bản vẽ điện

.
VD MV switch gear
General documentation Binder 1/1
Vendor instruction English
Plant Name: Xuan Thanh
Contract Number: 14-45344
Created by: CB
Approved by: CBC
Approved date: 04-10-2016
Doc. no.: 60154454 - 1.0

Xuan Thanh
Vietnam
14-45344
Vendor Documentation
Binder 1/1
General
MV switchgear
FLS equipment no.
811.MV220
Purchase order no.

4-1445344-499033A
Language
English
Vendor reference
Index 1
Xuan Thanh PIX Inst - Operation -

Vietnam Maint Manual. 2
14-45344
Vendor Documentation
Binder 1/1 VAMP Protection IED
V300 3
General
MV switchgear
HVX Breaker Operation
FLS equipment no. and Tec Instuctions 4
811.MV220
Purchase order no.

4-1445344-499033A
HVX Catalogue &
Selection List 5
HVX Wiring. 6
Current transformer
Technical Specifications 7
Voltage transformer
Technical Specifications 8
Language
English
Vendor references
ET200S Operating
Instructions 9
10
Medium Voltage Distribution
PIX
12–17–24 kV
Air-insulated switchgear with vacuum switching devices
Installation Operation Maintenance

Technical Manual
Nr. AMTNoT 060-02
Edition 03/2009
www.schneider-electric.com
Schneider Electric
35, rue Joseph Monier
CS 30323
92506 Rueil-Malmaison Cedex, France
Manufacturer:
Schneider Electric Sachsenwerk GmbH
Service:
Should you have any queries as to our service, please contact:
Schneider Electric Sachsenwerk GmbH
© Schneider Electric
All rights reserved to this technical instruction.
Reproduction and making available of this technical instruction, or extracts, to third parties are prohibited.
Only integral reproduction of this technical instruction is permitted with the written permission from Schneider Electric Energietechnik GmbH –
Sachsenwerk Medium Voltage.
Electronic copies in e.g. PDF-format or scanned version have the status “for information only” .
The only valid version of technical Instructions are always enclosed directly to the product in question by the factory.
PIX Content
Remarks on this manual�� 6

1 Safety provisions�� 8
Applicable standards and regulations:.............................................. 8
Behaviour in case of incidents or accidents...................................... 8
2.1 Panel design .................................................................................... 9
2 Design and description�� 9
2.2 Panel variants...................................................................................11
2.2.1 Feeder panels with switching devices........................... .............11
2.2.2 Panels for bus section coupler...................................... .............12
2.2.3 Panels with busbar voltage transformer and earthing switch.....12
2.3 Dimensions and weights (without packaging)..................................... 13
2.4 Applied standards............................................................................... 15
2.5 Environmental and operating conditions............................................. 16
2.6 Ratings of the PIX series.................................................................... 16
2.7 Nameplate........................................................................................... 17
2.8 Technical data of electrical control and operating devices................. 17
2.9 Utilization in line with the intended purpose....................................... 18
2.10 Disposal after the end of the useful life.............................................. 18
3 Packaging, transport, delivery and storage �� 19
3.1 Shipping units.....................................................................................19
3.2 Transport............................................................................................20
3.3 Delivery..............................................................................................20
3.4 Storage...............................................................................................20
4 Access to the main circuit compartments �� 21
4.1 Safety provisions................................................................................21
4.2 Access to the cable compartment......................................................21
4.2.1 Removal of the cable compartment cover..................................21
4.2.2 Removing the truck carrier..........................................................21
4.3 Access to switching device compartment..........................................23
4.3.1 Opening and closing the front door............................................23
4.3.2 Removing the transport locke of the truck.................................24
4.3.3 Removing and connecting the low-voltage connector..................24
4.3.4 Removing the truck from the panel............................................25
4.3.5 Inserting the truck into the panel................................................26
4.4 Access to the busbar compartment...................................................27
4.4.1 Front access................................................................................27
4.4.2 Top access.......................................................................................... 28
5 Assembly�� 29
5.2 Important information for assembly....................................................29
5.3 Transport of the panels / trucks on the construction site...................29
5.3.1 Panels..........................................................................................29
5.3.2 Trucks..........................................................................................31
5.4 Requirements regarding the switchgear room...................................31
5.5 Aligning and fastening panels............................................................33
5.6 Screw-fastening the panels to one another.......................................34
5.7 Installation of the busbar bushings....................................................34
5.8 Busbar assembly................................................................................35
5.8.1 Arrangement of busbars in branch-circuit panels.......................35
5.8.2 Arrangement of the lower busbars in bus section couplers.......35
5.8.3 Mounting busbars..........................................................................5
5.9 Assembly of the earth bus.................................................................. 37
6 High-voltage connection�� 38
6.1 Overview of cable connection system...............................................38
6.2 Adjusting the cable connection height...............................................38
6.3 Connection of high-voltage cables.....................................................39
6.4 High-voltage connection to rear of panel (optional)...........................41
AMTNoT 060-02 3
PIX Content (contd.)
7 Low-voltage connection�� 42
7.1 Open low-voltage compartment door.................................................. 42
7.2 Attachment of the low-voltage compartment...................................... 42
7.3 Connection of the ring circuits in the low-voltage compartment......... 42
7.4 Connecting external cables in the switchgear panel.......................... 43
7.4.1 Routing the external cables through the panel’s internal cable
duct.............................................................................................43
7.4.2 Routing the external cables through an additional cable duct ..43
8 Commissioning�� 44
8.1 Final steps........................................................................................... 44
8.2 Checking switching functions and interlocks...................................... 45
8.3 Power frequency test for busbar (optional)......................................... 45
8.4 Cable test after assembly................................................................... 46
9 Voltage indicators�� 48
9.1 Voltage Detection Systems (VDS)...................................................... 48
9.2 Voltage Present Indicating System VPIS............................................ 48
9.3 Phase comparators............................................................................. 49
10 Operation�� 50
10.1 Operator interfaces of panels............................................................. 50
10.2 Operation accessories........................................................................ 51
10.3 Trucks for PIX panels.......................................................................... 52
10.4 Interlocks......................................................................................... 54
10.4.1 Mechanical interlocks..................................................................54
10.4.2 Electromagnetic interlocks (optional)..........................................54
10.4.3 Mechanical lock-outs due to padlocks (not included in scope of
supplies)......................................................................................55
10.4.4. Interlocks by means of cylinder locks (optional)...........................57
10.4.5 Supplementary interlocks............................................................58
10.5 Operating specifications.....................................................................58
10.6 Operating the circuit-breaker.............................................................58
10.6.1 Charging the circuit-breaker’s energy storing device.................58
10.6.2 Operating the circuit-breaker manually.......................................59
10.6.3 Switching the circuit-breaker electrically.....................................60
10.6.4 Position indicators on circuit-breaker and possible operating
sequences..................................................................................60
10.7 Move truck into service/disconnected position...........................60
10.7.1 Racking-in the truck from disconnected into service position....60
10.7.2 Racking-out the truck from service into disconnected position..61
10.8 Vacuum contactor CVX......................................................................61
10.8.1 Fuse tripping...............................................................................62
10.9 Operating the earthing switch manually.............................................. 62
10.9.1 Switching ON the earthing switch.................................................63
10.9.2 Switching earthing switch OFF.......................................................63
10.10 Standard switching operations...........................................................63
10.10.1 Operating feeder cable..................................................................64
10.10.2 Earthing the feeder cable..............................................................64
10.10.3 Coupling busbar sections via bus section coupler.........................64
10.11 Earthing the busbar.............................................................................65
10.11.1 Earthing the busbar with the circuit-breaker of an feeder panel.....65
10.11.2 Earthing the busbar with busbar earthing switch in the metering
panel...........................................................................................66
10.11.3 Earthing the busbar with busbar earthing switch........................66
11.2 Servicing schedule.............................................................................67
11 Maintenance�� 67
4 AMTNoT 060-02
PIX Content (contd.)
11.3 Cleaning.............................................................................................68
11.4 Avoid condensation............................................................................68
11.5 Corrosion protection...........................................................................68
11.6 Replacement of components and panels..........................................68
11.7 Lubrication instructions......................................................................69
11.8 Replacing fuse of voltage transformer...............................................70
12 Annex�� 71
12.1 Auxiliary products...............................................................................71
12.2 Treatment of firmly screw-connected contact surfaces.....................71
12.3 Screw fastenings................................................................................72
12.4 Required tools (not included in the scope of supplies)......................72
12.5 Operation accessories.......................................................................73
12.5.1 Transport trolley for truck............................................................73
12.5.2 Handling crane for trucks (optional)............................................74
12.6 List of the assembly drawings.........................................................
74
AMTNoT 060-02 5
PIX Remarks on this manual
As our products are subject to continuous further development, we reserve the

right to make changes regarding standards, illustrations and technical data.
All dimensions specified in this manual are in millimeters.
Purpose and target group
This Technical Manual describes installation, assembly, operation and
maintenance of air-insulated medium-voltage switchgear of the PIX series.
It is exclusively intended for use by the manufacturer’s staff or by persons
certified for the PIX series (training certificate).
This Technical Manual is an integral part of the product and must be stored
in such a way that it is at all times readily accessible for and can be used by
persons who are to work on the switchgear. If the switchgear is relocated to
another site, this Technical Manual must be passed on to the new operators
along with the unit.
Further applicable documents
The following additional documents must be observed for this switchgear:
■■ sales agreement with the stipulations regarding the switchgear-specific
equipment and the legal details
■■ the switchgear-specific circuit diagrams / documentation
■■ the operating manuals of the low-voltage devices installed in the
switchgear (e.g. voltage indicators, devices in low-voltage compartment)
■■ the assembly drawings supplied with the switchgear
■■ the assembly instructions of the manufacturer of the cable connection
systems to be connected to the switchgear
■■ the assembly and operating instructions of the trucks / additional
equipment used:
□□ Circuit-breaker HVX with Ur ≤ 24 kV, Ir ≤ 2500 A (No. AGS 531301-01)
□□ Circuit-breaker HVX with Ur ≤ 17.5 kV, Ir ≤ 2500 A (No. AGS 531461-01)
□□ Metering truck MTX (No. AGS 531361-01)
□□ Disconnector truck UTX (No. AGS 531361-01)
□□ Vacuum contactor CVX (No. NTV 133)
□□ Voltage transformer truck in cable compartment (can be racked out)
(No. AGS 531505-02)
□□ PIX Additional Equipment (No. AMTNoT 077-02)
■■ Motor Control Center with Ur ≤ 7.2 kV (No. AGS 531500-02)
Terms and symbols used
This manual uses certain terms and symbols. They warn about dangers or
provide important information which must be complied with to avoid danger
to personnel and damage to equipment:
„Warning“
This danger symbol warns about dangerous
electrical voltage. Contact with voltage may result in
fatal injury!
„Warning“
This danger symbol warns about the risk of injury.
Please comply with all the provisions identified by
this symbol in order to avoid death or serious injury.
„Warning“
This danger symbol warns about the risk of falling.
„Important“
This instruction symbol is used for information which is
important to avoid material damage.
6 AMTNoT 060-02
PIX Remarks on this manual (contd.)
Abbreviations used
“PIX 12”:
PIX switchgear for rated voltage Ur = 12 kV
“PIX 17”:
PIX switchgear for rated voltage Ur = 17.5 kV
“PIX 24”:
PIX switchgear for rated voltage Ur = 24 kV
“Truck”: withdrawable part
Any questions or suggestions?
Do you have any questions or suggestions regarding this manual, or do
you require further information?
We always strive to provide you with the best-possible information for
optimum, safe use of our products. Thus, do not hesitate to contact us if
you have any recommendations, amendments or proposals for
improvement.
AMTNoT 060-02 7
PIX 1 Safety provisions
Read these instructions carefully before you work on the switchgear, and
perform the work detailed in them as described. Do not perform any work
which is not described in this manual.
Applicable standards and regulations:

■■ Common regulations for high-voltage switchgear and control gear:
IEC 62271-1
■■ The locally applicable accident prevention, operating and work
instructions must be complied with.
■■ Installation: IEC 61936-1 / HD 637 S11
■■ Operation of electrical equipment: EN 50110-11
1
The national standards applicable in the country where the equipment is
to be installed must be complied with.
Before performing work on the panel, make sure that you comply with
the following instructions:
Warning!
Before starting work on high-voltage components,
de-energize the system, verify it for zero voltage and
earth the system in accordance with the applicable
safety rules pursuant to EN 50110-1.
Warning!
After removal of covers, operator safety in
accordance with IEC 62271-200 may be restricted if
the appropriate part of the switchgear panel has not
been isolated from the power supply.
Warning!
Before performing work on the drive mechanism,
switch off the supply voltage and prevent it from
reclosing.
Warning!
There is a risk of injury when working on the drive
mechanism. Before starting work, release the
energy-storing device by
-- an OFF–ON–OFF operating sequence for the circuit breaker and
-- closing via the make-proof earthing switch.
Behaviour in case of incidents or accidents

For the case of an internal fault, the PIX switchgear features pressure relief
flaps which prevent the panels and the switchgear from bursting.
In case of fire or of internal faults, toxic and caustic decomposition products
may be produced. Comply with the locally applicable accident and safety
provisions.
In case of personal injury, take first-aid measures or cause them to be
taken.
8 AMTNoT 060-02
PIX 2 Design and description
2.1 Panel design
Fig. 2.1
Feeder panel PIX 12 with circuit-breaker truck HVX (for rated currents ≤ 2500 A)
1 Low-voltage compartment
2 Circuit-breaker truck HVX
3 Front door
4 Earthing switch control element
5 Voltage indicator
6 Position indicator of earthing switch
7 Cable compartment cover
8 Voltage transformer (optional)
9 Earth bar
10 Current transformer
11 Cable connections
12 Make-proof earthing switch
13 Shutter
14 Busbars
15 Pressure relief flap of switching device compartment
AMTNoT 060-02 9
PIX 2 Design and description (contd.)
1
16
15
2
3
14
4
13
12
11
6 10
7 9
Fig. 2.2
Feeder panel with circuit-breaker truck HVX (for rated currents ≤ 2500 A)
1 Jack rings for transport harness

2 Busbars
3 Pressure relief duct
4 Pressure relief flap of cable compartment
5 Earthing switch
6 Current transformer
7 Cable fastening
8 High-voltage cable
9 Voltage transformer (optional)
10 Cable compartment cover
11 Cable connection
12 Circuit-breaker truck HVX
13 Front door
14 Pressure relief flap of switching device compartment
15 Door of low-voltage compartment
16 Pressure relief flap of busbar compartment
10 AMTNoT 060-02
2
1
Fig. 2.3
Panel with internal arc classification (IAC)
1 Deflector
2.2 Panel variants

The subchapters always show panel types with the appropriate basic equipment.
Customized models with additional equipment are described in the switchgear-specific documentation.
2.2.1 Feeder panels with switching devices
Fig. 2.4 Fig. 2.5

Feeder panel with circuit-breaker truck HVX for rated Feeder panel with circuit-breaker truck HVX for rated
currents > 2500 A and voltage transformer (optional) currents ≤ 2500 A and voltage transformer (optional)
Fig. 2.6 Fig. 2.7

Panel with disconnector truck UTX “Motor Control Center” panel with vacuum contactor
CVX (only 12 kV)
AMTNoT 060-02 11
2.2.2 Panels for bus section coupler
Fig. 2.8 Fig. 2.9

Bus section coupler ”Circuit-breaker panel with earthing Bus section coupler ”Bus riser panel with metering truck MTX”
switch”
Fig. 2.10 Fig. 2.11

Bus section coupler ”Bus riser panel with disconnector truck Bus section coupler ”Bus riser panel”
UTX”
2.2.3 Panels with busbar voltage transformer and earthing switch
Fig. 2.12 Fig. 2.13

Busbar with fixed busbar voltage transformer Busbar with busbar earthing switch
Fig. 2.14 Fig. 2.15

Metering panel with metering truck and busbar earthing Bus riser panel, optionally available with fixed voltage
switch transformer
12 AMTNoT 060-02
2.3 Dimensions and weights (without

packaging)
For the precise panel dimensions, please refer to the switchgear-specific
documentation. These depend on:
■■ the rated voltage
■■ the rated normal current
■■ the rated short-time current and
■■ additional equipment, e. g.:
□□ busbar or fan attachments
□□ rear high voltage cable connection
d b
a e
Fig. 2.16
Dimensions of PIX panels
a Panel width
b Panel height (depending on height of low-voltage compartment)
c Height of low-voltage compartment
d Panel height without low-voltage compartment and attachments
e Panel depth
968 2
1
558
600
757
Fig. 2.17
Dimensions of pressure relief duct and deflector

2 Deflector
AMTNoT 060-02 13
PIX 12
Depth and height of panel1

1405 Standard
Panel depth e [mm] in case of two current transformers per phase or panel width 650 mm with Ik = 40
1605
kA
2130
Panel height b [mm] 2230 depending on the height of the low-voltage compartment c = 530, 630 or 730 mm
2330
Panel height d [mm] 2130 without low-voltage compartment and additional equipment
Panel type Rated current2 Panel width Weight3

[A] a1 [mm] approx. [kg]
≤ 1250 650/8004 720
■■ Feeder panel with HVX circuit-breaker
1600/2000 800 850
■■ Bus section coupler with HVX circuit-breaker
≥ 2500 1000 1100
■■ Bus riser panel ≤ 1250 650 650

■■ Feeder panel with disconnector truck UTX (also for bus 1600/2000 800 750
section coupler) ≥ 2500 1000 900
Busbar metering panel – 650 600
Feeder panel with vacuum contactor CVX ≤ 400 650 700
1
see Fig. 2.16
2
In case of branch-circuit panels, the rated current refers to the branch circuit (max. busbar nominal current: 4000 A)
3
Weight including low-voltage compartment, without voltage transformer and without busbar attachments
Panels with voltage transformer in the branch circuit: + 120 kg
4
Panel width depends on rated short-time current Ik:
□□ 650 mm at 31.5 kA
□□ 800 mm at 40 kA
(Exception: Panel width 650 mm at 40 kA with panel depth 1605 mm )
PIX 17

1505 Standard
Panel depth e [mm]
1605 in case of two voltage transformers per phase
2200
depending on the height of the low-voltage compartment
Panel height b [mm] 2300
c = 600, 700 and 800 mm
2400
Panel type
Rated current2 Panel width Weight3
[A] a1 [mm] approx.
[kg]
■■ Feeder panel with HVX circuit-breaker ≤ 2000 750 850
■■ Bus section coupler with HVX circuit-breaker ≥ 2500 1000 1100
■■ Bus riser panel ≤ 2000 750 750
■■ Feeder panel with disconnector truck UTX (also for bus
section coupler) ≥ 2500 1000 900

1
see Fig. 2.16
2
3
14 AMTNoT 060-02
PIX 24

Panel depth e 1605
2330
depending on the height of the low-voltage compartment
Panel height b [mm] 2430
c = 530, 630 or 730 mm
2530
Panel type Rated current2 Panel width Weight3

[A] a1 [mm] approx. [kg]
■■ Feeder panel with HVX circuit-breaker ≤ 1600 800 850
■■ Bus section coupler with HVX circuit-breaker ≤ 2500 1000 1000
■■ Bus riser panel ≤ 1600 800 750

■■ Feeder panel with disconnector truck UTX (also for bus 2000 800/1000 4
800
section coupler) 2500 1000 800
1
see Fig. 2.16
2
3
4
Panel width depends on rated short-time current Ik:
□□ 800 at ≤ 25 kA
□□ 1000 at ≤ 31.5 kA
2.4 Applied standards

Series PIX switchgear units with vacuum switching devices are
■■ metal-enclosed; Loss of service continuity category in accordance with IEC 62271-200: LSC 2B-PM
■■ type-tested
■■ optional: tested for internal faults (qualification IAC)
■■ dimensioned for indoor installation
PIX switchgear units meet the following standards and regulations:

Designation IEC standard EN standard
IEC 62271-1
Switchgear EN 62271-200
IEC 62271-200
Circuit-breaker IEC 62271-100 EN 62271-100
Vacuum contactor IEC 60470 EN 60470
Earthing switch IEC 62271-102 EN 62271-102
Disconnector truck IEC 62271-102 EN 62271-102
Current transformers IEC 60044-1 EN 60044-1
Voltage transformer IEC 60044-2 EN 60044-2
IEC 61243-5 EN 61243-5
Voltage Detecting Systems
IEC 61958 EN 61958
Protection against accidental contact,
IEC 60529 EN 60529
foreign bodies and water
Installation IEC 61936-1 HD 637 S1
Operation of electrical equipment – EN 50110-1
AMTNoT 060-02 15
Degree of protection against accidental contact and foreign objects
Degrees of protection against accidental contact and foreign objects according to IEC 60529
external enclosure of panel IP3X1
between the compartments of the panel IP2X
1
optional IP4X; other values available on request
2.5 Environmental and operating conditions

PIX is an indoor switchgear and may only be operated under normal conditions in acc. with IEC 62271-1.
Operation under conditions deviating from these is only admissible subject to consultation with and written approval from the
manufacturer.
Ambient conditions in accordance with IEC 62271-1

Temperature class “minus 5 indoors”1
Min./max. ambient temperature °C –5/+401
Average value over 24 hours °C ≤ 351
mean rel. air humidity: 24 hour/1 month % ≤ 95/≤ 90
Installation altitude above sea-level m ≤ 10001
1
higher values available on request
2.6 Ratings of the PIX series

Switchgear panel PIX 12 PIX 17 PIX 24
Rated voltage Ur [kV] 12 17,5 24
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage Up [kV] 75 95 125
Rated power frequency withstand voltage Ud [kV] 28 38 50
Busbar [A]
Rated normal ≤ 3150/40001 ≤ 2500
Circuit-breaker [A]
current Ir
Vacuum contactor [A] 200 – 400 –
Rated peak withstand current Ip 2

[kA] ≤ 100 ≤ 80
Rated short-time current Ik 2
[kA] ≤ 40 (3 s) ≤ 31,5 (3 s)
Rated frequency fr [Hz] 50/60
1
with fan
2
The short-circuit capability of the current transformers must be considered separately.
The applicable panel-specific technical data are indicated on the nameplate (see section 2.7 Nameplate) and in the switchgear-
specific documentation.
The technical data of the switching device (HVX, UTX) are indicated on the nameplate and in the operating manual of the
device concerned.
16 AMTNoT 060-02
2.7 Nameplate
The type designation on the nameplates on the front of the panels (Fig.
2.18) informs about essential technical data. When submitting enquiries to
the manufacturer or ordering spare parts, the following information is
required:
■■ Type designation
■■ Serial number
■■ Year of construction
Fig. 2.18
Nameplate on panel front
1 Type designation
2 Serial number
3 Year of construction
4 Technical data
2.8 Technical data of electrical control and

operating devices
The switchgear panels have been designed on principle so as to permit
manual operation.
Fixtures in the switchgear panel
The drive mechanisms of the individual switching devices can be equipped,
depending on the specific customer’s model, with additional electrical
control and operating devices. These are defined in the switchgear-specific
circuit diagram (see switchgear documentation).
Component fitting options:
■■ Motor-operated drive mechanism
for the earthing switch control element
■■ Blocking coil
The blocking coil prevents manual actuation of the earthing switch. If the
supply voltage has failed or is shut off, all blocking coils are in ”blocked”
position.
■■ Auxiliary switches
Auxiliary switches are always actuated directly by the truck or by the switch
shaft via an intermediate linkage. Their position always corresponds to that
of the main contacts. The switching functions have been set in the factory
according to the circuit diagram.
■■ Micro-switches
are used depending on the customized panel models.
AMTNoT 060-02 17
Overview of rated supply voltages

Direct voltage DC [V] 24 48 60 110 125 220
Alternating voltage AC [V] (110)/120 (220)/230
Power consumption
Rated power consumption
Device AC 50/60 Hz
DC approx. [W] approx. [VA]
Blocking coil 12
Motor for earthing switch 150–180
Information about the power consumption of solenoids and the motor is available
from the manufacturer. The supply voltage data is required to this effect.
Truck
Electrical control and operating devices of trucks are described in the
appropriate Technical Manuals (see ”Reference documents” on page 6).
■■ Circuit-breaker HVX with Ur ≤ 24 kV, Ir ≤ 2500 A
see Technical Instruction AGS 531301-01
■■ Circuit-breaker HVX with Ur ≤ 17.5 kV, Ir > 2500 A
■■ Disconnector truck UTX/Metering truck MTX
■■ Vacuum contactor CVX
see Technical Instruction NTV 133
2.9 Utilization in line with the intended

purpose
PIX series air-insulated medium-voltage switchgear units are designed
exclusively for switching and distributing electrical power. They may only
be used in the scope of the specified standards and the switchgear-specific
technical data. Any other utilization constitutes improper use and may
result in dangers and damage.
Disclaimer of liability
The manufacturer shall not be held responsible for damage which occurs if
■■ instructions in this Technical Manual are not complied with,
■■ the switchgear is not operated according to its intended use (see above);
■■ the switchgear is assembled, connected or operated improperly;
■■ accessories or spare parts are used which have not been approved by
the manufacturer;
■■ the switchgear is converted without the manufacturer’s approval, or if
inadmissible parts are attached.
No liability is accepted for parts provided by customers, e.g. current
transformers.
2.10 Disposal after the end of the useful life

A material and recycling data sheet can be provided on request for the
disposal of series PIX switchgear at the end of its service life:
Disposal is performed as a service by the manufacturer’s Service Center
which to payment.
18 AMTNoT 060-02
PIX 3 Packaging, transport,
delivery and storage
3.1 Shipping units

■■ The conditions and types of transport have been stipulated in the
contract details. The type of packaging depends on the type of transport
and the storage conditions.
■■ The panels are delivered individually and are fastened on transport aids.
The standard accessories are included.
■■ In the case of panels with a width of 650, 750 and 800 mm, the trucks can
be delivered within the panels. They are in ”disconnected position”, and
secured in the switching device compartment using transport locks.
With 1000 mm wide panels, the trucks are delivered in separate packaging.
■■ The panels are delivered in upright position.
Important:
The weight of the entire transport unit is indicated on the
packaging.
Packaging
■■ If the panels are transported exclusively on a lorry, they are fastened by
wooden bars at the front and rear and packed in PE film (Fig. 3.1).
■■ For sea transport, the units are packed in sealed aluminium foil with
desiccant and in a closed wooden case with tightly closed wooden base
(also for container transport, Fig. 3.2).
■■ In case of air transport, the panels are packaged in wooden crates with a
protective PE film hood (dust protection) or in wooden crates, also with
closed wooden bases, however without protective hoods (dust protection,
Fig. 3.2).
Fig. 3.1
Packed in PE protective film on a pallet
Fig. 3.2
Packed in a wooden case
AMTNoT 060-02 19
PIX 3 Packaging, transport,
delivery and storage (contd.)
3.2 Transport
Warning!
When transporting the switchgear, it must be
ensured that the units do not slip or tip (if necessary,
nail down transport pallets to the loading surface).
Important:
For transporting the trucks, comply with the transport specifica-
tions in the appropriate manuals.
Fig. 3.3
Do not tip the transport units Transport using a forklift truck
For transport, the panels must be packaged completely. The entire length
of the forks must be placed under the transport unit (Fig. 3.4).
Fig. 3.4
Transport using a forklift truck
3.3 Delivery
■■ Handle shipping units carefully when unloading and unpacking them.
■■ Shipping units must be checked upon receipt. Any damage which may
have occurred in transit must be recorded and reported to the manufacturer
immediately.
■■ Check completeness of consignment based on the transport documents.
The supplier must be notified in writing without delay about any deviations.
3.4 Storage
Warning!
Sufficient stability and evenness of the supporting
area (floor) must be ensured.
If the panels are not installed immediately after delivery, they can be stored
under the following conditions:
+ 40 ºC ■■ Panels may only be stored vertically; they must not be stacked.
■■ Storage only indoors!
■■ Panels and accessories must be packed in sealed aluminium film with
– 5 ºC
desiccant and in a wooden case (storage for max. two years after date of
packing).
Fig. 3.5
Schematic diagram of storage conditions for PIX
switchgear panels
20 AMTNoT 060-02
PIX 4 Access to the main circuit
compartments
4.1 Safety provisions

Warning!
Before opening / removing doors / covers, isolate the
compartment in question, check for zero voltage and
earth in accordance with the safety provisions in EN
50110-1.
Warning!
After removal of covers, operator safety in accordan-
ce with IEC 62271-200 may be restricted if the appro-
priate part of the switchgear unit has not been
isolated from the power supply.
4.2 Access to the cable compartment

Warning!
The cable compartment may only be opened if the
earthing switch is ON (see Chapter 10.9.1).
The panels can be equipped with supplementary cylinder locks to lock the
cable compartment cover. To this effect, see also Chapter 10.4.4
”Interlocks via cylinder locks”.
4.2.1 Removal of the cable compartment cover

L1
L2
L3
■■ Release the securing bolts of the cable compartment cover (Fig. 4.1, 1).
■■ Lift and remove the cable compartment cover (2).
2
Fig. 4.1
1 Release securing bolts of cable compartment
cover
2 Lift cable compartment cover and remove it in
forward direction
Re-mounting the cable compartment cover
After terminating assembly work, place cable compartment cover onto the
panel, lower it and fasten it again using the securing bolts.
4.2.2 Removing the truck carrier

The truck carrier can be removed as required, for example for maintenance
work (Chapter 11) or for access to the busbar compartment (Chapter
4.4.1).
AMTNoT 060-02 21
compartments (contd.)
■■ Remove truck from the panel (see Chapter 4.3).

■■ Remove insulating walls (only in case of 17 and 24 kV panels):
□□ Release the 3 securing bolts (Fig. 4.2, 1) of the support (2).
□□ First remove support (2) and then the four insulating walls (3).
■■ Dismantle auxiliary switch block for truck (4) and deposit carefully in the
cable compartment.
■■ If the panel features a voltage indicator: disconnect the plug-and-socket
connector of the unit (5).
■■ Remove the securing bolts of the truck carrier (6).
■■ First raise truck carrier on the front, then pull it out (7).
L1
L2
L3
7
2 3 1
Fig. 4.2
Removing the truck carrier
1 Securing bolts of the support
2 Support (only for PIX 17 and 24)
3 Insulating walls (only for PIX 17 and 24)
4 Fastening the auxiliary switch block
5 Plug-and-socket connector of voltage indicator
6 Securing bolts of truck carrier
7 Raise truck carrier on the front and pull it out
8 Slide for earthing switch actuation
22 AMTNoT 060-02
Re-install truck carrier

Re-install truck carrier and dismantled components by reversing the above
order. When screwing the truck carrier down, make sure that the slide (Fig.
4.2, item 8) to open the insertion opening for the earthing switch operates
smoothly. If necessary, release bolts and reposition the truck carrier.
4.3 Access to switching device compartment

Warning!
The switching device compartment may only be
opened if the truck is in disconnected position (see
Chapter 10.7.2).
4.3.1 Opening and closing the front door

3
Opening the front door
■■ Insert double-bit key into the door opening and turn it to the left (Fig. 4.3,
1); the door is unlocked.
2
■■ Insert handle with the lever pointing down, and turn handle to the left (2);
the front door is lifted.
■■ To open the door, swing it to the left (3).
Closing the front door
■■ Close the door completely.
■■ Turn the handle downwards; the door is lowered.
■■ Pull door handle off and stow it in the tool tray of the trolley (see Chapter
1 12.5).
■■ Lock the door using a double-bit key.
L1
L2
L3
Fig. 4.3
Opening the front door
1 Insert double-bit key and unlock door. To this effect,
turn the key to the left.
2 Insert handle with the lever pointing down, and turn
handle to the left.
3 The door is opened and can be swung open to the
left.
AMTNoT 060-02 23
4.3.2 Removing the transport locke of the truck

In the case of panels with a width of 650, 750 and 800 mm, the trucks can
be delivered within the panels and are secured by means of a transport
lock (Fig. 4.4).
■■ Release the two bolts (Fig. 4.5, 1).
■■ Release lock bolts M8x25 (2).
■■ Remove transport lock (3).
■■ Reinsert the two bolts (1).
Remove transport lock on the other side following the same procedure.
Fig. 4.4
Transport lock of circuit-breaker truck
3 1
Fig. 4.5
1 Bolts
2 Lock bolts
3 Transport lock
4.3.3 Removing and connecting the low-voltage
connector
2
Important:
The low-voltage connector can only be removed or inserted
while the truck is in disconnected position.
Removing the low-voltage connector

■■ Pull interlocking slide of low-voltage connector forward (Fig. 4.6, 1) and
remove the connector (2).
1
■■ Stow low-voltage connector in storage tray above the truck (Fig. 4.7).
Fig. 4.6
1 Unlock low-voltage connector
Connecting the low-voltage connector
2 Remove low-voltage connector ■■ Take low-voltage connector from the storage tray above the truck (Fig.
4.7).
■■ Insert low-voltage connector into the truck and press interlocking slide
forward.
Fig. 4.7
Place low-voltage connector in tray
above the truck
24 AMTNoT 060-02
4.3.4 Removing the truck from the panel

■■ Adjust rails and unlocking bar of trolley to the correct track width of the
truck (see Chapter 12.5).
■■ Turn lever to the left (Fig. 4.8, 1). The trolley is lifted on the front.
Fig. 4.8
Turning lever on trolley to the left
3 ■■ Approach trolley to the panel so that the lateral guides (Fig. 4.9, 2) are
close to the panel, and turn lever (1) back to the right. The trolley is locked
on the panel (3).
3
Fig. 4.9
Locking transport trolley on panel
■■ Push unlocking bar (Fig. 4.10, 4) forward to its stop. The latching of the
truck in the panel is released.
■■ Pull truck onto the trolley via the two handles (5) until it snaps in on the
trolley audibly.
■■ Turn lever back to the left (6). The trolley is lifted on the front, and
removed from the panel.
Fig. 4.10
Pull circuit-breaker onto trolley
■■ Pull trolley with the truck away from the panel (7) and turn lever back to
the right to lower it (8).
■■ Now the truck can be raised by means of a crane, and deposited. For
7
further information, please refer to Chapter 5.3.2. Instructions regarding
lifting and transporting trucks (HVX, UTX, MTX, CVX).
Fig. 4.11
Pull trolley with truck away from the panel
AMTNoT 060-02 25
4.3.5 Inserting the truck into the panel

2 Important:
3 Trucks and panels can be given matching coding, optionally.
This is to prevent a truck from being racked completely into the
panel if the rated data do not match.
1
4
■■ Turn lever to the left (Fig. 4.12, 1). The trolley is lifted on the front.
■■ Approach trolley to the panel via the handles (2) so that the lateral guides
Fig. 4.12 (3) are close to the panel, and turn lever back to the right (4). The trolley is
Move trolley with circuit-breaker towards the panel locked on the panel.
until they are in contact, and lock.
6 ■■ Press left-hand unlocking button (Fig. 4.13, 5) and slip truck briefly
beyond the ratchet lever. Subsequently, slide truck into the panel using the
handles (6), until it is latched in the panel.
■■ Turn lever back to the left (7). The trolley is lifted on the front, and
removed from the panel.
■■ Pull trolley back from the panel and turn lever back to the right to lower it.
Fig. 4.13
Pushing the circuit-breaker into the panel.
26 AMTNoT 060-02
4.4 Access to the busbar compartment

Warning!
The busbar compartment may only be opened if the
busbar is earthed (see Chapter 10.11).
4.4.1 Front access

Steps for assembly (Fig. 4.14):
■■ Remove cable compartment cover (see Chapter 4.2).
■■ Open front door (see Chapter 4.3.1).
■■ Remove truck HVX, UTX etc. (see Chapter 4.3.4).
■■ Remove truck carrier (see Chapter 4.2).
■■ Unscrew pressure relief flap and take it out in forward direction.
■■ Remove partition plate to busbar compartment and take it out in forward
direction.
■■ Insert temporary base plate to enable safe access to the cable
compartment.
Fig. 4.14
1 Remove cable compartment cover

2 Open front door
3 Remove truck (the example shows the circuit-breaker truck HVX)
4 Remove truck carrier
5 Unscrew pressure relief flap and take it out in forward direction
6 Remove partition plate to busbar compartment and take it out in forward direction
7 Insert temporary base plate to enable safe access to the cable compartment
8 Busbar compartment
9 Working position
AMTNoT 060-02 27
1 2 4
4.4.2 Top access
3
Warning!
The top sides of the panels are not meant to be
walked on. Persons may fall through them, get
injured or may damage the panel. When work has to
be performed on the panel top, temporarily position a
solid base plate to step on.
Access to the busbars is also possible from the top via the panel top (Fig.
Fig. 4.15 4.15) provided the space available so permits (sufficient ceiling height is
Top access to the busbar compartment required).
■■ Cover top of panel using a temporary base plate (1).
1 Temporary base plate ■■ Release the screw fastening of the upper busbar compartment cover (2)
2 Screw fastening and remove sheet metal cover (3). Now, the busbar compartment (4) is
3 Sheet metal cover
accessible.
4 Busbar compartment
28 AMTNoT 060-02
PIX 5 Assembly

The switchgear panels may only be installed and assembled by the
manufacturer’s staff or by persons who have been certified for this work.
PIX panels are delivered with the circuit-breaker switched OFF, the
circuitbreaker energy storing device released and the earthing switch OFF.
Warning!
Risk of injuries!
During assembly, installation and connection, the
energy storing devices must not be charged.
Warning!
Risk of accidents
Watch out for floor openings in the switchgear room.
Warning!
The top sides of the panels are not meant to be
walked on. Persons may fall through them, get
injured or may damage the panel. When work has to
be performed on the panel top - e.g. assembly of
deflectors, fans or pressure relief ducts - temporarily
position a solid
base plate to step on.
Warning!
The safety provisions of Chapter 1 must be
observed.
5.2 Important information for assembly

■■ Condensation, dirt and dust during assembly should be avoided on all
accounts, in order to prevent damage to the panels.
■■ For assembly, observe the assembly drawings supplied with the
equipment. The drawing numbers are specified in this manual in the
description of the assembly work.
■■ For all screw fastenings, comply with the tightening torques specified in
Chapter 12.3.
Assembly of the switchgear-specific additional equipment (e.g. deflectors,
pressure relief ducts, fans, busbar attachments for voltage transformers or
earthing switches etc.) is described in the manual regarding PIX Additional
Equipment (No. AMTNoT 077-02).
5.3 Transport of the panels / trucks on the

construction site
5.3.1 Panels
Warning!
Make sure the rope or the chain being used is strong
enough to bear the weight of the panel (see Chapter
2.2). Comply with the relevant provisions for hoisting
equipment.
Warning!
On lowering the panels, make sure that the
supporting platform is sufficiently stable and even.
Warning!
Risk of accidents. Pay attention to floor openings!
AMTNoT 060-02 29
PIX 5 Assembly (contd.)
Transport using a crane

■■ Attach the crane straps in the four jack rings on top of the panel (Fig. 5.1).
Make sure to leave a minimum height of 1 m (Fig. 5.2).
■■ Release the front and rear panel screw fastening from the transport
packaging. To this effect, remove the cable compartment cover, see
Chapter 4.2.1.
■■ Carefully lift the panel and deposit it at the intended location.
Fig. 5.1
Jack rings on top of the panel
≥ 1m
Fig. 5.2
Observe the minimum height
Transport on the floor

■■ Push panel onto three cylindrical rollers (minimum diameter 30 mm) (Fig.
5.3).
■■ Thus, move the panel until it reaches its final location.
Fig. 5.3
Transport of the panel on the floor
30 AMTNoT 060-02
5.3.2 Trucks
The trucks can be transported by means of the optional handling crane
(Fig. 5.4). Item no. AGSC73258-01.
Trucks must always be deposited on external wooden beams (Fig. 5.5).
For further details, please refer to the instruction manuals for the trucks in
question.
Fig. 5.4
Transport of truck using the handling
crane
Fig. 5.5
Trucks must always be deposited on 5.4 Requirements regarding the
external wooden beams
switchgear room
Before installing the switchgear panels, make sure that the switchgear
room is checked according to the switchgear documentation (Fig. 5.6):
■■ Observe the minimum distance between the switchgear and the wall of
the building.
■■ The load-bearing capacity of the fastening points must correspond to the
weight of the switchgear (perform a stress analysis of the floor).
■■ Check base frame (if used) for dimensions and positional tolerances.
■■ Check position of floor openings for high-voltage and low-voltage cables.
Before the panel is positioned at its site of installation, check that the
fastening points are level. Unevenness must not exceed ± 2 mm/meter and
6 mm difference in height over the entire locating surface.
Important:
Observe switchgear-specific space assignment plan.
AMTNoT 060-02 31
Ground plan of a PIX switchgear within a switchgear room
100
1
25
730 (PIX 17/24)

4
630 (PIX 12)

2
2
1
3
100
Fig. 5.6
Design example: The switchgear is located in the left-hand corner of the room
1 Bore-hole for fastening of panel
2 Switchgear side wall
3 Openings for routing external low-voltage cables
4 Openings for routing high-voltage cables
5 Reserved (100 x 100 mm) for the connection of the earth bus of the switchgear
to the building’s earth cable
Ground plan of the panels
19,5
4 x Ø 12,5
35 35
1215
1405 (1605)
1
440
423 (473)
200
2
29,5
143
35
114
40
650/750/800/1000
Fig. 5.7
Dimensions (example: PIX 12 panels)
1 Opening for routing high-voltage cables
2 Opening for routing external low-voltage cables
32 AMTNoT 060-02
5.5 Aligning and fastening panels

Important:
The position of the first panel is decisive for placement of the
subsequent panels, thus it is essential that measuring is
effected with the utmost precision!
Fastening on concrete foundations
■■ Position first panel on the foundations in accordance with the
switchgearspecific space assignment plan.
■■ Align panel. Check the panel front for correct horizontal and vertical
position. If applicable, lift the panel and place shims in the direct vicinity of
the fastening points, until the horizontal position has been reached.
Assembly drawing: SEM102173-01
■■ Screw-fasten panel to the two fastening points on the front end and at
least one fixation pont on the rear end (Fig. 5.8); hex. bolt M 10 x 30 +
dowel pin.
Important:
Panel fastening with seismic qualification or vibration-proof
characteristics can be supplied on request. For further details,
please, contact the manufacturer..
≥ 1000 mm
≥ 100 mm
Screws
M10x30
+ Lock washer Screws M10x30
+ Washer
Lock washer
+ Dowel pin Sectional
view Washer
Dowel pin
0, 1 or 2 spacers
Top view
Spacers
Fig. 5.8
Panel fastening on concrete foundations
AMTNoT 060-02 33
5.6 Screw-fastening the panels to one

another
Assembly drawing: SEM102056-01
■■ 1. Screw-fastening panel fronts to one another using 6 fastening points
(Fig. 5.9).
■■ 2. Fasten panels to one another at the top on the rear side using a
connecting link. To this effect, use the screws provided on the panel.
2
1
Fig. 5.9
Screw-fastening the panels to one another
1 Screw M8
2 Spring washer
3 Hex. nut M8 with lock washer
4 Connecting link
3 3
5.7 Installation of the busbar bushings
Panels can be equipped, depending on the customer specifications, with
retaining plates (Fig. 5.11 and 5.12) or busbar section segregations (Fig.
5.10) for the busbar.
The retaining plates/busbar section segregations are pre-mounted at the
2
2
factory. The bushings (2) are included in the accessories.
1
1
Slip bushing from the outside through the bore-hole and mount retaining
ring (3) from the inside.
Fig. 5.10 Fig. 5.11

1 Busbar section 1 Busbar retaining
segregation (option) plate
2 Bushing 2 Bushing
3 Retaining ring 3 Retaining ring
Fig. 5.12
Busbar retaining plate in bus section couplers
34 AMTNoT 060-02
5.8 Busbar assembly

5.8.1 Arrangement of busbars in branch-circuit
panels
Number of busbars per phase

1 2 3
Number
of feeder
bars per 2
phase 1250 A 1600 A 1250 A 1600 A
(60x10) (80x10) (60x10) (80x10)
3 -
5.8.2 Arrangement of the lower busbars in bus

section couplers
Number of busbars per phase

1 2 3
Number 2 -
of feeder
bars per
phase 3 - -
5.8.3 Mounting busbars

Access to the busbar compartment: see Chapter 4.4
Important:
Comply with the specifications on treatment of contact
surfaces and the tightening torques for busbar screw fastening
in the Annex.
■■ Clean all contact areas of the busbars and feeder bars in the switchgear
panels and coat them with lubricant KL (see Chapter 12.2).
■■ Screw-fasten busbars to the feeder bars as shown in Fig. 5.14 using four
bolts (PIX 12, Fig. 5.15) or four bolts and an electrode (PIX 17/24, Fig.
5.16). Observe location of busbars and feeder bars (Chap. 5.8.1).
AMTNoT 060-02 35
Busbar screw fastening for PIX 12/17/24

1 2
1 Busbar
2 Feeder bar
3 Busbar screw fastening with electrode
3 4
4 Intermediate layer
Fig. 5.13
Assembly of busbar in a left-hand end panel
1 Busbar
2 Feeder bar
1 2 3 3 Busbar screw fastening with electrode
Fig. 5.14
Busbar fastening in a center panel (example shown:
PIX 17/24)
1 Bolt M 12
2 Spring washers
3 Nut M 12
1
Fig. 5.15
Busbar screw fastening PIX 12
1 Bolt M 12
2 Lock ring
1 3 Electrode
4 Electrode with inner thread
2
3
Take differing busbar screw fastening in PIX-12 busbar end
panels into consideration:
1 1 1 1
4
Fig. 5.16
Busbar screw fastening PIX 17/24
2 2
Fig. 5.17
1
In busbar end panels, the phases L1 and L3 must be screw-fastened to electrodes
in accordance with PIX 24 (Fig. 5.16)
2
In the bus section coupler, all phases L1/L2/L3 in the lower busbar must be
screwfastened to electrodes in accordance with PIX 24 (Fig. 5.16)
36 AMTNoT 060-02
1 5
5.9 Assembly of the earth bus
Earth bars are screw-fastened between the switchgear panels using
4 connecting bars (Fig. 5.18).
Important:
Comply with the specifications on treatment of contact surfaces
and the tightening torques for screw fastenings in the Annex.
4 2
■■ Clean all contact areas of the connecting bar and the appropriate earth
3
bar in the switchgear panels and coat them with lubricant KL (see Chapter
12.2).
Fig. 5.18 ■■ Slip the connecting bar (1) into the adjacent panel (3) through the cutout
Mounting the earth bar
in the panel-supporting structure (2).
1 Connecting bar
■■ Screw-fasten (5) connecting bar on both sides to the earth bar (4) in
2 Cutout in panel-supporting structure
3 Adjacent panel
question.
4 Earthing bars in the panels ■■ Connect earth bus (Fig. 5.19) to the earthing system of the switchgear
5 Screw fastening of connecting bar to earthing bars building (connecting lines and screw accessories are not included in the
scope of supplies).
Important:
Observe the specific standards referring to earthing systems
which apply in your country.
Fig. 5.19
Connecting point of switchgear earth bus to building
earth
AMTNoT 060-02 37
PIX 6 High-voltage connection
6.1 Overview of cable connection system
Ø9
Cable connection variants:
40
Cable connection for Ø 13:
Ø 13
■■ Cable cross section ≤ 400 mm2
Cable connection for 4 bore-holes of Ø 9:
30
■■ Cable cross section 500 or 630 mm2

30
15
Overview of cable connection variants

25 30 Cable terminal Representation of a connection phase
80 per phase Front view Side view
Fig. 6.1
Connecting bar 80 x 10 with dimensions for the max. 2
fastening of cable sealing end
max. 4
max. 6
max. 8
Further cable connection variants optionally available:

■■ Metal-clad rear cable compartment for cable connections behind the
panel (see Chapter 6.4)
■■ Conductor bar terminal
Please clarify technical details and design specifications with the
manufacturer, as required.
1
6.2 Adjusting the cable connection height
The cable connection height can be increased by approx. 50 mm as
required.
■■ Remove the base plates and the lateral supports. Measure and drill new
fastening holes in the supports.
■■ Fasten support in the panel to the new fastening holes.
L2 max.
L1
L
Connection clearances [mm]

PIX 12 PIX 17 PIX 24
L 430 460 555
50 mm
2 L1 390 420 515

L2 440 470 565
Fig. 6.2
Cable connection height in panel
1 Cable connection
2 Adjustable lateral support
38 AMTNoT 060-02
(contd.)
6.3 Connection of high-voltage cables

1
Preparation of cable compartment
2 Access to cable compartment: See Chapter 4.2.
■■ Remove cable clips and rubber sleeves (Fig. 6.3).
■■ If necessary, remove the base plates.
4 3
Fig. 6.3
1 Release fastening of cable clips
2 Remove cable clips
3 Remove rubber sleeves
4 Remove base plate as required
Mount sealing end

■■ Route the individual cables outwards through the cable compartment of
the panel to enable assembly of the cable ends.
■■ Cut the rubber sleeves to fit the cable diameter, and push them onto the
cables (Fig. 6.4).
■■ Strip cable ends and assemble the sealing end as specified by the cable
manufacturer.
Warning!
Do not use aluminium cable lugs for the cable
connection. Inadmissible matching of materials.
Fig. 6.4
Cut rubber sleeves to size and slip them onto the
cables
Fig. 6.5
Mount cable lug
AMTNoT 060-02 39
(contd.)
Important:
-- Unless otherwise specified by the cable manufacturer:
Comply with the specified tightening torques and pre-coat
contact areas (see Chapter 12.2).
-- Observe the phase assignment of the switchgear panel.
■■ Fasten the individual cables to the appropriate connection surfaces (Fig.
6.6 to 6.8). In case of two cables per phase: Connect the two cables to the
first connection (Fig. 6.7).
■■ Re-mount the base plates.
■■ Fasten high-voltage cable to the base plates using clamping assemblies
(Fig. 6.9 and 6.10).
■■ Screw-fasten the earthing screens (2) of the cables to the earthing bar
(3) of the panel.
1 2 3
Fig. 6.6
1 High-voltage cable
2 Earthing screen
3 Earthing bar
Fig. 6.7 Fig. 6.8

Connection using 1 - 2 cables Connection using 8 cables
Fig. 6.9 Fig. 6.10

Clamping assembly for cables with a diameter Clamping assembly for cables with a diameter
of ≥ 40 mm of < 40 mm
40 AMTNoT 060-02
(contd.)
6.4 High-voltage connection to rear of

panel (optional)
Panels can be extended optionally by a rear cable compartment (Fig. 6.11).
This rear connection compartment permits connection to high voltage
behind the panel. Normally, the high-voltage cables or external conductor
bars are routed in from above. The variants of the cable connection options
(depending on the rated nominal current) correspond to the explanations in
Chapter 6.1.
The preassembled sheet metal housing of the rear cable compartment is
screw-fastened to the panel on the construction site.
The current transformers are located in the rear cable compartment. The
front earth bar has a connection to the rear into the rear cable compartment,
where a separate earth bus for earth connectors is located.
Important:
Please clarify further technical details and design specifications
with the manufacturer, as required.
Fig. 6.11
High-voltage connection on rear side of switchgear
panel (optional)
AMTNoT 060-02 41
PIX 7 Low-voltage connection
7.1 Open low-voltage compartment door

■■ Insert double-bit key into the lock of the low-voltage compartment and
turn it to the left by 90°.
2 ■■ Open door to the left.
■■ The door can be secured optionally in open position using a lock plate
(Fig. 7.1, 1).
1
Fig. 7.1
1 Lock plate (optional)
2 Ring circuits
7.2 Attachment of the low-voltage

compartment
The low-voltage compartments are delivered, depending on the order,
either in pre-assembled condition or separately as accessories.
■■ Remove transport protection covers. Assign the low-voltage
compartment to the appropriate panel.
■■ Position low-voltage compartment carefully on top of the panel, making
sure that the top internal connection cables of the panel are not damaged.
■■ Align low-voltage compartment and screw-fasten it to the panel.
Assembly drawing: AGS C73 180-01
■■ Screw-fasten the low-voltage compartments to each other at the sides.
■■ Connect the panel’s internal terminals for control and measuring cables
according to the connector identification and the circuit diagram to the
terminal strips in the low-voltage compartment.
7.3 Connection of the ring circuits in the

low-voltage compartment
■■ Route the ring circuits for the intra-panel wiring through the lateral
openings of the low-voltage compartment (Fig. 7.1, 2).
■■ The ring circuits have been designed with connectors. Connect ring
circuits in accordance with the connector identification (or the circuit
diagram) to the appropriate terminal strips in the low-voltage compartment.
42 AMTNoT 060-02
PIX 7 Low-voltage connection
(contd.)
7.4 Connecting external cables in the

2 switchgear panel
7.4.1 Routing the external cables through the
panel’s internal cable duct
3 Customized low-voltage cables for control and measurement can be routed
to the low-voltage compartment inside each panel on the righthand side
(Fig. 7.2). The cable duct for the external cables is only located on the left
side in the bus section coupler.
■■ Remove the metal cable duct covers on the right inside of the panel (3).
■■ Break sheet-metal cutouts in the panel base (1) out as required.
4 ■■ Route external cables (2) from the cable basement through the cutout
2
into the panel’s internal cable duct and to the low-voltage compartment.
Fasten cables to the panel using cable clamps (4).
■■ Connect external cables to the terminal strip in the low-voltage
compartment according to the circuit diagram.
■■ Reposition the cable duct covers (3).
3
2
1
Fig. 7.2
1 Sheet metal cutouts in the panel base
2 External cables
3 Cable duct covers
4 Cable clamp
7.4.2 Routing the external cables through an

additional cable duct (optional)
Customized low-voltage cables for control and measurement can be routed
1 via an optional, separate cable duct above the low-voltage compartment
(Fig. 7.3).
The cable duct is mounted on site, and is included in the accessories.
2
■■ Mount the cable duct in accordance with the assembly drawing AMT 000
376-01.
■■ Route external cables through the cable duct (2) to the lowvoltage
3 compartment (3). Connect external cables to the terminal strips in the
low-voltage compartment according to the circuit diagram.
■■ Screw-fasten cover of cable duct (1).
Fig. 7.3
Top cable duct
1 Cable duct cover
2 Cable duct
3 Low-voltage compartment
AMTNoT 060-02 43
PIX 8 Commissioning
8.1 Final steps

Warning!
The high-voltage power supply must not be
connected. All active parts must be earthed.
Important:
Whenever you detect anomalies, faults or malfunctions, do not
commission the switchgear, but inform the manufacturer.
Clean and check assembly

■■ Clean the switchgear, removing contamination resulting from assembly
work.
■■ Remove all the attached information tags, cards, brochures and
instructions no longer needed.
■■ Check the tightening torques of all screw fastenings and connections
established on the site of installation:
□□ high-voltage connection
□□ earth conductor
□□ busbar connections
□□ panel screw fastenings
□□ low-voltage wiring
□□ special attachments
Damaged paint
The panels are powder-coated. Minor damage to the paint can be repaired
using commercially available paint (standard colour RAL 7044 or customer
specific colour).
Re-mount the covers:
■■ Removed partition and cover plates in the busbar and switching device
compartment (see Chapter 4.4.1).
■■ Cable duct covers of the external control and measurement cables (see
Chapter 7.4.1)
■■ Cable compartment cover (see Chapter 4.2).
■■ Remove temporary base from the panel top, if such a base has been
used (see Chapter 4.4.2).
Inspection
■■ Check the switchgear for damage which might be due to transport or
assembly work.
■■ Compare data on nameplate to the required ratings.
Racking-in the trucks
Insert trucks in the panels depending on the panel configuration (see
Chapter 4.3.5):
■■ Disconnector truck UTX
■■ Vacuum contactor CVX
■■ Metering truck MTX
■■ Circuit-breaker truck HVX
The HVX circuit-breaker is delivered without transport securing device in
the drive mechanism as of October 2008. The circuit-breaker can be
commissioned immediately.
Important:
HVX circuit-breakers with a former date of manufacture (up to
approx. October 2008) are equipped with a transport securing
device in the drive mechanism. This securing is marked on the
front cover (Fig. 8.1) with an label. In this case, do not operate
the circuit-breaker. Remove the transport securing device
before commissioning (see Assembly and Operating
Fig. 8.1 Instructions HVX, AGS 531 301-01 and AGS 531 461-01).
Label on the front cover of the
Close front doors
circuitbreaker, only if delivered with
transport securing device See Chapter 4.3.1.
44 AMTNoT 060-02
PIX 8 Commissioning (contd.)
8.2 Checking switching functions and

interlocks
Warning!
The high-voltage power supply must not be
connected. All active parts must be earthed.
Important:
-- For switching operations, comply with Chapter 10 (Operation).
-- In case supply voltage is not available:
• are blocking coils (optional; lock circuit-breaker button and/or
truck in disconnected position) in locked position, thus blocking
manual switching operations;
• is there a dropped-out undervoltage release in the circuit-
breaker (optional).
-- The energy-storing device of the circuit-breaker drive is
charged autonomously as soon as the supply voltage is
applied.
■■ Apply supply voltage.

■■ Perform several manual test operations with each switching device.
■■ Check switch position indicators.
■■ Check electrical functions of control and operating devices.
□□ Closing and opening releases for circuit-breaker
□□ Optional motor-operated drives for the truck and the earthing switch
■■ Check switch position indicators and interlocks (see Chapter 10).
8.3 Power frequency test for busbar

(optional)
Warning!
Comply with the safety provisions in Chapter 1.
A test unit and a test adapter (not included in scope of supplies) are
required for the power frequency test.
Preparation
■■ All panels must be isolated from the power supply and earthed (Fig. 8.2).
■■ Busbar:
Disconnect voltage transformer (MTX) and surge arrester. Earth voltage
detection systems.
■■ Incoming feeder panel for voltage test:
Remove cable compartment cover and disconnect voltage transformer and
surge arrester. Earth voltage detection systems.
Important:
Make sure that no high-voltage cables are connected.
Observe the assembly and operating instructions for the test
unit and the test adapter.
Performing the power frequency tests

■■ Perform the power frequency test of the busbar on the feeder panel:
□□ Connect test unit to the test cable.
□□ Switch the earthing switch OFF.
□□ Move circuit-breaker truck HVX into service position and switch
circuit-breaker ON.
□□ Perform the power frequency test successively for all three phases (L1,
L2, L3) in accordance with the specifications of the test unit manufacturer.
Make sure to earth the adjacent phases.
Important:
Observe admissible test values for the switchgear and the
admissible test values for power-frequency tests after
installation of the switchgear in accordance with
IEC 62271-200.
AMTNoT 060-02 45
4
5
1
Fig. 8.2
Switch position during the power frequency test (example: five panels)
1 Feeder panels
2 Incoming feeder panel for test voltage
3 Busbar
4 Test unit (e g. high-voltage source, test transformer)
5 Test cable
After the power frequency test

■■ Switch circuit-breaker OFF and put circuit-breaker truck into
disconnected position; switch earthing switch ON.
□□ Remove test unit and test cables.
□□ Reconnect disconnected voltage transformers and surge arresters.
8.4 Cable test after assembly

Warning!
Comply with the safety provisions in Chapter 1.
During the cable test, the busbar can be operated at rated voltage (see
nameplate). For qualification of the current transformers for cable tests,
enquire at the appropriate manufacturer’s.
A test unit and a test adapter (not included in scope of supplies) are
required for cable testing.
46 AMTNoT 060-02
Important:
Observe the assembly instructions for the test adapters and the
operating and inspection instructions for the test unit.
Preparation
■■ Isolate feeder cable of the panel which is to be tested.
■■ Isolate feeder cable in remote station.
■■ Earth feeder cable of the panel which is to be tested.
■■ Disconnect voltage transformer and surge arrester; earth voltage
detection systems.
Performing the cable test
■■ Connect the test adapter to a free cable connection in the panel and on
the test unit. To this effect, observe the specifications of the test unit’s
manufacturer.
Important:
Make sure that the metallic components of the test adapter are
at a sufficient distance from the earthed switchgear
components (e.g. housing).
■■ Set switchgear panel to test position:
Circuit-breaker: OFF
Truck: in disconnected position
Earthing switch: OFF
■■ Perform cable test according to the cable manufacturer’s specifications.

When doing so, do not exceed the admissible limits (see Table).
Once the cable test has been completed:
■■ Earth feeder cable again.
■■ Remove test set.
■■ Reconnect voltage transformer, surge arrester and voltage detection
systems or de-earth them.
■■ Reposition cable compartment cover.
Admissible limits for the cable test in panels

DC test voltage [kV] max. 15 min.
PIX 12 34
PIX 17 42
PIX 24 67
Admissible limits for the switchgear in case of cable tests with a testing frequency of
0.1 Hz available on request from the manufacturer’s.
AMTNoT 060-02 47
PIX 9 Voltage indicators
9.1 Voltage Detection Systems (VDS)

Important:
Refer to the operating manual of the voltage detection system
concerned.
Pluggable voltage detection system

The operating voltage or the zero voltage state of the feeders is detected
via a separate voltage detection system according to IEC 61243-5.
Socket-contacts for the indicator units are located on the panel front (Fig.
9.2). Capacitive voltage indicators of all the approved manufacturers can
be used (Fig. 9.1).
Fig. 9.1 Important:
Voltage indicator All three phases L1, L2 and L3 must always be checked
(Type HR-ST, Horstmann GmbH) together.
Close non-used socket-contacts using caps.
Integrated Voltage Detection System IVIS

Fig. 9.2 IVIS (Fig. 9.3) is an integrated voltage detection system with display unit
Socket-contacts for HR system on the
used to determine zero voltage according to IEC 61243-5.
panel front
The IVIS system has been designed for maximum operating reliability. It
does not require supply from an external source. It features climateproof
encapsulated electronics and is maintenance-free, due to permanent
monitoring of the indication thresholds.
Flash arrow symbols on the indicators display the operating voltage still
existing within the defined response thresholds (Fig. 9.3). The IVIS system
does not require the electrical repeat tests common for voltage detection
systems.
For a description of all functions and messages of the IVIS system, please
Fig. 9.3 refer to the separate Operating Manual IVIS (No. AGS 531757-01).
Integrated Voltage Detection System IVIS
9.2 Voltage Present Indicating System
VPIS
1
VPIS (Abb. 9.4) is a capacitive voltage indicator in accordance with IEC
2 61958. It is exclusively used to display the specified operating voltage.
In operation, each of the 3 phases L1, L2 and L3 (3) is displayed by its own
flashing indicator lamp (1).
L1 L2 L3 3
For each phase, a connector point (2) is available below each indicator
lamp for connection of the phase comparator. Only approved phase
comparators may be used for this VPIS system (see Chapter 9.3).
Fig. 9.4
Voltage indicator VPIS Warning!
1 Indicator lamps
These devices cannot be used to verify zero voltage.
2 Connection points Voltage indicators in accordance with IEC 61243-5
3 Phases must be used to determine zero voltage. Thus, before
opening the switchgear or before performing work
on live components, these areas must always be
earthed by means of a make-proof earthing switch.
48 AMTNoT 060-02
PIX 9 Voltage indicators (contd.)
9.3 Phase comparators

Phase comparators are optionally available and not included in the scope
of supplies.
Make sure to check phase coincidence before connecting different supply
lines for the first time.
Phase comparators for VDS systems (see Chapter 9.1)
If IVIS is used, phase comparison can be performed by means of the phase
comparator MS 100 (Fig. 9.5).
Phase comparator for VPIS system (see Chapter 9.2)
This phase comparator may only be used for the VIPS system in Chapter
Fig. 9.5
9.2.
Phase comparator MS 100
Rated voltage Ur [kV] VPIS item number
5–7.2 AMT150384-01
10–24 AMT150384-02
■■ Check the device before each operation. Connect the two plugs of the
phase comparator to the two connection points of a VPIS device (Fig. 9.7).
The lamp must light up: The phase comparator is working properly.
■■ Checking phase coincidence of two panels: Connect the plugs of the
phase comparator to the same phase connection points of two different
VPIS devices (panels) (Fig. 9.8). The indicator must not light up. If the
phases do not coincide, check the cable connection and, if necessary,
exchange.
■■ After each operation, check the device once more (see item 1).
Fig. 9.6
Phase comparator for HR system
(Type ORION 3.0, Horstmann GmbH)
L1 L2 L3
IEC 61958 10-24kV
Fig. 9.7
No phase coincidence: indicator lights up
L1
L1 L2 L3 L1
L1 L2 L3
IEC 61958 10-24kV IEC 61958 10-24kV
Fig. 9.8
Phase coincidence: indicator does not light up
AMTNoT 060-02 49
PIX 10 Operation
10.1 Operator interfaces of panels
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
L1
12
L2
L3
13
14
15
Fig. 10.1
Operator interface of PIX panels (shown in conjunction with the circuit-breaker
HVX)
1 Lock to open and close the door of the low-voltage compartment

2 Protection and control device
3 Circuit-breaker ON
4 Circuit-breaker OFF
5 Insertion opening for handle to open and close the front door
6 Inspection glass for indications and position of the circuit-breaker
7 Knob for releasing the opening, for manual charging of the circuit-
breaker’s energy storing device
8 Opening for manual charging of the circuit-breaker’s energy storing
device
9 Lock permitting locking and unlocking of the front door
10 Knob for releasing the opening for racking the truck in/out manually
11 Opening for racking the truck in/out manually
12 Earthing switch operating element
13 Voltage indicator
14 Position indicator of earthing switch
15 Securing bolts of the cable compartment cover
50 AMTNoT 060-02
PIX 10 Operation (contd.)
10.2 Operation accessories

Important:
These accessories are supplied together with the panel. The panel may only be operated by means of these
accessories.
Designation Item no. Illustration
Handle for opening and closing the front door SEM101120-01
Double-bit key for the front door SEM101137-01
Double-bit key for the low-voltage compartment SEM101137-02
Crank to charge the circuit-breaker’s energy-storing AGS H30498-01

device
Operating rod to switch the circuit-breaker on and off AGS H35446-01
Designation To be used Rated value Connector Item no. Illustration

for: design
AMT000223-08
Short circuit current ≤ 31.5 square
(motorized)
Cable feeder kA
square AMT000223-09
Operating lever for
Short circuit current 40 kA hexagonal AMT000223-10
earthing switch
Short circuit current ≤ 31.5
square AMT000223-05
Busbar kA
Short circuit current 40 kA hexagonal AMT000223-07
AGSH31601-01
Truck (manual drive)
Rated current Ir < 2500 A hexagonal
HVX/UTX/MTX AGSH31674-01
(motor drive)
Crank for truck
AGSH32532-01
Truck (manual drive)
Rated current Ir ≥ 2500 A square
HVX/UTX AGSH31674-02
(motor drive)
AMTNoT 060-02 51
10.3 Trucks for PIX panels

1 Moving contacts
2 Pole casing with vacuum interrupter chamber
3 Truck rollers
5 Operations counter
6 Insertion opening for manual charging of the energy storing device
7 Indicator, energy-storing device (charged/released)
8 Indicator, circuit-breaker ON/OFF
9 Handles for racking the circuit-breaker in/out
Fig. 10.2
12 Sockets for low-voltage connector
HVX circuit-breaker ≤ 24 kV/≤ 2500 A
1 Pole partitions
2 Moving contacts
3 Vacuum interrupter chambers
4 Press rod (transmission of ON/OFF switching movement)
5 Shutter actuation
6 Truck rollers
9 Insertion opening for manual charging of the energy storing device
10 Indicator, energy-storing device (charged/released)
11 Indicator, circuit-breaker ON/OFF
12 Handles for racking the circuit-breaker in/out
Fig. 10.3 15 Sockets for low-voltage connector
HVX circuit-breaker ≤ 17.5 kV/> 2500 A
52 AMTNoT 060-02
1 H.V.H.R.C. fuses
2 Moving contacts
3 Vacuum interrupter chambers with magnetic drive
4 Truck rollers
7 Indicator, vacuum contactor ON/OFF
8 Handles for racking out/in
9 Fuse status indication
10 Low-voltage connector
Fig. 10.4
Vakuumschütz CVX
1 Moving contacts
2 Truck rollers
Fig. 10.5
Disconnector truck UTX 12 kV
1 Moving contacts
2 Truck rollers
Fig. 10.6
Disconnector truck UTX 17.5/24 kV with pole casing
1 Moving contacts
2 High-voltage fuse for voltage transformer
3 Voltage transformer
4 Truck rollers
Fig. 10.7
Metering truck MTX
AMTNoT 060-02 53
10.4 Interlocks
PIX panels have mechanical basic interlocks which help avoid operating errors.
You must be familiar with these interlocks before operating panels.
10.4.1 Mechanical interlocks
Interlock Function of interlock Method of operation of
interlock
Between truck and low-voltage The truck cannot be actuated unless the The opening for the moving crank
connector low-voltage connector is inserted handle is locked.
The truck cannot be racked in if the earthing The moving crank handle is uncoupled
switch is ON. automatically.
Between truck and earthing
switch The earthing switch can no longer be The rotary movement of the earthing
switched on if the truck has left its switch lever is blocked. Do not apply
disconnected position. force!
Circuit-breaker cannot be racked in or out The opening for the moving crank
while it is switched on handle is locked
Between the circuit-breaker Circuit-breaker cannot be switched on unless The circuit-breaker cannot be switched
and the truck ■■ it is completely in its disconnected or service on or off
position and
■■ the operating crank for the rack-in
mechanism has been removed
Between the cable compartment The cable compartment cover can only be The cable compartment cover is
cover and the earthing switch removed if the earthing switch is ON. locked mechanically by means of a
(optional) sheet metal plate.
The front door can only be opened if the The front door cannot be lifted via the
truck is in its disconnected position. opening handle unless the truck is in
Between the truck and the disconnected position.
front door (optional)
If the front door is opened, the truck cannot The crank of the truck cannot be
be moved into service position. inserted if the front door is open.
10.4.2 Electromagnetic interlocks (optional)

Electromagnetic blocking coils can be used for inter-panel as well as intrapanel interlocks:
■■ The circuit-breaker’s ON and OFF pushbuttons are blocked.
■■ Manual actuation of the disconnector truck is blocked.
■■ Manual actuation of the earthing switch is blocked.
Warning!
Complete switchgear interlocking can only be
ensured with complete locking devices to avoid
malfunctions.
Important:
-- In case of failure of the supply voltage, all electrical interlocks
are in their ”locked” position. Measure: Re-establish supply
voltage.
-- Please note the purchase contract and the switchgear-
specific circuit diagram as regards the design of the interlocking
systematics.
-- If no blocking coils are being used for the locking devices, a
mechanical lock-out with cylinder or U lock must be provided.
54 AMTNoT 060-02
10.4.3 Mechanical lock-outs due to padlocks (not

included in scope of supplies)
The boreholes are provided for padlock yokes of Ø ≤ 8 mm.
Fig. 10.8
Cover flaps on ON/OFF pushbutton for the circuit-
breaker can be locked by means of a padlock
(optional).
Fig. 10.9
Mechanical lock-out of earthing switch via padlock
Fig. 10.10
Manual switching ON of circuit-breaker locked by
padlock
AMTNoT 060-02 55
Fig. 10.11
Manual switching OFF of circuit-breaker locked by
padlock
Fig. 10.12
Mechanical lock-out for shutter (same principle for
left-hand and right-hand sides)
Fig. 10.13
Interlock of truck (optional)
56 AMTNoT 060-02
10.4.4 Interlocks by means of cylinder locks

(optional)
1 Interlocking of earthing switch in closed condition

2 Interlocking of earthing switch in open condition
1
2
Fig. 10.14
3 Interlock of truck
3
Fig. 10.15
4 Interlocking of front door
Fig. 10.16
5 Interlocking of cable compartment cover
Fig. 10.17
AMTNoT 060-02 57
10.4.5 Supplementary interlocks

Further mechanical lock-outs and additional interlocks can be provided as
specified in the contract.
10.5 Operating specifications
The switchgear unit may only be operated by specialist electricians who
have proven experience (training certificate) in conjunction with the PIX
12-17-24 kV series and all the relevant safety standards.
Refer also to the safety provisions in Chapter 1.
Warning!
To rule out faulty switching, the operating sequences
described below must be complied with. Each
switching operation must be completed.
Check whether the supply voltage is ON.
Important:
-- After each switching operation for which you have used a
crank or a lever, remove this device and store it in the tool
board.
-- In case supply voltage is not available:
• blocking coils (locking the interrogation slides and circuit-
breaker pushbuttons, depending on design) are in “locked”
position.
• an undervoltage release (optional) has dropped out.
Measure: Re-establish the supply voltage.
10.6 Operating the circuit-breaker

10.6.1 Charging the circuit-breaker’s energy storing
device
Initial situation:
-- Circuit-breaker OFF
-- Energy storing device released.
Charging by hand
■■ Open cover (Fig. 10.18, 1) and insert crank (2).
4 ■■ Turn clockwise (3), until the charge drive mechanism is uncoupled
(sound). The energy storing device indicates the “charged” condition (4).
■■ Remove crank.
1 Charging via motor
The energy-storing device is charged automatically as soon as the motor’s
supply voltage is applied.
2 The position indicator of the energy storing device indicates the “charged”
condition (Fig. 10.18, 4).
3
L1
L2
L3
Fig. 10.18
Charge energy storing device of circuitbreaker
manually
1 Open cover
2 Insert crank
3 Turn clockwise
4 Position indicator, energy-storing device (charged)
58 AMTNoT 060-02
10.6.2 Operating the circuit-breaker manually

Switching ON via the operating rod
Insert the operating rod into the right-hand guide of the front door and press
it right to the back (Fig. 10.19, 1). The circuit-breaker is switched ON; the
1 position indicator indicates ”ON“ (2).
The energy storing device can be charged again immediately after
2 switching ON (by hand or by motor). If supply voltage is present, the energy
storage device is charged automatically.
1 Operating rod
Fig. 10.19
2 Position indicator reads: Circuitbreaker ON
Switching the circuit-breaker ON via the operating rod
Switching OFF via the operating rod

Insert the operating rod into the left-hand guide of the front door and press
it right to the back (Fig. 10.20, 3). The circuit-breaker is switched OFF. The
position indicator indicates ”OFF” (4).
1 Operating rod
3 2 Position indicator reads: Circuitbreaker OFF
4
Fig. 10.20
Switching the circuit-breaker OFF via the operating rod
Switching ON via pushbutton (optional)

1 Press the left-hand lever down (Fig. 10.21, 1). To switch ON, press the
black pushbutton (right-hand - 2). The circuit-breaker is switched ON. The
2 position indicator indicates ”ON” (3).
The energy storing device can be charged immediately after switching ON
(by hand or by motor). If supply voltage is present, the energy storage
device is charged automatically.
1 Press lever down

3 2 Press pushbutton I
3 Position indicator reads: Circuitbreaker ON
Fig. 10.21
Switching circuit-breaker ON via
pushbutton
Switching OFF via pushbutton (optional)

4
Press the left-hand lever down (Fig. 10.22, 4). To switch OFF, press the red
pushbutton (left-hand - 5). Circuit-breaker is switched OFF. The position
5 indicator indicates ”OFF” (6).
4 Press lever down

5 Press push-button O
6 Position indicator reads: Circuitbreaker OFF
Fig. 10.22
Switching circuit-breaker OFF via
pushbutton
AMTNoT 060-02 59
10.6.3 Switching the circuit-breaker electrically

Switching ON (Closing)
Actuate closing release via bay computer or remote control.
(by hand or by motor). If voltage is applied to the motor, charging is
performed automatically.
Switching OFF (Opening)
■■ Actuate the opening release via the bay computer or the remote control
■■ by undervoltage release or
■■ by secondary release
10.6.4 Position indicators on circuit-breaker and
possible operating sequences
Item Position Position Possible
indicator for indicator for operating
energy-storing circuit breaker sequence
device (spring ON/OFF
mechanism)
1 released OFF none
2 charged OFF C–O
3 released ON O
4 charged ON O–C–O
C = Switching ON (Closing) O = Switching OFF (Opening)
10.7 Move truck into service/disconnected position

Warning!
Trucks may on principle only be moved into service
or disconnected position when de-energized. Switch
circuit-breaker and vacuum contactor OFF or, in case
of disconnector truck UTX, isolate the feeder.
Important:
Do not pull the crank out before the truck in question has
1 reached its end position; do not pull it out in an undefined
3 2 intermediate position.
Initial situation:
L1
L2
L3
-- Earthing switch OFF
10.7.1 Racking-in the truck from disconnected into

Fig. 10.23
service position
1 Open cover
2 Insert crank
■■ Turn crank clockwise (3) until the truck has been racked in. Remove
3 Turn crank clockwise crank.
■■ Check position of truck (Fig. 10.24) through the inspection glass.
60 AMTNoT 060-02
Fig. 10.24
Truck in service position
10.7.2 Racking-out the truck from service into
disconnected position
■■ Turn crank counter-clockwise (3) until the truck has been racked out.
1
Remove crank.
3
■■ Check position of truck (Fig. 10.26) through the inspection glass.
1 Open cover
2 2 Insert crank
3 Turn crank counter-clockwise
L1
L2
L3
Fig. 10.25
10.8 Vacuum contactor CVX

Fig. 10.26
truck in disconnected position Position indicator
CVX Whether the vacuum contactor CVX is switched on or off is indicated
directly on the device (Fig. 10.27 and 10.28).
1 1 Vacuum contactor ON
Fig. 10.27
CVX 2 Vacuum contactor OFF
Fig. 10.28
AMTNoT 060-02 61
Switching
The vacuum contactor CVX is switched on and off by means of a remote
control device or the control and protection device GEMSTART (see
switchgear documentation).
Switching OFF manually (optional)
This feature is only available for mechanically latched vacuum contactors CVX.
In this case, the vacuum contactor CVX can be switched off directly on the
panel (Fig. 10.29 and 10.30).
■■ Insert operating rod through the guide hole in the front door until the
vacuum contactor switches OFF (Fig. 10.29). Check the position indicator
Fig. 10.29 (Fig. 10.28).
Switching OFF the vacuum contactor CVX by means of ■■ Alternatively: Switching off by means of a pushbutton (Fig. 10.30). To this
an operating rod effect, move the lever (1) downwards to its stop and press the OFF
pushbutton (2). Check the position indicator (Fig. 10.28).
Fig. 10.30
Switching OFF the vacuum contactor
CVX by means of a push-button
1 Press lever down
10.8.1 Fuse tripping
2 Press pushbutton O The inspection port of the vacuum contactor on the panel front indicates the
fuse tripping status:
CVX
Fig. 10.31
1 Indicator green: no fuse tripped
Measures to be taken in case of fuse tripping
CVX ■■ Put vacuum contactor to disconnected position and move it out of the
panel. This approach corresponds to the description in Chapter 4.3.4 with
the HVX truck.
■■ Always exchange all three fuses. Fuse replacement is described in the
Operating Manual of the vacuum contactor CVX (no. NTV 132).
10.9 Operating the earthing switch manually

Initial situation:
-- Leistungsschalter OFF
-- Truck in disconnected position
3 2
Fig. 10.32
2 Indicator red: one or several fuses
have tripped
3 Switch position indicator: vacuum
contactor has switched off automatically
62 AMTNoT 060-02
10.9.1 Switching ON the earthing switch

■■ Push the slide (Fig. 10.33, 1) upwards and insert the control lever of the
1 earthing switch with the lever rod pointing upwards (2).
3
2 ■■ Turn the lever clockwise by approx. 95° (3).
■■ Check position indicator. It must indicate that the earthing switch is ON
(Fig. 10.34, 4). Remove lever.
Fig. 10.33
Switch earthing switch ON:
1 Press slide upwards
2 Insert the operating lever
3 Turn operating lever clockwise
Fig. 10.34
4 Position indicator reads: Earthing switch is turned 10.9.2 Switching earthing switch OFF
ON
■■ Push the slide (Fig. 10.35, 1) upwards and insert the control lever of the
earthing switch with the lever rod pointing to the right (2).
■■ Press the lever counterclockwise by approx. 95° (3).
■■ Check position indicator: It must indicate that the earthing switch is OFF
(Fig. 10.36, 4). Remove crank.
1
2
10.10 Standard switching operations
Important:
Observe the switching provisions (Chapter 10.5) and the
interlocking conditions (Chapter 10.4).
Fig. 10.35
Switch earthing switch OFF
1 Press slide upwards
2 Insert the operating lever
3 Turn operating lever counterclockwise
Fig. 10.36
4 Position indicator reads: earthing switch is OFF
AMTNoT 060-02 63
10.10.1 Operating feeder cable

Initial situation:
-- HVX truck in disconnected position
1 Switch feeder cable ON
2 ■■ Move truck into service position (1).
■■ Switch circuit-breaker ON (2).
Switch feeder cable OFF
■■ Switch circuit-breaker OFF.
■■ Move truck into disconnected position.
10.10.2 Earthing the feeder cable

Fig. 10.37
Switch feeder cable ON Initial situation:
Earthing feeder cable

Switch the earthing switch ON (1).
De-earthing
Switch the earthing switch OFF.
1 10.10.3 Coupling busbar sections via bus section

coupler
With HVX and UTX truck
Fig. 10.38
Earthing feeder cable Initial situation:
-- both trucks (HVX, UTX) in disconnected position
1 1
2
Coupling the sections
■■ Move both trucks into service position (1).
Uncoupling
Fig. 10.39 ■■ Move both trucks into disconnected position.
Coupling busbar sections via bus section coupler and
HVX and UTX trucks With HVX truck
Initial situation:
64 AMTNoT 060-02
Coupling the sections

1 ■■ Move truck into service position (1).
2 ■■ Switch circuit-breaker ON (2).
Uncoupling
10.11 Earthing the busbar

Fig. 10.40
Coupling busbar sections via bus section coupler and Warning!
HVX truck The trucks (HVX, UTX) in the appropriate busbar
sections must be in disconnected position.
Important:
Observe the switching provisions (Chapter 10.5) and the
interlocking conditions (Chapter 10.4).
10.11.1 Earthing the busbar with the circuit-breaker

of an feeder panel
The earthing device can be connected to a free cable terminal in the cable
compartment (access: see Chapter 4.2). If necessary, remove cable. The
earthing device and the earthing adapter are not included in the scope of
supplies.
Important:
Comply with the specifications of the manufacturer of the
earthing device and
-- if applicable - the earthing adapter.
Initial situation:
-- Feeder cable EARTHED
-- Earthing switch ON
Earthing the busbar:
■■ Connect earthing device in cable compartment (1).
■■ Switch the earthing switch OFF (2).
■■ Move truck into service position (3).
3
De-earthing:
4
■■ Switch the earthing switch ON.
■■ Remove the earthing device.
2
1
Fig. 10.41
Earthing the busbar with the circuit-breaker of an
feeder panel
AMTNoT 060-02 65
10.11.2 Earthing the busbar with busbar earthing

switch in the metering panel
Initial situation:
-- Metering truck MTX in service position
Earthing the busbar

De-earthing
Fig. 10.42
Earthing the busbar with busbar earthing switch in the
metering panel
1
10.11.3 Earthing the busbar with busbar earthing
switch
Initial situation:
Fig. 10.43 -- Busbar earthing switch OFF
Earthing the busbar with busbar earthing switch
Earthing the busbar
De-earthing
66 AMTNoT 060-02
PIX 11 Maintenance

Only specialist electricians certified by the manufacturer for maintenance work and who have the required knowledge regarding
handling of medium-voltage switchgear of the series PIX 12-17-24 kV and all the relevant safety provisions are permitted to
perform maintenance and cleaning work.
Warning!
Refer to the safety provisions in Chapter 1.
11.2 Servicing schedule

We recommend performing a visual inspection of the panels at least every four years, depending on the strain to which they are
subjected during operation and the operating conditions.
Important:
In case of humidity and condensation or air pollution (dust, smoke or corrosive gases), the
maintenance intervals must be adapted to the actual conditions.
For cleaning and maintenance work, please refer to Chapter 4 ”Access to the main circuit compartments”.
In case of ambiguities or irregularities, please contact the manufacturer’s Service Center immediately.
Maintenance interval for Work to be carried out Qualification /

ambient conditions Work performed by
according to IEC 62271-1
4 years or depending on the actual ■■ Check panels completely for contamination,
ambient conditions condensation and damage, e.g. due to partial discharge
■■ Clean panels, if necessary (see Chapter 11.3).
Perform a manual switching test of the drives and check
interlocks and position indicators (see Chapter 10)
■■ Repair damage or replace components (see Staff who have been certified
Chapter 11.5 and 11.6) for this work
12 years ■■ Clean and grease drives and movable main current
contacts (see Chapter. 11.7)
■■ Check releases and blocking coils for proper
working order
■■ Check tightening torque of busbar screw fastenings
Circuit-breaker truck HVX Refer to the applicable instruction manual for the truck concerned:
Metering truck MTX AGS 531461-01, AGS 531301-01
Disconnector truck UTX AGS 531361-01
AGS 531361-01
Vacuum contactor CVX NTV 133
After 1,000 actuations of the truck Revision of the switching device in question Manufacturer’s Service
or the earthing switch Center
AMTNoT 060-02 67
PIX 11 Maintenance (contd.)
11.3 Cleaning
To ensure the specified insulating level, the insulating components must be
clean and dry. On principle, cleanliness deserves utmost attention. When
deposited dirt and humidity are detected, the panels must be cleaned in an
expert fashion.
When performing cleaning, make sure that the lubrication in the drive
mechanisms is not removed. If the drive mechanisms are no longer
sufficiently lubricated, new lubrication must be applied.
Warning!
Risk of injuries: The drives must not be disassembled
for service and maintenance work.
Slight contamination
Clean using a dry, lint-free cloth. Depending on the degree of soiling,
replace cloth as often as necessary.
Serious contamination
Use cleaning agent, 1 litre can (see Chapter 12.1). The use of other
cleaning agents is not admissible.
■■ Wear protective gloves
■■ Use cleaning agent according to manufacturer’s instructions
■■ Soak the cloth thoroughly and wipe the insulating components. Keep
duration of exposure as short as possible.
■■ Expose the cleaned surface to the air for at least two hours.
11.4 Avoid condensation

To ensure the specified insulating level, the switchgear panel – especially
its insulating components – must not be exposed to condensation.
Measures to take in case of condensation
■■ Should condensation be detected in or on the panel, clean the panel in
accordance with Chapter 11.3.
■■ Installation or inspection of panel heating. It must provide a sufficient
heating performance to prevent condensation on the panel.
11.5 Corrosion protection

Drive mechanisms and covers have a long-term protection against corrosion.
Any damage to the paint, scratches and other damage must be repaired
immediately to avoid corrosion.
Contact the manufacturer’s Service Center.
11.6 Replacement of components and

panels
The drive mechanisms, current transformers and voltage transformers as
well as the testing and monitoring systems can be replaced if necessary.
Also, entire panels can be replaced.
The following data on the nameplate are relevant for replacement of
components or panels or in case of any queries (see also Chapter 2.6):
■■ Type designation
■■ Serial number
■■ Year of construction
Should you have any queries regarding replacement of components or
panels, please contact the manufacturer’s Service Center.
68 AMTNoT 060-02
11.7 Lubrication instructions

Warning!
Risk of injuries: Circuit-breakers and drives must not
be disassembled for lubrication.
Important:
Only approved lubricants may be used (see Chapter 12.1).
The following elements must not be lubricated:
-- Motor
-- Ball bearings
-- Auxiliary releases
-- Push switches
-- Blocking coils
-- Auxiliary switches
Preparation
■■ Remove truck from the panel (see Chapter 4.3.4).
■■ To get access to the fixed contacts behind the shutters, use a shutter lift
(Fig. 11.1). Handling of the shutter lift corresponds to that of standard trucks
(HVX, UTX).
■■ Clean lubrication points using a lint-free cloth; use cleaning agent in case
of serious contamination (see Annex).
Fig. 11.1
Shutter lift for a panel width of 650 mm:
Item number ADM I25 125-01
for panel width 800/1000 mm:
Item number ADM I25 126-01 Lubrication
Points of lubrication Lubricant Lubrication procedure

Clean by means of lint-free
cloth; use cleaning agent in
case of serious contamination.
Sliding contact surfaces KL
Apply a thin and uniform film
of lubricant.
Clean lubricating points using

a lintfree cloth or a soft
paint-brush, if necessary
All accessible friction using cleaning agent (use
KL
points and sliding surfaces sparingly, just moisten points
of lubrication).
Apply a thin coat of lubricant
(using e.g. a paintbrush).
Pour drops of liquid lubricant
(oil can, drip feed lubricator)
into the bearing gap. Liquid
lubricant gets between the
Bearings and joints FL bearing surfaces due to the
capillary effect. In case of
inaccessible lubrication
points, use an extension tube
or spray.
AMTNoT 060-02 69
6
7
5
4
1
2
3
Fig. 11.2
Points of lubrication/maintenance
1 Earthing switch operating mechanism
2 Earthing switch contacts
3 Fuse of voltage transformer (optional)
4 Tracks for truck
5 Shutter mechanism
6 Fixed contacts for the truck
7 Switching device (lubricate in accordance with lubricating instructions in the appropriate operating manual HVX/UTX/MTX)
8 Trolley, handling: see Chapter 12.5
Once maintenance work is complete:

■■ Remove all the tools and auxiliary equipment used.
■■ Reinsert truck into the panel (see Chapter 4.3.5).
■■ Reposition covers, close doors and check switching functions (see Chapter 8 ”Commissioning”).
11.8 Replacing fuse of voltage transformer

Voltage transformer in feeder cable
■■ Switch ON the panel’s earthing switch.
■■ Pull fuse (Fig. 11.2, item 3) carefully out of the clamping contact. Check contact surfaces for cleanness and, if necessary,
clean (see section 11.3).
Insert new fuse; remount cable compartment cover.
Voltage transformer on metering truck MTX
See Operating Manual AGS 531361-01.
70 AMTNoT 060-02
PIX 12 Annex
12.1 Auxiliary products

The auxiliary products are available from the manufacturer. The use of
alternative auxiliary products is not permissible.
Warning!
Risk of injury in case of inappropriate handling.
Observe the safety data sheets of the manufacturers
of the auxiliary products.
Auxiliary product Item no.
Cleaning agent S 008 152
Lubricant KL, 0.5 kg can ST 312-111-835
Liquid lubricant FL, 0.5 kg can S 008153
Repair paint, 500 g can, RAL 7044, S 009 492
silk-grey
12.2 Treatment of firmly screw-connected

contact surfaces
Important:
Caution when handling bars insulated by heat-shrinkable
sleeves: The heatshrinkable sleeve must not get into contact
with lubricant (swelling).
Important:
Contact areas coated with lubricant KL should not be touched, if
possible.
■■ Contact areas must be subjected to preliminary treatment before

screwfastening (see Table).
■■ Immediately after the preliminary treatment, coat contact surfaces
completely with a thin and uniform film of lubricant KL.
Material of contact Pre-treatment

surfaces
Silver-plated contact surfaces Clean1
Nickel-plated contact surfaces Remove passivation layer4
Copper or copper alloy Clean 1, expose metallic surface2
Aluminium Clean 1, expose metallic surface2
Steel Clean 1, expose metallic surface2
Zinc-plated steel Remove passivation, not the zinc
layer3
Hot-galvanized sheet-metal Clean 1, passivation need not be
removed
1
Clean by means of lint-free cloth; use cleaning agent in case of serious
contamination (see above)
2
Expose metallic surface
□□ by treating the entire surface with emery cloth or a rotating grinding tool (grain
size 100 or 80) or
□□ using a wire brush which is clearly marked for use exclusively for aluminium or
exclusively for copper
3
using a brass brush, steel brush
4
rub slightly by hand using Scotchbrite abrasive agent (Ni layer must not be
reduced)
AMTNoT 060-02 71
PIX 12 Annex (contd.)
12.3 Screw fastenings

The following elements must be used for all screw fastenings:
■■ Screws and bolts: Grade ≥ 8.8
■■ Nuts: Grade 8
Important:
Do not grease screws or nuts.
Tightening torque [Nm]

Thread size
min. max.
M5 3.8 4.7
M6 7 9
M8 16 24
M10 36 44
M12 63 77
Table 1:
Hex. bolts and socket-head capscrews (except slotted screws) and nuts (except
self-locking nuts)

Thread size
min. max.
M6 5 7.5
M8 12 18
M10 24 38
M12 36 54
Table 2:
Screw fastening with casting nuts in cast resin parts (transformer and post insulator)

Thread size
min. max.
M6 5.5 7.5
M8 15 19
M10 30 40
M12 60 76
Table 3:
Screw fastening for current transmission, conductor material: copper
12.4 Required tools (not included in the

scope of supplies)
Cutter
Nail puller
approved torque wrenches with different bits for
hexagon socket screws and socket-head screws and
nuts; bits for screw and nut grades M 5, M 6, M 8,
M 10, M 12
Screwdriver and Philips screwdriver
Cutting pliers
4 crane straps/chains of L ≥ 2000 mm

lint-free, clean rags
72 AMTNoT 060-02
12.5 Operation accessories

12.5.1 Transport trolley for truck
1 2 3 4
12
6
11 7
10
Fig. 12.1
Transport trolley for truck
1 Autonomous interlocking of the racked-in truck on the trolley
2 Variable screw fastening of track
3 Positioning of track to adjust the various track widths
4 Track
5 Interlocking with panel
6 Variable screw fastening of unlocking bar
7 Positioning of unlocking bar to match various panel versions
8 Tray for accessories (lever, keys, handle)
9 Lever to lock / unlock the transport trolley on the panel. Table of trolley is lifted or
lowered.
10. Unlocking bar. The truck is unlocked in the panel.
11 Handles of trolley
12 Slide to unlock the truck from the trolley
AMTNoT 060-02 73
Rated voltage
Panel width Item number of
Ur of the panel Truck
[mm] trolley
[kV]
650/800 HVX/UTX/MTX/CVX EIB AE1 148-011
≤ 12 HVX/UTX (Ir = 2500 A) EIB AE1 148-02
1000
HVX/UTX (Ir = 3150 A) AGS C74 125-01
750 HVX/UTX/MTX/CVX EIB AE1 148-011
≤ 17,5 HVX/UTX (Ir = 2500 A) EIB AE1 148-02
1000
HVX/UTX (Ir = 3150 A) AGS C74 125-01
800 HVX/UTX/MTX/CVX EIB AE1 148-011
24
1000 HVX/UTX (Ir = 2500 A) EIB AE1 148-02
Adjusting the track width

1
The trolley can be used for panel widths of 650, 750 and 800 mm:
■■ Release 3 screws on each track (Fig. 12.1, 2).
■■ Adjust the two tracks to the appropriate panel track width and check
them. Re-mount the six screws.
■■ Adapt position of unlocking bar (10) also to the appropriate panel (same
procedure).
12.5.2 Handling crane for trucks (optional)
Fig. 12.2 12.6 List of the assembly drawings

Handling crane for trucks
Item no. AGSC73258-01 List of all assembly drawings specified in this manual.
This does not apply to special modules or customer-specific special
designs.
According to the switchgear configuration in question, only such drawings
from the list are supplied by the factory as are actually required.
Description Assembly drawing Chapter

Panel fastening on concrete SEM102173-01 5.5
foundations
Screw-fastening the panels to SEM102056-01 5.7
one another
Mounting the low-voltage AGS C73 180-01 7.2
compartments
Mounting an additional cable AMT 000 376-01 7.4.2
duct
74 AMTNoT 060-02
Appendices Note
AMTNoT 060-02 75
© 2011 Schneider Electric - All rights reserved
Schneider Electric As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for
35, rue Joseph Monier confirmation of the information given in this publication.
CS 30323
This document has been printed
on ecological paper
RCS Nanterre 954 503 439
Publishing: Schneider Electric
Capital social 896 313 776 €
Design: Schneider Electric
Printing
AMTNoT 060-02 02-2011
VAMP 300
Protection IED
Publication version: V300/en M/A002

Trace back information:
Workspace Main version a40
Checked in 2014-04-10
Skribenta version 4.1.081
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 This document ......................................................................... 9

1.1 Legal notice ...................................................................... 9
1.2 Safety information and password protection .................... 9
1.3 Purpose ............................................................................ 11
1.4 Related documents .......................................................... 11
1.5 Document conventions .................................................... 11
1.6 Abbreviations ................................................................... 12
2 Introduction ............................................................................. 14
2.1 Principles of numerical protection techniques ................. 14
2.2 VAMP 300 ........................................................................ 16
2.3 Local HMI ......................................................................... 16
2.4 VAMPSET setting and configuration tool ......................... 20
2.5 Configuring the system with VAMPSET ........................... 20
2.5.1 Setting up the communication ............................. 20
2.5.2 Writing the settings to the IED ............................. 21
2.5.3 Saving the VAMPSET document file ................... 21
3 Mechanical structure .............................................................. 22

3.1 VAMP 300 IED modularity ............................................... 22
3.2 Slot info and ordering code .............................................. 24
4 Measurement functions .......................................................... 25

4.1 Measurements for protection functions ............................ 25
4.2 Measurements for arc protection function ....................... 26
4.3 Measurement accuracy .................................................... 27
4.4 RMS values ...................................................................... 28
4.5 Harmonics and Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) ............. 28
4.6 Demand values ................................................................ 29
4.7 Minimum and maximum values ....................................... 30
4.8 Maximum values of the last 31 days and twelve months .. 32
4.9 Voltage measurement modes .......................................... 33
4.9.1 Single channel voltage measurement ................. 33
4.9.2 Multiple channel voltage measurement .............. 34
4.10 Direction of power and current ......................................... 39
4.11 Symmetric components ................................................... 40
4.12 Primary secondary and per unit scaling ........................... 41
4.12.1 Current scaling .................................................... 41
4.12.2 Voltage scaling for analogue module A ............... 44
4.12.3 Voltage scaling for analogue module B, C, D ..... 46
5 Control functions .................................................................... 49

5.1 Output relays .................................................................... 49
5.2 Digital inputs .................................................................... 52
V300/en M/A002 3
Table of Contents
5.3 Binary inputs and outputs ................................................ 56

5.4 Virtual inputs and outputs ................................................ 57
5.5 LED names ...................................................................... 60
5.6 Matrix ............................................................................... 61
5.6.1 Output matrix ....................................................... 61
5.6.2 Blocking matrix .................................................... 62
5.6.3 LED matrix .......................................................... 63
5.7 Controllable objects ......................................................... 65
5.7.1 Local/Remote selection ....................................... 66
5.7.2 Controlling with DI ............................................... 66
5.7.3 Controlling with I/O .............................................. 67
5.7.4 Controlling with F1 & F2 ...................................... 67
5.8 Logic functions ................................................................. 68
5.9 Local panel ....................................................................... 71
5.9.1 Mimic display ....................................................... 71
5.9.2 Local panel configuration .................................... 74
5.9.3 Function buttons .................................................. 76
5.9.4 Setting group control ........................................... 77
6 Protection functions ............................................................... 78

6.1 Current protection function dependencies ....................... 78
6.2 IED functionality in different applications ......................... 78
6.2.1 Feeder protection ................................................ 79
6.2.2 Motor protection .................................................. 79
6.3 Synchrocheck (25) ........................................................... 80
6.3.1 Connections for synchrocheck ............................ 80
6.4 Undervoltage protection U< (27) ...................................... 84
6.5 Directional power protection P< (32) ............................... 87
6.6 Undercurrent protection I< (37) ........................................ 88
6.7 Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in feeder mode ........... 89
6.8 Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in motor mode ............ 90
6.9 Phase reversal/incorrect phase sequence protection I2>>
(47) ................................................................................... 92
6.10 Stall protection IST> (48) .................................................. 93
6.10.1 Motor status ........................................................ 95
6.11 Thermal overload protection T> (49) ............................... 97
6.12 Circuit breaker failure protection CBFP (50BF) ............... 101
6.13 Overcurrent protection I> (50/51) .....................................103
6.13.1 Remote controlled overcurrent scaling ............... 107
6.14 Earth fault protection I0> (50N/51N) .................................109
6.15 Overvoltage protection U> (59) ........................................113
6.16 Zero sequence voltage protection U0> (59N) .................. 115
6.17 Frequent start protection N> (66) .....................................118
6.18 Directional phase overcurrent Iφ> (67) .............................119
6.19 Directional earth fault protection I0φ> (67N) ..................... 125
6.20 Intermittent transient earth fault protection I0T> (67NT) ....131
6.21 Magnetishing inrush If2 > (68F2) ...................................... 138
6.22 Transformer over exicitation If5> (68F5) .......................... 139
6.23 Auto-reclose function (79) ................................................139
4 V300/en M/A002
Table of Contents
6.24 Frequency Protection f><, f>><< (81) .............................. 147

6.25 Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF) (81R) ................. 149
6.26 Cold load pick-up and magnetising inrush ....................... 153
6.27 Arc flash protection .......................................................... 156
6.27.1 Arc flash protection, general principle ................. 156
6.27.2 Arc flash protection menus ..................................156
6.27.3 Configuration example of arc flash protection ..... 162
6.28 Programmable stages (99) .............................................. 168
6.29 Inverse time operation ..................................................... 171
6.29.1 Standard inverse delays IEC, IEEE, IEEE2, RI ...173
6.29.2 Free parameterization using IEC, IEEE and IEEE2
equations .............................................................184
6.29.3 Programmable inverse time curves .................... 185
7 Supporting functions .............................................................. 186

7.1 Event log .......................................................................... 186
7.2 Disturbance recorder ....................................................... 188
7.3 System clock and synchronization ...................................192
7.4 Self-supervision ............................................................... 196
7.4.1 Diagnostics ..........................................................196
7.5 Voltage sags and swells ...................................................197
7.6 Voltage interruptions ........................................................ 199
7.7 Current transformer supervision ...................................... 201
7.8 Voltage transformer supervision ...................................... 202
7.9 Circuit breaker condition monitoring ................................ 203
7.10 Energy pulse outputs ....................................................... 208
7.11 System clock and synchronization ...................................211
7.12 Running hour counter ...................................................... 215
7.13 Timers .............................................................................. 216
7.14 Combined overcurrent status ...........................................218
7.15 Self-supervision ............................................................... 221
7.15.1 Diagnostics ..........................................................221
7.16 Incomer short circuit fault locator ..................................... 223
7.17 Feeder fault locator .......................................................... 226
8 Communication and protocols .............................................. 229

8.1 Communication ports ....................................................... 229
8.1.1 Ethernet port ....................................................... 231
8.2 Communication protocols ................................................ 233
8.2.1 GetSet ................................................................. 233
8.2.2 Modbus TCP and Modbus RTU .......................... 234
8.2.3 Profibus DP ......................................................... 234
8.2.4 SPA-bus .............................................................. 236
8.2.5 IEC 60870-5-103 ................................................. 236
8.2.6 DNP 3.0 ...............................................................239
8.2.7 IEC 60870-5-101 ................................................. 240
8.2.8 External I/O (Modbus RTU master) .....................240
8.2.9 IEC 61850 ........................................................... 241
V300/en M/A002 5
Table of Contents
8.2.10 EtherNet/IP ..........................................................242

8.2.11 FTP server .......................................................... 243
8.2.12 HTTP server – Webset ........................................243
9 Applications and configuration examples ............................ 244

9.1 Substation feeder protection ............................................ 245
9.2 Industrial feeder protection .............................................. 247
10 Connections .............................................................................248
10.1 Supply voltage cards ........................................................248
10.2 Analogue measurement cards ......................................... 250
10.2.1 Analogue measurements card “A =
3L+U+I0(5/1A)” .................................................... 250
10.2.2 "B = 3L+4U+I0 (5/1A)" ......................................... 251
10.2.3 "C = 3L+4U+2I0 (5+1A)" ......................................252
10.2.4 "D = 3L+4U+2I0 (1+0.2A)" ...................................253
10.2.5 Voltage measuring modes correlation for B,C and
D analogue measurement cards ......................... 254
10.3 I/O cards .......................................................................... 255
10.3.1 I/O card “B = 3BIO+2Arc” .................................... 255
10.3.2 I/O card “G = 6DI+4DO” ...................................... 256
10.3.3 I/O card “I = 10DI” ............................................... 257
10.4 I/O option card “D= 4Arc” ................................................. 258
10.5 Communication cards ...................................................... 258
10.5.1 COM 3-COM 4 ports ........................................... 260
10.6 Local port (Front panel) ....................................................265
10.7 External option modules .................................................. 266
10.7.1 VSE-001 fiber optic interface module ................. 266
10.7.2 VSE-002 RS-485 interface module ..................... 267
10.7.3 VSE-009 DeviceNet interface module ................ 268
10.7.4 VPA-3CG profibus interface module ................... 269
10.7.5 VIO 12A RTD input / output modules .................. 270
10.8 Block diagram .................................................................. 271
10.9 Connection examples ...................................................... 272
11 Technical data ..........................................................................275

11.1 Connections ..................................................................... 275
11.1.1 Measuring circuits ............................................... 275
11.1.2 Auxiliary power supply ........................................ 276
11.1.3 Digital inputs internal operating voltage ............. 277
11.1.4 Heavy duty trip contact ........................................277
11.1.5 Trip contacts, Tx ..................................................278
11.1.6 Signal contacts .................................................... 278
11.1.7 Local serial communication port ..........................278
11.1.8 COM 3-4 serial communication port ....................279
11.1.9 Ethernet communication port .............................. 279
11.1.10 Arc protection interface ....................................... 279
11.1.11 Analogue input / output connection (option)* ...... 280
6 V300/en M/A002
Table of Contents
11.2 Test and environmental conditions .................................. 281

11.2.1 Disturbance tests ................................................ 281
11.2.2 Electrical tests ..................................................... 281
11.2.3 Mechanical tests ................................................. 282
11.2.4 Environmental tests .............................................282
11.2.5 Environmental conditions .................................... 282
11.2.6 Casing ................................................................. 283
11.3 Protection functions ......................................................... 283
11.3.1 Non-directional current protection ....................... 283
11.3.2 Directional current protection .............................. 289
11.3.3 Frequent start protection ..................................... 291
11.3.4 Voltage protection ............................................... 292
11.3.5 Circuit-breaker failure protection CBFP (50BF) ...295
11.3.6 Magnetising inrush 68F2 ..................................... 295
11.3.7 Over exicitation 68F5 .......................................... 295
11.3.8 Frequency protection .......................................... 296
11.3.9 Power protection ................................................. 297
11.3.10 Synchrocheck function ........................................ 297
11.4 Supporting functions ........................................................ 298
11.4.1 Disturbance recorder (DR) .................................. 298
11.4.2 Transformer supervision ..................................... 299
12 Mounting .................................................................................. 300
13 Order information ....................................................................301
V300/en M/A002 7
1 This document
1 This document
1.1 Legal notice

Copyright
2014 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Disclaimer
No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any
consequences arising out of the use of this document. This document
is not intended as an instruction manual for untrained persons. This
document gives instructions on device installation, commissioning
and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable
circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the
event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action
without proper authorization. Contact Schneider Electric and request
the necessary information.
Contact information
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
1.2 Safety information and password

protection
Important Information
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to
become familiar with the device before trying to install, operate,
service or maintain it. The following special messages may appear
throughout this bulletin or on the equipment to warn of potential
hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies
a procedure.
The addition of either symbol to a “Danger” or “Warning” safety label
indicates that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal
injury if the instructions are not followed.
V300/en M/A002 9
1.2 Safety information and password protection 1 This document
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential

personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this
symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, can result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, can result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical
injury. The safety alert symbol shall not be used with this signal
word.
User qualification
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and
maintained only by trained and qualified personnel. No responsibility
is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out
of the use of this material. A qualified person is one who has skills
and knowledge related to the construction, installation, and operation
of electrical equipment and has received safety training to recognize
and avoid the hazards involved.
Password protection
Use IED's password protection feature in order to protect untrained
person interacting this device.
10 V300/en M/A002
1 This document 1.3 Purpose
WARNING
WORKING ON ENERGIZED EQUIPMENT
Do not choose lower Personal Protection Equipment while
working on energized equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or
serious injury.
1.3 Purpose
This document contains instructions on the installation,
commissioning and operation of VAMP 300.
This guide also contains an application example of configuring a
protection IED.
This document is intended for persons who are experts on electrical
power engineering.
This document covers the device models as described by the ordering
code in Chapter 13 Order information.
1.4 Related documents

Document Identification*)
VAMP 300 Series Local HMI Alarm List AN300.ENxxxx
VAMPSET Setting and Configuration Tool User Manual VVAMPSET_EN_M_xxxx
*) xxxx = revision number

Download the latest software at .
1.5 Document conventions

Convention Example
Menu names are presented in bold. Open the File menu.
Buttons in software are presented in bold. Click OK.
Parameter names are presented in Italics. Select the Stage enabled
parameter.
Parameter values are presented in Italics. The parameter value is Off.
Push-buttons on local HMI are presented by icons.
To enter the menu, press .
V300/en M/A002 11
1.6 Abbreviations 1 This document
1.6 Abbreviations
ANSI American National Standards Institute. A standardization organisation.
CB Circuit breaker
CBFP Circuit breaker failure protection
cosφ Active power divided by apparent power = P/S. (See power factor PF). Negative sign indicates reverse
power.
CT Current transformer
CTPRI Nominal primary value of current transformer
CTSEC Nominal secondary value of current transformer
Dead band See hysteresis.
DI Digital input
DO Digital output, output relay
Document file Stores information about the IED settings, events and fault logs.
DSR Data set ready. An RS232 signal. Input in front panel port of VAMP relays to disable rear panel local
port.
DST Daylight saving time. Adjusting the official local time forward by one hour for summer time.
DTR Data terminal ready. An RS232 signal. Output and always true (+8 Vdc) in front panel port of VAMP
relays.
FFT Fast Fourier transform. Algorithm to convert time domain signals to frequency domain or to phasors.
FPGA Field-programmable gate array
HMI Human-machine interface
Hysteresis I.e. dead band. Used to avoid oscillation when comparing two near by values.
IMODE Nominal current of the selected mode. In feeder mode, IMODE= VTPRIMARY. In motor mode, IMODE= IMOT.
IMOT Nominal current of the protected motor
IN Nominal current. Rating of CT primary or secondary.
ISET Another name for pick up setting value I>
I0N Nominal current of I0 input in general
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission. An international standardization organisation.
IEC-101 Abbreviation for communication protocol defined in standard IEC 60870-5-101
IEC-103 Abbreviation for communication protocol defined in standard IEC 60870-5-103
IED Intelligent electronic device
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
LAN Local area network. Ethernet based network for computers and IEDs.
Latching Output relays and indication LEDs can be latched, which means that they are not released when the
control signal is releasing. Releasing of lathed devices is done with a separate action.
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light-emitting diode
Local HMI IED front panel with display and push-buttons
NTP Network time protocol for LAN and WWW
P Active power. Unit = [W]
PF Power factor. The absolute value is equal to cosφ, but the sign is '+' for inductive i.e. lagging current
and '-' for capacitive i.e. leading current.
PM Nominal power of the prime mover. (Used by reverse/under power protection.)
12 V300/en M/A002
1 This document 1.6 Abbreviations
PT See VT
pu Per unit. Depending of the context the per unit refers to any nominal value. For example for overcurrent
setting 1 pu = 1xIMODE.
Q Reactive power. Unit = [var] acc. IEC
RMS Root mean square
S Apparent power. Unit = [VA]
SF IED status inoperative
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol for LAN and WWW
SPST sigle pole single throw
SPDT sigle pole double throw
TCS Trip circuit supervision
THD Total harmonic distortion
U0SEC Voltage at input Uc at zero ohm earth fault. (Used in voltage measurement mode “2LL+Uo”)
UA Voltage input for U12 or UL1 depending of the voltage measurement mode
UB Voltage input for U23 or UL2 depending of the voltage measurement mode
UC Voltage input for U31 or U0 depending of the voltage measurement mode
UN Nominal voltage. Rating of VT primary or secondary
UTC Coordinated Universal Time (used to be called GMT = Greenwich Mean Time)
VAMPSET Configuration tool for VAMP protection devices
VT Voltage transformer i.e. potential transformer PT
VTPRI Nominal primary value of voltage transformer
VTSEC Nominal secondary value of voltage transformer
WWW World wide web (internet)
Webset http configuration interface
VAMP 300 IED Refers VAMP 300 series platefrm in general
VAMP 300F Refers VAMP 300 series feeder protection IED
VAMP 300M Refers VAMP 300 series motor protection IED
V300/en M/A002 13
2 Introduction
2 Introduction
2.1 Principles of numerical protection

techniques
The device is fully designed using numerical technology. This means
that all the signal filtering, protection and control functions are
implemented through digital processing.
The numerical technique used in the device is primarily based on
an adapted Fast Fourier Transformation (FFT). In FFT the number
of calculations (multiplications and additions), which are required to
filter out the measuring quantities, remains reasonable.
The synchronized sampling means an even number of 2n samples
per period (e.g. 32 samples per a period). This means that the
frequency must be measured and the number of the samples per
period must be controlled accordingly so that the number of the
samples per period remains constant if the frequency changes.
Apart from the FFT calculations, some protection functions also
require the symmetrical components to be calculated for obtaining
the positive, negative and zero phase sequence components of the
measured quantity.
Figure 2.1 shows a principle block diagram of a numerical device.
The main components are the energizing inputs, digital input
elements, output relays, A/D converters and the micro controller
including memory circuits. Further, a device contains a power supply
unit and a human-machine interface (HMI).
Figure 2.2 shows the heart of the numerical technology. That is the
main block diagram for calculated functions.
Figure 2.3 shows a principle diagram of a single-phase overvoltage
function.
14 V300/en M/A002
2 Introduction 2.1 Principles of numerical protection techniques
Figure 2.1: Principle block diagram of the VAMP hardware
Figure 2.2: Block diagram of signal processing and protection software
Figure 2.3: Block diagram of a basic protection function
V300/en M/A002 15
2.2 VAMP 300 2 Introduction
2.2 VAMP 300

VAMP 300 has a modular design, and it can be optimized to almost
all type of applications in low and medium voltage distribution
systems.
VAMP 300F/M can be used as a feeder/motor protection relay and
it can have inbuilt arc-protection as a back-up. Functionality can be
selected by choosing ordering code according the application.
Following options depend on the ordering code
• Multiple power supply options
• phase current inputs
• residual current inputs
• voltage inputs
• amount of digital inputs
• amount of trip contacts
• Integrated arc-options (point sensors) with BI/BO
• various possibilities with communication interfaces
The VAMP 300 IED has good protection against harsh environments.
Protective level is IP54.
The VAMP 300F IED includes all the feeder and VAMP 300M all the
motor protection protection functions in one unit.
2.3 Local HMI

This device has 128 x 64 LCD matrix display.
Figure 2.4: VAMP 300 local HMI 128 x 64
16 V300/en M/A002
2 Introduction 2.3 Local HMI
1 Power LED and seven programmable LEDs

2 CANCEL push-button
3 Navigation push-buttons
4 LCD
5 INFO push-button
6 Status LED and seven programmable LEDs
7 Function push-buttons and LEDs showing their status
8 Local port
9 Object control buttons
Push-buttons
Symbol Function
CANCEL push-button for returning to the previous menu. To return to the
first menu item in the main menu, press the button for at least three seconds.
INFO push-button for viewing additional information, for entering the pass-
word view and for adjusting the LCD contrast.
Programmable function push-button.
Programmable function push-button.
ENTER push-button for activating or confirming a function.
UP navigation push-button for moving up in the menu or increasing a numer-

ical value.
DOWN navigation push-button for moving down in the menu or decreasing
a numerical value.
LEFT navigation push-button for moving backwards in a parallel menu or
selecting a digit in a numerical value.
RIGHT navigation push-button for moving forwards in a parallel menu or
selecting a digit in a numerical value.
Object close push-button
Object open push-button
LEDs
The LEDs on the local HMI can be configured in VAMPSET.
To customise the LED texts on the local HMI, the texts can be written
on a template and then printed on a transparency. The transparencies
can be placed to the pockets beside the LEDs.
Enter password
1.
On the local HMI, push and .
2. Enter the four-digit password and push .
V300/en M/A002 17
2.3 Local HMI 2 Introduction
Adjusting LCD contrast (while correct password is enabled)

1.
Push and adjust the contrast.
• To increase the contrast, push .
• To decrease the contrast, push .
2.
To return to the main menu, push .
Release all latches (while correct password is enabled)
1.
Push .
• To release the latches, press .
• To release choose “Release” parameter and press .
Control object (while password and selective control is enabled)

When selective control is enabled, control operation needs
confirmation (select-execute)
1.
Push to close object.
•
Push again to confirm.
•
Push to cancel.
2.
Push to open object.
•
Push again to confirm.
•
Push to cancel.
Control object (while password and direct control is enabled)

When direct control is enabled, control operation is done without
confirmation
1.
2.
Push to open object.
18 V300/en M/A002
2 Introduction 2.3 Local HMI
Moving in the menus
Main menu Submenus
ARC Arc protection settings
OK
I pick-up setting
OK OK
Figure 2.5: Moving in menus using local HMI
• To move in the main menu, push or .

• To move in submenus, push or .
• To enter a submenu, push and use or for moving
down or up in the menu.
•
To edit a parameter value, push and . Give the four-digit
password and push
•
To go back to the previous menu, push .
•
To go back to the first menu item in the main menu, push for
at least three seconds.
NOTE: To enter the parameter edit mode, give the password. When the
value is in edit mode, its background is dark.
V300/en M/A002 19
2.4 VAMPSET setting and configuration tool 2 Introduction
2.4 VAMPSET setting and configuration tool

VAMPSET is a software tool for setting and configuring the Vamp
IEDs. VAMPSET has a graphical interface, and the created
documents can be saved and printed out for later use.
To use VAMPSET, you need
• PC with Windows XP (or newer) operating system installed
• VX052 or equivalent USB cable for connecting the IED to the
PC (USB-cable provided by VAMP is recommended)
• Experience in using the Windows operating system
Download the latest VAMPSET version at
www.schneider-electric.com.
2.5 Configuring the system with VAMPSET

Before configuring the arc flash protection system, you need
• PC with adequate user rights
• VAMPSET setting and configuration tool downloaded to the PC
• USB cable (VX052) for connecting the IED with the PC
2.5.1 Setting up the communication

NOTE: If several IEDs are connected to a ARC I/O bus, set only one to
master mode and the others to slave mode.
• Connect the USB cable between the PC and the local port of the
IED.
Defining the PC serial port settings
NOTE: Ensure that the communication port setting on the PC corresponds

to the IED setting.
1. Open the Device Manager on the PC and check the USB Serial
Port number (COM) for the IED.
2. Open the VAMPSET setting and configuration tool on the PC.
3. On the VAMPSET Settings menu, select Communication
Settings.
4. Select the correct port under the Port area and click Apply.
20 V300/en M/A002
2 Introduction 2.5 Configuring the system with VAMPSET
Defining the VAMPSET communication settings

1. On the local HMI, go to the CONF/ DEVICE SETUP menu and
check the local port bit rate.
2. On the VAMPSET Settings menu, select Communication
Settings.
3. Under the Local area, select the corresponding speed (bps) from
the drop-down list and click Apply.
4. In VAMPSET Settings menu, select Program Settings.
NOTE: If faster operation is needed, change the speed to 187500 bps both
in VAMPSET and in the IED.
Connecting the IED

1. On the VAMPSET Communication menu, select Connect
Device.
2. Enter the password and click Apply. VAMPSET connects to the
device.
NOTE: The default password for the configurator is 2.
2.5.2 Writing the settings to the IED

• In the VAMPSET Communication menu, select Write All
Settings To Device to download the configuration to the IED.
NOTE: To save the IED configuration information for later use, also save
the VAMPSET document file on the PC.
2.5.3 Saving the VAMPSET document file

Save the IED configuration information to the PC. The document file
is helpful for instance if you need help in troubleshooting.
1. Connect the IED to the PC with an USB cable.
2. Open the VAMPSET tool on the PC.
3. On the Communication menu, select Connect device.
4. Enter the configurator password. The IED configuration opens.
5. On the File menu, click Save as.
6. Type a descriptive file name, select the location for the file and
click Save.
NOTE: By default, the configuration file is saved in the VAMPSET folder.
V300/en M/A002 21
3 Mechanical structure
3 Mechanical structure
3.1 VAMP 300 IED modularity

The device has a modular structure. The device is built from hardware
modules, which are installed into 10 different slots at the back of the
device. The location of the slots is shown in the following figure.
The type of hardware modules is defined by the ordering code. A
minimum configuration is that there is a supply voltage card in slot
1 and an analogue measurement card in slot 8.
I
II
III
IV
I Card C 1 Supply voltage [V]

II Connector 2 2 I/O card I
III Pin 1 3...5 I/O cards II...IV
IV Protective grounding 6, 7 I/O option cards I and II
8 Analog measurement card (I, U)
9, 10 Communication interface I and II
Figure 3.1: Slot numbering and card options in the VAMP 300 rear panel and an
example of defining the pin address 1/C/2:1
NOTE: Slots 7 and 10 are not available.
For complete availability of different option cards please refer

Chapter 13 Order information.
Chapter 10 Connections has detailed information of each card.
22 V300/en M/A002
3 Mechanical structure 3.1 VAMP 300 IED modularity
Table 3.1: VAMP 300F CBGAA-AAAAA-A1

SLOT NAME TYPE
Application F = Feeder (Slot 8: HW = A, B, C or D)
1 Supply voltage C = 110 .. 240 Vac/dc (6 x DO: 1 change over
signal duty and 5 tripping duty)
2 I/O card I B = 3BIO+2Arc (3 x BI/BO, 2 x Arc sensor, T2,
T3, T4)
3 I/O card II G = 6DI+4DO (6 x DI, 4 x DO)
4 I/O card III A = None
5 I/O card IV A = None
6 Option card I A = None
7 Future option A = None
8 Analog measurement card A = 3L+U+Io (5/1A)
(See application)
9 Communication interface I A = None
10 Future option A = None
Display type A = 128x64 (128 x 64 LCD matrix)
DI nominal voltage 1 = 24 VDC / 110 VAC
V300/en M/A002 23
3.2 Slot info and ordering code 3 Mechanical structure
3.2 Slot info and ordering code

The configuration of the device can be checked from local HMI or
VAMPSET menu called “Slot” or “SLOT INFO”. This contains “Card
ID” which is the name of the card used by the device firmware.
Figure 3.2: Hardware configuration example view from VAMPSET-configuration

tool.
NOTE: See Chapter 13 Order information to order a certain type of IED.
An example: User wants to have a feeder protection IED with 8 trip

contacts, 6 digital inputs, Arc -protection and fibre communication
with IEC 61850 protocol. Following order code fulfils the
requirements:
This IED now includes total of 8 output contacts, alarm contact, SF

contact, 6 digital inputs, communication interface for IEC 61850
protocol and suitable functionality for feeder protection.
24 V300/en M/A002
4 Measurement functions
4 Measurement functions
4.1 Measurements for protection functions
Current (PU)
Load = 0%
100
rms f2/f1 (%)

5 f1 50
Relative 2nd harmoic f2/f1 (%)

f2
0 0
-5
IL2
-10
0.00 0.05 0.10 0.15 0.20 0.25 0.30

Time (s)
Figure 4.1: Example of various current values of a transformer inrush current.
All the direct measurements are based on fundamental frequency

values. The exceptions are frequency and instantaneous current for
arc protection. Most protection functions are also based on the
fundamental frequency values.
The figure shows a current waveform and the corresponding
fundamental frequency component f1, second harmonic f2 and rms
value in a special case, when the current deviates significantly from
a pure sine wave.
V300/en M/A002 25
4.2 Measurements for arc protection function 4 Measurement functions
4.2 Measurements for arc protection

function
The three phase current measurement and earth-fault current
measurement for arc protection is done with electronics (see figure).
The electronics compares the current levels to the pick-up settings
- THRESHOLDs - and gives a binary signals “I>” or “I01>” to the arc
protection function if limit is exceeded. All the frequency components
of the currents are taken into account.
Signals “I>” or “I01>” are connected to a FPGA chip which implements
the arc protection function. The pick-up settings are named “I> int”
and “I01> int” in the local LCD panel or VAMPSET views, these
settings are used to set the THRESHOLD levels for the electronics.
The accuracy of the arc protection measurements is as follows:
• Under nominal current: 2.5% (1 of nominal
• Over nominal current: 2.5% (1 of measured/injected value
(1 From firmware 10.xxx onwards. Before that accuracy was 5%.
Figure 4.2: Measurement logic for the arc flash protection function.
26 V300/en M/A002
4 Measurement functions 4.3 Measurement accuracy
4.3 Measurement accuracy

Table 4.1: Phase current inputs IL1, IL2, IL3
Measuring range 0.05 – 250 A
Inaccuracy: -
I ≤ 7.5 A 0.5 % of value or 15 mA
I > 7.5 A 3 % of value

The specified frequency range is 45 Hz – 65 Hz.
Table 4.2: Voltage input U

Measuring range 0.5 – 185 V
Inaccuracy 0.5 % or 0.3 V
Table 4.3: Voltage input U0 / U4

Measuring range 0.5 – 175 V
Inaccuracy 0.5 % or 0.3 V
Table 4.4: Residual current input I0

Measuring range 0.003 – 5 x IN
Inaccuracy: -
I ≤ 1.5 xIN 0.3 % of value or 0.2 % of IN
I > 1.5 xIN 3 % of value

The rated input IN is 5A, 1 A or 0.2 A. It is specified in the order code of the relay.
Table 4.5: Frequency

Measuring range 16 Hz – 75 Hz
Inaccuracy 10 mHz
The frequency is measured from voltage signals when least four voltages are measured.
With only one voltage (F&I) the frequency is measured from currents.
Table 4.6: THD and harmonics

Inaccuracy I, U > 0.1 PU 2 % units
Update rate Once a second
NOTE: These measurement accuracies are only valid for the user interface
and communication.
V300/en M/A002 27
4.4 RMS values 4 Measurement functions
4.4 RMS values

RMS currents
The device calculates the RMS value of each phase current. The
minimum and the maximum of RMS values are recorded and stored
(Chapter 4.7 Minimum and maximum values).
2 2 2
I RMS = I f 1 + I f 2 + ... + I f 15
RMS voltages
The device calculates the RMS value of each voltage input. The
minimum and the maximum of RMS values are recorded and stored
(Chapter 4.7 Minimum and maximum values).
2 2 2
U RMS = U f 1 + U f 2 + ... + U f 15
4.5 Harmonics and Total Harmonic

Distortion (THD)
The device calculates the THDs as percentage of the base frequency
for currents and voltages.
The device calculates the harmonics from the 2nd to the 15th of phase
currents and voltages. (The 17th harmonic component will also be
shown partly in the value of the 15th harmonic component. This is
due to the nature of digital sampling.)
The harmonic distortion is calculated using equation
15
h1 = Fundamental value
∑h i
2
THD = i =2 h2...15 = Harmonics

h1
Example
h1 = 100 A, h3 = 10 A, h7 = 3 A, h11 = 8 A
10 2 + 3 2 + 8 2
THD = = 13.2%
100
For reference the RMS value is
RMS = 100 2 + 10 2 + 3 2 + 8 2 = 100.9 A
Another way to calculate THD is to use the RMS value as reference

instead of the fundamental frequency value. In the example above
the result would then be 13.0 %.
28 V300/en M/A002
4 Measurement functions 4.6 Demand values
4.6 Demand values

The relay calculates average i.e. demand values of phase currents
IL1, IL2, IL3 and power values S, P and Q.
The demand time is configurable from 10 minutes to 60 minutes with
parameter "Demand time".
Figure 4.3: Demand values
Table 4.7: Demand value parameters

Parameter Value Unit Description Set
Time 10 ... 30 min Demand time (averaging time) Set
Fundamental frequency values
IL1da A Demand of phase current IL1
Pda kW Demand of active power P
PFda Demand of power factor PF
Qda kvar Demand of reactive power Q
Sda kVA Demand of apparent power S
V300/en M/A002 29
4.7 Minimum and maximum values 4 Measurement functions

RMS values
IL1RMSda A Demand of RMS phase current IL1
Prmsda kW Demand of RMS active power P
Qrmsda kvar Demand of RMS reactive power Q
Srmsda kVA Demand of RMS apparent power S
4.7 Minimum and maximum values

Minimum and maximum values are registered with time stamps since
the latest manual clearing or since the device has been restarted.
The available registered min & max values are listed in the following
table.
Figure 4.4: Minimun and maximum values
30 V300/en M/A002
4 Measurement functions 4.7 Minimum and maximum values
Min & Max measurement Description

IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase current (fundamental frequency value)
IL1RMS, IL2RMS, IL3RMS Phase current, rms value
Io1 , Io2 Residual current
UA, UB, UC, UD Voltages, fundamental frequency values
UARMS, UBRMS, UCRMS, UDRMS Voltages, RMS value
f Frequency
P, Q, S Active, reactive, apparent power
P.F. Power factor
The clearing parameter "ClrMax" is common for all these values.

Table 4.8: Parameters
Parameter Value Description Set
ClrMax - Reset all minimum and maximum values S
Clear
V300/en M/A002 31
4.8 Maximum values of the last 31 days and twelve months 4 Measurement functions
4.8 Maximum values of the last 31 days and

twelve months
Some maximum and minimum values of the last 31 days and the
last twelve months are stored in the non-volatile memory of the relay.
Corresponding time stamps are stored for the last 31 days. The
registered values are listed in the following table.
Figure 4.5: Past 31 days and 12 month maximums/minimums can be viewed in

“month max” menu.
Measurement Max Min Description

IL1, IL2, IL3 X Phase current (fundamental frequency value)
Io1, Io2 X Residual current
S X Apparent power
P X X Active power
Q X X Reactive power
Timebase can be a value from one cycle to one minute. Also demand
value can be used as timebase and its value can be set between 10
- 60 minutes. Demand value menu is located under the “logs” leaflet
-> demand values.
Table 4.9: Parameters of the day and month registers
Parameter Value Description Set
Timebase Parameter to select the type of the registered values. S
20 ms Collect min & max of one cycle values *)
200 ms Collect min & max of 200 ms average values
1s Collect min & max of 1 s average values
1 min Collect min & max of 1 minute average values
demand Collect min & max of demand values (Chapter 4.6 Demand values)
ResetDays Reset the 31 day registers S
ResetMon Reset the 12 month registers S
*) This is the fundamental frequency rms value of one cycle updated every 20 ms.
32 V300/en M/A002
4 Measurement functions 4.9 Voltage measurement modes
4.9 Voltage measurement modes
4.9.1 Single channel voltage measurement

The following applies to order option "A" in slot 8.
A = 3L+U+Io (5/1 A)
Depending on the application and available voltage transformers,
the relay can be connected either to zero-sequence voltage, one
line-to-line voltage or one phase-to-ground voltage. The configuration
parameter "Voltage measurement mode" must be set according the
used connection.
L1 L2 L3
U0
8/A/1:
10
The device is connected to zero se-
"Uo" quence voltage. Directional earth
11
fault protection is available. Line
voltage measurement, energy
measurement and over- and under-
voltage protection are not possible.
Figure 4.6: Broken delta connection “U0”.
L1 L2 L3
LL
8/A/1:
10
11
The device is connected to one line-
"1LL" to-line voltage. Single phase voltage
measurement and over- and under-
voltage protection are available.
Directional earth fault protection is
not possible.
Figure 4.7: Line-to-line voltage “1LL”.
V300/en M/A002 33
4.9 Voltage measurement modes 4 Measurement functions
L1 L2 L3
LN
8/A/1:
10 The device is connected to one
11 "1LN" phase-to-ground voltage. Single
phase voltage measurement is
available. In low impedance groun-
ded networks over- and under-
voltage protection are available.
Directional earth fault protection is
not possible.
Figure 4.8: Phase-to-neutral voltage “1LN”.
4.9.2 Multiple channel voltage measurement

The slot 8 can accommodate four different analogue measurement
cards.
Model A has only one voltage input where as models B, C and D
have four voltage measurement channels.
• B = 3L+4U+Io (5/1 A)
• C = 3L+4U+2Io (5+1 A)
• D = 3L+4U+2Io (1+0.2 A)
3LN
• Voltages measured by VTs:
UL1, UL2, UL3
• Values calculated: UL12, UL23,
UL31, U1, U2, U2/U1, f, Uo
8B2 : 1...6
8C2 : 1...6 • Measurements available: All
8D2 : 1...6
• Protection functions available:
1 UL1 (a)
2 UL1 (n) All
3 UL2 (a)
4 UL2 (n)
5 UL3 (a)
6 UL3 (n)
3LN
34 V300/en M/A002
UL1
UL2 8/C/1 : 11...12 3LN+U0
UL3 8/D/1 : 11...12
This connection is typically used for

feeder and motor protection
schemes.
11 Uo (da) • Voltages measured by VTs:
12 Uo (dn) UL1, UL2, UL3, Uo
8/C/2 : 1...6 • Values calculated: UL12, UL23,
8/D/2 : 1...6
UL31, U1, U2, U2/U1, f
1 UL1 (a)
2 UL1 (n) • Measurements available: All
3 UL2 (a)
4 UL2 (n) • Protection functions available:
5 UL3 (a)
V 3LN + Uo
6 UL3 (n) All
UL1
UL2 8/C/1 : 11...12
UL3 8/D/1 : 11...12
3LN+LLy
Connection of voltage transformers
for synchrocheck application. The
other side of the CB has line-to-line
connection for reference voltage.
11 UL12 (a) • Voltages measured by VTs:
12 UL12 (b)
UL1, UL2, UL3, UL12y
8/C/2 : 1...6 • Values calculated: UL12, UL23,
8/D/2 : 1...6
UL31, Uo, U1, U2, U2/U1, f
1 UL1 (a)
2 UL1 (n) • Measurements available: All
3 UL2 (a)
4 UL2 (n) • Protection functions available:
5 UL3 (a)
V 3LN + LLy
6 UL3 (n) All
V300/en M/A002 35
Slot 8
8/C1 : 1...12
8/D1 : 1...12
1 IL1 (S1)
2 IL1 (S2)
3 IL2 (S1)
4 IL2 (S2)
5 IL3 (S1)
6 IL3 (S2)
7
8
I01
I01
3LN+LNy
9 I02
10
11
I02
U4 UL1 (a)
This connection is typically used for
12 U4
8C2 : 1...6
UL1 (n)
feeder protection scheme where
8D2 : 1...6
1 UL1 (a)
line-to-neutral voltage is required for
2
3
UL1
UL2
(n)
(a)
synchrocheck application.
4 UL2 (n)
6 UL3 (n)
UL1, UL2, UL3, UL1y
UL31, Uo, U1, U2, U2/U1, f
• Measurements available: All
All
UL1
UL2 2LL+U0
UL3
Connection of two line-to-line and
residual voltage measurement
scheme.
UL12, UL23, Uo
8/C/2 : 1...6
8/D/2 : 1...6 • Values calculated: UL31, UL1,
1 UL12 (a) UL2, UL3, U1, U2, U2/U1, f
2 UL12 (b)
3 UL23 (a) • Measurements available: All
4 UL23 (b)
5 Uo (da) • Protection functions available:
6 Uo (dn)
V 2LL + Uo All
36 V300/en M/A002
UL1 2LL+U0+LLy
UL2 8/C/1 : 11...12
UL3 8/D/1 : 11...12 Connection of two line-to-line and
residual voltage scheme. Line-to-line
reference voltage is taken from other
side of the CB for synchrocheck
scheme.
11 UL12 (a)
12 UL12 (b) • Voltages measured by VTs:
8/C/2 : 1...6 UL12, UL23, Uo, UL12y
8/D/2 : 1...6
1 UL12 (a)
2 UL12 (b) UL2, UL3, U1, U2, U2/U1, f
3 UL23 (a)
• Measurements available: All
4 UL23 (b)
5 Uo (da)
6 Uo (dn) • Protection functions available:
V 2LL + Uo + LLy
All
UL1
UL2 8/C/1 : 11...12
2LL+U0+LNy
UL3 8/D/1 : 11...12
Connection of two line-to-line and
residual voltage scheme. The other
side of the CB has phase-to-neutral
connection for synchrocheck.
12 UL1 (b)
UL12, UL23, Uo, UL1y
8/C/2 : 1...6
8/D/2 : 1...6 • Values calculated: UL31, UL1,
1 UL12 (a) UL2, UL3, U1, U2, U2/U1, f
2 UL12 (b)
3 UL23 (a) • Measurements available: All
4 UL23 (b)
5 Uo (da) • Protection functions available:
6 Uo (dn)
V 2LL + Uo + LNy All
V300/en M/A002 37
LL+U0+LLy+LLz
UL1
UL2 8/C/1 : 11...12 This scheme has two CBs to be
UL3 8/D/1 : 11...12 synchronized. Left side of the bus
bar has line-to-line and right side
line-to-line connection for syn-
chrocheck's reference voltages. In
the middle system voltages are
measured by phase-to-neutral and
11 UL12 (a)
12 UL12 (b) open delta connection.
8/C/2 : 1...6
8/D/2 : 1...6 UL12, Uo, UL12y, UL12z
1 UL12 (a) • Values calculated: UL1, UL2,
2 UL12 (b)
3 UL12 (a) UL3, f
4 UL12 (b)
5 Uo (da) • Measurements available: -
V LL + Uo + LLy + LLz 6 Uo (dn)
Single phase voltage protection
LN+U0+LNy+LNz
UL1
UL2 8/C/1 : 11...12 This scheme has two CBs to be
UL3 8/D/1 : 11...12 synchronized. Left and right sides of
the bus bar have line-to-neutral
connections for synchrocheck's ref-
erence voltages. In the middle sys-
tem voltages are measured by
phase-to-neutral and open delta
11 UL1 (a)
12 UL1 (n) connection.
8/C/2 : 1...6
8/D/2 : 1...6 UL+Uo+ULy+ULz
1 UL1 (a) • Values calculated: UL12, UL23,
2 UL1 (n)
3 UL1 (a) UL31, f
4 UL1 (n)
5 Uo (da) • Measurements available: -
V LN + Uo + LNy + LNz 6 Uo (dn)
Single phase voltage protection
38 V300/en M/A002
4 Measurement functions 4.10 Direction of power and current
4.10 Direction of power and current

Figure 4.9 shows the concept of three phase current direction and
sign of cosφ and power factor PF. Figure 4.10 shows the same
concepts, but on a PQ-power plane.
+90°
II I
ind +cap
cos = cos = +
PF = + PF = I: Forward capacitive power current is leading
V REF 0°
II: Reverse inductive power current is leading
III I IV
III: Reverse capacitive power current is lagging
cap +ind
IV: Forward inductive power current is lagging
cos = cos = +
PF = PF = +
Figure 4.9: Quadrants of voltage/current phasor plane
Q
+90°
II cap +ind I
cos = cos = +
PF = PF = +
I: Forward inductive power current is lagging
S
II: Reverse capacitive power current is lagging
P 0°
III IV III: Reverse inductive power current is leading
ind +cap
IV: Forward capacitive power current is leading
cos = cos = +
PF = + PF =
Figure 4.10: Quadrants of power plane
Table 4.10: Power quadrants

Power quadrant Current related Power direction cosφ Power factor
to voltage PF
+ inductive Lagging Forward + +
+ capacitive Leading Forward + -
- inductive Leading Reverse - +
- capacitive Lagging Reverse - -
V300/en M/A002 39
4.11 Symmetric components 4 Measurement functions
4.11 Symmetric components

In a three phase system, the voltage or current phasors may be
divided in symmetric components according C. L. Fortescue (1918).
The symmetric components are:
• Positive sequence 1
• Negative sequence 2
• Zero sequence 0
Symmetric components are calculated according the following
equations:
S 0  1 1 1  U 
 S  = 1 1 a a   V 
2
 1 3
 S 2  1 a 2 a  W 
S0 = zero sequence component

S1 = positive sequence component
S2 = negative sequence component
1 3
a = 1∠120° = − + j
2 2 , a phasor rotating constant
U = phasor of phase L1 (phase current)
V = phasor of phase L2
W = phasor of phase L3
40 V300/en M/A002
4 Measurement functions 4.12 Primary secondary and per unit scaling
4.12 Primary secondary and per unit scaling

Many measurement values are shown as primary values although
the relay is connected to secondary signals. Some measurement
values are shown as relative values - per unit or per cent. Almost all
pick-up setting values are using relative scaling.
The scaling is done using the given CT, VT in feeder mode and
furthermore motor name plate values in motor mode.
The following scaling equations are useful when doing secondary
testing.
4.12.1 Current scaling

NOTE: The rated value of the device's current input, for example 5 A or 1A,
does not have any effect in the scaling equations, but it defines the
measurement range and the maximum allowed continuous current.
See Chapter 11.1.1 Measuring circuits for details.
Primary and secondary scaling

Current scaling
secondary → primary
CTPRI
I PRI = I SEC ⋅
CTSEC
primary → secondary
CTSEC
I SEC = I PRI ⋅
CTPRI
For residual current to input I01 use the corresponding CTPRI and
CTSEC values. For earth fault stages using I0Calc signals use the
phase current CT values for CTPRI and CTSEC.
Examples:
1. Secondary to primary
CT = 500/5
Current to the relay's input is 4 A.
=> Primary current is IPRI = 4x500/5 = 400 A
2. Primary to secondary
CT = 500/5
The relay displays IPRI = 400 A
=> Injected current is ISEC = 400x5/500 = 4 A
V300/en M/A002 41
4.12 Primary secondary and per unit scaling 4 Measurement functions
Per unit [pu] scaling

For phase currents excluding ArcI> stage
1 pu = 1xIMODE = 100 %, where
IMODE is the rated current according to the mode. See Chapter 1.6
Abbreviations
For residual currents and ArcI> stage
1 pu = 1xCTSEC for secondary side and 1 pu = 1xCTPRI for primary
side.
Phase current scaling excluding ArcI> stage Residual current (3I0) scaling and phase
current scaling for ArcI> stage
secondary → per unit
I SEC ⋅ CTPRI I SEC
I PU = I PU =
CTSEC ⋅ I MODE CTSEC
per unit → secondary
I MODE I SEC = I PU ⋅ CTSEC
I SEC = I PU ⋅ CTSEC ⋅
CTPRI
Examples:
1. Secondary to per unit for ArcI>
CT = 750/5
Current injected to the relay's inputs is 7 A.
=> Per unit current is IPU = 7/5 = 1.4 pu = 140 %
2. Secondary to per unit for phase currents excluding ArcI>
CT = 750/5
IMODE = 525 A
Current injected to the relay's inputs is 7 A.
=> Per unit current is IPU = 7x750/(5x525) = 2.00 pu = 2.00 xIMODE
= 200 %
3. Per unit to secondary for ArcI>
CT = 750/5
The device setting is 2 pu = 200 %.
=> Secondary current is ISEC = 2x5 = 10 A
42 V300/en M/A002
4. Per unit to secondary for phase currents excluding ArcI>

CT = 750/5
IMODE = 525 A
The relay setting is 2xIMODE = 2 pu = 200 %.
=> Secondary current is ISEC = 2x5x525/750 = 7 A
5. Secondary to per unit for residual current
Input is I01.
CT0 = 50/1
Current injected to the relay's input is 30 mA.
=> Per unit current is IPU = 0.03/1 = 0.03 pu = 3 %
6. Per unit to secondary for residual current
Input is I01.
CT0 = 50/1
The relay setting is 0.03 pu = 3 %.
=> Secondary current is ISEC = 0.03x1 = 30 mA
7. Secondary to per unit for residual current
Input is I0Calc.
CT = 750/5
Currents injected to the relay's IL1 input is 0.5 A.
IL2 = IL3 = 0.
=> Per unit current is IPU = 0.5/5 = 0.1 pu = 10 %
8. Per unit to secondary for residual current
Input is I0Calc.
CT = 750/5
The relay setting is 0.1 pu = 10 %.
=> If IL2 = IL3 = 0, then secondary current to IL1 is
ISEC = 0.1x5 = 0.5 A
V300/en M/A002 43
4.12.2 Voltage scaling for analogue module A

Primary/secondary scaling of line-to-line voltages
Line-to-line voltage scaling
Voltage measurement mode = "1LL" Voltage measurement mode = "1LN"
VTPRI VTPRI
U PRI = U SEC ⋅ U PRI = 3 ⋅ U SEC ⋅
VTSEC VTSEC
VTSEC U PRI VTSEC
U SEC = U PRI ⋅ U SEC = ⋅
VTPRI 3 VTPRI
Examples:
1. Secondary to primary. Voltage measurement mode is "1LL".
VT = 12000/110
Voltage connected to the relay's input is 100 V.
=> Primary voltage is UPRI = 100x12000/110 = 10909 V.
2. Secondary to primary. Voltage measurement mode is "1LN".
VT = 12000/110
The voltage connected to the relay's input is 57.7 V.
=> Primary voltage is UPRI = 3 x58x12000/110 = 10902 V
3. Primary to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "1LL".
VT = 12000/110
The relay displays UPRI = 10910 V.
=> Secondary voltage is USEC = 10910x110/12000 = 100 V
4. Primary to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "1LN".
VT = 12000/110
The relay displays U12 = U23 = U31 = 10910 V.
=> Secondary voltage is USEC = 10910/ 3 x110/12000 = 57.7
V.
44 V300/en M/A002
Per unit [pu] scaling of line-to-line voltages

One per unit = 1 pu = 1xUN = 100 %, where UN = rated voltage of
the VT.
Voltage measurement mode = "1LL" Voltage measurement mode = "1LN"
U SEC U SEC
U PU = U PU = 3 ⋅
VTSEC VTSEC
U SEC = U PU ⋅ VTSEC VTSEC
U SEC = U PU ⋅
3
Examples:
1. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "1LL".
VT = 12000/110
UN = VTPRI
Voltage connected to the relay's input is 110 V.
=>Per unit voltage is UPU = 110/110 = 1.00 pu = 1.00xUMODE =
100 %
2. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "1LN".
VT = 12000/110
Phase-to-neutral voltage connected to the relay's input is 63.5
V.
=> Per unit voltage is UPU = 3 x63.5/110x12000/11000 = 1.00
pu = 1.00xUN = 100 %
3. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "1LL".
VT = 12000/110
The relay displays 1.00 pu = 100 %.
=> Secondary voltage is USEC = 1.00x110x11000/12000 = 100.8
V
4. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "1LN".
VT = 12000/110
=> Phase-to-neutral voltage connected to the relay's input is
USEC = 1.00x110/ 3 x11000/12000 = 63.5 V
V300/en M/A002 45
Per unit [pu] scaling of zero sequence voltage

Zero-sequence voltage (U0) scaling
Voltage measurement mode = "U0"
secondary ->per unit
U SEC
U PU =
U 0 SEC
per unit -> secondary
U SEC = U PU ⋅ U 0 SEC
Examples:
1. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "U0".
U0SEC = 110 V (This is a configuration value corresponding to
U0 at full earth fault.)
Voltage connected to the device's input UC is 22 V.
=> Per unit voltage is UPU = 22/110 = 0.20 pu = 20 %
4.12.3 Voltage scaling for analogue module B, C, D

Primary/secondary scaling of line-to-line voltages
Voltage measurement mode = "2LL+U0" Voltage measurement mode = "3LN"
VTPRI VTPRI
U PRI = U SEC ⋅ U PRI = 3 ⋅ U SEC ⋅
VTSEC VTSEC
VTSEC U PRI VTSEC
U SEC = U PRI ⋅ U SEC = ⋅
VTPRI 3 VTPRI
Examples:
1. Secondary to primary. Voltage measurement mode is
"2LL+U0"
VT = 12000/110
Voltage connected to the device's input UA or UB is 100 V.
=> Primary voltage is UPRI = 100x12000/110 = 10909 V.
2. Secondary to primary. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN
VT = 12000/110
Three phase symmetric voltages connected to the device's inputs
UA, UB and UC are 57.7 V.
=> Primary voltage is UPRI = 3 x58x12000/110 = 10902 V
3. Primary to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is
"2LL+U0"
VT = 12000/110
The relay displays UPRI = 10910 V.
=> Secondary voltage is USEC = 10910x110/12000 = 100 V
46 V300/en M/A002
4. Primary to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN

VT = 12000/110
The relay displays U12 = U23 = U31 = 10910 V.
=> Symmetric secondary voltages at UA, UB and UC are USEC =
10910/ 3 x110/12000 = 57.7 V.
Per unit [pu] scaling of line-to-line voltages
One per unit = 1 pu = 1xUN = 100 %, where UN = rated voltage of
the VT.
Voltage measurement mode = "2LL+U0", Voltage measurement mode = "3LN"
"1LL+U0/LLy", "2LL/LLy", "LL/LLy/LLz"
U SEC VTPRI U SEC VTPRI
U PU = ⋅ U PU = 3 ⋅ ⋅
VTSEC U N VTSEC U N
UN VTSEC UN
U SEC = U PU ⋅ VTSEC ⋅ U SEC = U PU ⋅ ⋅
VTPRI 3 VTPRI
Examples:
1. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is
"2LL+U0"
VT = 12000/110
Voltage connected to the device's input UA or UB is 110 V.
=> Per unit voltage is UPU = 110/110 = 1.00 pu = 1.00xUN = 100
%
2. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN"
VT = 12000/110
Three symmetric phase-to-neutral voltages connected to the
device's inputs UA, UB and UC are 63.5 V
=> Per unit voltage is UPU = 3 x63.5/110x12000/11000 = 1.00
pu = 1.00xUN = 100 %
3. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is
"2LL+U0"
VT = 12000/110
=> Secondary voltage is USEC = 1.00x110x11000/12000 = 100.8
V
4. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN"
VT = 12000/110
UN = 11000 V
=> Three symmetric phase-to-neutral voltages connected to the
device 's inputs UA,UB and UC are
USEC = 1.00x110/ 3 x11000/12000 = 58.2 V
V300/en M/A002 47
Per unit [pu] scaling of zero sequence voltage

Zero-sequence voltage (U0) scaling
Voltage measurement mode = "2LL+U0", Voltage measurement mode = "3LN"
"1LL+U0/LLy"
secondary -> per unit
U SEC U a +U b +U c
U PU = 1 SEC
U 0 SEC U PU = ⋅
VTSEC 3
per unit -> secondary
U SEC = U PU ⋅ U 0 SEC U a +U b +U c = 3 ⋅ U PU ⋅ VTSEC
SEC
Examples:
1. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is
"2LL+U0"
Voltage connected to the device's input UC is 22 V.
=> Per unit voltage is UPU = 22/110 = 0.20 pu = 20 %
2. Secondary to per unit. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN"
VT = 12000/110
Voltage connected to the device's input UA is 38.1 V, while
UA = UB = 0.
=> Per unit voltage is UPU = (38.1+0+0)/( 3 x110) = 0.20 pu = 20
%
3. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is
"2LL+U0"
The device displays U0 = 20 %.
=> Secondary voltage at input UC is USEC = 0.20x110 = 22 V
4. Per unit to secondary. Voltage measurement mode is "3LN"
VT = 12000/110
The device displays U0 = 20 %.
=> If UB = UC = 0, then secondary voltages at UA is
USEC = 3 x0.2x110 = 38.1 V
48 V300/en M/A002
5 Control functions
5 Control functions
5.1 Output relays

The output relays are also called digital outputs. Trip contacts can
be controlled by using relay output matrix or logic function. Also
forced control is possible. When using force controlling it has to be
first enabled in the “relays” menu.
The output relays are also called digital outputs. Any internal signal
can be connected to the output relays using "OUTPUT MATRIX"
and/or "ARC MATRIX - OUTPUT". An output relay can be configured
as latched or non-latched.
The position of the contact can be checked in “output matrix” and
“relays” menu. An output relay can be configured as latched or
non-latched. Latched relay contacts can be set free by pressing the
“enter” key or the IED or by releasing from VAMPSET setting tool.
The difference between trip contacts and alarm contacts is the DC
breaking capacity. The contacts are single pole single throw (SPST)
normal open type (NO), except alarm relay A1 which has change
over contact single pole double throw (SPDT).
In addition to this VAMP 300 has so called heavy duty outputs
available in power supply module C and D. See Chapter 11 Technical
data for more details.
Normally open contacts can be turned normally closed by using the
local HMI or Vampset. Anyhow normally closed contact will open
automatically when the auxiliary power of the IED is switched off.
Figure 5.2: Trip contacts can be assigned directly to

Figure 5.1: Trip contacts can be connected to protec- outputs of logical operators. Notice the difference
tion stages or other similar purpose in “output matrix” between latched and non-latched connection. Logic
menu. output will be assigned automatically in output matrix
as well when logic is built.
Trip contacts can be controlled by using relay output matrix or logic

function. Also forced control is possible. When using force controlling
it has to be first enabled in the “relays” menu.
V300/en M/A002 49
5.1 Output relays 5 Control functions
The position of the contact can be checked in “output matrix” and

“relays” menu. An output relay can be configured as latched or
non-latched. Latched relay contacts can be set free by by releasing
from VAMPSET setting tool or pressing the “releasing all latches”
on the IED. See pictures or instructions below.
Figure 5.4: Trip contact can be viewed, forced to oper-

ate in “relays” menu.
Figure 5.3: Latched output matrix signals released by

using VAMPSET setting tool.
Release all latches (while correct password is enabled)

1.
Push .
• To release the latches, press .
• To release choose “Release” parameter and press .
Every option card and slot has default numbering. Below is an
example of model Vamp 300F CGGII-AABAA-A1 showing default
numbering of DO.
User can change numbering of the following option cards - slot 2, 3,
4, 5: G, I. More information in Chapter 5.6 Matrix
Default digital output numbering is also shown in corresponding
vampset menus.
50 V300/en M/A002
5 Control functions 5.1 Output relays
1. T1, T9-12, A1, SF

2. T13-16
3. T17-20
1 2 3
Figure 5.5: Default numbering of model Vamp 300F CGGII-AABAA-A1
Power supply card outputs are not visible in 'relay config' menu
V300/en M/A002 51
5.2 Digital inputs 5 Control functions
Table 5.1: Parameters of output relays

Parameter Value Unit Description Note
T1 … Tx the 0 Status of trip output relay F
available para-
meter list de- 1
pends on the
number and type
of the I/O cards.
A1 0 Status of signal output relay F
1
SF 0 Status of the SF relay F
1 In Vampset it is called as "Service status

output"
Force On Force flag for output relay forcing for test Set
purposes. This is a common flag for all
Off output relays and protection stage status,
too. Any forced relay(s) and this flag are
automatically reset by a 5-minute timeout.
NAMES for OUTPUT RELAYS (editable with VAMPSET only)
Description String of max. 32 characters Names for DO on VAMPSET screens. Set
Default is
"Trip relay n", n=1... x or
"Signal relay n", n=1
Set = An editable parameter (password needed). F = Editable when force flag is on
5.2 Digital inputs

Digital inputs are available for control purposes. The number of
available inputs depends on the number and type of option cards.
The polarity – normal open (NO) / normal closed (NC – and a delay
can be configured according the application by using the local HMI
or Vampset.
Digital inputs can be used in many operations. The status of the input
can be checked in relay “output matrix” and “digital inputs” menu.
Digital inputs makes possible to change group, block/enable/disable
functions, to program logics, indicate object status etc.
The digital inputs do require an external control voltage (ac or dc).
Digital input will be activated after activation voltage exceeds.
Deactivation follows when the voltage drops below threshold limit.
Activation voltage level of digital inputs can be selected in order code
when such option cards are equipped. With special option cards the
activation/threshold voltage is firmware adjustable.
52 V300/en M/A002
5 Control functions 5.2 Digital inputs
Figure 5.6: Digital inputs can be connected to trip Figure 5.7: Digital inputs can be assigned directly to
contacts or other similar purpose in “output matrix” inputs/outputs of logical operators. Notice the difference
menu. between latched and non-latched connection. Logic
output will be assigned automatically in output matrix
as well when logic is built.
Figure 5.8: Digital inputs can be viewed, named and changed between NO/NC in
“Digital inputs” menu. In case that inputs are energized by using AC voltage “mode”
has to be selected as AC.
All essential information of digital inputs can be found from the same
location “digital inputs” menu. DI on/off events and alarm display
(pop-up) can be enabled and disabled in “digital inputs” menu.
Individual operation counters are located in the same menu as well.
Label and description texts can be edited with VAMPSET according
the application. Labels are the short parameter names used on the
local panel and descriptions are the longer names used by
VAMPSET.
Digital input activation thresholds are hardware selectable.
V300/en M/A002 53
5.2 Digital inputs 5 Control functions
Slot - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V300 - - A A -
DI nominal voltage
1 = 24 VDC / 110 VAC
2 = 110 VDC / 220 VAC
3 = 220 VDC
Figure 5.9: VAMP 300 IED order code.
Digital input delay determines the activation and de-activation delay

for the input. See picture below to indicate how DI behaves when
the delay is set to 1.0 seconds.
Figure 5.10: Digital inputs behaviour when delay is set to one second.
Table 5.2: Parameters of digital inputs

Mode DC Used voltage of digital inputs
Set
AC
Input DI1...DIx Number of digital input. The available parameter list
depends on the number and type of the I/O cards.
Slot 2...6 Card slot number where option card is installed.
State 0 Status of digital input 1...x.
1
Polarity NO For normal open contacts (NO). Active edge is 0 => 1
NC For normal closed contacts (NC) Set
Active edge is 1 => 0

Delay 0.00 ... 60.00 s Definite delay for both on and off transitions Set
On event On Active edge event enabled
Set
Off Active edge event disabled
Off event On Inactive edge event enabled
Set
Off Inactive edge event disabled
Alarm display no No pop-up display
Set
yes Alarm pop-up display is activated at active DI edge
Counters 0 ... 65535 Cumulative active edge counter (Set)
NAMES for DIGITAL INPUTS (editable with VAMPSET only)
Label String of max. 10 Short name for DIs on the local display
characters Set
Default is "DIn", n=1...
Description String of max. 32 Long name for DIs. Default is "Digital input n", n=1...
Set
characters
54 V300/en M/A002
5 Control functions 5.2 Digital inputs
Set = An editable parameter (password needed)
Every option card and slot has default numbering.

Below is an example of model Vamp 300F CGGII-AABAA-A1 showing
default numbering of DI.
User can change numbering of the following option cards - slot 2, 3,
4, 5: G, I. More information in Chapter 5.6 Matrix.
Default digital input numbering is also shown in corresponding
VAMPSET menus.
1. DI1-6
2. DI7-12
3. DI13-22
4. DI23-32
1 2 3 4
Figure 5.11: Default numbering of model Vamp 300F CGGII-AABAA-A1
V300/en M/A002 55
5.3 Binary inputs and outputs 5 Control functions
5.3 Binary inputs and outputs

Information from the arc protection function can be transmitted and/or
received through binary inputs (BI) and outputs (BO). The rated
voltage of these signals is 30 V dc when active. The input signal has
to be 18 … 250 V dc to be activated.
Binary inputs
The binary inputs (BI) can be used to get the light indication from
another IED to build selective arc protection systems. BI is a dry
input for 18 … 250 V dc signal. The connection of BI signals is
configured in the matrices of the arc flash protection function.
Binary output
The binary outputs (BO) can be used to give the light indication signal
or any other signal or signals to another IED's binary input to build
selective arc protection systems. BO is an internally wetted 30 Vdc
signal. The connection of BO signals is configured in the matrices
of the arc flash protection function.
56 V300/en M/A002
5 Control functions 5.4 Virtual inputs and outputs
5.4 Virtual inputs and outputs

There are virtual inputs and virtual outputs, which can in many places
be used like their hardware equivalents except that they are only
located in the memory of the device. The virtual inputs acts like
normal digital inputs. The state of the virtual input can be changed
from local display, communication bus and from VAMPSET. For
example setting groups can be changed using virtual inputs.
Virtual inputs can be used in many operations. The status of the
input can be checked in “output matrix” and “virtual inputs” menu.
Status is also visible on local mimic display if so selectec. Virtual
inputs can be selected to be operated trough function buttons F1
and F2, trough local mimic or simply by using the virtual input menu.
Virtual inputs makes possible to change group, block/enable/disable
functions, to program logics and other similar to digital inputs.
Activation and reset delay of input is approximately 5ms. See
specification below:
Table 5.3: Virtual input and output
Number of inputs 4
Number of outputs 6
Activation time < 5 ms
Reset time < 5 ms
Figure 5.12: Virtual inputs and ouputs can be used for

many purpose in “output matrix” -menu.
Figure 5.13: Virtual inputs and outputs can be assigned

directly to inputs/outputs of logical operators. Notice
the difference between latched and non-latched con-
nection.
INPUT SIGNALS > VIRTUAL INPUT

The virtual inputs do act like digital inputs, but there are no physical
contacts. These can be controlled via the local HMI and
communication protocols. Virtual inputs are shown in the output
matrix and the block matrix. Virtual inputs can be used with the user's
programmable logic and to change the active setting group etc.
V300/en M/A002 57
5.4 Virtual inputs and outputs 5 Control functions
Figure 5.14: Virtual inputs can be viewed, named and controlled in “Virtual inputs”
-menu.
Table 5.4: Parameters of virtual inputs

VI1 ... VI4 0 Status of virtual input
1
Events On Event enabling Set
Off
NAMES for VIRTUAL INPUTS (editable with VAMPSET only)
Label String of max. 10 charac- Short name for VIs on the local display Set
ters
Default is "VIn", n=1...4
Description String of max. 32 charac- Long name for VIs. Default is "Virtual input Set
ters n", n=1...4
58 V300/en M/A002
5 Control functions 5.4 Virtual inputs and outputs
OUTPUT SIGNALS > VIRTUAL OUTPUT

The virtual outputs do act like output relays, but there are no physical
contacts. Virtual outputs are shown in the output matrix and the block
matrix. Virtual outputs can be used with the user's programmable
logic and to change the active setting group etc.
Figure 5.15: Virtual Outputs can be viewed, named and force controlled in “Virtual
outputs” -menu. Virtual outputs menu is located under the “device menu” leaflet
-> output signals. Virtual output contacts are in “DO” -menu when 64 x 128 LCD
display is installed.
Table 5.5: Parameters of virtual outputs

VO1 ... VO6 0 Status of virtual output F
1
Events On Event enabling Set
Off
NAMES for VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (editable with VAMPSET only)
Label String of max. 10 charac- Short name for VOs on the local display Set
ters
Default is "VOn", n=1...6
Description String of max. 32 charac- Long name for VOs. Default is Set
ters
"Virtual output n", n=1...6
Set = An editable parameter (password needed). F = Editable when force flag is on
V300/en M/A002 59
5.5 LED names 5 Control functions
5.5 LED names

VAMP 300 IED has 18 LED:s on front. Two LEDs represents units
general status (On & ), two LED:s for function buttons (F1 & F2)
and 14 user configurable LED:s (A - N). When the IED is powered
the “ON” LED will lit as green. During normal use “Service” LED is
not active, it activates only when error occurs or the IED is not
operating correctly. Should this happen contact your local
representative for further guidance.
LED can lit either green or red.
ON Service
A B
C D
E F
G H
I J
K L
M N
F1 F2
Figure 5.16: VAMP 300 local panel LED:s
60 V300/en M/A002
5 Control functions 5.6 Matrix
5.6 Matrix
5.6.1 Output matrix

By means of the output matrix, the output signals of the various
protection stages, digital inputs, logic outputs and other internal
signals can be connected to the output relays, virtual outputs etc.
NOTE: For configuring the high-speed operations of the arc protection the
“ARC MATRIX – OUTPUT” must be used.
For ARC MATRIX description see Chapter 6.27 Arc flash protection
There are general purpose LED indicators – "A", "B", "C",….”N” –

available for customer-specific indications on the front panel. Their
usage is define in a separate LED MATRIX.
Furthermore there are two LED indicators specified for keys F1 and
F2. In addition, the triggering of the disturbance recorder (DR) and
virtual outputs are configurable in the output matrix.
An output relay or indicator LED can be configured as latched or
non-latched. A non-latched relay follows the controlling signal. A
latched relay remains activated although the controlling signal
releases.
There is a common "release latched" signal to release all the latched
relays. This release signal resets all the latched output relays and
indicators with CPU control. The reset signal can be given via a
digital input, via a keypad or through communication. Any digital
input can be used for resetting. The selection of the input is done
with the VAMPSET software under the menu "Release output matrix
latches". Under the same menu, the "Release latches" parameter
can be used for resetting.
Figure 5.17: Trip and alarm relays together with virtual outputs can be assigned
in output matrix. Also automatic triggering of disturbance recorder is done in output
matrix.
V300/en M/A002 61
5.6 Matrix 5 Control functions
5.6.2 Blocking matrix

By means of a blocking matrix, the operation of any protection stage
(except the arc protection stages) can be blocked. The blocking
signal can originate from the digital inputs or it can be a start or trip
signal from a protection stage or an output signal from the user's
programmable logic. In the Figure 5.18, an active blocking is indicated
with a black dot (•) in the crossing point of a blocking signal and the
signal to be blocked.
Figure 5.18: Blocking matrix and output matrix
NOTE: Blocking matrix can not be used to block the arc protection stages.
Figure 5.19: All protection stages (except Arc stages) can be blocked in block
matrix.
62 V300/en M/A002
5 Control functions 5.6 Matrix
5.6.3 LED matrix
Figure 5.20: LEDs will be assigned in the “LED matrix” -menu. It is not possible
to control LED:s directly with logics.
Normal connection
When connection is normal the assigned LED will be active when
the control signal is active. After deactivation, the LED will turn off.
LED activation and deactivation delay when controlled is
approximately 10ms.
Latched connection
Latched LED will activate when the control signal activates but will
remain lit even when the control signal deactivates. Latched LED’s
can be released by pressing enter key.
Blink Latched connection
When connection is “BlinkLatch” the assigned LED will be active and
blinking as long as control signal is active. After deactivation the LED
remains latched and blinking. Latch can be released by pressing
enter key. Latch sequence runs the way that LED is lit for 310ms
and then stays off for 90ms.
LED test sequence
In order to run LED test sequence, open user password first.
User can test the functionality of LED's if needed. To start the test
sequence, press "info" button and the " " on the local HMI. The
IED will test all the LED's functionality. The sequence can be started
in all main menu windows, except the very first one.
Inputs for LED’s can be assigned in LED matrix. All 14 LED’s can
be assigned as green or red. Connection can be normal, latched or
blink latched. Instead of mere protection stages there are lots of
functions those can be assigned to o output LED’s. See the table
below:
V300/en M/A002 63
5.6 Matrix 5 Control functions
Table 5.6: Inputs for LED’s A - N

Input LED mapping Latch Description Note
Protection, Arc and program- Led A…N Normal/ Latched/ Different type of protection stages can be Set
mable stages BlinkLatch assigned to LED's
green or red
Digital/Virtual inputs and Led A…N Normal/ Latched/ All different type of inputs can be assigned Set
function buttons BlinkLatch to LED's
green or red
Object open/close, object final Led A…N Normal/ Latched/ Information related to objects and object Set
trip and object failure informa- BlinkLatch control
tion green or red
Local control enabled Led A…N Normal/ Latched/ While remote/local state is selected as Set
BlinkLatch local the “local control enabled” is active
green or red
Logic output 1…20 Led A…N Normal/ Latched/ All logic outputs can be assigned to LED:s Set
BlinkLatch at the LED matrix
green or red
Manual control indication Led A…N Normal/ Latched/ Set
BlinkLatch
green or red
COM 1…5 comm. Led A…N Normal/ Latched/ Set
BlinkLatch
green or red
Setting error, seldiag alarm, Led A…N Normal/ Latched/ Set
pwd open and setting change BlinkLatch
green or red
GOOSE NI1…64 Led A…N Normal/ Latched/ Set
BlinkLatch
green or red
GOOSEERR1…16 Led A…N Normal/ Latched/ Set
BlinkLatch
green or red
Set = an editable parameter (password needed)
64 V300/en M/A002
5 Control functions 5.7 Controllable objects
5.7 Controllable objects

The device allows controlling of six objects, that is, circuit-breakers,
disconnectors and earthing switches. Controlling can be done by
"select-execute" or "direct control" principle.
The object block matrix and logic functions can be used to configure
interlocking for a safe controlling before the output pulse is issued.
The objects 1...6 are controllable while the objects 7...8 are only able
to show the status.
Controlling is possible by the following ways:
• through the local HMI
• through a remote communication
• through a digital input
• through the object control buttons
• through the function key
The connection of an object to specific output relays is done via an
output matrix (object 1-6 open output, object 1-6 close output). There
is also an output signal “Object failed”, which is activated if the control
of an object is not completed.
Object states
Each object has the following states:
Setting Value Description
Object state Undefined (00) Actual state of the object
Open
Close
Undefined (11)
Basic settings for controllable objects

Each controllable object has the following settings:
DI for ‘obj open’ None, any digital input, virtual input or virtual Open information
output
DI for ‘obj close’ Close information
DI for ‘obj ready’ Ready information
Max ctrl pulse length 0.02 … 600 s Pulse length for open and close commands
Completion timeout 0.02 … 600 s Timeout of ready indication
Object control Open/Close Direct object control
If changing states takes longer than the time defined by “Max ctrl
pulse length” setting, object fails and “Object failure” matrix signal is
set. Also undefined-event is generated. “Completion timeout” is only
V300/en M/A002 65
5.7 Controllable objects 5 Control functions
used for the ready indication. If “DI for ‘obj ready’” is not set,
completion timeout has no meaning.
Output signals of controllable objects
Each controllable object has 2 control signals in matrix:
Output signal Description
Object x Open Open control signal for the object
Object x Close Close control signal for the object
These signals send control pulse when an object is controlled by

digital input, remote bus, auto-reclose etc.
Settings for read-only objects
Each read-only object has the following settings:
DI for ‘obj open’ None, any digital input, virtual input or virtual Open information
output
DI for ‘obj close’ Close information
Object timeout 0.02 … 600 s Timeout for state changes
If changing states takes longer than the time defined by “Object

timeout” setting, and “Object failure” matrix signal is set. Also
undefined-event is generated.
5.7.1 Local/Remote selection

In Local mode, the output relays can be controlled via a local HMI,
but they cannot be controlled via a remote serial communication
interface. For more information see Chapter 5.9.3 Function buttons
In Remote mode, the output relays cannot be controlled via a local
HMI, but they can be controlled via a remote serial communication
interface.
The selection of the Local/Remote mode is done by using a local
HMI, or via one selectable digital input. The digital input is normally
used to change a whole station to a local or remote mode. The
selection of the L/R digital input is done in the “Objects” menu of the
VAMPSET software.
5.7.2 Controlling with DI

Objects can be controlled with digital input, virtual input or virtual
output. There are four settings for each controllable object:
Setting Active
DI for remote open control
In remote state
DI for remote close control
66 V300/en M/A002
5 Control functions 5.7 Controllable objects
Setting Active
DI for local open control
In local state
DI for local close control
If the device is in local control state, the remote control inputs are
ignored and vice versa. Object is controlled when a rising edge is
detected from the selected input. Length of digital input pulse should
be at least 60 ms.
5.7.3 Controlling with I/O

VAMP 300 also has dedicated control buttons for object. Green (I)
stands for object close and red (O) controls object open command
internally. Control buttons are configured in OBJECTS view.
Table 5.7: Parameters of function keys
Disabled - Green button (I) opens selected object if Set
password is enabled
Object 1…6 Obj1... Obj6
Red button (O) closes selected object if
password is enabled
Mode for control butons Selective Control operation needs confirmation (se-
lect-execute)
Direct
Control operation is done without confirm-
ation
5.7.4 Controlling with F1 & F2

Objects can be controlled with F1 & F2.
As default, these keys are programmed to toggle VI1 and VI2. It is
possible to change F1 & F2 to toggle other VI’s or to act as object
control.
Table 5.8: Parameters of F1, F2
VI1…VI4 - - Set
0 Function key toggles virtual input 1...4

between on (1) and off (0)
1
Selected object and control is shown in VAMPSET software under

the menu ”FUNCTION BUTTONS”. If no object with local control is
selected ’-’ is shown. If multiple local controls are selected for one
key ’?’ is shown.
V300/en M/A002 67
5.8 Logic functions 5 Control functions
5.8 Logic functions

The device supports customer-defined programmable logic for
boolean signals. User configurable logic can be used to create
something that is not provided by the relay as a default.
The logic is designed by using the VAMPSET setting tool and
downloaded to the device. Functions available are:
Table 5.9: Available logic functions and their memory use
Locig functions No. of gates reserved Max. no. of input Max. no. of logic out-
gates puts
AND 1
OR 1
XOR 1
AND+OR 2
32
CT (count+reset) 2
INVAND 2 (An input gate can in- 20
clude any number of
INVOR 2 inputs.)
OR+AND 2
RS (set+reset) 2
RS_D 4
(set+D+load+reset)
Logic is made with VAMPSET setting tool. Consumed memory is

dynamically shown on the configuration view in percentage. The first
value indicates amount of used inputs, second amount of gates and
third values shows amount of outputs consumed.
Figure 5.21: Logic can be found and modified in “logic” menu in Vampset setting
tool
See guide below to learn basics of logic creation:
68 V300/en M/A002
5 Control functions 5.8 Logic functions
1 2
3
4
Figure 5.22: How to create logical nodes.
1. Press empty area to add a logic gate, confirm new function by

pressing “Yes”.
2. Logic function is always & -gate as a default.
3. While logic increases the capacity is increasing as well.
4. To joint logics, go on top of the output line of gate and hold down
mouse left -> make the connection to other logic functions input.
1 3
2 5
Figure 5.23: Logic creation.
1. Left click on top of any logic function to activate the “Select

operation” view.
2. Edit properties button opens the “Function properties” window.
3. Generally it is possible to choose the type of logic function
between and/or/counter/swing -gate.
4. When counter is selected, count setting may be set here.
5. Separate delay setting for logic activation and dis-activation.
V300/en M/A002 69
5.8 Logic functions 5 Control functions
6. Possible to invert the output of logic. Inverted logic output is

marked with circle.
1
2 4
3
Figure 5.24: Logic creation
1. Select input signals can be done by pressing the following button

or by clicking mouse left on top of the logic input line.
2. Select outputs can be done by pressing the following button or
by clicking mouse left on top of the logic output line.
3. This deletes the logic function.
4. When logic is created and settings are written to the IED the unit
requires a restart. After restarting the logic output is automatically
assigned in output matrix as well.
NOTE: Whenever writing new logic to the IED the unit has to be restarted.
70 V300/en M/A002
5 Control functions 5.9 Local panel
5.9 Local panel

VAMP 300 has one LCD matrix display. The size of the display is
128 x 64 pixels.
Default display (128 x 64) has similar menu structure to older relay
series like 100 and 200 -series. Also 50 -series product range has
the same original VAMP menu structure. All the main menus are
located on the left side and to get in to certain submenu, user has
to move up and down the main menus.
5.9.1 Mimic display

VAMP 300 has a mimic display enabled as a default. Mimic can be
modified according the application or disabled if not needed. Mimic
display can be configured only by using Vampset -setting tool. It is
not possible to create mimic by using the local HMI of the IED.
Figure 5.25: It is possible to modify local panel mimic in “Mimic” menu. Mimic
menu is located under the “device menu” leaflet. In order to have mimic menu, it
has to be enabled. Mimic menu can be enabled in “local panel configuration”
menu. Mimic cannot be enabled/disabled by using the local panel of the IED.
A
BC D
E F
Figure 5.26: Creating mimic is completed by using different options below.
V300/en M/A002 71
5.9 Local panel 5 Control functions
A) Percentage indicates the amount of memory used by the mimic.

100% is the maximum.
B) Clear object/drawings by going on top of it or clear the whole
mimic by clicking an empty area. When clearing object/drawing while
moving the mouse on top of it, the color turns to red.
C) Text tool.
D) Different type of line tools. To move existing drawings/objects on
mimic go on top of it and hold down mouse left and move around.
When you are on top of drawing/object it changes the color to green.
E) Different type of configurablel objects. Number of the object
corresponds to the number in OBJECT -menu.
F) Some predefined drawings.
NOTE: To enable new drawings and changes in mimic press “Write changes
to device” or “Write current view to device” button when using
Vampset -setting tool.
A B C
Figure 5.27: Mimic display can hold different type of information which is specified
below. It is also possible to change status of certain items while local control is
enabled.
A) Remote/Local selection defines whether certaina actions are

granted or not. In remote state it is not possible to locally
enable/disable auto-reclosing or to control objects. Remote / Local
state can be changed in objects -menu as well.
B) Creates auto-reclosing on/off selection to mimic.
C) Creates virtual input activation on local mimic display.
D) Describes the location of IED. Text comes from device info menu.
E) Up to six user configurable measurements.
72 V300/en M/A002
Table 5.10: Mimic functionality

Sublocation Text field Up to 9 characters. Fixed location. Set
Object 1…8 1…8 Click on top of the object to change the Set
control number between 1 and 8. Number
1 corresponds to object 1 in objects -
menu.
Local / Remote mode L Local / Remote control. R stands for re- Set
mote. Remote local state can be changed
R in objects -menu as well. Position can be
changed.
Auto-reclosure 0 Possible to enable/disable auro-reclosure Set
localy in local mode (L) or remotely in re-
1 mote mode (R). Position can be changed.
Measurement display 1...6 IL1-3, I0, U12, U23, Up to 6 freely selectable measurements. Set (*)
U31, UL1, UL2, UL3,
U0, f, P, Q, S, P.F.,
CosPhi, E+, Eq+, E-,
Eq-, ARStart, ARFaill,
ARShot1-5, IFLT,
Starts, Trips, I0Calc,
IL1-3da, IL, Pda, Qda,
Sda, T, fSYNC,
USYNC, I’L1-3, dIL1-3
Virtual input 1...4 0 Change the status of virtual inputs while Set
the password is enabled. Position can be
1 changed.
Set = Settable. (*) = Channels vary according the IED type
V300/en M/A002 73
5.9.2 Local panel configuration

Information displayed on the measurement view is configured in local
panel configuration menu.
Figure 5.28: Local panel configuration menu.
Table 5.11: Local panel configuration

Display 1...5 IL1-3, I0, U12, U23, 20 (5 x 4) freely configurable measure- Set (*)
U31, UL1, UL2, UL3, ment values can be selected
U0, f, P, Q, S, P.F.,
CosPhi, E+, Eq+, E-,
Eq-, ARStart, ARFaill,
ARShot1-5, IFLT,
Starts, Trips, I0Calc,
IL1-3da, IL, Pda, Qda,
Sda, T, fSYNC,
USYNC, I’L1-3, dIL1-3
Display contrast 50…210 Contrast can be changed in the device Set
menu as well.
Display backlight control DI1…44, Arc1…3, Ar- Activates the backlight of the display. Set (*)
cF, BI, VI1…4,
LED1…14, VO1…6,
Backlight off timeout 0.0…2000.0 min Configurable delay for backlight to turns Set
off when IED is not used. Default value is
60 minutes. When value is zero (0.0)
backlight stays on all the time.
Enable alarm screen Checked Pop-up text box for events. pop-up events Set
can be checked individually by pressing
Unchecked enter, but holding the button for 2 seconds
checks all the events at once.
AR info for mimic display Checked Auto reclosure status visible on top of the Set
local mimic display.
Unchecked
74 V300/en M/A002

Sync I info for mimic display Checked Synchro-check status visible on top of the Set
local mimic display. Operates together
Unchecked with auto-reclosure.
Auto LED release Checked Enables automatix LED release function- Set
ality.
Unchecked
Auto LED release enable time 0.1…600 s Default 1.5 s. When new LED/LED:s is/are Set
latched, previous active latches will be
released automatically if the set time has
passed.
Fault value scaling PU, Pri Fault values per unit or primary scsaled. Set
Local MIMIC Checked Enable/disable the local mimic (enabled Set
as default).
Unchecked
Event buffer size 50...2000 Event buffer size. Default setting is 200 Set
events.
Set = Settable. (*) = Inputs vary according the IED type
V300/en M/A002 75
5.9.3 Function buttons

VAMP 300 has two type of function buttons F1 & F2 and control
buttons for breaker control. See picture below:
Figure 5.29: Function buttons F1 and F2 (1). Control buttons green and red (2).
There are two independent function keys,F1 and F2, available in the
device front panel. As default, these keys are programmed to toggle
VI1 and VI2. It is possible to change F1 & F2 to toggle other VI’s or
to act as object control.
VAMP 300 also has dedicated control buttons for object. Green (I)
stands for object close and red (O) controls object open command
internally. Control buttons are configured in OBJECTS view.
Table 5.12: Parameters of function keys
For F1 and F2
VI1…VI4 - - Set
0 Function key toggles virtual input 1...4

between on (1) and off (0)
1
For control buttons
Disabled - Green button (I) opens selected object if Set
password is enabled
Object 1…6 Obj1... Obj6
Red button (O) closes selected object if
password is enabled
Mode for control butons Selective Control operation needs confirmation (se-
lect-execute)
Direct
Control operation is done without confirm-
ation
Control object (while at least operator level password is enabled

and mode is selective)
1.
•
Push again to confirm
•
Push to cancel
76 V300/en M/A002
2.
Push to open object
•
Push to again to confirm
•
Push to cancel
Control object (while least operator level password is enabled

and mode is direct)
•
Push to close object
•
Push to open object
NOTE: Password usage in breaker control can be disabled in OBJECTS

setting.
5.9.4 Setting group control

Setting groups are controlled by using digital inputs or other assigned
inputs. When assigned input is not active group 1 is active. When
controlled input activates the group 2 is activated as well. See picture
below:
Figure 5.30: Groups are controlled by assigning a input to “Set group DI control”.
V300/en M/A002 77
6 Protection functions
6 Protection functions
6.1 Current protection function

dependencies
The current based protection functions are relative to IMODE, which
is dependent of the chosen IED functionality. In the VAMP 300M, all
of the current based functions are relative to IMOT and in the VAMP
300F to IN with following exceptions.
I2> (46), I2>> (47), IST> (48), N> (66) are always dependent on IMOT
and they are only available for VAMP 300M.
6.2 IED functionality in different applications

IED may have different function depending on the hardware options
or according the application. Major difference is when IED is equipped
with 1 or 4 voltages. With voltages, the unit is able to calculate power
and energy.
Protection A= 3L + U + Io (5/1A) B = 3L+4U+Io (5/1A)
C = 3L+4U+2Io (5+1A)
D = 3L+4U+2Io (1+0.2A)
Feeder Motor Feeder Motor
Arc protection (option) x x x x
Phase overcurrent (50/51) x x x x
Directional phase overcurrent (67) x x
Cold load pick-up x x x x
Thermal overload (49) x x x x
Earth fault (50N/51N) x x x x
Directional earth fault (67N) x x x x
Intermittent earth fault (67N-IEF) x x
Undervoltage (27) x (1 x (1 x x
Overvoltage (59) x (1 x (1 x x
Neutral voltage (59N) x x x x
Phase undercurrent (37) x x
Unbalance (46) x x x x
Phase sequence (47) x x
Directional power (32) x x
E cessive starts (48) x x
Successive starts (66) x x
Magnetising inrush (68F2) x x x x
Frequency (81H/81L) x x
78 V300/en M/A002
6 Protection functions 6.2 IED functionality in different applications
Protection A= 3L + U + Io (5/1A) B = 3L+4U+Io (5/1A)
C = 3L+4U+2Io (5+1A)
D = 3L+4U+2Io (1+0.2A)
Feeder Motor Feeder Motor
Synchrocheck (25) x
Rate of change of frequency (81R) x x
Recloser (79) x x
Breaker failure (50BF) x x x x
Programmable stage 1-8 (99) x x x x
(1: single phase
6.2.1 Feeder protection

When ordering IED for feeder application the first character that
determines the type of the unit has to be “F”.
With analogue measurement card “B” the IED comes with three
phase currents, four voltages and one residual current input. Residual
currents input has two windings. The nominal current can be
connected to 5 or 1 amps.
Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VAMP 300 F - x x x x x - x A B x A - x x
Feeder 3L + U + I0 (5/1A)
Feeder relay is able to calculate power and energy only when it has
four voltage channels.
6.2.2 Motor protection

When ordering IED for motor application the first character that
determines the type of the unit has to be “M”.
With analogue measurement card “B” the IED comes with three
phase currents, four voltages and one residual current input. Residual
currents input has two windings. The nominal current can be
connected to 5 or 1 amps.
Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
VAMP 300 M - x x x x x - x A B x A - x x
Motor 3L + U + I0 (5/1A)
Motor relay is able to calculate power and energy only when it has
four voltage channels.
V300/en M/A002 79
6.3 Synchrocheck (25) 6 Protection functions
6.3 Synchrocheck (25)

The device includes a function that will check synchronism when the
circuit-breaker is closed. The function will monitor voltage amplitude,
frequency and phase angle difference between two voltages. Since
there are two stages available, it is possible to monitor three voltages.
The voltages can be busbar and line or busbar and busbar (bus
coupler).
Synchrocheck function is available when one of the following analog
measurement module and suitable measuring mode is in use:
Analog measurement card Voltage measuring mode No. of synchrocheck
stages
B = 3L+4U+I0 (5/1A) 3LN+LLy 1
C = 3L+4U+2I0 (5+1A) 3LN+LNy 1

2LL+Uo+LLy 1
D = 3L+4U+2I0 (1+0.2A)
2LL+Uo+LNy 1
LL+Uo+LLy+LLz 2
LN+Uo+LNy+LNz 2
6.3.1 Connections for synchrocheck

The voltage used for sychrochecking is always phase-to-phase
voltage U12. The sychrocheck stage 1 always compares U12 with
U12y. The compared voltages for the stage 2 can be selected (U12
/ U12y, U12 / U12z, U12y / U12z). See Chapter 4.9 Voltage
measurement modes.
80 V300/en M/A002
6 Protection functions 6.3 Synchrocheck (25)
Table 6.1: Setting parameters of synchrocheck stages SyC1, SyC2 (25)

Parameter Values Unit Default Description
Side U12/U12y; - U12/U12z Voltage selection. The stage 1 has fixed
voltages U12/U12y.
U12/U12z;
U12y/U12z
CBObj Obj1-Obj6 - Obj1 The selected object for CB control. The
synchrocheck closing command will use the
closing command of the selected object.
CBObj2 Obj1-Obj6 - Obj2 The selected object for CB control. The
synchrocheck closing command will use the
closing command of the selected object.
ObjSel Digital inputs - - Input for selecting between CBObj1 and
CBObj2. When active CBObj2 is in use
Smode Async; Sync; Off - Sync Synchrocheck mode.
Off = only voltage check
Async = the function checks dU, df and

dangle. Furthermore, the frequency slip, df,
determines the remaining time for closing.
This time must be longer than “CB time”.
Sync mode = Synchronization is tried to

make exactly when angle difference is zero.
In this mode df-setting should be enough
small (<0.3Hz).
Umode -, - - Voltage check mode:
DD, The first letter refers to the reference voltage

and the second letter refers to the comparis-
DL, on voltage.
LD, D means that the side must be “dead” when
closing (dead = The voltage below the dead
DD/DL,
voltage limit setting)
DD/LD,
L means that the side must be “live” when
DL/LD, closing (live = The voltage higher than the
live voltage limit setting)
DD/DL/LD
Example: DL mode for stage 1:
The U12 side must be “dead” and the U12y

side must be “live”.
Cbtime 0.04 … 0.6 s 0.1 Typical closing time of the circuit-breaker.
Dibypass Digital inputs - - Bypass input. If the input is active, the func-
tion is bypassed.
Bypass 0; 1 - 0 The bypass status. “1” means that the func-
tion is bypassed. This parameter can also
be used for manual bypass.
CBCtrl Open;Close - - Circuit-breaker control
ShowInfo Off; On - On Additional information display about the
sychrocheck status to the mimic dispaly.
SGrpDI Digital inputs - - The input for changing the setting group.
SetGrp 1; 2 - 1 The active setting group.
V300/en M/A002 81
6.3 Synchrocheck (25) 6 Protection functions
Table 6.2: Measured and recorded values of synchrocheck stages SyC1,

SyC2 (25)
Parameter Values Unit Description
Measured values df - Hz Measured frequency difference
dU - % Un / deg Measured voltage amplitude and phase
angle difference
UState - - Voltage status (e.g. DD)
SState - - Synchrocheck status
ReqTime - - Request time status
f1) - Hz Measured frequency (reference side)
fy1) - Hz Measured frequency (comparison side)
U121) - % Un Measured voltage (reference side)
U12y1) - % Un Measured voltage (comparison side)
Recorded values ReqCntr - - Request counter
SyncCntr - - Synchronising counter
FailCntr - - Fail counter
f1) - Hz Recorded frequency (reference side)
fy1) - Hz Recorded frequency (comparison side)
U121) - % Un Recorded voltage (reference side)
U12y1) - % Un Recorded voltage (comparison side)
dAng - Deg Recorded phase angle difference, when
close command is given from the function
dAngC - Deg Recorded phase angle difference, when the
circuit-breaker actually closes.
EDly - % The elapsed time compared to the set re-
quest timeout setting, 100% = timeout
1) Please note that the labels (parameter names) change according to the voltage selection.
The following signals of the stage are available in the output matrix
and the logic: “Request”, “OK” and “Fail”. The “request”-signal is
active, when a request has received but the breaker is not yet closed.
The “OK”-signal is active, when the synchronising conditions are
met, or the voltage check criterion is met. The “fail”-signal is activated,
if the function fails to close the breaker within the request timeout
setting. See below the figure.
82 V300/en M/A002
6 Protection functions 6.3 Synchrocheck (25)
object close command given (mimic or bus) request go down when

actually make only sync request "real" object close is
requested
SYNC REQUEST
SYNC OK
OBJECT CLOSE COMMAND
Synchronizing time
Normal object close operation
If timeout happens, Sync_Fail signal
activates Timeout defined in synchrocheck.
Figure 6.1: The principle of the synchrocheck function
Please note that the control pulse of the selected object should be
long enough. For example, if the voltages are in opposite direction,
the synchronising conditions are met after several seconds.
Obj
close Synchrocheck Object CB
command
Sync_Fail signal Object_Fail signal

if sync timeout if "real" object
happen control fail
Time settings:
• Synchrocheck: Max synchronize time (~seconds)
• Object: Max object control pulse len (~200 ms)
Figure 6.2: The block diagram of the synchrocheck and the controlling object
Please note that the wiring of the secondary circuits of voltage

transformers to the device terminal depends on the selected voltage
measuring mode.
V300/en M/A002 83
6.4 Undervoltage protection U< (27) 6 Protection functions
Table 6.3: Voltage measurement modes for synchrocheck function

8/B/2 8/B/1
Terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11
Voltage channel U1 U2 U3 U4
Mode / Used voltage
3LN+LLy LLy
UL1 UL2 UL3
3LN+LNy LNy
2LL+U0+LLy LLy
U23
2LL+U0+LNy U12 LNy
U0
LL+U0+LLy+LLz U12y U12z
LN+U0+LNy+LNz UL1 UL1y UL1z
See synchrocheck stages connection diagrams in Chapter 4.9

Voltage measurement modes
6.4 Undervoltage protection U< (27)

This is a basic undervoltage protection. The function measures the
three line-to-line voltages and whenever the smallest of them drops
below the user's pick-up setting of a particular stage, this stage picks
up and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on longer
than the user's operation time delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
Blocking during VT fuse failure

As all the protection stages the undervoltage function can be blocked
with any internal or external signal using the block matrix. For
example if the secondary voltage of one of the measuring
transformers disappears because of a fuse failure (See VT
supervision function in Chapter 7.8 Voltage transformer supervision).
The blocking signal can also be a signal from the user's logic (see
Chapter 5.8 Logic functions).
Self blocking at very low voltage

The stages can be blocked with a separate low limit setting. With
this setting, the particular stage will be blocked, when the biggest of
the three line-to-line voltages drops below the given limit. The idea
is to avoid purposeless tripping, when voltage is switched off. If the
operating time is less than 0.08 s, the blocking level setting should
not be less than 15 % to the blocking action to be enough fast. The
self blocking can be disabled by setting the low voltage block limit
equal to zero.
Figure 6.3 shows an example of low voltage self blocking.
84 V300/en M/A002
6 Protection functions 6.4 Undervoltage protection U< (27)
ULLmax = max(U12, U23, U31) UunderSelfBlocking
E I K
C
dead band
U< setting
H
D
B F
block limit
J
A G
time
U< under-voltage state
Figure 6.3: Under voltage state and block limit.
A The maximum of the three line-to-line F This is an under voltage situation.

voltages ULLmax is below the block limit.
This is not regarded as an under
voltage situation.
B The voltage ULLmin is above the block G The voltage ULLmin is under block limit
limit but below the pick-up level. This and this is not regarded as an under
is an undervoltage situation. voltage situation.
C Voltage is OK, because it is above the H This is an under voltage situation.
pick-up limit.
D This is an under voltage situation. I Voltage is OK.
E Voltage is OK. J Same as G
K Voltage is OK.
Three independent stages

There are three separately adjustable stages: U<, U<< and U<<<.
All these stages can be configured for definite time (DT) operation
characteristic.
Setting groups
There are two settings groups available for all stages. Switching
between setting groups can be controlled by digital inputs, virtual
inputs (mimic display, communication, logic) and manually.
V300/en M/A002 85
6.4 Undervoltage protection U< (27) 6 Protection functions
Table 6.4: Parameters of the under voltage stages U<, U<<, U<<<
Status - Current status of the stage -
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
SCntr Cumulative start counter C
TCntr Cumulative trip counter C
SetGrp 1 or 2 Active setting group Set
SGrpDI Digital signal to select the active setting group Set
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
LEDx LED indicator signal
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
Force Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. This is Set
a common flag for all stages and output relays, too.
On Automatically reset by a 5-minute timeout.
MinU V The supervised minimum of line-to-line voltages in
primary volts
U<, U<<, U<<< V Pick-up value scaled to primary value
U<, U<<, U<<< % Un Pick-up setting Set
t<, t<<, t<<< S Definite operation time Set
LVBlk % Un Low limit for self blocking Set
RlsDly S Release delay (U< stage only) Set
Hyster Default 3.0 % % Dead band setting Set
Set = An editable parameter (password needed). C = Can be cleared to zero. F = Editable when force flag is on
For details of setting ranges, see Chapter 11.3 Protection functions
Recorded values of the latest eight faults

There are detailed information available of the eight latest faults for
each of the stages: Time stamp, fault voltage, elapsed delay, voltage
before the fault and setting group.
Table 6.5: Recorded values of the undervoltage stages (8 latest faults) U<,
U<<, U<<<
Parameter Value Unit Description
yyyy-mm-dd Time stamp of the recording, date
hh:mm:ss.ms Time stamp, time of day
Flt % Un Minimum fault voltage
EDly % Elapsed time of the operating time setting. 100% = trip
PreFlt % Un Supervised value before fault, 1 s average value.
SetGrp 1, 2 Active setting group during fault
86 V300/en M/A002
6 Protection functions 6.5 Directional power protection P< (32)
6.5 Directional power protection P< (32)

Directional power function can be used for example to disconnect a
motor in case the supply voltage is lost and thus prevent power
generation by the motor. It can also be used to detect loss of load
of a motor.
Directional power function is sensitive to active power. For reverse
power function the pick-up value is negative. For underpower function
a positive pick-up value is used. Whenever the active power goes
under the pick-up value, the stage picks up and issues a start signal.
If the fault situation stays on longer than the delay setting, a trip
signal is issued.
The pick-up setting range is from –200 % to +200 % of the nominal
apparent power SN. The nominal apparent power is determined by
the configured voltage and current transformer values.
Equation 6.1:
S n = VTRated Pr imary ⋅ CTRated Pr imary ⋅ 3
There are two identical stages available with independent setting

parameters.
Table 6.6: Setting parameters of P< and P<< stages
Parameter Value Unit Default Description
P<, P<< -200.0 ... 200.0 %Sn -4.0 (P<), P<,P<< pick-up setting
-20.0(P<<)
t< 0.3 … 300.0 s 1.0 P<, P<< operational delay
S_On Enabled; Disabled - Enabled Start on event
S_Off Enabled; Disabled - Enabled Start off event
T_On Enabled; Disabled - Enabled Trip on event
T_Off Enabled; Disabled - Enabled Trip off event
Table 6.7: Measured and recorded values of P< and P<< stages
Parameter vaule Unit Description
Measured value P kW Active power
Recorded values SCntr - Start counter (Start) reading
TCntr - Trip counter (Trip) reading
Flt %Sn Max value of fault
EDly % Elapsed time as compared to the
set operating time, 100% = tripping
V300/en M/A002 87
6.6 Undercurrent protection I< (37) 6 Protection functions
6.6 Undercurrent protection I< (37)

The undercurrent unit measures the fundamental frequency
component of the phase currents.
The stage I< can be configured for definite time characteristic.
The undercurrent stage is protecting rather the device driven by the
motor e.g. a submersible pump, than the motor itself.
Table 6.8: Parameters of the undercurrent stage I< (37)
Parameter Value/unit Description
Measured value ILmin A Min. value of phase currents IL1…IL3 in primary value
Setting values I< xImode Setting value as per times Imot
t< S Operation time [s]
Recorded values SCntr Start counter (Start) reading
TCntr Trip counter (Trip) reading
Type 1-N, 2-N Fault type/single-phase fault e.g.: 1-N = fault on phase
L1
3-N
1-2, 2-3 Fault type/two-phase fault
1-3 e.g.: 2-3 = fault between L2 and L3

1-2-3 Fault type/three-phase fault
Flt % Min. value of fault current as per times Imot
Load % 1s mean value of pre-fault currents IL1—IL3
EDly % Elapsed time as compared to the set operate time,
100% = tripping
88 V300/en M/A002
6 Protection functions 6.7 Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in feeder mode
6.7 Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in

feeder mode
The purpose of the unbalance stage is to detect unbalanced load
conditions, for example a broken conductor of a heavy loaded
overhead line in case there is no earth fault. The operation of the
unbalanced load function is based on the negative phase sequence
component I2 related to the positive phase sequence component I1.
This is calculated from the phase currents using the method of
symmetrical components. The function requires that the measuring
inputs are connected correctly so that the rotation direction of the
phase currents are as in Chapter 10.9 Connection examples. The
unbalance protection has definite time operation characteristic.
I I1 = IL1 + aIL2 + a2IL3
K2 = 2
I1 I2 = IL1 + a2IL2 + aIL3
1 3
a = 1∠120° = − + j
2 2 , a phasor rotating constant
Table 6.9: Setting parameters of the current unbalanced stageI2> (46) in

feeder mode
I2/I1> 2 … 70 % 20 Setting value, I2/I1
t> 1.0 … 600.0 s 10.0 Definite operating time
Type DT - DT The selection of time characteristics
INV
Table 6.10: Measured and recorded values of of the current unbalanced

stageI2> (46) in feeder mode
Measured value I2/I1 % Relative negative sequence component
Recorded values SCntr Cumulative start counter
TCntr Cumulative start counter
Flt % Maximum I2/I1 fault component
EDly % Elapsed time as compared to the set oper-
ating time, 100% = tripping
V300/en M/A002 89
6.8 Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in motor mode 6 Protection functions
6.8 Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in

motor mode
Current unbalance in a motor causes double frequency currents in
the rotor. This warms up the surface of the rotor and the available
thermal capacity of the rotor is much less than the thermal capacity
of the whole motor. Thus an rms current based overload protection
(see chapter Chapter 6.11 Thermal overload protection T> (49)) is
not capable to protect a motor against current unbalance.
The current unbalance protection is based on the negative sequence
of the base frequency phase currents. Both definite time and inverse
time characteristics are available.
Inverse delay
The inverse delay is based on the following equation.
T= Operation time
Equation 6.2:
K1 = Delay multiplier
K1 I2 = Measured and calculated negative sequence phase
T=
 I2 
2
current of fundamental frequency.
  − K 22
 I MOT  IMOT = Nominal current of the motor
K2 = Pick-up setting I2> in pu. The maximum allowed degree
of unbalance.
Example:
K1 = 15 s
I2 = 22.9 % = 0.229 xIMOT
K2 = 5 % = 0.05 xIMOT
15
t= 2
= 300.4
 0.229  2
  − 0.05
 1 
The operation time in this example will be five minutes.
More stages (definite time delay only)

If more than one definite time delay stages are needed for current
unbalance protection, the freely programmable stages can be used
(Chapter 6.28 Programmable stages (99)).
90 V300/en M/A002
6 Protection functions 6.8 Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in motor mode
Setting groups
There are two settings groups available. Switching between setting
groups can be controlled by digital inputs, virtual inputs
(communication, logic) and manually.
CurrentUnbalanceChar
2000
1000
500 K2 = 2 % K2 = 40 % K2 = 70 %
200
Operation time (s)
100 K1 = 50 s
50
K2 = 2 % K2 = 40 % K2 = 70 %
20
10
5
K1 = 1 s
2
1
0 20 40 60 80 100
Negative sequence current I2 (%)
Figure 6.4: Inverse operation delay of current unbalance stage I2>. The longest
delay is limited to 1000 seconds (=16min 40s).
Table 6.11: Parameters of the current unbalance stage I2> (46) in motor mode
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
Force Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. This is a Set
common flag for all stages and output relays, too. Automat-
On ically reset by a 5-minute timeout.
I2/Imot % Imot The supervised value.
I2> % Imot Pick-up setting Set
t> s Definite operation time (Type=DT) Set
Type DT Definite time Set
INV Inverse time (Equation 6.2)
V300/en M/A002 91
6.9 Phase reversal/incorrect phase sequence protection I2>> (47) 6 Protection functions

K1 s Delay multiplier (Type =INV) Set

There is detailed information available of the eight latest faults: Time
stamp, unbalance current, elapsed delay and setting group.
Table 6.12: Recorded values of the current unbalance stage I2> (46) in motor
mode (8 latest faults)
Flt % Imot Maximum unbalance current
SetGrp 1 Active setting group during the fault
6.9 Phase reversal/incorrect phase

sequence protection I2>> (47)
The phase sequence stage prevents the motor from being started
in to wrong direction, thus protecting the load.
When the ratio between negative and positive sequence current
exceeds 80% and the average of three phase currents exceeds
0.2xIMOT in the start-up situation, the phase sequence stage starts
and trips after 100 ms after start-up.
Table 6.13: Parameters of the incorrect phase sequence stage I2>> (47)
Measured value I2/I1 % Neg. phase seq. current/pos. phase seq. current
Flt % Max. value of fault current
100% = tripping
92 V300/en M/A002
6 Protection functions 6.10 Stall protection IST> (48)
6.10 Stall protection IST> (48)

The stall protection stage protects the motor against prolonged
direct-on-line (DOL) starts caused by e.g. a stalled rotor, too high
inertia of the load or too low voltage. This function is sensitive to the
fundamental frequency compo¬nent of the phase currents.
The IST> stage can be configured for definite operation time or inverse
time operation characteristic. For a weak voltage supply the inverse
characteristics is useful allowing more start time when a voltage drop
decreases the start current and increases the start time. Equation 6.3
defines the inverse operation time. Figure 6.6 shows an example of
the inverse characteristics.
T= Inverse operation time.

Equation 6.3:
Rated start current of the motor “Nom motor start current”
ISTART =
IMOTST. The default setting is 6.00xIMOT.
2
I  IMEAS = Measured current
T =  start  Tstart Maximum allowed start time “Inv. time coefficient” k> for
 I meas  TSTART =
the motor at rated voltage.
The pick-up setting “Motor start detection current” IST> is the start
detection level of the start current. While the current has been less
than 10% of Imot and then within 200 milliseconds exceeds the
setting IST>, the stall protection stage starts to count the operation
time TSTART.
When current drops below 120 % x IMOT the stall protection stage
releases. Stall protection is active only during the starting of the
motor.
Istlohko
Im1
& Start
Im2
Im3
MAX > ts tr
& Register
event
Block t
Trip
³1
& Register
event
Motor nom. Delay Definite / inverse Inverse delay Enable events

start current time
Figure 6.5: Block diagram of the stall protection stage IST>.
V300/en M/A002 93
6.10 Stall protection IST> (48) 6 Protection functions
Figure 6.6: Example of an inverse operation time delay of the stall protection stage.
If the measured current is less than the specified start current ISTART the operation
time will be longer than the specified start time TSTART and vice versa.
Table 6.14: Parameters of the stall protection stage IST> (48)

Setting values ImotSt xImot Nominal motor starting current
Ist> % Imot Motor start detection current. Must be less than initial
motor starting current.
Type DT Delay type: Definite time
Inv Delay type: inverse time
t s Definete operation time
k s Time multiplier TSTART for inverse delay characteristics
Flt xImot Max. value of fault.
100% = tripping
94 V300/en M/A002
6 Protection functions 6.10 Stall protection IST> (48)
6.10.1 Motor status

There are three possible startus for a motor: stopped, starting or
running.
• Motor stopped: Motor average current is less than 10% of the
motor nominal current.
• Motor starting: To reach the starting position motor has to be
stopped for least 500ms before starting. Motor average current
has to increase above the motor start detection current (setting
value) within 200ms. Motor will remain starting as long as the
terms for turning into running condition are not filled.
• Motor running: Motor is able to turn into a running position from
both stopped and starting position. Low limit for motor running
is 20% of the motors nominal and the high limit for motor running
is 120% of the motors nominal current.
Figure 6.7: Motor status via VAMPSET

and local panel.
The status of the motor can be viewed via VAMPSET -software or

by looking from the local panel of the relay (Mstat). Statuses Starting
and running can be found from the output –and block matrix.
Therefore it is possible to use these signals for tripping or indication
and for blocking purposes.
Figure 6.8: Motor status in output –and block matrix.
V300/en M/A002 95
6.10 Stall protection IST> (48) 6 Protection functions
Softstart
Frequency converter drives and soft starter applications will not
initiate motor start signal due to the low current while starting motor.
Motor will change directly from stopped to running position when the
current increases into a certain level.
Figure 6.9: The terms of soft start.
Normal starting sequence

As a default for the motor start detection, relay uses value of 6 times
motor nominal. This value is editable.
Figure 6.10: The terms of normal starting sequence.
96 V300/en M/A002
6 Protection functions 6.11 Thermal overload protection T> (49)
6.11 Thermal overload protection T> (49)

The thermal overload function protects the motor in the motor mode
or cables in the feeder mode against excessive heating.
Thermal model
The temperature is calculated using rms values of phase currents
and a thermal model according IEC 60255-8. The rms values are
calculated using harmonic components up to the 15th.
2
I 2 − IP
Trip time: t = τ ⋅ ln 2
I − a2
Alarm: a = k ⋅ kΘ ⋅ I MODE ⋅ alarm (Alarm 60% = 0.6)
Trip: a = k ⋅ kΘ ⋅ I MODE
2
I
Release time: t = τ ⋅ Cτ ⋅ ln 2 P 2
a −I
Trip release: a = 0.95 × k × I MODE
Start release: a = 0.95 × k × I MODE × alarm (Alarm 60% = 0.6)
T= Operation time
= Thermal time constant tau (Setting value)
ln = Natural logarithm function
I= Measured rms phase current (the max. value of
three phase currents)
Ip = I = θ × k × IN
Preload current, P (If temperature
rise is 120%(θ = 1.2). This parameter is the
memory of the algorithm and corresponds to the
actual temperature rise.
k= Overload factor (Maximum continuous current),
i.e. service factor.(Setting value)
kΘ = Ambient temperature factor (Permitted current due
to tamb).
IMODE = The rated current (IN or IMOT)
Cτ = Relay cooling time constant (Setting value)
V300/en M/A002 97
6.11 Thermal overload protection T> (49) 6 Protection functions
Time constant for cooling situation

If the motor's fan is stopped, the cooling will be slower than with an
active fan. Therefore there is a coefficient Cτ for thermal constant
available to be used as cooling time constant, when current is less
than 0.3xIMOT.
Heat capacitance, service factor and ambient temperature

The trip level is determined by the maximum allowed continuous
current IMAX corresponding to the 100 % temperature rise ΘTRIP i.e.
the heat capacitance of the motor or cable. IMAX depends of the given
service factor k and ambient temperature ΘAMB and settings IMAX40
and IMAX70 according the following equation.
I MAX = k ⋅ kΘ ⋅ I MODE
The value of ambient temperature compensation factor kΘ depends

on the ambient temperature ΘAMB and settings IMAX40 and IMAX70.
See Figure 6.11. Ambient temperature is not in use when kΘ = 1.
This is true when
• IMAX40 is 1.0
• Samb is “n/a” (no ambient temperature sensor)
• TAMB is +40 °C.
kQ AmbientTemperatureCompensation
1.2
IMAX40
1.0
0.8 IMAX70
0.6
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
QAMB (°C)
Figure 6.11: Ambient temperature correction of the overload stage T>.
98 V300/en M/A002
6 Protection functions 6.11 Thermal overload protection T> (49)
Example of a behaviour of the thermal model

Figure 6.11 shows an example of the thermal model behaviour. In
this example = 30 minutes, k = 1.06 and kΘ = 1 and the current
has been zero for a long time and thus the initial temperature rise is
0 %. At time = 50 minutes the current changes to 0.85 x IMODE and
the temperature rise starts to approach value (0.85/1.06)2 = 64 %
according the time constant. At time = 300 min, the temperature is
about stable, and the current increases to 5 % over the maximum
defined by the rated current and the service factor k. The temperature
rise starts to approach value 110 %. At about 340 minutes the
temperature rise is 100 % and a trip follows.
Initial temperature rise after restart

When the device is switched on, an initial temperature rise of 70 %
is used. Depending of the actual current, the calculated temperature
rise then starts to approach the final value.
Alarm function
The thermal overload stage is provided with a separately settable
alarm function. When the alarm limit is reached the stage activates
its start signal.
Figure 6.12: Example of the thermal model behaviour.
V300/en M/A002 99
6.11 Thermal overload protection T> (49) 6 Protection functions
Table 6.15: Parameters of the thermal overload stage T> (49)

Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
Time hh:mm:ss Estimated time to trip
Force Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. Set
This is a common flag for all stages and output
On relays, too. Automatically reset by a 5-minute
timeout.
T % Calculated temperature rise. Trip limit is 100 %. F
MaxRMS Arms Measured current. Highest of the three phases.
Imax A kxIn. Current corresponding to the 100 % temper-
ature rise.
k> xImode Allowed overload (service factor) Set
Alarm % Alarm level Set
tau min Thermal time constant Set
ctau xtau Coefficient for cooling time constant. Default = Set
1.0
kTamb xImode Ambient temperature corrected max. allowed
continuous current
Imax40 % Imode Allowed load at Tamb +40 °C. Default = 100 %. Set
Imax70 % Imode Allowed load at Tamb +70 °C. Set
Tamb °C Ambient temperature. Editable Samb=n/a. Default Set
= +40 °C
Samb Sensor for ambient temperature Set
n/a No sensor in use for Tamb
ExtAI1...16 External Analogue input 1...16
100 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.12 Circuit breaker failure protection CBFP (50BF)
6.12 Circuit breaker failure protection CBFP

(50BF)
The circuit breaker failure protection can be used to trip any upstream
circuit breaker (CB), if the fault has not disappeared within a given
time after the initial trip command. A different output contact of the
device must be used for this backup trip.
The operation of the circuit-breaker failure protection (CBFP) is based
on the supervision of the signal to the selected trip relay and the time
the fault remains on after the trip command.
If this time is longer than the operating time of the CBFP stage, the
CBFP stage activates another output relay, which will remain
activated until the primary trip relay resets.
The CBFP stage is supervising all the protection stages using the
same selected trip relay, since it supervises the control signal of this
device. See Chapter 5.6.1 Output matrix
Table 6.16: Parameters of the circuit breaker failure stage CBFP (50BF)
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
Force Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. This Set
is a common flag for all stages and output relays, too.
Cbrelay The supervised output relay*). Set
1 Relay T1
2 Relay T2
t> s Definite operation time. Set
*) This setting is used by the circuit breaker condition monitoring, too. See Chapter 7.9 Circuit breaker condition monitoring.

There are detailed information available of the eight latest faults:
Time stamp and elapsed delay.
V300/en M/A002 101

6.12 Circuit breaker failure protection CBFP (50BF) 6 Protection functions
Table 6.17: Recorded values of the circuit breaker failure stage (8 latest
faults) CBFP (50BF)
102 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.13 Overcurrent protection I> (50/51)
6.13 Overcurrent protection I> (50/51)

Overcurrent protection is used against short circuit faults and heavy
overloads.
The overcurrent function measures the fundamental frequency
component of the phase currents. The protection is sensitive for the
highest of the three phase currents. Whenever this value exceeds
the user's pick-up setting of a particular stage, this stage picks up
and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on longer
than the user's operation delay setting, a trip signal is issued.

There are three separately adjustable overcurrent stages: I>, I>>
and I>>>. The first stage I> can be configured for definite time (DT)
or inverse time operation characteristic (IDMT). The stages I>> and
I>>> have definite time operation characteristic. By using the definite
delay type and setting the delay to its minimum, an instantaneous
(ANSI 50) operation is obtained.
Figure 6.13 shows a functional block diagram of the I> overcurrent
stage with definite time and inverse time operation time. Figure 6.14
shows a functional block diagram of the I>> and I>>> overcurrent
stages with definite time operation delay.
Inverse operation time

Inverse delay means that the operation time depends on the amount
the measured current exceeds the pick-up setting. The bigger the
fault current is the faster will be the operation. Accomplished inverse
delays are available for the I> stage. The inverse delay types are
described in Chapter 6.29 Inverse time operation. The device will
show the currently used inverse delay curve graph on the local panel
display.
Inverse time limitation

The maximum measured secondary current is 50xIN. This limits the
scope of inverse curves with high pick-up settings. See Chapter 6.29
Inverse time operation for more information.
Cold load and inrush current handling

See Chapter 6.26 Cold load pick-up and magnetising inrush.
Setting groups
There are two settings groups available for each stage. Switching
inputs (communication, logic) and manually.
V300/en M/A002 103

6.13 Overcurrent protection I> (50/51) 6 Protection functions
Figure 6.13: Block diagram of the three-phase overcurrent stage I>.
Figure 6.14: Block diagram of the three-phase overcurrent stage I>> and I>>>.
104 V300/en M/A002

Table 6.18: Parameters of the overcurrent stage I> (50/51)

Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
TripTime s Estimated time to trip
SCntr Cumulative start counter Clr
TCntr Cumulative trip counter Clr
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Force Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. This is a common Set
flag for all stages and output relays, too. This flag is automatically
On reset 5 minutes after the last front panel push button pressing.
ILmax A The supervised value. Max. of IL1, IL2 and IL3
I> A Pick-up value scaled to primary value
I> xImode Pick-up setting Set
Curve - Delay curve family: Set
DT Definite time
IEC, IEEE, Inverse time. Chapter 6.29 Inverse time operation.

IEEE2, RI, PrgN
Type - Delay type. Set
DT Definite time
NI, VI, EI, LTI, Inverse time. Chapter 6.29 Inverse time operation.
Parameters
t> s Definite operation time (for definite time only) Set
k> Inverse delay multiplier (for inverse time only) Set
Dly20x s Delay at 20xImode
A, B, C, D, E User's constants for standard equations. Type=Parameters. Set
Chapter 6.29 Inverse time operation.
For details of setting ranges, see Chapter 11.3 Protection functions.
V300/en M/A002 105

Table 6.19: Parameters of the overcurrent stages I>>, I>>> (50/51)

Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Force Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. This is a common Set
flag for all stages and output relays, too. Automatically reset by a
On 5-minute timeout.
I>>, I>>> A Pick-up value scaled to primary value
I>>, I>>> xImode Pick-up setting Set
t>>, t>>> s Definite operation time Set

stamp, fault type, fault current, load current before the fault, elapsed
delay and setting group.
106 V300/en M/A002

Table 6.20: Recorded values of the overcurrent stages (8 latest faults) I>,
I>>, I>>> (50/51)
Type - Fault type
1-N Ground fault
2-N Ground fault
3-N Ground fault
1-2 Two phase fault
2-3 Two phase fault
3-1 Two phase fault
1-2-3 Three phase fault

Flt xImode Maximum fault current
Load xImode 1 s average phase currents before the fault
SetGrp 1 Active setting group during fault
6.13.1 Remote controlled overcurrent scaling

Pick-up setting of the three over current stages can also be controlled
remotely. In this case only two scaling coefficients are possible:
100% (the scaling is inactive) and any configured value between
10% - 200% (the scaling is active). When scaling is enabled all
settings of group one are copied to group two but the pick-up value
of group two is changed according the given value (10-200%).
• This feature can be enabled/disabled via VAMPSET or by using
the local panel. When using VAMPSET the scaling can be
activated and adjusted in the “protection stage status 2” –menu.
When using the local panel similar settings can be found from
the “prot” -menu.
• It is also possible to change the scaling factor remotely by using
the modbus TCP –protocol. When changing the scaling factor
remotely value of 1% is equal to 1. Check the correct modbus
address for this application from the VAMPSET or from the
communication parameter list.
V300/en M/A002 107

Figure 6.15: Remote scaling example.
In the Figure 6.15 can be seen the affect of remote scaling. After
enabling group is changed from group one to group two and all
settings from group one are copied to group two. The difference is
that group two uses scaled pick-up settings.
NOTE: When remote scaling function is used, it replaces all the settings of
group 2. So this function cannot be used simultaneously with normal
group change.
108 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.14 Earth fault protection I0> (50N/51N)
6.14 Earth fault protection I0> (50N/51N)

The undirectional earth fault protection is to detect earth faults in low
impedance earthed networks. In high impedance earthed networks,
compensated networks and isolated networks undirectional earth
fault can be used as back-up protection.
The undirectional earth fault function is sensitive to the fundamental
frequency component of the residual current 3I0. The attenuation of
the third harmonic is more than 60 dB. Whenever this fundamental
value exceeds the user's pick-up setting of a particular stage, this
stage picks up and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation
remains on longer than the user's operation time delay setting, a trip
signal is issued.
Figure 6.16: Block diagram of the earth fault stage I0>
Figure 6.17: Block diagram of the earth fault stages I0>>, I0>>> and I0>>>>
Figure 6.16 shows a functional block diagram of the I0> earth

overcurrent stage with definite time and inverse time operation time.
Figure 6.17 shows a functional block diagram of the I0>>, I0>>> and
I0>>>> earth fault stages with definite time operation delay.
V300/en M/A002 109

6.14 Earth fault protection I0> (50N/51N) 6 Protection functions
Input signal selection

Each stage can be connected to supervise any of the following inputs
and signals:
• Input I01 for all networks other than rigidly earthed.
• Calculated signal I0Calc for rigidly and low impedance earthed
networks. I0Calc = IL1 + IL2 + IL3.
Intermittent earth fault detection

Short earth faults make the protection to start (to pick up), but will
not cause a trip. (Here a short fault means one cycle or more. For
shorter than 1 ms transient type of intermittent earth faults in
compensated networks there is a dedicated stage I0T> 67NT.) When
starting happens often enough, such intermittent faults can be cleared
using the intermittent time setting.
When a new start happens within the set intermittent time, the
operation delay counter is not cleared between adjacent faults and
finally the stage will trip.
Four or six independent undirectional earth fault overcurrent

stages
There are four separately adjustable earth fault stages: I0>, I0>>,
I0>>>, and I0>>>>. The first stage I0> can be configured for definite
time (DT) or inverse time operation characteristic (IDMT). The other
stages have definite time operation characteristic. By using the
definite delay type and setting the delay to its minimum, an
instantaneous (ANSI 50N) operation is obtained.
Inverse operation time (I0> stage only)

delays are available for the I0> stage. The inverse delay types are
described in Chapter 6.29 Inverse time operation. The device will
show a scaleable graph of the configured delay on the local panel
display.

The maximum measured secondary residual current is 10xI0N and
maximum measured phase current is 50xIN. This limits the scope of
inverse curves with high pick-up settings. Chapter 6.29 Inverse time
operation for more information.
110 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.14 Earth fault protection I0> (50N/51N)
Setting groups
inputs (communication, logic) and manually.
Table 6.21: Parameters of the undirectional earth fault stage I0> (50N/51N)
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
is a common flag for all stages and output relays,
On too. Automatically reset by a 5-minute timeout.
Io pu The supervised value according the parameter "In-
put" below.
IoCalc
IoPeak
Io> A Pick-up value scaled to primary value
Io> pu Pick-up setting relative to the parameter "Input" and Set
the corresponding CT value
DT Definite time

IEEE2, RI, PrgN
DT Definite time
Parameters
Input Io1 X1-7,8,9. See Chapter 10 Connections. Set
IoCalc IL1 + IL2 + IL3
Io1Peak X1-7,8,9. peak mode (I0φ> only).
V300/en M/A002 111

6.14 Earth fault protection I0> (50N/51N) 6 Protection functions

Intrmt s Intermittent time Set
Dly20x s Delay at 20xIon
Dly1x Delay at 1xIon
A, B, C, D, E User’s constants for standard equations. Set
Type=Parameters. See Chapter 6.29 Inverse time
operation.
Table 6.22: Parameters of the undirectional earth fault stage I0>>, I0>>>,
I0>>>> (50N/51N)
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
SgrpDI - Digital signal to select the active setting group Set
- None
Dix Digital input
Vix Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
Io pu The supervised value according the parameter “In-
put” below.
IoCalc
Io>> A Pick-up value scaled to primary value
Io>>>
Io>>>>
Io>> pu Pick-up setting relative to the parameter "Input" and Set
Io>>>
Io>>>>
112 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.15 Overvoltage protection U> (59)


There is detailed information available of the eight latest earth faults:
Time stamp, fault current, elapsed delay and setting group.
Table 6.23: Recorded values of the undirectional earth fault stages (8 latest
faults) I0>, I0>>, I0>>>, I0>>>> (50N/51N)
Flt pu Maximum earth fault current
6.15 Overvoltage protection U> (59)

The overvoltage function measures the fundamental frequency
component of the line-to-line voltages regardless of the voltage
measurement mode (Chapter 4.9 Voltage measurement modes). By
using line-to-line voltages any phase-to-ground over-voltages during
earth faults have no effect. (The earth fault protection functions will
take care of earth faults.) Whenever any of these three line-to-line
voltages exceeds the user's pick-up setting of a particular stage, this
stage picks up and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation
remains on longer than the user's operation time delay setting, a trip
signal is issued.
In rigidly earthed 4-wire networks with loads between phase and
neutral overvoltage protection may be needed for phase-to-ground
voltages, too. In such applications the programmable stages can be
used. Chapter 6.28 Programmable stages (99)

There are three separately adjustable stages: U>, U>> and U>>>.
All the stages can be configured for definite time (DT) operation
characteristic.
V300/en M/A002 113

6.15 Overvoltage protection U> (59) 6 Protection functions
Configurable release delay

The U> stage has a settable release delay, which enables detecting
intermittent faults. This means that the time counter of the protection
function does not reset immediately after the fault is cleared, but
resets after the release delay has elapsed. If the fault appears again
before the release delay time has elapsed, the delay counter
continues from the previous value. This means that the function will
eventually trip if faults are occurring often enough.
Configurable hysteresis
The dead band is 3 % by default. It means that an overvoltage fault
is regarded as a fault until the voltage drops below 97 % of the pick
up setting. In a sensitive alarm application a smaller hysteresis is
needed. For example if the pick up setting is about only 2 % above
the normal voltage level, hysteresis must be less than 2 %. Otherwise
the stage will not release after fault.
Setting groups
Figure 6.18 shows the functional block diagram of the overvoltage
function stages U>, U>> and U>>>.
Figure 6.18: Block diagram of the three-phase overvoltage stages U>, U>> and
U>>>
Table 6.24: Parameters of the overvoltage stages U>, U>>, U>>>

Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
114 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.16 Zero sequence voltage protection U0> (59N)

- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
Umax V The supervised value. Max. of U12, U23 and U31
U>, U>>, U>>> V Pick-up value scaled to primary value
U>, U>>, U>>> % Un Pick-up setting relative to UN Set
t>, t>>, t>>> s Definite operation time Set
RlsDly s Release delay (U> stage only) Set
Hyster 3 (default) % Dead band size i.e. hysteresis Set

Time stamp, fault voltage, elapsed delay and setting group.
Table 6.25: Recorded values of the overvoltage stages (8 latest faults) U>,
U>>, U>>>
Flt % Un Maximum fault voltage
6.16 Zero sequence voltage protection U0>

(59N)
The zero sequence voltage protection is used as unselective backup
for earth faults and also for selective earth fault protections for motors
having a unit transformer between the motor and the busbar.
This function is sensitive to the fundamental frequency component
of the zero sequence voltage. The attenuation of the third harmonic
V300/en M/A002 115

6.16 Zero sequence voltage protection U0> (59N) 6 Protection functions
is more than 60 dB. This is essential, because 3n harmonics exist

between the neutral point and earth also when there is no earth fault.
Whenever the measured value exceeds the user's pick-up setting
of a particular stage, this stage picks up and a start signal is issued.
If the fault situation remains on longer than the user's operation time
delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
Measuring the zero sequence voltage

The zero sequence voltage is either measured with three voltage
transformers (e.g. broken delta connection), one voltage transformer
between the motor's neutral point and earth (See Chapter 4.9 Voltage
measurement modes):
• U0: The zero sequence voltage is measured with voltage
transformer(s) for example using a broken delta connection. The
setting values are relative to the VT0 secondary voltage defined
in configuration.
NOTE: The U0 signal must be connected according the connection diagram

in order to get a correct polarization. Please note that actually the
negative U0, -U0, is to be connected to the relay.
Two independent stages

There are two separately adjustable stages: U0> and U0>>. Both
stages can be configured for definite time (DT) operation
characteristic.
The zero sequence voltage function comprises two separately
adjustable zero sequence voltage stages (stage U0> and U0>>).
Setting groups
There are two settings groups available for both stages. Switching
Figure 6.19: Block diagram of the zero sequence voltage stages U0> and U0>>
116 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.16 Zero sequence voltage protection U0> (59N)
Table 6.26: Parameters of the residual overvoltage stages U0>, U0>>

Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
Uo % The supervised value relative to Un/ 3
Uo>, Uo>> % Pick-up value relative to Un/ 3 Set
t>, t>> s Definite operation time Set

Time stamp, fault voltage, elapsed delay and setting group.
Table 6.27: Recorded values of the residual overvoltage stages U0>, U0>>
Flt % Fault voltage relative to Un/ 3
V300/en M/A002 117

6.17 Frequent start protection N> (66) 6 Protection functions
6.17 Frequent start protection N> (66)

The simplest way to start an asynchronous motor is just to switch
the stator windings to the supply voltages. However every such start
will heat up the motor considerably because the initial currents are
significantly above the rated current.
If the motor manufacturer has defined the maximum number of starts
within on hour or/and the minimum time between two consecutive
starts this stage is easy to apply to prevent too frequent starts.
When current has been less than 10% of IMOT and then exceeds
IST>, the situation is recognized as a start.
When the current is less than 10 % of IMOT, the motor is regarded
as stopped.
The stage will give a start signal when the second last start has been
done. The trip signal is normally activated and released when there
are no starts left. Figure 6.20 shows an application.
+ +
- -
STOP START
Open Close
coil coil
M
+
VAMP relay
Output matrix
T1 A1
I> start
I> trip
N> alarm
N> motor start inhibit
NStageAppl_40
Figure 6.20: Application for preventing too frequent starting, using the N> stage.
The relay A1 has been configured to be “normal closed”. The start is just an alarm
telling that there is only one start left at the moment.
118 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.18 Directional phase overcurrent Iφ> (67)
Table 6.28: Parameters of the frequent start protection N> (66)

Measured value Mot strs Motor starts in last hour
T Min Elapsed time from motor start
Setting values Sts/h Max. starts in one hour
Interval Min Min. interval between two consecutive starts
Descr 1StartLeft 1 start left, activates the N> start signal
MaxStarts Max. start trip, activates the N> trip signal
Interval Min. interval between two consecutive starts has not
yet been elapsed, activates the N> trip signal
Tot Mot Strs Number of total motor starts
Mot Strs/h Number of motor starts in last hour
El. Time from mot Strt Min Elapsed time from the last motor start
6.18 Directional phase overcurrent Iφ> (67)

Directional overcurrent protection can be used for directional short
circuit protection. Typical applications are
• Short circuit protection of two parallel cables or overhead lines
in a radial network.
• Short circuit protection of a looped network with single feeding
point.
• Short circuit protection of a two-way feeder, which usually
supplies loads but is used in special cases as an incoming feeder.
• Directional overcurrent protection in low impedance earthed
networks. Please note that in this case the device has to
connected to line-to-neutral voltages instead of line-to-line
voltages. In other words the voltage measurement mode has to
be "3LN" (See chapter Chapter 4.9 Voltage measurement
modes).
The stages are sensitive to the amplitude of the highest fundamental
frequency current of the three measured phase currents.
In phase to phase and in three phase faults, the fault angle is
determinded by using angles between positive sequence of currents
and voltages. In phase to ground faults, the fault angle is determinded
by using fault phase current and the healthy line to line voltage. For
details of power direction, see Chapter 4.10 Direction of power and
current.
A typical characteristic is shown in Figure 6.21. The base angle
setting is –30°. The stage will pick up, if the tip of the three phase
current phasor gets into the grey area.
V300/en M/A002 119

6.18 Directional phase overcurrent Iφ> (67) 6 Protection functions
NOTE: If the maximum possible earth fault current is greater than the used
most sensitive directional over current setting, the device has to be
connected to the line-to-neutral voltages instead of line-to-line
voltages in order to get the right direction for earth faults, too. (For
networks having the maximum possible earth fault current less than
the over current setting, use 67N, the directional earth fault stages.)
Im +90°
2°
ind. +cap.
SET
VA LUE
0° +res.
res. I LOAD Re
TRIP AREA
BASE ANGLE = °
I FAULT
cap. +ind.
90° ldir_angle2
Figure 6.21: Example of protection area of the directional overcurrent function.
Three modes are available: dirctional, non-direct, and

directional+back-up (Figure 6.22). In the non-directional mode the
stage is acting just like an ordinary overcurrent 50/51 stage.
Directional+back-up mode works the same way as directional mode
but it has undirectional back-up protection in case a close-up fault
will force all voltages to about zero. After the angle memory hold
time, the direction would be lost. Basically the directional+backup
mode is required when operation time is set longer than 0.5 s and
no other undirectional back-up protection is in use.
120 V300/en M/A002

+90° +90°
ind. +cap. ind. +cap.
2°
DIRECTIONAL NON-DIRECTIONAL
SET SET
VA LUE 0° VA LUE 0°
res. +res. res. +res.

BASE ANGLE = °
TRIP AREA TRIP AREA
cap. +ind. cap. +ind.
90° 90° ldir_modeA 15%
Figure 6.22: Difference between directional mode and non-directional mode. The
grey area is the trip region.
An example of bi-directional operation characteristic is shown in

Figure 6.23. The right side stage in this example is the stage Iφ> and
the left side is Iφ>>. The base angle setting of the Iφ> is 0° and the
base angle of Iφ>> is set to –180°.
+90°
ind. +cap.
4°
I φ >> TRIP AREA
SET SET
VA LUE VA LUE 0°
res. +res.
BASE ANGLE = °
BASE ANGLE = 18 °
I φ > TRIP AREA
cap. +ind.
90° ldir_modeBiDir 15%
Figure 6.23: Bi-directional application with two stages Iφ> and Iφ>>.
When any of the three phase currents exceeds the setting value and
– in directional mode – the phase angle including the base angle is
within the active ±88° wide sector, the stage picks up and issues a
start signal. If this fault situation remains on longer than the delay
setting, a trip signal is issued.
V300/en M/A002 121

Four independent stages

There are four separately adjustable stages available: Iφ>, Iφ>>,
Iφ>>> and Iφ>>>>.

Stages Iφ> and Iφ>> can be configured for definite time or inverse
time characteristic. See Chapter 6.29 Inverse time operation for
details of the available inverse delays. Stages Iφ>>> and Iφ>>>>
have definite time (DT) operation delay. The device will show a
scaleable graph of the configured delay on the local panel display.

The maximum measured secondary current is 50xIN. This limits the
scope of inverse curves with high pick-up settings. See Chapter 6.29
Inverse time operation for more information.
Cold load and inrush current handling

See Chapter 6.26 Cold load pick-up and magnetising inrush
Setting groups
Table 6.29: Parameters of the directional overcurrent stages Iφ>, Iφ>> (67)
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
122 V300/en M/A002


Iφ>, Iφ>> A Pick-up value scaled to primary value
Iφ>, Iφ>> xImode Pick-up setting Set
DT Definite time
IEC, IEEE, Inverse time. See Chapter 6.29 Inverse time operation.
IEEE2, RI, PrgN
DT Definite time
NI, VI, EI, LTI, Inverse time. See Chapter 6.29 Inverse time operation.
Parameters
Dly20x s Delay at 20xIset
Mode Dir Directional mode (67) Set
Undir Undirectional (50/51)
Dir+back-up Directional and undirectional back-up

Offset ° Angle offset in degrees Set
U/I angle ° Measured U1/I1 angle
U1 % Un Measured positive sequence voltage
A, B, C, D, E User’s constants for standard equations. Type=Parameters. Set
See Chapter 6.29 Inverse time operation.
V300/en M/A002 123

Table 6.30: Parameters of the directional overcurrent stages Iφ>>>, Iφ>>>>

(67)
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
SgrpDI Digital signal to select the active setting group Set
- None
Dix Digital input
Vix Virtual input
Vox Virtual output
Force Off Force flag for status forcing for test purposes. Set
This is a common flag for all stages and output
On relays, too. Automatically reset by a 5-minute
timeout.
Iφ>>>> A Pick-up value scaled to primary value
Iφ>>>>>
Iφ>>>> xImode Pick-up setting Set
Iφ>>>>>
t>>> s Definite operation time (for definite time only) Set
t>>>>
Mode Dir Directional (67) Set
Undir Undirectional (50/51)
Dir+back-up Directional and undirectional back-up

Offset ° Angle offset in degrees Set
U/I angle ° Measured U1/I1 angle
U1 % Un Measured positive sequence voltage

Time stamp, fault type, fault current, load current before the fault,
elapsed delay and setting group.
124 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.19 Directional earth fault protection I0φ> (67N)
Table 6.31: Recorded values of the directional overcurrent stages (8 latest

faults) Iφ>, Iφ>>, Iφ>>>, Iφ>>>> (67)
Type - Fault type
1-N Ground fault
2-N Ground fault
3-N Ground fault
1-2 Two phase fault
2-3 Two phase fault
3-1 Two phase fault
1-2-3 Three phase fault
1-2-N Two phase fault with earth contact
1-2-3-N Three phase fault with earth contact

Flt xIn Maximum fault current
Load xIn 1 s average phase currents before the fault
Angle ° Fault angle in degrees
U1 xUn Positive sequence voltage during fault
SetGrp 1, 2 Active setting group during fault
Direction mode Dir, undir, dir+back-up
6.19 Directional earth fault protection I0φ>

(67N)
The directional earth fault protection is used for earth faults in
networks or motors where a selective and sensitive earth fault
protection is needed and in applications with varying network
structure and length.
The device consists of versatile protection functions for earth fault
protection in various network types.
The function is sensitive to the fundamental frequency component
of the residual current and zero sequence voltage and the phase
angle between them. The attenuation of the third harmonic is more
than 60 dB. Whenever the size of I0 and U0 and the phase angle
between I0 and U0 fulfils the pick-up criteria, the stage picks up and
a start signal is issued. If the fault situation remains on longer than
the user's operation time delay setting, a trip signal is issued.
V300/en M/A002 125

6.19 Directional earth fault protection I0φ> (67N) 6 Protection functions
Polarization
The negative zero sequence voltage -U0 is used for polarization i.e.
the angle reference for I0. The -U0 voltage is measured via energizing
input U0 or it is calculated from the phase voltages internally
depending on the selected voltage measurement mode (see
Chapter 4.9 Voltage measurement modes):
• 3LN/LLY and 3LN/LNY: the zero sequence voltage is calculated
from the phase voltages and therefore any separate zero
sequence voltage transformers are not needed. The setting
values are relative to the configured voltage transformer (VT)
voltage/ 3 .
• 3LN+U0: the zero sequence voltage is measured with voltage
transformer(s) for example using a broken delta connection. The
setting values are relative to the VT0 secondary voltage defined
in configuration.
Modes for different network types

The available modes are:
• ResCap
This mode consists of two sub modes, Res and Cap. A digital
signal can be used to dynamically switch between these two sub
modes. This feature can be used with compensated networks,
when the Petersen coil is temporarily switched off.
- Res
The stage is sensitive to the resistive component of the
selected I0 signal. This mode is used with compensated
networks (resonant grounding) and networks earthed with
a high resistance. Compensation is usually done with a
Petersen coil between the neutral point of the main
transformer and earth. In this context "high resistance"
means, that the fault current is limited to be less than the
rated phase current. The trip area is a half plane as drawn
in Figure 6.25. The base angle is usually set to zero degrees.
- Cap
The stage is sensitive to the capacitive component of the
selected I0 signal. This mode is used with unearthed
networks. The trip area is a half plane as drawn in
Figure 6.25. The base angle is usually set to zero degrees.
• Sector
This mode is used with networks earthed with a small
resistance. In this context "small" means, that a fault current
may be more than the rated phase currents. The trip area has a
shape of a sector as drawn in Figure 6.26. The base angle is
usually set to zero degrees or slightly on the lagging inductive
side (i.e. negative angle).
126 V300/en M/A002

• Undir
This mode makes the stage equal to the undirectional stage I0>.
The phase angle and U0 amplitude setting are discarded. Only
the amplitude of the selected I0 input is supervised.
Input signal selection

Each stage can be connected to supervise any of the following inputs
and signals:
• Calculated signal I0Calc for rigidly and low impedance earthed
networks. I0Calc = IL1 + IL2 + IL3 = 3I0.
Intermittent earth fault detection

Short earth faults make the protection to start (to pick up), but will
not cause a trip. (Here a short fault means one cycle or more. For
shorter than 1 ms transient type of intermittent earth faults in
compensated networks there is a dedicated stage I0T> 67NT.) When
starting happens often enough, such intermittent faults can be cleared
using the intermittent time setting.
When a new start happens within the set intermittent time, the
finally the stage will trip.
Two independent stages

There are two separately adjustable stages: I0φ> and I0φ>>. Both
the stages can be configured for definite time delay (DT) or inverse
time delay operation time.

delays are available for both stages I0φ> and I0φ>>. The inverse
delay types are described in Chapter 6.29 Inverse time operation.
The device will show a scaleable graph of the configured delay on
the local panel display.

The maximum measured secondary residual current is 10xI0N and
maximum measured phase current is 50xIN. This limits the scope of
inverse curves with high pick-up settings. See Chapter 6.29 Inverse
time operation for more information.
V300/en M/A002 127

Setting groups
Figure 6.24: Block diagram of the directional earth fault stages I0φ> and I0φ>>
Figure 6.25: Operation characteristic of the directional earth fault protection in Res
or Cap mode. Res mode can be used with compensated networks and Cap mode
is used with ungrounded networks.
128 V300/en M/A002

Figure 6.26: Two example of operation characteristics of the directional earth fault
stages in sector mode. The drawn I0 phasor in both figures is inside the trip area.
The angle offset and half sector size are user’s parameters.
Table 6.32: Parameters of the directional earth fault stages I0φ>, I0φ>> (67N)
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
Io pu The supervised value according the parameter "In-
put" below.
IoCalc
(I0φ> only)
IoPeak
IoRes pu Resistive part of I0 (only when "InUse"=Res)
IoCap pu Capacitive part of I0 (only when "InUse"=Cap)
Ioφ> A Pick-up value scaled to primary value
V300/en M/A002 129


Ioφ> pu Pick-up setting relative to the parameter “Input” and Set
Uo> % Pick-up setting for U0 Set
Uo % Measured U0
DT Definite time

IEEE2, RI, PrgN
Tyep - Delay type. Set
DT Definite time
Parameters
Mode ResCap High impedance earthed nets Set
Sector Low impedance earthed nets
Undir Undirectional mode

Offset ° Angle offset (MTA) for RecCap and Sector modes Set
Sector Default = 88 ±° Half sector size of the trip area on both sides of the Set
offset angle
ChCtrl Res/Cap control in mode ResCap Set
Res Fixed to Resistive characteristic
Cap Fixed to Capacitive characteristic
DIx Controlled by digital input
VI1..4 Controlled by virtual input
InUse Selected submode in mode ResCap.
- Mode is not ResCap
Res Submode = resistive
Cap Submode = capacitive
Io1Peak X1-7,8,9 peak mode (I0φ> only)
Intrmt s Intermittent time Set
Dly20x s Delay at 20xI0N
A, B, C, D, E User's constants for standard equations. Set
Type=Parameters. See Chapter 6.29 Inverse time
operation.
130 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.20 Intermittent transient earth fault protection I0T> (67NT)

There is detailed information available of the eight latest earth faults:
Time stamp, fault current, elapsed delay and setting group.
Table 6.33: Recorded values of the directional earth fault stages (8 latest
faults) I0φ>, I0φ>> (67N)
Flt pu Maximum earth fault current
Resistive part of I0 (only when "InUse"=Res)
Capacitive part of I0 (only when "InUse"=Cap)

Angle ° Fault angle of I0 -U0 = 0°
Uo % Max. U0 voltage during the fault
6.20 Intermittent transient earth fault

protection I0T> (67NT)
NOTE: This function is available only when voltage measurement modes is
U0.
The directional intermittent transient earth fault protection is used to

detect short intermittent transient faults in compensated cable
networks. The transient faults are self extinguished at some zero
crossing of the transient part of the fault current IFault and the fault
duration is typically only 0.1 ms ... 1 ms. Such short intermittent faults
can not be correctly recognized by normal directional earth fault
function using only the fundamental frequency components of I0 and
U0.
Although a single transient fault usually self extinguishes within less
than one millisecond, in most cases a new fault happens when the
phase-to-earth voltage of the faulty phase has recovered
(Figure 6.27).
V300/en M/A002 131

6.20 Intermittent transient earth fault protection I0T> (67NT) 6 Protection functions
Figure 6.27: Typical phase to earth voltages, residual current of the faulty feeder
and the zero sequence voltage U0 during two transient earth faults in phase L1.
In this case the network is compensated.
Direction algorithm
The function is sensitive to the instantaneous sampled values of the
residual current and zero sequence voltage. The selected voltage
measurement mode has to include a direct -U0 measurement.
I0 pick-up sensitivity
The sampling time interval of the relay is 625 μs at 50 Hz (32
samples/cycle). The I0 current spikes can be quite short compared
to this sampling interval. Fortunately the current spikes in cable
networks are high and while the anti-alias filter of the relay is
attenuates the amplitude, the filter also makes the pulses wider.
Thus, when the current pulses are high enough, it is possible to
detect pulses, which have duration of less than twenty per cent of
the sampling interval. Although the measured amplitude can be only
a fraction of the actual peak amplitude it doesn't disturb the direction
detection, because the algorithm is more sensitive to the sign and
timing of the I0 transient than sensitive to the absolute amplitude of
the transient. Thus a fixed value is used as a pick up level for the I0.
Co-ordination with U0> back up protection

Especially in a fully compensated situation, the zero sequence voltage
back up protection stage U0> for the bus may not release between
consecutive faults and the U0> might finally do an unselective trip if
the intermittent transient stage I0T> doesn't operate fast enough. The
actual operation time of the I0T> stage is very dependent on the
132 V300/en M/A002

behaviour of the fault and the intermittent time setting. To make the
co-ordination between U0> and I0T> more simple, the start signal of
the transient stage I0T> in an outgoing feeder can be used to block
the U0> backup protection.
Co-ordination with the normal directional earth fault protection

based on fundamental frequency signals
The intermittent transient earth fault protection stage I0T> should
always be used together with the normal directional earth fault
protection stages I0φ>, I0φ>>. The transient stage I0T> may in worst
case detect the start of a steady earth fault in wrong direction, but
will not trip because the peak value of a steady state sine wave I0
signal must also exceed the corresponding base frequency
component's peak value in order to make the I0T> to trip.
The operation time of the transient stage I0T> should be lower than
the settings of any directional earth fault stage to avoid any
unnecessary trip from the I0φ>, I0φ>> stages .The start signal of the
I0T> stage can be also used to block I0φ>, I0φ>> stages of all paralell
feeders.
Auto reclosing
The start signal of any I0φ> stage initiating auto reclosing (AR) can
be used to block the I0T> stage to avoid the I0T> stage with a long
intermittent setting to interfere with the AR cycle in the middle of
discrimination time.
Usually the I0T> stage itself is not used to initiate any AR. For
transient faults the AR will not help, because the fault phenomena
itself already includes repeating self extinguishing.
Intermittent time
Single transient faults make the protection to pick up, but will not
cause trip if the stage has time to release between to successive
faults. When starting happens often enough, such intermittent faults
can be cleared using the intermittent time setting.
When a new fault happens within the set intermittent time, the
finally the stage will trip. A single transient fault is enough to start
the stage and increase the delay counter by 20 ms. For example if
the operating time is 140 ms, and the time between two peaks does
not exceed the intermittent time setting, then the seventh peak will
cause a trip (Figure 6.29).
Operation time setting and the actual operation time

When the algorithm detects the direction of the fault outwards from
the bus, the stage picks up and the operation delay counter is
incremented with 20 ms and a start signal is issued. If the time
V300/en M/A002 133
between successive faults is less than 40 ms, a trip signal is issued

when the operation time is full.
When the time between successive faults is more than 40 ms, the
stage will release between the faults and the delay counting is
restarted from zero for every single fault and no trip will be issued.
For such cases the intermittent setting can be used. Figure 6.28
shows an example of how the intermittent setting works. The upper
start and trip signals are a case with zero intermittent setting. The
lower signals are another case with intermittent setting 0.12 s. The
operation time setting is 0.14 s in both cases corresponding to seven
20 ms time slots with faults.
The time between the second and the third fault exceeds the release
time + intermittent time. Thus the operation delay counter is cleared
in both cases: with zero intermittent time and with 0.12 s intermittent
time.
The fourth and the next faults do occur after release time but within
release time + intermittent time. Thus the operation delay counter is
advanced at every fault in the case the intermittent time setting is
more than 100 ms (the lower status lines in the figure) and finally a
trip signal is issued at t=0.87 s.
When faults do occur more than 20 ms apart each other, every single
fault will increment the operation delay counter by 20 ms. In this
example the actual operation time starting from the third fault will be
617 ms although, the setting was 140 ms. In case the intermittent
setting would have been 0.2 s or more, the two first faults had been
included and a trip would have issued at t=0.64 s.
134 V300/en M/A002

Figure 6.28: Effect of the intermittent time parameter. The operation delay setting
is 0.14 s = 7x20 ms. The upper start and trip status lines are for a case with the
intermittent time set to zero. No trip will happen. The lower start and trip status
lines show another case with intermittent time setting 0.12 s. In this case a trip
signal will be issued at t=0.87 s.
Setting groups
groups can be controlled by digital inputs, virtual inputs (mimic
display, communication, logic) and manually.
Figure 6.29: Block diagram of the directional intermittent transient earth fault stage
I0T>.
V300/en M/A002 135

Table 6.34: Parameters of the directional intermittent transient earth fault

stage I0T> (67NT)
Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
On too. Automatically reset after a five minute timeout.
Io1 pu The detected I0 value according the parameter "In-
put" below.
Io2
Uo % The measured U0 value.
U0N = 100 %
Uo> % U0 pick up level. U0N = 100 % Set
t> s Operation time. Actually the number of cycles includ- Set
ing faults x 20 ms. When the time between faults
exceeds 20 ms, the actual operation time will be
longer.
Io input Io1Peak I01 Connectors X1-7,8,9 Set
Intrmt s Intermittent time. When the next fault occurs within Set
this time, the delay counting continues from the
previous value.

There is detailed information available of the eight latest detected
faults: Time stamp, U0 voltage, elapsed delay and setting group.
136 V300/en M/A002

Table 6.35: Recorded values of the directional intermittent transient earth

fault stage (8 latest faults) I0T> (67NT)
Flt pu Maximum detected earth fault current
Uo % Max. U0 voltage during the fault
V300/en M/A002 137

6.21 Magnetishing inrush If2 > (68F2) 6 Protection functions
6.21 Magnetishing inrush If2 > (68F2)

This stage is mainly used to block other stages. The ratio between
the second harmonic component and the fundamental frequency
component is measured on all the phase currents. When the ratio
in any phase exceeds the setting value, the stage gives a start signal.
After a settable delay, the stage gives a trip signal.
The start and trip signals can be used for blocking the other stages.
The trip delay is irrelevant if only the start signal is used for blocking.
The trip delay of the stages to be blocked must be more than 60 ms
to ensure a proper blocking.
2ndHarm
Im1
&
Im2
Im3
MAX > ts tr
Start
Block
& Register
event
Trip
t
& Register
event
Setting Delay Enable events

2.Harm
Figure 6.30: Block diagram of the magnetishing inrush stage.
Table 6.36: Setting parameters of magnetishing inrush blocking (68F2)

If2> 10…100 % 10 Setting value If2/Ifund
t_f2 0.05…300.0 s 0.05 Definite operating time
Table 6.37: Measured and recorded values of magnetishing inrush blocking

(68F2)
Measured values IL1H2. % 2. harmonic of IL1, proportional to the fundamental value of
IL1
IL2H2. % 2. harmonic of IL2
Recorded values Flt % The max. fault value
EDly % Elapsed time as compared to the set operating time; 100%
= tripping
138 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.22 Transformer over exicitation If5> (68F5)
6.22 Transformer over exicitation If5> (68F5)

Overexiting for example a transformer creates odd harmonics. This
over exicitation stage can be used detect overexcitation. This stage
can also be used to block some other stages.
The ratio between the over exicitation component and the
fundamental frequency component is measured on all the phase
currents. When the ratio in any phase exceeds the setting value, the
stage gives a start signal. After a settable delay, the stage gives a
trip signal.
The trip delay of the stages to be blocked must be more than 60 ms
to ensure a proper blocking.
Table 6.38: Setting parameters of over exicitation blocking (68F5)
If5> 10…100 % 10 Setting value If2/Ifund
t_f5 0.05…300.0 s 0.05 Definite operating time
Table 6.39: Measured and recorded values of over exicitation blocking (68F5)
Measured values IL1H5. % 5. harmonic of IL1, pro-
portional to the funda-
mental value of IL1
Recorded values Flt % The max. fault value
EDly % Elapsed time as com-
pared to the set operat-
ing time; 100% = trip-
ping
6.23 Auto-reclose function (79)

The VAMP protection relays include a sophisticated Auto-reclosing
(AR) function. The AR function is normally used in feeder protection
relays that are protecting an overhead line. Most of the overhead
line faults are temporary in nature. Even 85% can be cleared by
using the AR function.
General
The basic idea is that normal protection functions will detect the fault.
Then the protection function will trigger the AR function. After tripping
the circuit-breaker (CB), the AR function can reclose the CB.
V300/en M/A002 139

6.23 Auto-reclose function (79) 6 Protection functions
Normally, the first reclose (or shot) is so short in time that consumers
cannot notice anything. However, the fault is cleared and the feeder
will continue in normal service.
Terminology
Even though the basic principle of AR is very simple; there are a lot
of different timers and parameters that have to be set.
In VAMP relays, there are five shots. A shot consists of open time
(so called “dead” time) and close time (so called “burning” time or
discrimination time). A high-speed shot means that the dead time is
less than 1 s. The time-delayed shot means longer dead times up
to 2-3 minutes.
There are four AR lines. A line means an initialization signal for AR.
Normally, start or trip signals of protection functions are used to
initiate an AR-sequence. Each AR line has a priority. AR1 has the
highest and AR4 has the lowest one. This means that if two lines
are initiated at the same time, AR will follow only the highest priority
line. A very typical configuration of the lines is that the instantaneous
overcurrent stage will initiate the AR1 line, time-delayed overcurrent
stage the AR2 line and earth-fault protection will use lines AR3 and
AR4.
For more information about auto-reclosing, please refer to our
application note “Auto-reclosing function in VAMP protection relays”.
The auto-reclose (AR) matrix in the following Figure 6.31 describes
the start and trip signals forwarded to the auto-reclose function.
Open CB
Close CB
AR-matrix Ready Start delay Dead time Discrimination Reclaim time

(Wait for time
.
.
I>>s
I>t
I>s
AR-request)
Move back to shot 1.
Critical Reclaim time succeeded.
0...300 s 0...300 s
Shot 1 AR1 In use 0...300 s 0...300 s 0...300 s 0...300 s
AR2 In use
Not in use 0...300 s 0...300 s

Shot 2 In use
continue on next shot
reclaim time,
activated during
If new AR request is
make final trip
discrimination time,
activated during
If critical signal is
Shot 3...5
Figure 6.31: Auto-reclose matrix
140 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.23 Auto-reclose function (79)
The AR matrix above defines which signals (the start and trip signals
from protection stages or digital input) are forwarded to the
auto-reclose function. In the AR function, the AR signals can be
configured to initiate the reclose sequence. Each shot from 1 to 5
has its own enabled/disabled flag. If more than one AR signal
activates at the same time, AR1 has highest priority and AR2 the
lowest. Each AR signal has an independent start delay for the shot
1. If a higher priority AR signal activates during the start delay, the
start delay setting will be changed to that of the highest priority AR
signal.
After the start delay the circuit-breaker (CB) will be opened if it is
closed. When the CB opens, a dead time timer is started. Each shot
from 1 to 5 has its own dead time setting.
After the dead time the CB will be closed and a discrimination time
timer is started. Each shot from 1 to 5 has its own discrimination time
setting. If a critical signal is activated during the discrimination time,
the AR function makes a final trip. The CB will then open and the
AR sequence is locked. Closing the CB manually clears the “locked”
state.
After the discrimination time has elapsed, the reclaim time timer
starts. If any AR signal is activated during the reclaim time or the
discrimination time, the AR function moves to the next shot. The
reclaim time setting is common for every shot.
If the reclaim time runs out, the auto-reclose sequence is successfully
executed and the AR function moves to ready -state and waits for a
new AR request in shot 1.
A trip signal from the protection stage can be used as a backup.
Configure the start signal of the protection stage to initiate the AR
function. If something fails in the AR function, the trip signal of the
protection stage will open the CB. The delay setting for the protection
stage should be longer than the AR start delay and discrimination
time.
If a critical signal is used to interrupt an AR sequence, the
discrimination time setting should be long enough for the critical
stage, usually at least 100 ms.
Manual closing
When CB is closed manually with the local panel, remote bus, digital
inputs etc, the reclaim-state is activated. Within the reclaim time all
AR requests are ignored. It is up to protection stages to take care of
tripping. Trip signals of protection stages must be connected to a
trip relay in the output matrix.
V300/en M/A002 141

Manual opening
Manual CB open command during AR sequence will stop the
sequence and leaves the CB open.
Reclaim time setting

• Use shot specific reclaim time: No
Reclaim time setting defines reclaim time between different shots
during sequence and also reclaim time after manual closing.
• Use shot specific reclaim time: Yes
Reclaim time setting defines reclaim time only for manual control.
Reclaim time between different shots is defined by shot specific
reclaim time settings.
Support for 2 circuit breakers

AR function can be configured to handle 2 controllable objects. Object
1 is always used as CB1 and any other controllable object can be
used as CB2. The object selection for CB2 is made with Breaker 2
object setting. Switching between the two objects is done with a
digital input, virtual input or virtual output. AR controls CB2 when the
input defined by Input for selecting CB2 setting is active. Control
is changed to another object only if the current object is not close.
Blocking of AR shots
Each AR shot can be blocked with a digital input, virtual input or
virtual output. Blocking input is selected with Block setting. When
selected input is active the shot is blocked. A blocked shot is treated
like it doesn’t exist and AR sequence will jump over it. If the last shot
in use is blocked, any AR request during reclaiming of the previous
shot will cause final tripping.
Starting AR sequence
Each AR request has own separate starting delay counter. The one
which starting delay has elapsed first will be selected. If more than
one delay elapses at the same time, an AR request of the highest
priority is selected. AR1 has the highest priority and AR4 has the
lowest priority. First shot is selected according to the AR request.
Next AR opens the CB and starts counting dead time.
Starting sequence at shot 2…5 & skipping of AR shots

Each AR request line can be enabled to any combination of the 5
shots. For example making a sequence of Shot 2 and Shot 4 for
AR request 1 is done by enabling AR1 only for those two shots.
142 V300/en M/A002

NOTE: If AR sequence is started at shot 2...5 the starting delay is taken

from the discrimination time setting of the previous shot. For example
if Shot 3 is the first shot for AR2, the starting delay for this sequence
is defined by Discrimination time of Shot 2 for AR2.
Critical AR request
Critical AR request stops the AR sequence and cause final tripping.
Critical request is ignored when AR sequence is not running and
also when AR is reclaiming.
Critical request is accepted during dead time and discrimination time.
Shot active matrix signals

When starting delay has elapsed, active signal of the first shot is set.
If successful reclosing is executed at the end of the shot, the active
signal will be reset after reclaim time. If reclosing was not successful
or new fault appears during reclaim time, the active of the current
shot is reset and active signal of the next shot is set (if there are any
shots left before final trip).
AR running matrix signal

This signal indicates dead time. The signal is set after controlling CB
open. When dead time ends, the signal is reset and CB is controlled
close.
Final trip matrix signals

There are 5 final trip signals in the matrix, one for each AR request
(1…4 and critical). When final trip is generated, one of these signals
is set according to the AR request which caused the final tripping.
The final trip signal will stay active for 0.5 seconds and then resets
automatically.
DI to block AR setting
This setting is useful with an external synchro-check device. This
setting only affects re-closing the CB. Re-closing can be blocked
with a digital input, virtual input or virtual output. When the blocking
input is active, CB won’t be closed until the blocking input becomes
inactive again. When blocking becomes inactive the CB will be
controlled close immediately.
Table 6.40: Setting parameters of AR function
ARena ARon; ARoff - ARon Enabling/disabling the autoreclose
ExtSync None, - - The digital input for blocking CB close. This can be
used for Synchrocheck.
any digital input, virtual
input or virtual output
V300/en M/A002 143


AR_DI None, - - The digital input for toggling the ARena parameter

AR2grp ARon; ARoff - ARon Enabling/disabling the autoreclose for group 2
ReclT 0.02 … 300.00 s 10.00 Reclaim time setting. This is common for all the
shots.
CB Obj1...Obj6 Obj1 Breaker object in use
CB1 Obj1...Obj6 Obj1 Breaker 1 object
CB2 Obj1...Obj6 - Breaker 2 object
AutoCBSel On; Off off Enabling/disabling the auto CB selection
CB2Sel None, - The digital input for selecting the CB2.

ARreq On; Off - Off AR request event
ShotS On; Off - Off AR shot start event
ARlock On; Off - Off AR locked event
CritAr On; Off - Off AR critical signal event
ARrun On; Off - Off AR running event
FinTrp On; Off - Off AR final trip event
ReqEnd On; Off - Off AR end of request event
ShtEnd On; Off - Off AR end of shot event
CriEnd On; Off - Off AR end of critical signal event
ARUnl On; Off - Off AR release event
ARStop On; Off - Off AR stopped event
FTrEnd On; Off - Off AR final trip ready event
ARon On; Off - Off AR enabled event
ARoff On; Off - Off AR disabled event
CRITri On; Off - On AR critical final trip on event
AR1Tri On; Off - On AR AR1 final trip on event
AR2Tri On; Off - On AR AR2 final trip on event
Shot settings
DeadT 0.02 … 300.00 s 5.00 The dead time setting for this shot. This is a com-
mon setting for all the AR lines in this shot
AR1 On; Off - Off Indicates if this AR signal starts this shot
Start1 0.02 … 300.00 s 0.02 AR1 Start delay setting for this shot
Discr1 0.02 … 300.00 s 0.02 AR1 Discrimination time setting for this shot
144 V300/en M/A002


Table 6.41: Measured and recorded values of AR function

Measured or recor- Obj1 UNDEFINED; - Object 1 state
ded values
OPEN;
CLOSE;
OPEN_REQUEST;
CLOSE_REQUEST;
READY;
NOT_READY;
INFO_NOT_AVAILABLE;
FAIL
Status INIT; - AR-function state
RECLAIM_TIME;
READY;
WAIT_CB_OPEN;
WAIT_CB_CLOSE;
DISCRIMINATION_TIME;
LOCKED;
FINAL_TRIP;
CB_FAIL;
INHIBIT
Shot# 1…5 - The currently running
shot
ReclT RECLAIMTIME; - The currently running
time (or last executed)
STARTTIME;
DEADTIME;
DISCRIMINATIONTIME
SCntr - Total start counter
Fail - The counter for failed
AR shots
Shot1 * - Shot1 start counter
*) There are 5 counters available for each one of the two AR signals.
V300/en M/A002 145

Figure 6.32: Example sequence of two shots. After shot 2 the fault is cleared.
1. Current exceeds the I> setting; the start delay from shot 1 starts.
2. After the start delay, an OpenCB relay output closes.
3. A CB opens. The dead time from shot 1 starts, and the OpenCB
relay output opens.
4. The dead time from shot 1 runs out; a CloseCB output relay
closes.
5. The CB closes. The CloseCB output relay opens, and the
discrimination time from shot 1 starts. The current is still over the
I> setting.
6. The discrimination time from the shot 1 runs out; the OpenCB
relay output closes.
7. The CB opens. The dead time from shot 2 starts, and the
OpenCB relay output opens.
8. The dead time from shot 2 runs out; the CloseCB output relay
closes.
9. The CB closes. The CloseCB output relay opens, and the
discrimination time from shot 2 starts. The current is now under
I> setting.
10. Reclaim time starts. After the reclaim time the AR sequence is
successfully executed. The AR function moves to wait for a new
AR request in shot 1.
146 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.24 Frequency Protection f><, f>><< (81)
6.24 Frequency Protection f><, f>><< (81)

Frequency protection is used for load sharing, loss of mains detection
and as a backup protection for over-speeding.
The frequency function measures the frequency from the two first
voltage inputs. At least one of these two inputs must have a voltage
connected to be able to measure the frequency. Whenever the
frequency crosses the user's pick-up setting of a particular stage,
this stage picks up and a start signal is issued. If the fault situation
remains on longer than the user's operation delay setting, a trip signal
is issued. For situations, where no voltage is present an adapted
frequency is used. See Chapter 2.1 Principles of numerical protection
techniques.
Protection mode for f>< and f>><< stages

These two stages can be configured either for overfrequency or for
underfrequency.
Under voltage self blocking of underfrequency stages

The underfrequency stages are blocked when biggest of the three
line-to-line voltages is below the low voltage block limit setting. With
this common setting, LVBlk, all stages in underfrequency mode are
blocked, when the voltage drops below the given limit. The idea is
to avoid purposeless alarms, when the voltage is off.
Initial self blocking of underfrequency stages

When the biggest of the three line-to-line voltages has been below
the block limit, the under frequency stages will be blocked until the
pick-up setting has been reached.
Four independent frequency stages

There are four separately adjustable frequency stages: f><, f>><<,
f<, f<<. The two first stages can be configured for either
overfrequency or underfrequency usage. So totally four
underfrequency stages can be in use simultaneously. Using the
programmable stages even more can be implemented (chapter
Chapter 6.28 Programmable stages (99)). All the stages have definite
operation time delay (DT).
Setting groups
V300/en M/A002 147

6.24 Frequency Protection f><, f>><< (81) 6 Protection functions
Table 6.42: Parameters of the over & underfrequency stages

Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
f Hz The supervised value.
- Hz Pick-up value Set
fX Over/under stage f><. See Mode
fXX Over/under stage f>><<.
f< Under stage f<
f<< Under stage f<<

- s Definite operation time Set
tX f>< stage
tXX f>><< stage
t< f< stage
t<< f<< stage

Mode - Operation mode. (only for f>< and f>><<) Set
> Overfrequency mode
< Underfrequency mode

LVblck % Un Low limit for self blocking. This is a common setting Set
for all four stages.

Time stamp, frequency during fault, elapsed delay and setting group.
148 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.25 Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF) (81R)
Table 6.43: Recorded values of the over & under frequency stages (8 latest
faults) f><, f>><<, f<, f<<
Flt Hz Faulty frequency
6.25 Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF)

(81R)
Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF or df/dt) function is used for
fast load shedding, to speed up operation time in over- and
under-frequency situations and to detect loss of grid. For example
a centralized dedicated load shedding relay can be omitted and
replaced with distributed load shedding, if all outgoing feeders are
equipped with VAMP devices.
A special application for ROCOF is to detect loss of grid (loss of
mains, islanding). The more the remaining load differs from the load
before the loss of grid, the better the ROCOF function detects the
situation.
Frequency behaviour during load switching

Load switching and fault situations may generate change in
frequency. A load drop may increase the frequency and increasing
load may decrease the frequency, at least for a while. The frequency
may also oscillate after the initial change. After a while the control
system of any local generator may drive the frequency back to the
original value. However, in case of a heavy short circuit fault or in
case the new load exceeds the generating capacity, the average
frequency keeps on decreasing.
V300/en M/A002 149

6.25 Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF) (81R) 6 Protection functions
Figure 6.33: An example of definite time df/dt operation time. At 0.6 s, which is
the delay setting, the average slope exceeds the setting 0.5 Hz/s and a trip signal
is generated.
Setting groups
Description of ROCOF implementation

The ROCOF function is sensitive to the absolute average value of
the time derivate of the measured frequency |df/dt|. Whenever the
measured frequency slope |df/dt| exceeds the setting value for 80
ms time, the ROCOF stage picks up and issues a start signal after
an additional 60 ms delay. If the average |df/dt|, since the pick-up
moment, still exceeds the setting, when the operation delay time has
elapsed, a trip signal is issued. In this definite time mode the second
delay parameter "minimum delay, tMIN" must be equal to the operation
delay parameter "t".
If the frequency is stable for about 80 ms and the time t has already
elapsed without a trip, the stage will release.
ROCOF and frequency over and under stages

One difference between over-/under-frequency and df/dt function is
the speed. In many cases a df/dt function can predict an
overfrequency or underfrequency situation and is thus faster than a
simple overfrequency or under¬frequency function. However, in most
cases a standard overfrequency and underfrequency stages must
be used together with ROCOF to ensure tripping also in case the
frequency drift is slower than the slope setting of ROCOF.
150 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.25 Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF) (81R)
Definite operation time characteristics

Figure 6.33 shows an example where the df/dt pick-up value is 0.5
Hz/s and the delay settings are t=0.60 s and tMIN=0.60 s. Equal times
t = tMIN will give a definite time delay characteristics. Although the
frequency slope fluctuates the stage will not release but continues
to calculate the average slope since the initial pick-up. At the defined
operation time, t = 0.6 s, the average slope is 0.75 Hz/s. This exceeds
the setting, and the stage will trip.
At slope settings less than 0.7 Hz/s the fastest possible operation
time is limited according the Figure 6.34
Figure 6.34: At very sensitive slope settings the fastest possible operation time is
limited according the figure.
Inverse operation time characteristics

By setting the second delay parameter tMIN smaller than the
operational delay t, an inverse type of operation time characteristics
is achieved.
Figure 6.36 shows one example, where the frequency behaviour is
the same as in the first figure, but the tMIN setting is 0.15 s instead
of being equal with t. The operation time depends of the measured
average slope according the following equation.
V300/en M/A002 151

6.25 Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF) (81R) 6 Protection functions
tTRIP = Resulting operation time (seconds).

Equation 6.4:
sSET = df/dt i.e. slope setting (hertz/seconds).
s ⋅t tSET = Operation time setting t (seconds).

t TRIP = SET SET
s s = Measured average frequency slope (hertz/seconds).
The minimum operation time is always limited by the setting

parameter tMIN. In the example of the fastest operation time, 0.15 s,
is achieved when the slope is 2 Hz/s or more. The leftmost curve in
Figure 6.35 shows the inverse characteristics with the same settings
as in Figure 6.36.
Figure 6.35: Three examples of possible inverse df/dt operation time characteristics.
The slope and operation delay settings define the knee points on the left. A
common setting for tMin has been used in these three examples. This minimum
delay parameter defines the knee point positions on the right.
152 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.26 Cold load pick-up and magnetising inrush
FREQUENCY ROCOF3_v3
(Hz)
50.0 Settings:
df/dt = 0.5 Hz/s
t = 0.60 s
1.
0
0.5 tMin = 0.15 s
H
Hz
z/
/s
s
0.7
2.0
5 Hz
Hz/
/s TIME
49.7
s
(s)
0.00 0.15 0.30 0.45 0.60
START
TRIP
Figure 6.36: An example of inverse df/dt operation time. The time to trip will be
0.3 s, although the setting is 0.6 s, because the average slope 1 Hz/s is steeper
than the setting value 0.5 Hz/s.
Table 6.44: Setting parameters of df/dt stage

df/dt 0.2 ... 10.0 Hz/s 5.0 df/dt pick-up setting
t> 0.14 … 10.0 s 0.50 df/dt operational delay
tMin> 0.14 … 10.0 s 0.50 df/dt minimum delay
Table 6.45: Measured and recorded values of df/dt stage

Measured value f Hz Frequency
df/dt Hz/s Frequency rate of change
Recorded values SCntr - Start counter (Start) reading
TCntr - Trip counter (Trip) reading
Flt %Hz/s Max rate of change fault value
EDly % Elapsed time as compared to the
set operating time, 100% = tripping
6.26 Cold load pick-up and magnetising

inrush
Cold load pick-up
A situation is regarded as cold load when all the three phase currents
have been less than a given idle value and then at least one of the
currents exceeds a given pick-up level within 80 ms. In such case
V300/en M/A002 153

6.26 Cold load pick-up and magnetising inrush 6 Protection functions
the cold load detection signal is activated for a given time. This signal
is available for output matrix and blocking matrix. Using virtual outputs
of the output matrix setting group control is possible.
Application for cold load detection

Right after closing a circuit breaker a given amount of overload can
be allowed for a given limited time to take care of concurrent
thermostat controlled loads. Cold load pick-up function does this for
example by selecting a more coarse setting group for over-current
stage(s). It is also possible to use the cold load detection signal to
block any set of protection stages for a given time.
Magnetising inrush detection

Magnetising inrush detection is quite similar with the cold load
detection but it does also include a condition for second harmonic
relative content of the currents. When all phase currents have been
less than a given idle value and then at least one of them exceeds
a given pick-up level within 80 ms and the ratio 2nd harmonic ratio
to fundamental frequency, If2/If1, of at least one phase exceeds the
given setting, the inrush detection signal is activated. This signal is
available for output matrix and blocking matrix. Using virtual outputs
of the output matrix setting group control is possible.
By setting the Pickupf2 parameter for If2/If1 to zero, the inrush signal
will behave equally with the cold load pick-up signal.
Application for inrush current detection

The inrush current of transformers usually exceeds the pick-up setting
of sensitive overcurrent stages and contains a lot of even harmonics.
Right after closing a circuit breaker the pick-up and tripping of
sensitive overcurrent stages can be avoided by selecting a more
coarse setting group for the appropriate over-current stage with
inrush detect signal. It is also possible to use the detection signal to
block any set of protection stages for a given time.
NOTE: Inrush detection is based on FFT - calculation which recuires full

cycle of data for analyzing the harmonic content. Therefore when
using inrush blocking function the cold load pick up starting conditions
are used for activating the inrush blocking when the current rise is
noticed. If in the signal is found second harmonic component after
1st cycle the blocking is continued, otherwise 2nd harmonic based
blocking signal is released. Inrush blocking is recommended to be
used into time delayed overcurrent stages while non blocked instant
overcurrent stage is set to 20 % higher than expected inrush current.
By this scheme fast reaction time in short circuit faults during the
energization can be achieved while time delayed stages are blocked
by inrush function.
154 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.26 Cold load pick-up and magnetising inrush
1 3 4
Pick-up
Idle
Cold
load
1. No activation because the current has not been under the set
IDLE current.
2. Current dropped under the IDLE current level but now it stays
between the IDLE current and the pick-up current for over 80ms.
3. No activation because the phase two lasted longer than 80ms.
4. Now we have a cold load activation which lasts as long as the
operation time was set or as long as the current stays above the
pick-up setting.
Figure 6.37: Functionality of cold load / inrush current feature.
Table 6.46: Parameters of the cold load & inrush detection function
ColdLd - Status of cold load detection:
Start Cold load situation is active
Trip Timeout
Inrush - Status of inrush detection:
Start Inrush is detected
Trip Timeout
Pickup A Primary scaled pick-up value
Idle A Primary scaled upper limit for idle current
MaxTime s Set
Idle xImode Current limit setting for idle situation Set
Pickup xImode Pick-up setting for minimum start current Set
80 ms Maximum transition time for start recognition
Pickupf2 % Pick-up value for relative amount of 2nd harmonic, If2/If1 Set
V300/en M/A002 155

6.27 Arc flash protection 6 Protection functions
6.27 Arc flash protection
6.27.1 Arc flash protection, general principle

The arc flash protection contains 8 arc stages, which may be used
to trip e.g. the circuit breakers. Arc stages are activated with
overcurrent and light signals (or light signal alone). The allocation of
different current and light signals to arc stages is defined in arc flash
protection matrices: current, light and output matrix. The matrices
are programmed via the arc flash protection menus. Available matrix
signals depends on order code (see Chapter 13 Order information).
Available signal inputs and outputs for arc protection depends on
the hardware configuration of the device.
6.27.2 Arc flash protection menus

The arc flash protection menus are located in the main menu under
ARC. The ARC menu can be viewed either on the local HMI, or by
using VAMPSET.
156 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.27 Arc flash protection
ARC PROTECTION
Figure 6.38: Example view of ARC PROTECTION menu
Table 6.47: ARC PROTECTION parameter group

Item Default Range Description
I>int. pick-up setting 1.00 xln 0.50...8.00 xln Phase L1, L2, L3 overcurrent pick-up level
Io>int. pick-up setting 1.00 xln 0.10...5.00 xln Residual overcurrent pick-up level
Install arc sensors - -, Install Installs all connected sensors
Installation state Ready Installing, Ready Installation state
Loop Sensor's sensitivity 737 100 - 900 Sensitivity setting for fibre loop sensor. C-option
Link Arc selfdiag to SF relay On On, Off Links Arc protection selfsupervision signal to
SF relay
Release latches - -, Release Releases latches from the IED
Stage Enabled On or Off On, Off Enables the Arc protection stage
Trip delay [ms] 0 0...255 Trip delay for the Arc protection stage
NOTE: Use trip delay for separate arc stage as breaker failure protection
(CBFP).
V300/en M/A002 157

ARC MATRIX – CURRENT

In the ARC MATRIX - CURRENT setting view available current
signals (left column) are linked to the appropriate Arc stages (1…8).
Figure 6.39: Example view of ARC MATRIX - CURRENT menu
Table 6.48: ARC MATRIX – CURRENT parameter group

I>int. - On, Off Phase L1, L2, L3 internal overcurrent signal
Io>int. - On, Off Residual overcurrent signal
BI1...BI3 - On, Off Binary input 1...3 signals
GOOSE NI - On, Off Goose network input
Virtual output 1...6 - On, Off Virtual output
Arc stage 1...8 - On, Off Arc protection stage 1...8
158 V300/en M/A002

ARC MATRIX – LIGHT

In the ARC MATRIX - LIGHT setting view available arc light signals
are linked (left column) are linked to the appropriate Arc stages
(1…8).
Figure 6.40: Example view of ARC MATRIX - LIGHT menu
Table 6.49: ARC MATRIX – LIGHT parameter group

Arc sensor 1...10 - On, Off Internal arc flash sensor 1...10
BI1...3 - On, Off Binary input 1...3 signal
GOOSE NI - On, Off Goose network input
Virtual output 1...6 - On, Off Virtual output
V300/en M/A002 159

ARC MATRIX – OUTPUT
Figure 6.41: Example view of ARC MATRIX - OUTPUT menu
In the ARC MATRIX - OUTPUT setting view the used Arc stages
(1…8) are connected to the required outputs. Possible latched
function per output is also determined in this view. Output signals
as per order code.
Table 6.50: ARC MATRIX – OUTPUT parameter group
Latched - On, Off Output latch
T1...4 - On, Off Trip output relay 1...4
A1 - On, Off Signal alarm relay 1
BO1...3 - On, Off Binary output 1...3
MATRIX CORRELATION PRINCIPLE

When determining the activating conditions for a certain arc stage,
a logical AND is made between the outputs from the arc light matrix
and arc current matrix.
If an arc stage has selections in only one of the matrixes, the stage
operates on light-only or on current-only principle.
Figure 6.42: Matrix correlation principle with the logical AND operator
160 V300/en M/A002

ARC EVENT ENABLING
Figure 6.43: Example view of ARC EVENT ENABLING menu
Table 6.51: ARC EVENT ENABLING parameter group

I>int. On On, Off Internal I overcurrent signal
Io>int. On On, Off Internal Io overcurrent signal
Arc sensor 1...10 On On, Off Arc flash sensor 1...10
Arc stage 1...8 On On, Off Arc protection stage 1...8
BI1 On On, Off Binary input 1
BI2 On On, Off Binary input 2
BI3 BI2 On, Off Binary input 3
‘Act On’ event On On, Off Event enabling
‘Act Off’’ event On On, Off Event enabling
V300/en M/A002 161

6.27.3 Configuration example of arc flash protection

Installing the arc flash sensors
1. On the VAMPSET group list, select ARC PROTECTION.
2. Under Settings, click the Install arc sensors drop-down list and
select Install.
3. Wait until the Installation state shows Ready. The
communication between the system components is created.
The installed sensors and units can be viewed at the bottom of the
ARC PROTECTION group view.
1. On the VAMPSET group list, select ARC PROTECTION

2. Click the Arc Stages 1, 2, select Stage 1 and 2 'On'
3. Click the Trip delay[ms] value, set it to e.g. '0' and press Enter.
4. Click the DI block value, set it to e.g. '-' and press Enter.
Configuring the current pick-up values

The SCALING menu contains the primary and secondary values of
the CT. However, the ARC PROTECTION menu calculates the
primary value only after the I pick-up setting value is given.
For example:
1. On the VAMPSET group list, select SCALING.
2. Click the CT primary value, set it to e.g. 1200 A and press Enter.
3. Click the CT secondary value, set it to e.g. 5 A and press Enter.
4. On the VAMPSET group list, select ARC PROTECTION
5. Define the I pick-up setting value for the IED.
6. Define the Io pick-up setting in similar manner.
162 V300/en M/A002

Figure 6.44: Example of setting the current transformer scaling values.
Figure 6.45: Example of defining the I pick-up setting value.
Configuring the current matrix

Define the current signals that are received in the arc flash protection
system’s IED. Connect currents to Arc stages in the matrix.
For example:
The arc flash fault current is measured from the incoming feeder,
and the current signal is linked to Arc stage 1 in the current matrix.
1. On the VAMPSET group list, select ARC MATRIX – CURRENT.
2. In the matrix, select the connection point of Arc stage 1 and
I>int.
3. On the Communication menu, select Write Changed Settings
To Device.
V300/en M/A002 163

Figure 6.46: Configuring the current matrix – an example
Configuring the light matrix

Define what light sensor signals are received in the protection system.
Connect light signals to arc stages in the matrix.
For example:
1. On the VAMPSET group list, select ARC MATRIX – LIGHT.
2. In the matrix, select the connection point of Arc sensor 1 and
Arc stage 2.
3. Select the connection point of Arc sensor 2 and Arc stage 2.
To Device.
164 V300/en M/A002

Figure 6.47: Configuring the light arc matrix
Configuring the output matrix

Define the trip relays to which the current and light signals have
effect.
For example:
1. On the VAMPSET group list, select ARC MATRIX – OUTPUT.
2. In the matrix, select the connection point of Arc stage 1 and T1.
3. Select the connection points of Latched and T1 and T2.
4. Select the connection point of Arc stage 2 and T2.
To Device.
NOTE: It is recommended to use latched outputs for the trip outputs.
V300/en M/A002 165

Figure 6.48: Configuring the output matrix - an example
Configuring the arc events

Define which arc events are written to the event list in this application.
For example:
1. On the VAMPSET group list, select ARC EVENT ENABLING.
2. In the matrix, enable both ‘Act On’ event and ‘Act Off’’ event
for Arc sensor 1, Arc stage 1, and Arc stage 2.
To Device.
166 V300/en M/A002

Figure 6.49: Configuring the arc events – an example
Configuring the LED names

1. On the VAMPSET group list, select LED NAMES.
2. To change a LED name, click the LED Description text and type
a new name. Press Enter.
Figure 6.50: LED NAMES menu in VAMPSET for LED configuration
V300/en M/A002 167

6.28 Programmable stages (99) 6 Protection functions
6.28 Programmable stages (99)

For special applications the user can built own protection stages by
selecting the supervised signal and the comparison mode.
The following parameters are available:
• Priority
If operation times less than 60 milliseconds are needed select
10 ms. For operation times under one second 20 ms is
recommended. For longer operation times and THD signals 100
ms is recommended.
• Coupling A
The name of the supervised signal in “>” and “<” modes (see
table below). Also the name of the supervised signal 1 in “Diff”
and “AbsDiff” modes.
• Coupling B
The name of the supervised signal 2 in “Diff” and “AbsDiff”
modes.
• Compare condition
Compare mode. ‘>’ for over or ‘<’ for under comparison, “Diff”
and “AbsDiff” for comparing Coupling A and Coupling B.
• Pick-up
Limit of the stage. The available setting range and the unit
depend on the selected signal.
• Operation delay
Definite time operation delay
• Hysteresis
Dead band (hysteresis)
• No Compare limit for mode <
Only used with compare mode under (‘<’). This is the limit to start
the comparison. Signal values under NoCmp are not regarded
as fault.
Table 6.52: Available signals to be supervised by the programmable stages
IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase currents
Io Residual current input I0
U12, U23, U31 Line-to-line voltages
UL1, UL2, UL3 Phase-to-ground voltages
Uo Zero-sequence voltage
f Frequency
P Active power
Q Reactive power
S Apparent power
Cos Fii Cosine φ
IoCalc Phasor sum IL1 + IL2 + IL3
168 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.28 Programmable stages (99)
I1 Positive sequence current

I2 Negative sequence current
I2/I1 Relative negative sequence current
I2/In Negative sequence current in pu
U1 Positive sequence voltage
U2 Negative sequence voltage
U2/U1 Relative negative sequence voltage
IL Average (IL1 + IL2 + IL3)/3
TanFii Tangent φ[=tan(arccosφ)]
Prms Active power rms value
Qrms Reactive power rms value
Srms Apparent powre rms value
THDIL1 Total harmonic distortion of IL1
THDUa Total harmonic distortion of input UA
THDUb Total harmonic distortion of input UB
THDUc Total harmonic distortion of input UC
fy Frequency behind circuit breaker
fz Frequency behind 2nd circuit breaker
IL1RMS IL1 RMS for average sampling
ILmin, ILmax Minimum and maximum of phase currents
ULLmin, ULLmax Minimum and maximum of line voltages
ULNmin, ULNmax Minimum and maximum of phase voltages
VAI1, VAI2, VAI3, VAI4, VAI5 Virtual analog inputs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (GOOSE)
Signals available depending on slot 8 options.

Eight independent stages
The device has eight independent programmable stages. Each
programmable stage can be enabled or disabled to fit the intended
application.
Setting groups
There are two identical stages available with independent setting
parameters.
V300/en M/A002 169

6.28 Programmable stages (99) 6 Protection functions
Table 6.53: Parameters of the programmable stages PrgN (99)

Blocked -
Start F
Trip F
- None
DIx Digital input
VIx Virtual input
VOx Virtual output
Fx Function key
Link See Table 6.52 Name for the supervised signal Set
See Table 6.52 Value of the supervised signal
Cmp Mode of comparison Set
> Over protection
< Under protection
Diff Difference
AbsDiff Absolut difference
Pickup Pick up value scaled to primary level
Pickup pu Pick up setting in pu Set
t s Definite operation time. Set
Hyster % Dead band setting Set
NoCmp pu Minimum value to start under comparison. (Mode='<') Set

stamp, fault value and elapsed delay.
170 V300/en M/A002

6 Protection functions 6.29 Inverse time operation
Table 6.54: Recorded values of the programmable stages PrgN (99)

Flt pu Fault value
6.29 Inverse time operation

The inverse time operation - i.e. inverse delay minimum time (IDMT)
type of operation - is available for several protection functions. The
common principle, formulae and graphic representations of the
available inverse delay types are described in this chapter.
Inverse delay means that the operation time depends on the
measured real time process values during a fault. For example with
an overcurrent stage using inverse delay a bigger a fault current
gives faster operation. The alternative to inverse delay is definite
delay. With definite delay a preset time is used and the operation
time does not depend on the size of a fault.
Stage specific inverse delay

Some protection functions have their own specific type of inverse
delay. Details of these dedicated inverse delays are described with
the appropriate protection function.
Operation modes
There are three operation modes to use the inverse time
characteristics:
• Standard delays
Using standard delay characteristics by selecting a curve family
(IEC, IEEE, IEEE2, RI) and a delay type (Normal inverse, Very
inverse etc). See Chapter 6.29.1 Standard inverse delays IEC,
IEEE, IEEE2, RI.
• Standard delay formulae with free parameters
selecting a curve family (IEC, IEEE, IEEE2) and defining one's
own parameters for the selected delay formula. This mode is
activated by setting delay type to ‘Parameters’, and then editing
the delay function parameters A ... E. See Chapter 6.29.2 Free
parameterization using IEC, IEEE and IEEE2 equations.
• Fully programmable inverse delay characteristics
Building the characteristics by setting 16 [current, time] points.
The relay interpolates the values between given points with 2nd
V300/en M/A002 171

6.29 Inverse time operation 6 Protection functions
degree polynomials. This mode is activated by setting curve

family to ‘PrgN’'. There are maximum three different
programmable curves available at the same time. Each
programmed curve can be used by any number of protection
stages. See Chapter 6.29.3 Programmable inverse time curves.
Inverse time setting error signal

If there are any errors in the inverse delay configuration the
appropriate protection stage will use definite time delay.
There is a signal ‘Setting Error’ available in output matrix, which
indicates three different situations:
1. Settings are currently changed with VAMPSET or local panel,
and there is temporarily an illegal combination of
curve/delay/points. For example if previous settings were IEC/NI
and then curve family is changed to IEEE, the setting error will
active, because there is no NI type available for IEEE curves.
After changing valid delay type for IEEE mode (for example MI),
the ‘Setting Error’ signal will release.
2. There are errors in formula parameters A…E, and the device is
not able to build the delay curve
3. There are errors in the programmable curve configuration and
the device is not able to interpolate values between the given
points.
Limitations
The maximum measured secondary phase current is 50xIN and the
maximum directly measured earth fault current is 10xI0N for residual
current inputs. The full scope of inverse delay curves goes up to 20
times the setting. At high setting the maximum measurement
capability limits the scope of inverse curves according the following
table.
Current input Maximum measured Maximum secondary scaled set-
secondary current ting enabling inverse delay times
up to full 20x setting
IL1, IL2, IL3 and I0Calc 250 A 12.5 A
I01 = 5 A 50 A 2.5 A
I01 = 1 A 10 A 0.5 A
I01 = 0.2 A 2A 0.1 A
172 V300/en M/A002

1. Example of limitation
CT = 750/5
CT0= 100/1 (cable CT is used for residual current)
The CT0 is connected to a 1 A terminals of input I01.
For overcurrent stage I> the table above gives 12.5 A. Thus the
maximum setting for I> stage giving full inverse delay range is
12.5 A / 5 A = 2.5 xIN= 1875 APrimary.
For earth fault stage I0> the table above gives 0.5 A. Thus the
maximum setting for I0> stage giving full inverse delay range is
0.5 A / 1 A = 0.5 xI0N = 50 APrimary.
2. Example of limitation
CT = 750/5
Application mode is Motor
Rated current of the motor = 600 A
I0Calc (= IL1 +IL2 +IL3) is used for residual current
At secondary level the rated motor current is 600/750*5 = 4 A
For overcurrent stage I> the table above gives 12.5 A. Thus the
maximum setting giving full inverse delay range is 12.5 A / 4 A
= 3.13 xIMOT = 1875 APrimary.
For earth fault stage I0> the table above gives 12.5 A. Thus the
maximum setting for I0> stage giving full inverse delay range is
12.5 A / 5 A = 2.5 xI0N = 1875 APrimary.
6.29.1 Standard inverse delays IEC, IEEE, IEEE2, RI

The available standard inverse delays are divided in four categories
IEC, IEEE, IEEE2 and RI called delay curve families. Each category
of family contains a set of different delay types according the following
table.

The inverse time setting error signal will be activated, if the delay
category is changed and the old delay type doesn't exist in the new
category. See Chapter 6.29 Inverse time operation for more details.
Limitations
The minimum definite time delay start latest, when the measured
value is twenty times the setting. However, there are limitations at
high setting values due to the measurement range. Chapter 6.29
Inverse time operation for more details.
V300/en M/A002 173

Table 6.55: Available standard delay families and the available delay types
within each family.
Delay type Curve family
DT IEC IEEE IEEE2 RI
DT Definite time X
NI Normal inverse X X
VI Very inverse X X X
EI Extremely inverse X X X
LTI Long time inverse X X
LTEI Long time extremely inverse X
LTVI Long time very inverse X
MI Moderately inverse X X
STI Short time inverse X
STEI Short time extremely inverse X
RI Old ASEA type X
RXIDG Old ASEA type X
IEC inverse time operation

The operation time depends on the measured value and other
parameters according Equation 6.5. Actually this equation can only
be used to draw graphs or when the measured value I is constant
during the fault. A modified version is implemented in the relay for
real time usage.
t = Operation delay in seconds
Equation 6.5:
k = User’s multiplier
kA I = Measured value
t= B
 I  IPICKUP = User’s pick up setting
  − 1
 I PICKUP  A, B = Constants parameters according Table 6.56.
There are three different delay types according IEC 60255-3, Normal
inverse (NI), Extremely inverse (EI), Very inverse (VI) and a VI
extension. Additional there is a de facto standard Long time inverse
(LTI).
Table 6.56: Constants for IEC inverse delay equation
Delay type Parameter
A B
NI Normal inverse 0.14 0.02
EI Extremely inverse 80 2
VI Very inverse 13.5 1
LTI Long time inverse 120 1
174 V300/en M/A002

Example for Delay type "Normal inverse (NI) ":

k = 0.50
I = 4 pu (constant current)
IPICKUP = 2 pu
A = 0.14
B = 0.02
0.50 ⋅ 0.14
t= 0.02
= 5 .0
4
  −1
2
The operation time in this example will be 5 seconds. The same

result can be read from Figure 6.51.
Figure 6.51: IEC normal inverse delay. Figure 6.52: IEC extremely inverse delay.
V300/en M/A002 175

Figure 6.53: IEC very inverse delay. Figure 6.54: IEC long time inverse delay.
IEEE/ANSI inverse time operation

There are three different delay types according IEEE Std
C37.112-1996 (MI, VI, EI) and many de facto versions according
Table 6.57. The IEEE standard defines inverse delay for both trip
and release operations. However, in the VAMP relay only the trip
time is inverse according the standard but the release time is
constant.
The operation delay depends on the measured value and other
real time usage.
Equation 6.6:
 
  I = Measured value
 A 
t=k  C
+ B IPICKUP = User’s pick up setting
  I  − 1 
  I PICKUP   A,B,C = Constant parameter according Table 6.57.
 
176 V300/en M/A002

Table 6.57: Constants for IEEE/ANSI inverse delay equation

A B C
LTI Long time inverse 0.086 0.185 0.02
LTVI Long time very inverse 28.55 0.712 2
LTEI Long time extremely inverse 64.07 0.250 2
MI Moderately inverse 0.0515 0.1140 0.02
VI Very inverse 19.61 0.491 2
EI Extremely inverse 28.2 0.1217 2
STI Short time inverse 0.16758 0.11858 0.02
STEI Short time extremely inverse 1.281 0.005 2
Example for Delay type "Moderately inverse (MI)":

k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
IPICKUP = 2 pu
A = 0.0515
B = 0.114
C = 0.02
 
 
0.0515
t = 0.50 ⋅  + 0 .1140  = 1.9
  4  0.02 
  −1 
  2  
The operation time in this example will be 1.9 seconds. The same
V300/en M/A002 177

Figure 6.55: ANSI/IEEE long time inverse delay Figure 6.56: ANSI/IEEE long time very inverse delay
Figure 6.57: ANSI/IEEE long time extremely inverse Figure 6.58: ANSI/IEEE moderately inverse delay
delay
178 V300/en M/A002

Figure 6.59: ANSI/IEEE short time inverse delay Figure 6.60: ANSI/IEEE short time extremely inverse
delay
IEEE2 inverse time operation

Before the year 1996 and ANSI standard C37.112 microprocessor
relays were using equations approximating the behaviour of various
induction disc type relays. A quite popular approximation is
Equation 6.7, which in VAMP relays is called IEEE2. Another name
could be IAC, because the old General Electric IAC relays have been
modeled using the same equation.
There are four different delay types according Table 6.58. The old
electromechanical induction disc relays have inverse delay for both
trip and release operations. However, in VAMP relays only the trip
time is inverse the release time being constant.
The operation delay depends on the measured value and other
real time usage.
V300/en M/A002 179

Equation 6.7:
 
 
 B D E 
t = k A + + 2
+ 3
 I 
  − C   I − C   I


− C  
  
  I PICKUP   I PICKUP   I PICKUP  

I = Measured value
IPICKUP = User’s pick up setting
A,B,C,D = Constant parameter according Table 6.58.
Table 6.58: Constants for IEEE2 inverse delay equation
A B C D E
MI Moderately inverse 0.1735 0.6791 0.8 -0.08 0.1271
NI Normally inverse 0.0274 2.2614 0.3 -0.1899 9.1272
VI Very inverse 0.0615 0.7989 0.34 -0.284 4.0505
EI Extremely inverse 0.0399 0.2294 0.5 3.0094 0.7222
Example for Delay type "Moderately inverse (MI)":

k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
IPICKUP = 2 pu
A = 0.1735
B = 0.6791
C = 0.8
D = -0.08
E = 0.127
 
 
 0.6791 − 0.08 0.127 
t = 0.5 ⋅ 0.1735 + + 2
+ 3
= 0.38
 4  4   4  
  − 0. 8   − 0. 8   − 0.8  
 2  2  2  
180 V300/en M/A002

Figure 6.61: IEEE2 moderately inverse delay Figure 6.62: IEEE2 normal inverse delay
Figure 6.63: IEEE2 very inverse delay Figure 6.64: IEEE2 extremely inverse delay
V300/en M/A002 181

RI and RXIDG type inverse time operation

These two inverse delay types have their origin in old ASEA
(nowadays ABB) earth fault relays.
The operation delay of types RI and RXIDG depends on the
measured value and other parameters according Equation 6.8 and
Equation 6.9. Actually these equations can only be used to draw
graphs or when the measured value I is constant during the fault.
Modified versions are implemented in the relay for real time usage.
Equation 6.8: RI Equation 6.9: RXIDG
k I
t RI = t RXIDG = 5.8 − 1.35 ln
0.236 k I PICKUP
0.339 −
 I 
 
 I PICKUP 

I = Measured value
IPICKUP = User’s pick up setting
Example for Delay type RI

k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
IPICKUP = 2 pu
0.5
t RI = = 2.3
0.236
0.339 −
4
 
2
result can be read from Equation 6.8.
Example for Delay type RXIDG

k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
IPICKUP = 2 pu
4
t RXIDG = 5.8 − 1.35 ln = 3.9
0 .5 ⋅ 2
182 V300/en M/A002

Figure 6.65: Inverse delay of type RI. Figure 6.66: Inverse delay of type RXIDG.
V300/en M/A002 183

6.29.2 Free parameterization using IEC, IEEE and

IEEE2 equations
This mode is activated by setting delay type to ‘Parameters’, and
then editing the delay function constants, i.e. the parameters A ... E.
The idea is to use the standard equations with one’s own constants
instead of the standardized constants as in the previous chapter.
Example for GE-IAC51 delay type inverse:
k = 0.50
I = 4 pu
IPICKUP = 2 pu
A = 0.2078
B = 0.8630
C = 0.8000
D = -0.4180
E = 0.1947
 
 
 0.8630 − 0.4180 0.1947 
t = 0.5 ⋅ 0.2078 + + + = 0.37
 4  4 
2
 4 
3

  − 0.8   − 0.8   − 0.8  
 2  2  2  
The operation time in this example will be 0.37 seconds.

The resulting time/current characteristic of this example matches
quite well with the characteristic of the old electromechanical IAC51
induction disc relay.

The inverse time setting error signal will become active, if
interpolation with the given parameters is not possible. See
Chapter 6.29 Inverse time operation for more details.
Limitations
high setting values due to the measurement range. See Chapter 6.29
184 V300/en M/A002

6.29.3 Programmable inverse time curves

Only with VAMPSET, requires rebooting.
The [current, time] curve points are programmed using VAMPSET
PC program. There are some rules for defining the curve points:
• configuration must begin from the topmost line
• line order must be as follows: the smallest current (longest
operation time) on the top and the largest current (shortest
operation time) on the bottom
• all unused lines (on the bottom) should be filled with [1.00 0.00s]
Here is an example configuration of curve points:
Point Current I/IPICKUP Operation delay
1 1.00 10.00 s
2 2.00 6.50 s
3 5.00 4.00 s
4 10.00 3.00 s
5 20.00 2.00 s
6 40.00 1.00 s
7 1.00 0.00 s
8 1.00 0.00 s
9 1.00 0.00 s
10 1.00 0.00 s
11 1.00 0.00 s
12 1.00 0.00 s
13 1.00 0.00 s
14 1.00 0.00 s
15 1.00 0.00 s
16 1.00 0.00 s

The inverse time setting error signal will be activated, if interpolation
with the given points fails. See Chapter 6.29 Inverse time operation
for more details.
Limitations
high setting values due to the measurement range. See Chapter 6.29
V300/en M/A002 185

7 Supporting functions
7 Supporting functions
7.1 Event log

Event log is a buffer of event codes and time stamps including date
and time. For example each start-on, start-off, trip-on or trip-off of
any protection stage has a unique event number code. Such a code
and the corresponding time stamp is called an event.
As an example of information included with a typical event a
programmable stage trip event is shown in the following table.
EVENT Description Local panel Communication
protocols
Code: 46E2 Channel 46, event 2 Yes Yes
Prg1 trip on Event text Yes No
0,41 x In Fault value Yes No
2007-01-31 Date Yes Yes
08:35:13.413 Time Yes Yes
Events are the major data for a SCADA system. SCADA systems
are reading events using any of the available communication
protocols. Event log can also be scanned using the front panel or
using VAMPSET. With VAMPSET the events can be stored to a file
especially in case the relay is not connected to any SCADA system.
Only the latest event can be read when using communication
protocols or VAMPSET. Every reading increments the internal read
pointer to the event buffer. (In case of communication interruptions,
the latest event can be reread any number of times using an other
parameter.) On the local panel scanning the event buffer back and
forth is possible.
Event enabling/masking
In case of an uninteresting event, it can be masked, which prevents
the particular event(s) to be written in the event buffer. As a default
there is room for 200 latest events in the buffer. Event buffer size
can be modified from 50 to 2000.
Modification can be done in “Local panel conf” –menu.
Indication screen (popup screen) can also be enabled in this same
menu when Vampset –setting tool is used. The oldest one will be
overwritten, when a new event does occur. The shown resolution of
a time stamp is one millisecond, but the actual resolution depends
of the particular function creating the event. For example most
protection stages create events with 5ms, 10 ms or 20 ms resolution.
The absolute accuracy of all time stamps depends on the time
186 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.1 Event log
synchronizing of the relay. See Chapter 7.3 System clock and

synchronization for system clock synchronizing.
Event buffer overflow
The normal procedure is to poll events from the device all the time.
If this is not done, the event buffer will eventually overflow. On the
local screen this is indicated with string "OVF" after the event code.
Table 7.1: Setting parameters for events
Parameter Value Description Note
Count Number of events
ClrEn - Clear event buffer Set
Clear
Order Old-New Order of the event buffer for local display Set
New-Old
FVSca Scaling of event fault value Set
PU Per unit scaling
Pri Primary scaling
Display On Indication dispaly is enabled Set
Alarms Off No indication display

FORMAT OF EVENTS ON THE LOCAL DISPLAY
Code: CHENN CH = event channel, NN=event code
Event description Event channel and code in plain text
yyyy-mm-dd Date (for available date formats, see Chapter 7.3 System
clock and synchronization)
hh:mm:ss.nnn Time
V300/en M/A002 187

7.2 Disturbance recorder 7 Supporting functions
7.2 Disturbance recorder

The disturbance recorder can be used to record all the measured
signals, that is, currents, voltage and the status information of digital
inputs (DI) and digital outputs (DO).
The digital inputs include also the arc protection signals.
Triggering the recorder
The recorder can be triggered by any start or trip signal from any
protection stage or by a digital input. The triggering signal is selected
in the output matrix (vertical signal DR). The recording can also be
triggered manually. All recordings are time stamped.
Reading recordings
The recordings can be uploaded, viewed and analysed with the
VAMPSET program. The recording is in COMTRADE format. This
means that also other programs can be used to view and analyse
the recordings made by the relay.
For more details, please see a separate VAMPSET manual.
Number of channels
At the maximum, there can be 12 recordings, and the maximum
selection of channels in one recording is also 12 (limited in waveform
recording). The digital inputs reserve one channel (includes all the
inputs). Also the digital outputs reserve one channel (includes all the
outputs). If digital inputs and outputs are recorded, there will be still
10 channels left for analogue waveforms.
188 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.2 Disturbance recorder
Table 7.2: Disturbance recorder parameters

Mode Behaviour in memory full situation: Set
Saturated No more recordings are accepted
Overflow The oldest recorder will be overwritten
SR Sample rate Set
32/cycle Waveform
16/cycle Waveform
8/cycle Waveform
1/10ms One cycle value *)
1/20ms One cycle value **)
1/200 ms Average
1/1s Average
1/5s Average
1/10s Average
1/15s Average
1/30s Average
1/1min Average
Time s Recording length Set
PreTrig % Amount of recording data before the trig moment Set
MaxLen s Maximum time setting.
This value depends on sample rate, number and type of the

selected channels and the configured recording length.
Status Status of recording
- Not active
Run Waiting a triggering
Trig Recording
FULL Memory is full in saturated mode
ManTrig -, Trig Manual triggering Set
ReadyRec n/m n = Available recordings / m = maximum number of record-
ings
The value of 'm' depends on sample rate, number and type

of the selected channels and the configured recording length.
V300/en M/A002 189

7.2 Disturbance recorder 7 Supporting functions

AddCh Add one channel. Maximum simultaneous number of chan- Set
nels is 12.
IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase current
Io1, Measured residual current
U12, U23, U31 Line-to-line voltage
UL1, UL2, UL3 Phase-to-neutral voltage
Uo Zero sequence voltage
f Frequency
P, Q, S Active, reactive, apparent power
P.F. Power factor
CosFii cosφ
IoCalc Phasor sum Io = (IL1+IL2+IL3)/3
I1 Positive sequence current
I2 Negative sequence current
I2/In Current unbalance [xIGN]
IL Average (IL1 + IL2 + IL3)/3
DI, DO Digital inputs and outputs
TanFii tanφ
THDIL1, THDIL2, THDIL3 Total harmonic distortion of IL1, IL2 or IL3
Prms Active power rms value
Qrms Reactive power rms value
Srms Apparent power rms value
fy Frequency behind circuit breaker
fz Frequency behind 2nd circuit breaker
IL1RMS, IL2MRS, IL3RMS IL1, IL2, IL3 RMS for average sampling
Arc***) Arc protection signals
ClrCh -, Clear Remove all channels Set
(Ch) List of selected channels
Set = An editable parameter (password needed).
Signal available depending on the slot 8 options
For details of setting ranges, see Chapter 11.4 Supporting functions.
*) This is the fundamental frequency rms value of one cycle updated every 10 ms.
**) This is the fundamental frequency rms value of one cycle updated every 20 ms.
***) Arc events are polled in every 5 ms
Running virtual comtrade files

Virtual comtrade files can be run with the device. Device behaviour
can be analysed by playing the recorder data over and over again
in the relay memory.
NOTE: This is not applicable to the arc protection functions of the device.
190 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.2 Disturbance recorder
Steps of opening the VAMPSET setting tool.

1. Go to “Disturbance record” and select Open… (A).
2. Select the comtrade file from you hard disc or equivalent.
VAMPSET is now ready to read the recording.
3. The virtual measurement has to be enabled (B) in order to send
record data to the relay (C).
4. Sending the file to the device’s memory takes a few seconds.
Initiate playback of the file by pressing the Go! button (D). The
“Change to control mode” button takes you back to the virtual
measurement.
NOTE: The sample rate of the comtrade file has to be 32/cycle (625 micro
seconds when 50 Hz is used). The channel names have to
correspond to the channel names in Vamp relays: IL1, IL2, IL3, Io1,
Io2, U12, U23, UL1, UL2, UL3 and Uo.
V300/en M/A002 191

7.3 System clock and synchronization 7 Supporting functions
7.3 System clock and synchronization

The internal clock of the relay is used to time stamp events and
disturbance recordings.
The system clock should be externally synchronised to get
comparable event time stamps for all the relays in the system.
The synchronizing is based on the difference of the internal time and
the synchronising message or pulse. This deviation is filtered and
the internal time is corrected softly towards a zero deviation.
Adapting auto adjust

During tens of hours of synchronizing the device will learn its average
deviation and starts to make small corrections by itself. The target
is that when the next synchronizing message is received, the
deviation is already near zero. Parameters "AAIntv" and "AvDrft" will
show the adapted correction time interval of this ±1 ms auto-adjust
function.
Time drift correction without external sync

If any external synchronizing source is not available and the system
clock has a known steady drift, it is possible to roughly correct the
clock deviation by editing the parameters "AAIntv" and "AvDrft". The
following equation can be used if the previous "AAIntv" value has
been zero.
604.8
AAIntv =
DriftInOneWeek
If the auto-adjust interval "AAIntv" has not been zero, but further
trimming is still needed, the following equation can be used to
calculate a new auto-adjust interval.
1
AAIntvNEW =
1 DriftInOneWeek
+
AAIntvPREVIOUS 604.8
The term DriftInOneWeek/604.8 may be replaced with the relative

drift multiplied by 1000, if some other period than one week has been
used. For example if the drift has been 37 seconds in 14 days, the
relative drift is 37*1000/(14*24*3600) = 0.0306 ms/s.
192 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.3 System clock and synchronization
Example 1
If there has been no external sync and the relay's clock is leading
sixty-one seconds a week and the parameter AAIntv has been zero,
the parameters are set as
AvDrft = Lead
604.8
AAIntv = = 9. 9 s
61
With these parameter values the system clock corrects itself with –1
ms every 9.9 seconds which equals –61.091 s/week.
Example 2
If there is no external sync and the relay's clock has been lagging
five seconds in nine days and the AAIntv has been 9.9 s, leading,
then the parameters are set as
1
AAIntv NEW = = 10.6
1 5000
−
9.9 9 ⋅ 24 ⋅ 3600
AvDrft = Lead
When the internal time is roughly correct – deviation is less than four
seconds – any synchronizing or auto-adjust will never turn the clock
backwards. Instead, in case the clock is leading, it is softly slowed
down to maintain causality.
V300/en M/A002 193

Table 7.3: System clock parameters

Date Current date Set
Time Current time Set
Style Date format Set
y-d-m Year-Month-Day
d.m.y Day.Month.Year
m/d/y Month/Day/Year
SyncDI Possible values de- The digital input used for clock synchronisation. ***)
pends on the types of
I/O cards
- DI not used for synchronizing
TZone -12.00 ... +14.00 *) UTC time zone for SNTP synchronization. Set
Note: This is a decimal number. For example for state

of Nepal the time zone 5:45 is given as 5.75
DST No; Yes Daylight saving time for SNTP Set
SySrc Clock synchronisation source
Internal No sync recognized since 200s
DI Digital input
SNTP Protocol sync
SpaBus Protocol sync
ModBus Protocol sync
ModBus TCP Protocol sync
ProfibusDP Protocol sync
IEC101 Protocol sync
DNP3 Protocol sync
IRIG-B003 IRIG timecode B003 ****)
MsgCnt 0 ... 65535, The number of received synchronisation messages or
pulses
0 ... etc.
Dev ±32767 ms Latest time deviation between the system clock and
the received synchronization
SyOS ±10000.000 s Synchronisation correction for any constant deviation Set
in the synchronizing source.
AAIntv ±10000 s Adapted auto adjust interval for 1 ms correction Set**)
AvDrft Lead; Lag Adapted average clock drift sign Set**)
FilDev ±125 ms Filtered synchronisation deviation
*) Astronomically a range –11 ... +12 h would be enough, but for political and geographical reasons a larger range is
needed.
**) If external synchronization is used this parameter will be set automatically.
***) Set the DI delay to its minimum and the polarity such that the leading edge is the synchronizing edge.
****) Relay needs to be equipped with suitable hardware option module to receive IRIG-B clock synchronization signal.
(Chapter 13 Order information).
194 V300/en M/A002

Synchronisation with DI
Clock can be synchronized by reading minute pulses from digital
inputs, virtual inputs or virtual outputs. Sync source is selected with
Minute sync pulse DI setting.
When rising edge is detected from the selected input, system clock
is adjusted to the nearest minute. Length of digital input pulse should
be at least 50 ms. Delay of the selected digital input should be set
to zero.
Synchronisation correction
If the sync source has a known offset delay, it can be compensated
with SyOS setting. This is useful for compensating hardware delays
or transfer delays of communication protocols. A positive value will
compensate a lagging external sync and communication delays. A
negative value will compensate any leading offset of the external
synch source.
Sync source
When the device receives new sync message, the sync source
display is updated. If no new sync messages are received within
next 1.5 minutes, the device will change to internal sync mode.
Deviation
The time deviation means how much system clock time differs from
sync source time. Time deviation is calculated after receiving new
sync message. The filtered deviation means how much the system
clock was really adjusted. Filtering takes care of small deviation in
sync messages.
Auto-lag/lead
The device synchronizes to the sync source, meaning it starts
automatically leading or lagging to stay in perfect sync with the
master. The learning process takes few days.
V300/en M/A002 195

7.4 Self-supervision 7 Supporting functions
7.4 Self-supervision
The functions of the microcontroller and the associated circuitry, as
well as the program execution are supervised by means of a separate
watchdog circuit. Besides supervising the relay, the watchdog circuit
attempts to restart the micro controller in a inoperable situation. If
the restarting fails, the watchdog issues a self-supervision signal
indicating a permanent internal condition.
When the watchdog circuit detects a permanent fault, it always blocks
any control of other output relays (except for the self-supervision
output relay).
In addition, the internal supply voltages are supervised. Should the
auxiliary supply of the IED disappear, an indication is automatically
given because the IED status inoperative (SF) output relay functions
on a working current principle. This means that the SF relay is
energized when the auxiliary supply is on and the arc flash protection
is healthy.
7.4.1 Diagnostics
The device runs self-diagnostic tests for hardware and software in
boot sequence and also performs runtime checking.
Permanent inoperative state
If permanent inoperative state has been detected, the device releases
SF relay contact and status led is set on. Local panel will also display
a detected fault message. Permanet inoperative state is entered
when the device is not able to handle main functions.
Temporal inoperative state
When self-diagnostic function detects a temporal inoperative state,
Selfdiag matrix signal is set and an event (E56) is generated. In case
the inoperative state was only temporary, an off event is generated
(E57). Self diagnostic state can be reset via local HMI.
Diagnostic registers
There are four 16-bit diagnostic registers which are readable through
remote protocols. The following table shows the meaning of each
dagnostic register and their bits.
196 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.5 Voltage sags and swells
Register Bit Code Description

SelfDiag1 0 (LSB) T1 Potential output relay problem
1 T2
2 T3
3 T4
4 A1
SelfDiag3 0 (LSB) DAC Potential mA-output problem

1 STACK Potential stack problem
2 MemChk Potential memory problem
3 BGTask Potential background task timeout
4 DI Potential input problem (Remove DI1, DI2)
5
6 Arc Potential arc card problem
7 SecPulse Poential hardware problem
8 RangeChk DB: Setting outside range
9 CPULoad Overload
10 +24V Potential internal voltage problem
11 -15V
12 ITemp Internal temperature too high
13 ADChk1 Potential A/D converter problem
15 (MSB) E2prom Potential E2prom problem
SelfDiag4 0 (LSB) +12V Potential internal voltage problem

1 ComBuff Potential BUS: buffer problem
2 OrderCode Potential order code problem
The code is displayed in self diagnostic events and on the diagnostic

menu on local panel and VAMPSET.
7.5 Voltage sags and swells

The power quality of electrical networks has become increasingly
important. The sophisticated loads (e.g. computers etc.) require
uninterruptible supply of “clean” electricity. VAMP protection platform
provides many power quality functions that can be used to evaluate,
monitor and alarm on the basis of the quality. One of the most
important power quality functions are voltage sag and swell
monitoring.
VAMP provides separate monitoring logs for sags and swells. The
voltage log is trigged, if any voltage input either goes under the sag
limit (U<) or exceeds the swell limit (U>). There are four registers for
both sags and swells in the fault log. Each register will have start
time, phase information, duration, minimum, average, maximum
voltage values of each sag and swell event. Furthermore, there are
V300/en M/A002 197
7.5 Voltage sags and swells 7 Supporting functions
total number of sags and swells counters as well as total timers for
sags and swells.
The voltage power quality functions are located under the submenu
“U”.
Table 7.4: Setting parameters of sags and swells monitoring:
U> 20 … 150 % 110 Setting value of swell limit
U< 10 … 120 % 90 Setting value of sag limit
Delay 0.04 … 1.00 s 0.06 Delay for sag and swell detection
SagOn On; Off - On Sag on event
SagOff On; Off - On Sag off event
SwelOn On; Off - On Swell on event
SwelOf On; Off - On Swell off event
Table 7.5: Recorded values of sags and swells monitoring:

Recorded values Count - Cumulative sag counter
Total - Cumulative sag time counter
Count - Cumulative swell counter
Total - Cumulative swell time counter
Sag/ swell logs Date - Date of the sag/swell
1…4
Time - Time stamp of the sag/swell
Type - Voltage inputs that had the sag/swell
Time s Duration of the sag/swell
Min1 % Un Minimum voltage value during the sag/swell in
the input 1
the input 2
the input 3
Ave1 % Un Average voltage value during the sag/swell in
the input 1
the input 2
the input 3
Max1 % Un Maximum voltage value during the sag/swell
in the input 1
in the input 2
in the input 3
198 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.6 Voltage interruptions
7.6 Voltage interruptions

The device includes a simple function to detect voltage interruptions.
The function calculates the number of voltage interruptions and the
total time of the voltage-off time within a given calendar period. The
period is based on the real time clock of the device. The available
periods are:
• 8 hours, 00:00 – 08:00, 08:00 – 16:00, 16:00 – 24:00
• one day, 00:00 – 24:00
• one week, Monday 00:00 – Sunday 24:00
• one month, the first day 00:00 – the last day 24:00
• one year, 1st January 00:00 – 31st December 24:00
After each period, the number of interruptions and the total
interruption time are stored as previous values. The interruption
counter and the total time are cleared for a new period. The old
previous values are overwritten.
The voltage interruption is based on the value of the positive
sequence voltage U1 and a user given limit value. Whenever the
measured U1 goes below the limit, the interruption counter is
increased, and the total time counter starts increasing.
Shortest recognized interruption time is 40 ms. If the voltage-off time
is shorter it may be recognized depending on the relative depth of
the voltage dip.
If the voltage has been significantly over the limit U1< and then there
is a small and short under-swing, it will not be recognized (Figure 7.1).
Figure 7.1: A short voltage interruption which is probably not recognized
On the other hand, if the limit U1< is high and the voltage has been
near this limit, and then there is a short but very deep dip, it will be
recognized (Figure 7.2).
V300/en M/A002 199

7.6 Voltage interruptions 7 Supporting functions
Figure 7.2: A short voltage interrupt that will be recognized
Table 7.6: Setting parameters of the voltage sag measurement function:

U1< 10.0 … 120.0 % 64 Setting value
Period 8h - Month Length of the observation period
Day
Week
Month
Date - - Date
Time - - Time
Table 7.7: Measured and recorded values of voltage sag measurement

function:
Measured value Voltage LOW; - Current voltage status
OK
U1 % Measured positive sequence voltage
Recorded values Count - Number of voltage sags during the current
observation period
Prev - Number of voltage sags during the previous
observation period
Total s Total (summed) time of voltage sags during
the current observation period
Prev s Total (summed) time of voltage sags during
the previous observation period
200 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.7 Current transformer supervision
7.7 Current transformer supervision

The relay supervise the external wiring between the relay terminals
and current transformers (CT) and the CT them selves. Furthermore,
this is a safety function as well, since an open secondary of a CT,
causes dangerous voltages.
The CT supervisor function measures phase currents. If one of the
three phase currents drops below IMIN< setting, while another phase
current is exceeding the IMAX> setting, the function will issue an alarm
after the operation delay has elapsed.
Table 7.8: Setting parameters of CT supervisor CTSV
Imax> 0.0 … 10.0 xIn 2.0 Upper setting for CT supervisor
Imin< 0.0 … 10.0 xIn 0.2 Lower setting for CT supervisor
t> 0.02 … 600.0 s 0.10 Operation delay
CT on On; Off - On CT supervisor on event
CT off On; Off - On CT supervisor off event
Table 7.9: Measured and recorded values of CT supervisor CTSV

Measured value ILmax A Maximum of phase currents
ILmin A Minimum of phase currents
Display Imax>, Imin< A Setting values as primary values
Recorded values Date - Date of CT supervision alarm
Time - Time of CT supervision alarm
Imax A Maximum phase current
Imin A Minimum phase current
V300/en M/A002 201

7.8 Voltage transformer supervision 7 Supporting functions
7.8 Voltage transformer supervision

The device supervises the VTs and VT wiring between the device
terminals and the VTs. If there is a fuse in the voltage transformer
circuitry, the blown fuse prevents or distorts the voltage
measurement. Therefore, an alarm should be issued. Furthermore,
in some applications, protection functions using voltage signals,
should be blocked to avoid false tripping.
The VT supervisor function measures the three phase voltages and
currents. The negative sequence voltage U2 and the negative
sequence currentI2 are calculated. If U2 exceed the U2> setting and
at the same time, I2 is less than the I2< setting, the function will issue
an alarm after the operation delay has elapsed.
Table 7.10: Setting parameters of VT supervisor VTSV ( )
U2> 0.0 … 200.0 % Un 34.6 Upper setting for VT supervisor
I2< 0.0 … 200.0 % In 100.0 Lower setting for VT supervisor
t> 0.02 … 600.0 s 0.10 Operation delay
VT on On; Off - On VT supervisor on event
VT off On; Off - On VT supervisor off event
Table 7.11: Measured and recorded values of VT supervisor VTSV ( )

Measured value U2 % Un Measured negative sequence voltage
I2 % In Measured negative sequence current
Recorded Date - Date of VT supervision alarm
Values Time - Time of VT supervision alarm

U2 % Un Recorded negative sequence voltage
I2 % In Recorded negative sequence current
202 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.9 Circuit breaker condition monitoring
7.9 Circuit breaker condition monitoring

The relay has a condition monitoring function that supervises the
wearing of the circuit-breaker. The condition monitoring can give
alarm for the need of CB maintenance well before the CB condition
is critical.
The CB wear function measures the breaking current of each CB
pole separately and then estimates the wearing of the CB accordingly
the permissible cycle diagram. The breaking current is registered
when the trip relay supervised by the circuit breaker failure protection
(CBFP) is activated. (See Chapter 6.12 Circuit breaker failure
protection CBFP (50BF) for CBFP and the setting parameter
"CBrelay".)
Breaker curve and its approximation

The permissible cycle diagram is usually available in the
documentation of the CB manufacturer (Figure 7.3). The diagram
specifies the permissible number of cycles for every level of the
breaking current. This diagram is parameterised to the condition
monitoring function with maximum eight [current, cycles] points. See
Table 7.12. If less than eight points needed, the unused points are
set to [IBIG, 1], where IBIG is more than the maximum breaking
capacity.
If the CB wearing characteristics or part of it is a straight line on a
log/log graph, the two end points are enough to define that part of
the characteristics. This is because the relay is using logarithmic
interpolation for any current values falling in between the given
current points 2...8.
The points 4...8 are not needed for the CB in Figure 7.3. Thus they
are set to 100 kA and one operation in the table to be discarded by
the algorithm.
100000
Number of permitted operations
10000
1000
100
50
20
10
100 200 500 1000 10000 100000
Breaked current (A) CBWEARcharacteristics
Figure 7.3: An example of a circuit breaker wearing characteristic graph.
V300/en M/A002 203

7.9 Circuit breaker condition monitoring 7 Supporting functions
Table 7.12: An example of circuit breaker wearing characteristics in a table

format. The values are taken from the figure above. The table is edited with
VAMPSET under menu "BREAKER CURVE".
Point Interrupted current Number of permitted
(kA) operations
1 0 (mechanical age) 10000
2 1.25 (rated current) 10000
3 31.0 (maximum breaking current) 80
4 100 1
5 100 1
6 100 1
7 100 1
8 100 1
Setting alarm points

There are two alarm points available having two setting parameters
each.
• Current.
The first alarm can be set for example to nominal current of the
CB or any application typical current. The second alarm can be
set for example according a typical fault current.
• Operations left alarm limit
An alarm is activated when there are less operation left at the
given current level than this limit.
Any actual interrupted current will be logarithmically weighted for the
two given alarm current levels and the number of operations left at
the alarm points is decreased accordingly. When the "operations
left" i.e. the number of remaining operations, goes under the given
alarm limit, an alarm signal is issued to the output matrix. Also an
event is generated depending on the event enabling.
Clearing "operations left" counters

After the breaker curve table is filled and the alarm currents are
defined, the wearing function can be initialised by clearing the
decreasing operation counters with parameter "Clear" (Clear oper.
left cntrs). After clearing the relay will show the maximum allowed
operations for the defined alarm current levels.
Operation counters to monitor the wearing

The operations left can be read from the counters "Al1Ln" (Alarm 1)
and "Al2Ln" (Alarm2). There are three values for both alarms, one
for each phase. The smallest of three is supervised by the two alarm
functions.
204 V300/en M/A002

Logarithmic interpolation
The permitted number of operations for currents in between the
defined points are logarithmically interpolated using equation
Equation 7.1:
a
C=
In
C = permitted operations
I = interrupted current
a = constant according Equation 7.2
n = constant according Equation 7.3
Equation 7.2: Equation 7.3:
Ck a = C k I k2
ln
C k +1
n=
I
ln k +1
Ik
ln = natural logarithm function

Ck = permitted operations. k = row 2...7 in Table 7.12.
Ik = corresponding current. k = row 2...7 in Table 7.12.
Ck+1 = permitted operations. k = row 2...7 in Table 7.12.
Ik+1 = corresponding current. k = row 2...7 in Table 7.12.
Example of the logarithmic interpolation

Alarm 2 current is set to 6 kA. What is the maximum number of
operations according Table 7.12.
The current 6 kA lies between points 2 and 3 in the table. That gives
value for the index k. Using
k=2
Ck= 10000
Ck+1= 80
Ik+1= 31 kA
Ik= 1.25 kA
and the Equation 7.2 and Equation 7.3, the relay calculates
V300/en M/A002 205

7.9 Circuit breaker condition monitoring 7 Supporting functions
10000
ln
n= 80 = 1.5038
31000
ln
1250
a = 10000 ⋅ 12501.5038 = 454 ⋅ 10 6
Using Equation 7.1 the relay gets the number of permitted operations
for current 6 kA.
454 ⋅ 10 6
C= = 945
60001.5038
Thus the maximum number of current breaking at 6 kA is 945. This

can be verified with the original breaker curve in Figure 7.3. Indeed,
the figure shows that at 6 kA the operation count is between 900
and 1000. A useful alarm level for operation-left, could be in this
case for example 50 being about five per cent of the maximum.
Example of operation counter decrementing when the CB is

breaking a current
Alarm2 is set to 6 kA. CBFP is supervising trip relay T1 and trip signal
of an overcurrent stage detecting a two phase fault is connected to
this trip relay T1. The interrupted phase currents are 12.5 kA, 12.5
kA and 1.5 kA. How many are Alarm2 counters decremented?
Using Equation 7.1 and values n and a from the previous example,
the relay gets the number of permitted operation at 10 kA.
454 ⋅ 10 6
C10 kA = = 313
125001.5038
At alarm level 2, 6 kA, the corresponding number of operations is

calculated according
Equation 7.4:
C AlarmMax
∆=
C
945
∆ L1 = ∆ L 2 = =3
313
Thus Alarm2 counters for phases L1 and L2 are decremented by 3.

In phase L1 the currents is less than the alarm limit current 6 kA. For
such currents the decrement is one.
ΔL3 = 1
206 V300/en M/A002

Table 7.13: Local panel parameters of CBWEAR function

CBWEAR STATUS
- Operations left for
Al1L1 - Alarm 1, phase L1

Latest trip
Date Time stamp of the latest trip operation
time
IL1 A Broken current of phase L1

CBWEAR SET
Alarm1
Current 0.00 - 100.00 kA Alarm1 current level Set
Cycles 100000 - 1 Alarm1 limit for operations left Set
Alarm2
Current 0.00 - 100.00 kA Alarm2 current level Set
Cycles 100000 - 1 Alarm2 limit for operations left Set
CBWEAR SET2
Al1On On 'Alarm1 on' event enabling Set
Off
Al1Off On 'Alarm1 off' event enabling Set
Off
Al2On On 'Alarm2 on' event enabling Set
Off
Al2Off On 'Alarm2 off' event enabling Set
Off
Clear - Clearing of cycle counters Set
Clear
The breaker curve table is edited with VAMPSET.
V300/en M/A002 207

7.10 Energy pulse outputs 7 Supporting functions
7.10 Energy pulse outputs

The device can be configured to send a pulse whenever certain
amount of energy has been imported or exported. The principle is
presented in Figure 7.4. Each time the energy level reaches the pulse
size, an output relay is activated and the relay will be active as long
as defined by a pulse duration setting.
Figure 7.4: Principle of energy pulses
The relay has four energy pulse outputs. The output channels are:
• Active exported energy
• Reactive exported energy
• Active imported energy
• Reactive imported energy
Each channel can be connected to any combination of the output
relays using output matrix. The parameters for the energy pulses
can be found in the E menu under the submenus E-PULSE SIZES
and E-PULSE DURATION.
Table 7.14: Energy pulse output parameters
E-PULSE SIZES E+ 10 … 10 000 kWh Pulse size of active exported energy
Eq+ 10 … 10 000 kvarh Pulse size of reactive exported energy
E- 10 … 10 000 kWh Pulse size of active imported energy
Eq- 10 … 10 000 kvarh Pulse size of reactive imported energy
E-PULSE DURATION E+ 100 … 5000 ms Pulse length of active exported energy
Eq+ 100 … 5000 ms Pulse length of reactive exported energy
E- 100 … 5000 ms Pulse length of active imported energy
Eq- 100 … 5000 ms Pulse length of reactive imported energy
208 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.10 Energy pulse outputs
Scaling examples
Example 1.
Average active exported power is 250 MW.
Peak active exported power is 400 MW.
Pulse size is 250 kWh.
The average pulse frequency will be 250/0.250 = 1000 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency will be 400/0.250 = 1600 pulses/h.
Set pulse length to 3600/1600 - 0.2 = 2.0 s or less.
The lifetime of the mechanical output relay will be
50x106/1000 h = 6 a.
This is not a practical scaling example unless an output relay lifetime
of about six years is accepted.
Example 2.
The average pulse frequency will be 100/0.400 = 250 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency will be 800/0.400 = 2000 pulses/h.
50x106/250 h = 23 a.
Example 3.
The average pulse frequency will be 25/0.060 = 416.7 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency will be 70/0.060 = 1166.7 pulses/h.
50x106/417 h = 14 a.
V300/en M/A002 209

7.10 Energy pulse outputs 7 Supporting functions
Example 4.
Average active exported power is 1900 kW.
The average pulse frequency will be 1900/10 = 190 pulses/h.
The peak pulse frequency will be 50000/10 = 5000 pulses/h.
50x106/190 h = 30 a.
VAMP relays + +
PLC
T 1 Pulse counter input 1

Active exported
energy pulses
+E
T 2 Pulse counter input 2

Reactive exported
energy pulses
+Eq
A 1 Pulse counter input 3

Active imported
energy pulses
-E
A 2 Pulse counter input 4

Reactive imported
energy pulses
-Eq
e-pulseconf1
-
Figure 7.5: Application example of wiring the energy pulse outputs to a PLC having
common plus and using an external wetting voltage
VAMP relays
++
PLC
T 1
Active exported
energy pulses
+E
Pulse counter input 1
T 2
Reactive exported
energy pulses
+Eq
A 1
Active imported
energy pulses
-E
A 2
Reactive imported
energy pulses
-Eq
-
e-pulseconf2
common minus and using an external wetting voltage
210 V300/en M/A002

VAMP relays
PLC
T 1
Active exported Pulse counter input 1
energy pulses
+E
T 2
Reactive exported Pulse counter input 2
energy pulses
+Eq
A 1
Active imported Pulse counter input 3
energy pulses
-E
A 2
Reactive imported Pulse counter input 4
energy pulses
-Eq
e-pulseconf3
common minus and an internal wetting voltage.
7.11 System clock and synchronization

The internal clock of the relay is used to time stamp events and
disturbance recordings.
The system clock should be externally synchronised to get
comparable event time stamps for all the relays in the system.
The synchronizing is based on the difference of the internal time and
the synchronising message or pulse. This deviation is filtered and
the internal time is corrected softly towards a zero deviation.
Adapting auto adjust

During tens of hours of synchronizing the device will learn its average
deviation and starts to make small corrections by itself. The target
is that when the next synchronizing message is received, the
deviation is already near zero. Parameters "AAIntv" and "AvDrft" will
show the adapted correction time interval of this ±1 ms auto-adjust
function.
Time drift correction without external sync

If any external synchronizing source is not available and the system
clock has a known steady drift, it is possible to roughly correct the
clock deviation by editing the parameters "AAIntv" and "AvDrft". The
following equation can be used if the previous "AAIntv" value has
been zero.
604.8
AAIntv =
DriftInOneWeek
V300/en M/A002 211

If the auto-adjust interval "AAIntv" has not been zero, but further
trimming is still needed, the following equation can be used to
calculate a new auto-adjust interval.
1
AAIntvNEW =
1 DriftInOneWeek
+
AAIntvPREVIOUS 604.8
The term DriftInOneWeek/604.8 may be replaced with the relative

drift multiplied by 1000, if some other period than one week has been
used. For example if the drift has been 37 seconds in 14 days, the
relative drift is 37*1000/(14*24*3600) = 0.0306 ms/s.
Example 1
If there has been no external sync and the relay's clock is leading
sixty-one seconds a week and the parameter AAIntv has been zero,
the parameters are set as
AvDrft = Lead
604.8
AAIntv = = 9. 9 s
61
With these parameter values the system clock corrects itself with –1
ms every 9.9 seconds which equals –61.091 s/week.
Example 2
If there is no external sync and the relay's clock has been lagging
five seconds in nine days and the AAIntv has been 9.9 s, leading,
then the parameters are set as
1
AAIntv NEW = = 10.6
1 5000
−
9.9 9 ⋅ 24 ⋅ 3600
AvDrft = Lead
When the internal time is roughly correct – deviation is less than four
seconds – any synchronizing or auto-adjust will never turn the clock
backwards. Instead, in case the clock is leading, it is softly slowed
down to maintain causality.
212 V300/en M/A002

Table 7.15: System clock parameters

Date Current date Set
Time Current time Set
Style Date format Set
y-d-m Year-Month-Day
d.m.y Day.Month.Year
m/d/y Month/Day/Year
SyncDI Possible values de- The digital input used for clock synchronisation. ***)
pends on the types of
I/O cards
- DI not used for synchronizing
TZone -12.00 ... +14.00 *) UTC time zone for SNTP synchronization. Set
Note: This is a decimal number. For example for state

of Nepal the time zone 5:45 is given as 5.75
DST No; Yes Daylight saving time for SNTP Set
SySrc Clock synchronisation source
Internal No sync recognized since 200s
DI Digital input
SNTP Protocol sync
SpaBus Protocol sync
ModBus Protocol sync
ModBus TCP Protocol sync
ProfibusDP Protocol sync
DNP3 Protocol sync
IRIG-B003 IRIG timecode B003 ****)
MsgCnt 0 ... 65535, The number of received synchronisation messages or
pulses
0 ... etc.
Dev ±32767 ms Latest time deviation between the system clock and
the received synchronization
SyOS ±10000.000 s Synchronisation correction for any constant deviation Set
in the synchronizing source.
AAIntv ±10000 s Adapted auto adjust interval for 1 ms correction Set**)
AvDrft Lead; Lag Adapted average clock drift sign Set**)
FilDev ±125 ms Filtered synchronisation deviation
*) Astronomically a range –11 ... +12 h would be enough, but for political and geographical reasons a larger range is
needed.
**) If external synchronization is used this parameter will be set automatically.
***) Set the DI delay to its minimum and the polarity such that the leading edge is the synchronizing edge.
****) Relay needs to be equipped with suitable hardware option module to receive IRIG-B clock synchronization signal.
(Chapter 13 Order information).
V300/en M/A002 213

Synchronisation with DI
Clock can be synchronized by reading minute pulses from digital
inputs, virtual inputs or virtual outputs. Sync source is selected with
Minute sync pulse DI setting.
When rising edge is detected from the selected input, system clock
is adjusted to the nearest minute. Length of digital input pulse should
be at least 50 ms. Delay of the selected digital input should be set
to zero.
Synchronisation correction
If the sync source has a known offset delay, it can be compensated
with SyOS setting. This is useful for compensating hardware delays
or transfer delays of communication protocols. A positive value will
compensate a lagging external sync and communication delays. A
negative value will compensate any leading offset of the external
synch source.
Sync source
When the device receives new sync message, the sync source
display is updated. If no new sync messages are received within
next 1.5 minutes, the device will change to internal sync mode.
Deviation
The time deviation means how much system clock time differs from
sync source time. Time deviation is calculated after receiving new
sync message. The filtered deviation means how much the system
clock was really adjusted. Filtering takes care of small deviation in
sync messages.
Auto-lag/lead
The device synchronizes to the sync source, meaning it starts
automatically leading or lagging to stay in perfect sync with the
master. The learning process takes few days.
214 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.12 Running hour counter
7.12 Running hour counter

This function calculates the total active time of the selected digital
input, virtual I/O or output matrix output signal. The resolution is ten
seconds.
Table 7.16: Running hour counter parameters
Runh 0 ... 876000 h Total active time, hours (Set)
Note: The label text "Runh" can be edited with

VAMPSET.
Runs 0 ... 3599 s Total active time, seconds (Set)
Starts 0 ... 65535 Activation counter (Set)
Status Stop Current status of the selected digital signal
Run
Started at Date and time of the last activation
Stopped at Date and time of the last inactivation
(Set) = An informative value which can be edited as well.
V300/en M/A002 215

7.13 Timers 7 Supporting functions
7.13 Timers
The VAMP protection platform includes four settable timers that can
be used together with the user's programmable logic or to control
setting groups and other applications that require actions based on
calendar time. Each timer has its own settings. The selected on-time
and off-time is set and then the activation of the timer can be set to
be as daily or according the day of week (See the setting parameters
for details). The timer outputs are available for logic functions and
for the block and output matrix.
Figure 7.8: Timer output sequence in different modes.
The user can force any timer, which is in use, on or off. The forcing
is done by writing a new status value. No forcing flag is needed as
in forcing i.e. the output relays.
The forced time is valid until the next forcing or until the next reversing
timed act from the timer itself.
The status of each timer is stored in non-volatile memory when the
auxiliary power is switched off. At start up, the status of each timer
is recovered.
216 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.13 Timers
Table 7.17: Setting parameters of timers

Parameter Value Description
TimerN - Timer status
- Not in use
0 Output is inactive
1 Output is active
On hh:mm:ss Activation time of the timer
Off hh:mm:ss De-activation time of the timer
Mode For each four timers there are 12 different modes available:
- The timer is off and not running. The output is off i.e. 0 all the time.
Daily The timer switches on and off once every day.
Monday The timer switches on and off every Monday.
Tuesday The timer switches on and off every Tuesday.
Wednesday The timer switches on and off every Wednesday.
Thursday The timer switches on and off every Thursday.
Friday The timer switches on and off every Friday.
Saturday The timer switches on and off every Saturday.
Sunday The timer switches on and off every Sunday.
MTWTF The timer switches on and off every day except Saturdays and Sundays
MTWTFS The timer switches on and off every day except Sundays.
SatSun The timer switches on and off every Saturday and Sunday.
V300/en M/A002 217

7.14 Combined overcurrent status 7 Supporting functions
7.14 Combined overcurrent status

This function is collecting faults, fault types and registered fault
currents of all enabled overcurrent stages.
Combined over current status can be used as an indication of faults.
Combined o/c indicates the amplitude of the last occurred fault. Also
a separate indication of the fault type is informed during the start
and the trip. Active phases during the start and the trip are also
activated in the output matrix. After the fault is switched off the active
signals will release after the set delay “clearing delay“ has passed.
The combined o/c status referres to the following over current stages:
I>, I>>, I>>>, Iφ>, Iφ>>, Iφ>>> and Iφ>>>>.
Table 7.18: Line fault parameters
IFltLas xImode Current of the latest overcurrent fault (Set)
LINE ALARM
AlrL1 - Start (=alarm) status for each phase.
AlrL2 0 0=No start since alarm ClrDly
AlrL3 1 1=Start is on
OCs - Combined overcurrent start status.
0 AlrL1=AlrL2=AlrL3=0
1 AlrL1=1 orAlrL2=1 or AlrL3=1

LxAlarm - 'On' Event enabling for AlrL1...3 Set
On Events are enabled
Off Events are disabled

LxAlarmOff - 'Off' Event enabling for AlrL1...3 Set

OCAlarm - 'On' Event enabling for combined o/c starts Set

OCAlarmOff - 'Off' Event enabling for combined o/c starts Set

IncFltEvnt - Disabling several start and trip events of the same fault Set
On Several events are enabled *)
Off Several events of an increasing fault is disabled **)

ClrDly 0 ... 65535 s Duration for active alarm status AlrL1, Alr2, AlrL3 and OCs Set
LINE FAULT
218 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.14 Combined overcurrent status

FltL1 - Fault (=trip) status for each phase.
FltL2 0 0=No fault since fault ClrDly
FltL3 1 1=Fault is on
OCt - Combined overcurrent trip status.
0 FltL1=FltL2=FltL3=0
1 FltL1=1 orFltL2=1 or FltL3=1

LxTrip - 'On' Event enabling for FltL1...3 Set

LxTripOff - 'Off' Event enabling for FltL1...3 Set

OCTrip - 'On' Event enabling for combined o/c trips Set

OCTripOff - 'Off' Event enabling for combined o/c starts Set

IncFltEvnt - Disabling several events of the same fault Set
On Several events are enabled *)
Off Several events of an increasing fault is disabled **)

ClrDly 0 ... 65535 Duration for active alarm status FltL1, Flt2, FltL3 and OCt Set
*) Used with IEC 60870-105-103 communication protocol. The alarm screen will show the latest if it's the biggest registered
fault current, too. Not used with Spabus, because Spabus masters usually don't like to have unpaired On/Off events.
**) Used with SPA-bus protocol, because most SPA-bus masters do need an off-event for each corresponding on-event.
V300/en M/A002 219

7.14 Combined overcurrent status 7 Supporting functions
Figure 7.9: Combined o/c status.
The fault that can be seen in the Figure 7.9 was 3 times to nominal
and it started as an one phase fault L1-E. At the moment when one
of the protection stages tripped the fault was already increased in to
a two phase short circuit L1-L2. All signals those are stated as “1”
are also activated in the output matrix. After the fault disappears the
activated signals will release.
Combined over current status can be found from VAMPSET menu
“protection stage status 2”.
220 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.15 Self-supervision
7.15 Self-supervision
The functions of the microcontroller and the associated circuitry, as
well as the program execution are supervised by means of a separate
watchdog circuit. Besides supervising the relay, the watchdog circuit
attempts to restart the micro controller in a inoperable situation. If
the restarting fails, the watchdog issues a self-supervision signal
indicating a permanent internal condition.
When the watchdog circuit detects a permanent fault, it always blocks
any control of other output relays (except for the self-supervision
output relay).
In addition, the internal supply voltages are supervised. Should the
auxiliary supply of the IED disappear, an indication is automatically
given because the IED status inoperative (SF) output relay functions
on a working current principle. This means that the SF relay is
energized when the auxiliary supply is on and the arc flash protection
is healthy.
7.15.1 Diagnostics
The device runs self-diagnostic tests for hardware and software in
boot sequence and also performs runtime checking.
Permanent inoperative state
If permanent inoperative state has been detected, the device releases
SF relay contact and status led is set on. Local panel will also display
a detected fault message. Permanet inoperative state is entered
when the device is not able to handle main functions.
Temporal inoperative state
When self-diagnostic function detects a temporal inoperative state,
Selfdiag matrix signal is set and an event (E56) is generated. In case
the inoperative state was only temporary, an off event is generated
(E57). Self diagnostic state can be reset via local HMI.
Diagnostic registers
There are four 16-bit diagnostic registers which are readable through
remote protocols. The following table shows the meaning of each
dagnostic register and their bits.
V300/en M/A002 221

7.15 Self-supervision 7 Supporting functions
Register Bit Code Description

SelfDiag1 0 (LSB) T1 Potential output relay problem
1 T2
2 T3
3 T4
4 A1
SelfDiag3 0 (LSB) DAC Potential mA-output problem

1 STACK Potential stack problem
2 MemChk Potential memory problem
3 BGTask Potential background task timeout
4 DI Potential input problem (Remove DI1, DI2)
5
6 Arc Potential arc card problem
7 SecPulse Poential hardware problem
8 RangeChk DB: Setting outside range
9 CPULoad Overload
10 +24V Potential internal voltage problem
11 -15V
12 ITemp Internal temperature too high
15 (MSB) E2prom Potential E2prom problem
SelfDiag4 0 (LSB) +12V Potential internal voltage problem

1 ComBuff Potential BUS: buffer problem
2 OrderCode Potential order code problem
The code is displayed in self diagnostic events and on the diagnostic

menu on local panel and VAMPSET.
222 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.16 Incomer short circuit fault locator
7.16 Incomer short circuit fault locator

The device includes a stand-alone fault locator algorithm. The
algorithm can locate a short circuit in radial operated networks. The
fault location is given as in reactance (ohms) and kilometres. Fault
value can then be exported, for example, with event to a DMS
(Distribution Management System). The system can then localize
the fault. If a DMS is not available, the distance to the fault is
displayed as kilometres, as well as a reactance value. However, the
distance value is valid only if the line reactance is set correctly.
Furthermore, the line should be homogenous, that is, the wire type
of the line should be the same for the whole length. If there are
several wire types on the same line, an average line reactance value
can be used to get an approximate distance value to the fault
(examples of line reactance values: Overhead wire Sparrow: 0.408
ohms/km and Raven: 0.378 ohms/km).
The fault locator is normally used in the incoming bay of the
substation. Therefore, the fault location is obtained for the whole
network with just one device. This is very cost-effective upgrade of
an existing system.
The algorithm functions in the following order:

1. The needed measurements (phase currents and voltages) are
continuously available.
2. The fault distance calculation can be triggered in two ways: by
opening a feeder circuit-breaker due to a fault and sudden
increase in phase currents (Enable Xfault calc1 + Triggering
digital input). Other option is to use only the sudden increase in
the phase currents (Enable Xfault calc1).
3. Phase currents and voltages are registered in three stages:
before the fault, during the fault and after the faulty feeder
circuit-breaker was opened.
4. The fault distance quantities are calculated.
5. Two phases with the biggest fault current are selected.
6. The load currents are compensated.
7. The faulty line length reactance is calculated.
V300/en M/A002 223

7.16 Incomer short circuit fault locator 7 Supporting functions
Table 7.19: Setting parameters of incomer short circuit fault locator

Triggering digital input -; - - Trigger mode (-= triggering based on
sudden increase of phase current, other-
DI1 … DI18 wise sudden increase of phase current +
DIx/VIx)
VI1 ... VI4
VO1…VO6
NI1…NI64
POC1…POC16
Line reactance 0.010 … 10.000 Ohms/km 0.389 Line reactance of the line. This is used
only to convert the fault reactance to kilo-
meters.
dItrig 10 … 800 % Imode 50 Trig current (sudden increase of phase
current)
Blocked before next trig 10...600 s 70 Blocks function for this et time after trigger.
This is used for blocking calculation in
autoreclose.
Xmax limit 0.5...500.0 Ohm 11.0 Limit for maximum reactance. If reactance
value is above set limit calculation result
will not be shown.
Event Disabled; Enabled - Enabled Event mask
Table 7.20: Measured and recorded values of incomer short circuit fault
locator
Measured values/ Distance km Distance to the fault
recorded values Xfault ohm Fault reactance

Date - Fault date
Time - Fault time
Time ms Fault time
Cntr - Number of faults
Pre A Pre-fault current (=load current)
Fault A Current during the fault
Post A Post-fault current
Udrop % Un Voltage dip during the fault
Durati s Fault duration
Type - Fault type (1-2,2-3,1-3,1-2-3)
224 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.16 Incomer short circuit fault locator
Below is presented an application example where the fault location

algorithm is used at the incomer side. Notice following things while
commissioning the relay:
Below is presented an application example where the fault location

algorithm is used at the feeder side. Notice following things while
commissioning the relay:
V300/en M/A002 225

7.17 Feeder fault locator 7 Supporting functions
7.17 Feeder fault locator

The device includes a stand-alone fault locator algorithm. The
algorithm can locate a short circuit and earth fault in radial operated
networks. The fault location is given as in reactance (ohms) and
kilometres. Fault value can then be exported, for example, with event
to a DMS (Distribution Management System). The system can then
localize the fault. If a DMS is not available, the distance to the fault
is displayed as kilometres, as well as a reactance value.
However, the distance value is valid only if the line reactance is set
correctly.
Furthermore, the line should be homogenous, that is, the wire type
of the line should be the same for the whole length. If there are
several wire types on the same line, an average line reactance value
can be used to get an approximate distance value to the fault
(examples of line reactance values: Overhead wire Sparrow: 0.408
ohms/km and Raven: 0.378 ohms/km).
This fault locator cannot be used in incomer because this locator
has not ability to compensate healthy feeders away.
When feeder fault locator is calculating short circuit impedance
following formula is used:
U A −U B UA = Vector between the voltage and the ground

Z AB =
IA − IB UB = Vector between the voltage and the ground
IA = Vector between the current and the ground
IB = Vector between the current and the ground
When feeder fault locator is calculating ground fault impedance

following formula is used:
UA UA = Vector between the voltage and the ground

ZA =
I A + k × 3I 0 IA = Vector between the current and the ground
k= Earth factor k, needs to be set by user
3I0 = Residual current, calculated from phase currents (I0Calc)
Earth factor k is calculated with following formula:

K0 = (Z0L-Z1L) / (3 x Z1L)
Z0L = Zero sequence line imedance
Z1L = Positive sequence line impedance
Triggering of the fault reactance calculation happens when ”Pick-up
setting” -value is exceeded OR if user wants, both “Pick-up setting”
226 V300/en M/A002

7 Supporting functions 7.17 Feeder fault locator
and “Triggering digital input” terms are fulfilled. When used,

“Triggering digital input” can be either digital or virtual input.
Table 7.21: Setting parameters of feeder fault locator
Pick-up setting 0.10...5.00 xIn 1.2 Current limit for triggering.
Triggering digital input -; - - Trigger mode (-= triggering based on sudden
increase of phase current, otherwise sudden in-
DI1 … DI18 crease of phase current +
DIx/VIx/VOx/NIx/POCx)
VI1 ... VI4
VO1…VO6
NI1…NI64
POC1…POC16
Line reactance 0.010 … 10.000 Ohms/km 0.491 Line reactance of the line. This is used only to
convert the fault reactance to kilometers.
Earth factor 0.000 …10.000 - 0.678 Calculated earth factor from line specifications.
Earth factor angle -60...60 ° 10 Angle of calculated earth factor from line specific-
ations.
Event enabling Off; On - On Event mask
Table 7.22: Measured and recorded values of feeder fault locator

Measured values/ recor- Distance km Distance to the fault
ded values
Xfault ohm Fault reactance
Date - Fault date
Time - Fault time
Cntr - Number of faults
Fault A Current during the fault
Udrop % Un Voltage dip during the fault
Type - Fault type (1-2,2-3,1-3,1-2-3, 1-N,2-N,3-N,1-N-
2-N, 2-N-3-N,3-N-1-N,1-N-2-N-3-N)
V300/en M/A002 227

7.17 Feeder fault locator 7 Supporting functions
228 V300/en M/A002

8 Communication and protocols
8 Communication and protocols
8.1 Communication ports

The device has one fixed communication port: USB port in front for
connection to VAMPSET setting and configuration tool.
Optionally the device may have upto to 2 serial ports COM 3 and
COM 4 for serial protocols (for example IEC 103), one ETHERNET
port for Ethernet-based communication protocols (for example IEC
61850) and COM 5 port (Arc I/O Bus) for communication with the
arc protection I/O-units. COM 5 port is supported only when power
module option “A” or “B” is used.
The number of available serial ports depends on the type of the
communication option cards.
1 COM 5 port
2 Ethernet
COM 3 port
COM 4 port
Figure 8.1: VAMP 300 IED fixed communication ports in different slots.
NOTE: It is possible to have up to 2 serial communication protocols

simultaneously in the same D9 connector but restriction is that same
protocol can be used only once.
Protocol configuration menu contains selection for the protocol, port

settings and message/error/timeout counters.
V300/en M/A002 229

8.1 Communication ports 8 Communication and protocols
Figure 8.2: Protocols can be enabled in “protocol configuration” menu. Only serial
communication protocols are valid with RS-232 interface.

Protocol Protocol selection for COM port Set
None -
SPA-bus SPA-bus (slave)
ProfibusDP Interface to Profibus DB module VPA 3CG
(slave)
ModbusSlv Modbus RTU slave
IEC-103 IEC-60870-5-103 (slave)
ExternalIO Modbus RTU master for external I/O-
modules
IEC 101 IEC-608670-5-101
DNP3 DNP 3.0
DeviceNet Interface to DeviceNet module VSE 009
GetSet Communicationi protocola for VAMPSET
interface
Msg# 0 ... 232 - 1 Message counter since the device has Clr
restarted or since last clearing
Errors 0 ... 216 - 1 Protocol interruption since the device has Clr
Tout 0 ... 216 - 1 Timeout interruption since the device has Clr
speed/DPS Display of current communication paramet- 1.
ers.
speed = bit/s
D = number of data bits
P = parity: none, even, odd
S = number of stop bits
230 V300/en M/A002

8 Communication and protocols 8.1 Communication ports
Clr = Clearing to zero is possible
1. The communication parameters are set in the protocol specific menus. For the local port command line interface the
parameters are set in configuration menu.
8.1.1 Ethernet port

TCP port 1st INST and TCP port 2nd INST are ports for ethernet
communication protocols. Ethernet communication protocols can be
selected to these ports when such hardware option is installed. The
parameters for these ports are set via local HMI or with VAMPSET
in menus TCP port 1st INST and TCP port 2nd INST. Two different
protocols can be used simultaneously on one physical interface (both
protocols use the same IP address and MAC address but different
IP port).
NOTE: It is possible to have 2 ethernet communication protocols

simulataneously but restriction is that same protocol can be used
only once.
Figure 8.3: Protocols can be enabled in “protocol configuration” menu. With ethernet
option it is possible to use TCP -based communication protocols.
V300/en M/A002 231

8.1 Communication ports 8 Communication and protocols
Protocol configuration menu contains address and other related

information for the ethernet port. TCP port 1st and 2nd instance
include selection for the protocol, IP port settings and
message/error/timeout counters. More information about the protocol
configuration menu on table below.
Table 8.2: Main configuration parameters (local display), inbuilt Ethernet
port
Protocol Protocol selection for the extension port Set
None Command line interface for VAMPSET
ModbusTCPs Modbus TCP slave
IEC-101 IEC-101
IEC 61850 IEC-61850 protocol
EtherNet/IP Ethernet/IP protocol
DNP3 DNP/TCP
Port nnn Ip port for protocol, default 102 Set
IpAddr n.n.n.n Internet protocol address (set with Set
VAMPSET)
NetMsk n.n.n.n Net mask (set with VAMPSET) Set
Gatew default = 0.0.0.0 Gateway IP address (set with VAMPSET) Set
NTPSvr n.n.n.n Network time protocol server (set with Set
VAMPSET)
0.0.0.0 = no SNTP
KeepAlive nn TCP keepalive interval Set (1
FTP server on/off Enable FTP server Set
FTP speed 4 Kb/s (default) Maximum transmission speed for FTP Set
FTP password ? (user) FTP password Set
config (configurator)
MAC address 001ADnnnnnnn MAC address
VS Port nn IP port for Vampset Set
23 (default)
Msg# nnn Message counter
Errors nnn Error counter
Tout nnn Timeout counter
EthSffEn on/off Sniffer port enable Set
SniffPort Port2 Sniffer port

1)KeepAlive: The KeepAlive parameter sets in seconds the time between two keepalive packets are sent from the IED.
The setting range for this parameter is between zero (0) and 20 seconds; with the exception that zero (0) means actually
120 seconds (2 minutes). A keep alive’s packet purpose is for the VAMP IED to send a probe packet to a connected client
for checking the status of the TCP-connection when no other packet is being sent e.g. client does not poll data from the
IED. If the keepalive packet is not acknowledged, the IED will close the TCP connection. Connection must be resumed
on the client side.
232 V300/en M/A002

8 Communication and protocols 8.2 Communication protocols
Table 8.3: TCP PORT 1st INST

Protocol Protocol selection for the extension port. Set
None Command line interface for VAMPSET
DNP3 DNP/TCP
Table 8.4: CP PORT 2nd INST

Ethernet port protocol Protocol selection for the extension port. Set
(TCP PORT 2nd INST) None Command line interface for VAMPSET
DNP3 DNP/TCP
8.2 Communication protocols

The protocols enable the transfer of the following type of data:
• events
• status information
• measurements
• control commands
• clock synchronizing
• Settings (SPA-bus and embedded SPA-bus only)
8.2.1 GetSet
This is and ASCII protocol used by VAMPSET. This protocol is the
protocol used on the USB port. This can also be used on the COM
ports, if VAMPSET interface via these ports is required.
V300/en M/A002 233

8.2 Communication protocols 8 Communication and protocols
8.2.2 Modbus TCP and Modbus RTU

These Modbus protocols are often used in power plants and in
industrial applications. The difference between these two protocols
is the media. Modbus TCP uses Ethernet and Modbus RTU uses
asynchronous communication (RS-485, optic fibre, RS-232).
VAMPSET will show the list of all available data items for Modbus.
A separate document “Modbus data.pdf“ is also available.
The Modbus communication is activated via a menu selection with
parameter "Protocol". See Chapter 8.1 Communication ports .
For ethernet interface configuration, see Chapter 8.1.1 Ethernet port.
Addr 1 - 247 Modbus address for the device. Set
Broadcast address 0 can be used for clock synchronizing.

Modbus TCP uses also the TCP port settings.
bit/s 1200 bps Communication speed for Modbus RTU Set
2400
4800
9600
19200
Parity None Parity for Modbus RTU Set
Even
Odd
8.2.3 Profibus DP
The Profibus DP protocol is widely used in industry. An external VPA
3CG and VX072 cables are required.
Device profile "continuous mode"

In this mode the device is sending a configured set of data
parameters continuously to the Profibus DP master. The benefit of
this mode is the speed and easy access to the data in the Profibus
master. The drawback is the maximum buffer size of 128 bytes,
which limits the number of data items transferred to the master. Some
PLCs have their own limitation for the Profibus buffer size, which
may further limit the number of transferred data items.
234 V300/en M/A002

Device profile "Request mode"

Using the request mode it is possible to read all the available data
from the VAMP device and still use only a very short buffer for
Profibus data transfer. The drawback is the slower overall speed of
the data transfer and the need of increased data processing at the
Profibus master as every data item must be separately requested
by the master.
NOTE: In request mode it is not possible to read continuously only one single
data item. At least two different data items must be read in turn to
get updated data from the device.
There is a separate manual for VPA 3CG (VVPA3CG/EN M/xxxx)

for the continuous mode and request mode.
Available data
VAMPSET will show the list of all available data items for both modes.
A separate document “Profibus parameters.pdf” is also available.
The Profibus DP communication is activated usually for remote port
via a menu selection with parameter "Protocol". See Chapter 8.1
Communication ports .
Mode Profile selection Set
Cont Continuous mode
Reqst Request mode
bit/s 2400 bps Communication speed from the main CPU to the Profibus
converter. (The actual Profibus bit rate is automatically set
by the Profibus master and can be up to 12 Mbit/s.)
Emode Event numbering style. (Set)
Channel Use this for new installations.
(Limit60) (The other modes are for compatibility with old systems.)
(NoLimit)
InBuf bytes Size of Profibus master's Rx buffer. (data to the master) 1. 3.
OutBuf bytes Size of Profibus master's Tx buffer. (data from the master) 2. 3.
Addr 1 - 247 This address has to be unique within the Profibus network Set
system.
Conv Converter type 4.
- No converter recognized
VE Converter type "VE" is recognized
V300/en M/A002 235

8.2.4 SPA-bus
The device has full support for the SPA-bus protocol including reading
and writing the setting values. Also reading of multiple consecutive
status data bits, measurement values or setting values with one
message is supported.
Several simultaneous instances of this protocol, using different
physical ports, are possible, but the events can be read by one single
instance only.
There is a separate document “Spabus parameters.pdf” of SPA-bus
data items available.
Addr 1 - 899 SPA-bus address. Must be unique in the Set
system.
bit/s 1200 bps Communication speed Set
2400
4800
9600 (default)
19200
Emode Event numbering style. (Set)
Channel Use this for new installations.
(Limit60) (The other modes are for compatibility with
old systems.)
(NoLimit)
8.2.5 IEC 60870-5-103

The IEC standard 60870-5-103 "Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment" provides standardized
communication interface to a primary system (master system).
The unbalanced transmission mode of the protocol is used, and the
device functions as a secondary station (slave) in the communication.
Data is transferred to the primary system using "data acquisition by
polling"-principle.
The IEC functionality includes application functions:
• station initialization
• general interrogation
• clock synchronization and
• command transmission.
236 V300/en M/A002

It is not possible to transfer parameter data or disturbance recordings

via the IEC 103 protocol interface.
The following ASDU (Application Service Data Unit) types will be
used in communication from the device:
• ASDU 1: time tagged message
• ASDU 3: Measurands I
• ASDU 5: Identification message
• ASDU 6: Time synchronization and
• ASDU 8: Termination of general interrogation.
The device will accept:
• ASDU 6: Time synchronization
• ASDU 7: Initiation of general interrogation and
• ASDU 20: General command.
The data in a message frame is identified by:
• type identification
• function type and
• information number.
These are fixed for data items in the compatible range of the protocol,
for example, the trip of I> function is identified by: type identification
= 1, function type = 160 and information number = 90. "Private range"
function types are used for such data items, which are not defined
by the standard (e.g. the status of the digital inputs and the control
of the objects).
The function type and information number used in private range
messages is configurable. This enables flexible interfacing to different
master systems.
For more information on IEC 60870-5-103 in Vamp devices refer to
the “IEC103 Interoperability List” document.
Addr 1 - 254 An unique address within the system Set
19200
MeasInt 200 - 10000 ms Minimum measurement response interval Set
SyncRe Sync ASDU6 response time mode Set
Sync+Proc
Msg
Msg+Proc
V300/en M/A002 237

Table 8.9: Parameters for disturbance record reading

ASDU23 On Enable record info message Set
Off
Smpls/msg 1 - 25 Record samples in one message Set
Timeout 10 - 10000 s Record reading timeout Set
Fault Fault identifier number for IEC-103. Starts +
trips of all stages.
TagPos Position of read pointer
Chn Active channel
ChnPos Channel read position
Fault numbering
Faults Total number of faults
GridFlts Fault burst identifier number
Grid Time window to classify faults together to the Set
same burst.
238 V300/en M/A002

8.2.6 DNP 3.0

The relay supports communication using DNP 3.0 protocol. The
following DNP 3.0 data types are supported:
• binary input
• binary input change
• double-bit input
• binary output
• analog input
• counters
Additional information can be obtained from the “DNP 3.0 Device
Profile Document” and “DNP 3.0 Parameters.pdf”. DNP 3.0
communication is activated via menu selection. RS-485 interface is
often used but also RS-232 and fibre optic interfaces are possible.
9600 (default)
19200
38400
Parity None (default) Parity Set
Even
Odd
SlvAddr 1 - 65519 An unique address for the device within the Set
system
MstrAddr 1 - 65519 Address of master Set
255=default
LLTout 0 - 65535 ms Link layer confirmation timeout Set
LLRetry 1 - 255 Link layer retry count Set
1=default
APLTout 0 - 65535 ms Application layer confirmation timeout Set
5000=default
CnfMode EvOnly (default) Application layer confirmation mode Set
All
DBISup No (default) Double-bit input support Set
Yes
SyncMode 0 - 65535 s Clock synchronization request interval. Set
0 = only at boot
V300/en M/A002 239

8.2.7 IEC 60870-5-101

The IEC 60870-5-101 standard is derived from the IEC 60870-5
protocol standard definition. In Vamp devices, IEC 60870-5-101
communication protocol is available via menu selection. The Vamp
unit works as a controlled outstation (slave) unit in unbalanced mode.
Supported application functions include process data transmission,
event transmission, command transmission, general interrogation,
clock synchronization, transmission of integrated totals, and
acquisition of transmission delay.
For more information on IEC 60870-5-101 in Vamp devices refer to
the “IEC 101 Profile checklist & datalist” document.
bit/s 1200 bps Bitrate used for serial communication. Set
2400
4800
9600
Parity None Parity used for serial communication Set
Even
Odd
LLAddr 1 - 65534 Link layer address Set
LLAddrSize 1-2 Bytes Size of Link layer address Set
ALAddr 1 - 65534 ASDU address Set
ALAddrSize 1-2 Bytes Size of ASDU address Set
IOAddrSize 2-3 Bytes Information object address size. (3-octet Set
addresses are created from 2-octet ad-
dresses by adding MSB with value 0.)
COTsize 1 Bytes Cause of transmission size
TTFormat Short The parameter determines time tag format: Set
3-octet time tag or 7-octet time tag.
Full
MeasFormat Scaled The parameter determines measurement Set
data format: normalized value or scaled
Normalized value.
DbandEna No Dead-band calculation enable flag Set
Yes
DbandCy 100 - 10000 ms Dead-band calculation interval Set
8.2.8 External I/O (Modbus RTU master)

External Modbus I/O devices can be connected to the relay using
this protocol.
240 V300/en M/A002

8.2.9 IEC 61850

IEC 61850 protocol is available with the optional communication
module. IEC 61850 protocol can be used to read / write static data
from the relay to receive events and to receive / send GOOSE
messages to other relays.
IEC 61850 serve interface is capable of
• Configurable data model: selection of logical nodes corresponding
to active application functions
• Configurable pre-defined data sets
• Supported dynamic data sets created by clients
• Supported reporting function with buffered and unbuffered Report
Control Blocks
• Sending analogue values over GOOSE
• Supported control modes:
- direct with normal security
- direct with enhanced security
- select before operation with normal security
- select before operation with enhanced security
• Supported horizontal communication with GOOSE: configurable
GOOSE publisher data sets, configurable filters for GOOSE
subscriber inputs, GOOSE inputs available in the application
logic matrix
Additional information can be obtained from the separate documents
“IEC 61850 conformance statement.pdf”, “IEC 61850 Protocol
data.pdf” and “Configuration of IEC 61850 interface.pdf”.
V300/en M/A002 241

8.2.10 EtherNet/IP
The device supports communication using EtherNet/IP protocol which
is a part of CIP (Common Industrial Protocol) family. EtherNet/IP
protocol is available with the optional inbuilt Ethernet port. The
protocol can be used to read / write data from the device using
request / response communication or via cyclic messages
transporting data assigned to assemblies (sets of data).
EtherNet/IP main features:
• Static data model: 2 standard objects (Overload and Control
Supervisor), 2 private objects (one for digital data and one for
analog data) and 4 configuration objects for protection functions
configuration
• Two configurable assemblies (one producing and one consuming)
with the maximum capacity of 128 bytes each EDS file that can
be fed to any client supporting EDS files: can be generated at
any time, all changes to EtherNet/IP configuration (see
configuration parameters in Table 8.12) or to assemblies’ content
require generating of the new EDS file.
• Three types of communications are supported: UCMM (one time
request / response), Class 3 connection (cyclic request /
response) and Class 1 connection (cyclic IO messages containing
assemblies’ data)
EtherNet/IP implementation on VAMP device serves as a server and
is not capable of initiating communication.
Table 8.12: EtherNet/IP main configuration parameters
Parameter Range Description
IP address IP protocol address identifing device in the network
Multicast IP Multicast IP address used for sending IO messages
Multicast TTL 1-100 Time to live of the IO messages sent to multicast address
Vendor ID 1-65535 Identification of a vendor by number
Device Type 0-65535 Indication of general type of product
Product Code 1-65535 Identification of a particular product of an individual vendor
Major Revision 1-127 Major revision of the item the Identity Object represents
Minor Revision 1-255 Minor revision of the item the Identity Object represents
Serial Number 0-4294967295 Serial number of device
Product Name 32 chars Human readable identification
Producing Instance 1-1278 Instance number of producing assembly
Include Run/Idle On/Off Include or exlude Run/Idle Header in an outgoing IO messages
Header (Producing)
Consuming Instance 1-1278 Instance number of consuming assembly
Include Run/Idle Header On/Off Expect presence or absence of Run/Idle Header in an incoming IO
(Consuming) messages
242 V300/en M/A002

8.2.11 FTP server

The FTP server is available on VAMP IEDs equipped with an inbuilt
or optional Ethernet card.
The server enables downloading of the following files from an IED:
• Disturbance recordings.
• The MasterICD and MasterICDEd2 files.
The MasterICD and MasterICDEd2 files are VAMP-specific reference
files that can be used for offline IEC61850 configuration.
The inbuilt FTP client in Microsoft Windows or any other compatible
FTP client may be used to download files from the device.
Enable FTP server Yes Enable or disable the FTP server. Set
No
FTP password Max 33 characters Required to access the FTP server with an FTP Set
client. Default is “config”. The user name is al-
ways “vamp”.
FTP max speed 1…10 KB/s The maximum speed at which the FTP server Set
will transfer data.
8.2.12 HTTP server – Webset

The Webset HTTP configuration interface provides the option to
configure the device with a standard web browser such as Internet
Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, or Google Chrome. The feature is available
when communication option C or D is in use.
A subset of the features of Vampset is available in the Webset
interface. The group list and group view from Vampset are provided,
and most groups, except the LOGIC and the MIMIC groups are
configurable.
Parameter Value Description Note
Enable HTTP srvr Yes Enable or disable the HTTP server. Set
No
V300/en M/A002 243

9 Applications and configuration
examples
9 Applications and configuration

examples
The following chapters illustrate the functions in different protection
applications.
The relays can be used for line/feeder protection of medium voltage
networks with grounded, low-resistance grounded, isolated or a
compensated neutral point. The relays have all the required functions
to be applied as a backup relay in high voltage networks or to a
transformer differential relay. In addition VAMP 300 includes all the
required functions to be applied as motor protection relay for rotating
machines in industrial protection applications.
The relays provide circuit-breaker control functionality, additional
primary switching devices (earthing switches and disconnector
switches) can also be controlled from the relay HMI or the control or
SCADA/automation system. Programmable logic functionality is also
implemented in the relay for various applications e.g interlockings
schemes.
244 V300/en M/A002

9 Applications and configuration 9.1 Substation feeder protection
examples
9.1 Substation feeder protection
VAMP300app1
Figure 9.1: VAMP 300 used in substation feeder protection.
The device includes three-phase overcurrent protection, earth fault

protection and fast arc protection. At the incoming feeder, the
instantaneous stage I>>> of the VAMP feeder device is blocked with
the start signal of the overcurrent stage. This prevents the trip signal
if the fault occurs on the outgoing feeder.
V300/en M/A002 245

9.1 Substation feeder protection 9 Applications and configuration
examples
VAMP300app2
Figure 9.2: VAMP 300 used in substation feeder protection in compensated network
For the directional function of earth fault function, the status

information (on/off) of the Petersen coil is routed to one of the digital
inputs of the feeder device so that either I0sinφ or I0cosφ function is
obtained.
The function I0sinφ is used in isolated networks, and the function I0cosφ
is used in resistance or resonant earthed networks.
246 V300/en M/A002

9 Applications and configuration 9.2 Industrial feeder protection
examples
9.2 Industrial feeder protection
VAMP300app3
M
Figure 9.3: VAMP 300 used in cable protection of an industry plant network
The device supports directional earth fault protection and three-phase

overcurrent protection which is required in a cable feeder.
Furthermore, the thermal stage can be used to protect the cable
against overloading. All necessary motor protection functions are
supported when using motor application mode. This example also
includes fast arc protection.
V300/en M/A002 247

10 Connections
10 Connections
The configuration of the device can be checked from local HMI or
VAMPSET menu called “Slot” or “SLOT INFO”. This contains “Card
ID” which is the name of the card used by the device software.
Figure 0.1: An example of showing the hardware configuration by VAMPSET.
10.1 Supply voltage cards

Auxiliary voltage
External auxiliary voltage UAUX (110 - 240 V ac / dc, or optionally 24
- 48 V dc) of the device is connected to the terminals 1/C, D/1:1-2.
NOTE: When optional 24 - 48 V dc power module is used the polarity is as

follows: 1/D/2:2 positive, 1/D/2:1 negative.
248 V300/en M/A002

10 Connections 10.1 Supply voltage cards
Table 10.1: Supply voltage card Power C 110-240 & Power D 24-48
Pin No. Symbol Description
20 T12 Heavy duty trip relay 12 for arc protection
10 A1 NO Signal relay 1, normal open connector
9 A1 NC Signal relay 1, normal closed connector
8 A1 COMMON Signal relay 1, common connector
7 SF NO Service status output, normal open
Figure 10.2: Example of
supply voltage card Power 6 SF NC Service status output, normal closed
C 110-240 5 SF COMMON Service status output, common
4 No connection
3 No connection
2 L/+/~ Auxiliary voltage
1 N/-/~ Auxiliary voltage
WARNING
STATEMENT OF HAZARD
Always connect the protective grounding before connecting the
power supply.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death or
serious injury.
V300/en M/A002 249

10.2 Analogue measurement cards 10 Connections
10.2 Analogue measurement cards
10.2.1 Analogue measurements card “A =

3L+U+I0(5/1A)”
This card contains connections current measurement transformers
for measuring of the phase currents L1…L3 and residual current I0,
and one voltage measurement transformer for measuring of the U0,
ULL or ULN.
Following analogue card can be used in feeder (F) and motor (M)
applications. IED is able to measure three phase currents, residual
current and additionally one voltage which can be connected as a
line to line (1LL) or line to neutral (1LN). Zero sequence voltage (U0)
can be connected as well.
Table 10.2: Terminal pins 8/A/1:1...11

1 IL1 (S1) Phase current L1 (S1)
7 Io1 Residual current I01 common for 1A and 5A (S1)
8 Io1/5A Residual current I01 5A (S2)
10 Uo/ULL/ULN U0 (da)/ ULL (a)/ ULN (a)
11 Uo/ULL/ULN U0 (dn)/ ULL (b)/ ULN (n)
Figure 10.3: Analogue

measurement card "A"
250 V300/en M/A002

10 Connections 10.2 Analogue measurement cards
10.2.2 "B = 3L+4U+I0 (5/1A)"

This card contains connections for current transformers for measuring
of the phase currents L1…L3 and residual current I0, and four voltage
transformers for measuring of the U0, ULL or ULN.
Following analogue card can be used in feeder (F), motor (M) and
line (L) applications. IED is able to measure three phase currents,
residual current. IED also measures up to four voltage signals line
to line, line to neutral, zero sequence voltage and voltage from
another side (synchro-check). See voltage modes selection below:
• 3LN+U0, 3LN+LLY, 3LN+LNY
• 2LL+U0+LLY, 2LL+U0+LNY
• LL+U0+LLY+LLZ, LN+U0+LNY+LNZ
Table 10.3: Terminal pins 8/B/1:1...11

7 Io1 Residual current I01 common for 1A and 5A (S1)

1 ULL/ULN Voltage ULL (a) /ULN (a)
2 ULL/ULN Voltage ULL (b) /ULN (n)
Figure 10.4: Analogue 3 ULL/ULN Voltage ULL (a) /ULN (a)
measurement card "B"
V300/en M/A002 251

10.2.3 "C = 3L+4U+2I0 (5+1A)"

of the phase currents L1…L3 and two residual current I0, and four
voltage transformers for measuring of the U0, ULL or ULN.
Following analogue card can be used in capacitor bank (C) and
generator (G) applications. IED is able to measure three phase
currents, two residual currents. IED also measures up to four voltage
signals line to line, line to neutral, zero sequence voltage and voltage
from another side (synchro-check). See voltage modes selection
below:
Table 10.5: Terminal pins 8/C/1:1...12

7 Io1/5A Residual current I01 5A
Table 10.6: Terminal pins 8/C/2:1...6

Figure 10.5: Analogue
measurement card "C" 3 ULL/ULN Voltage ULL (a) /ULN (a)
252 V300/en M/A002

10 Connections 10.2 Analogue measurement cards
10.2.4 "D = 3L+4U+2I0 (1+0.2A)"

of the phase currents L1…L3 and two residual current I0, and four
voltage transformers for measuring of the U0, ULL or ULN.
Following analogue card can be used in capacitor bank (C), feeder
(F), generator (G), line (L) and motor (M) applications. IED is able
to measure three phase currents, two residual currents. IED also
measures up to four voltage signals line to line, line to neutral, zero
sequence voltage and voltage from another side (synchro-check).
See voltage modes selection below:
Table 10.7: Terminal pins 8/D/1:1...12

9 Io2/5A Residual current I02 0.2A
10 Io2/5A Residual current I02 0.2A

Figure 10.6: Analogue 2 ULL/ULN Voltage ULL (b) /ULN (n)

measurement card "D" 3 ULL/ULN Voltage ULL (a) /ULN (a)
V300/en M/A002 253

10.2.5 Voltage measuring modes correlation for B,C

and D analogue measurement cards
U1, U2, U3 and U4 are voltage channels for the IED, where U4 is
located in terminal 8/B, C or D/1 and the remaining voltage channels
are interfaced with 8/B, C or D/2.
The physical voltage transformer connection in the VAMP 300 IED
depends on the used voltage transformer connection mode. This
setting is made in scalings setting view. See Table and Table
Table 10.9: Correlation between voltage measuring mode and physical

voltage input in Terminal 8/B/1 and 2
8/B/2 8/B/1
Terminal
1 2 3 4 5 6 10 11
Mode / Used voltage
3LN Not in use
3LN+U0 U0
UL1 UL2 UL3
3LN+LLy LLy
3LN+LNy LNy
2LL+U0 Not in use
2LL+U0+LLy U23 LLy
U12
2LL+U0+LNy U0 LNy
Figure 10.7: Terminal 8/B/1 LL+U0+LLy+LLz U12y U12z
and 2 LN+U0+LNy+LNz UL1 UL1y UL1z
Table 10.10: Correlation between voltage measuring mode and physical

voltage input in Terminals 8/C/1 and 2 and 8/D/1 and 2
8/C/1 and
8/C/2 and 8/D/2
Terminal 8/D/1
1 2 3 4 5 6 11 12
Mode / Used voltage
3LN+U0 U0
3LN+LLy UL1 UL2 UL3 LLy
3LN+LNy LNy
2LL+U0 Not in use
2LL+U0+LLy U23 LLy
U12
2LL+U0+LNy U0 LNy
Figure 10.8: Example of LL+U0+LLy+LLz U12y U12z
Terminal 8/C/1 and 2
LN+U0+LNy+LNz UL1 UL1y UL1z
254 V300/en M/A002

10 Connections 10.3 I/O cards
10.3 I/O cards
10.3.1 I/O card “B = 3BIO+2Arc”

This card contains connections to 2 arc light sensors (e.g. VA 1 DA),
3 binary inputs, 3 binary outputs and 3 fast trip relays.

20 T4 Trip relay 4 for arc protection
14 BI3 Binary input 3
8 BO COMMON Binary output 1...3 common GND
7 BO3 Binary output 3, +30 V dc
4 Sen 2 - Arc sensor channel 2 negative terminal
3 Sen 2 + Arc sensor channel 2 positive terminal
2 Sen 1 - Arc sensor channel 1 negative terminal
1 Sen 1 + Arc sensor channel 1 positive terminal
NOTE: Binary inputs are polarity free.
V300/en M/A002 255

10.3 I/O cards 10 Connections
10.3.2 I/O card “G = 6DI+4DO”

This card provides 6 digital inputs and 4 relays outputs. The threshold
level is selectable by the last digit of the ordering code.
6xDI+4xDO option card is equipped with six dry digital inputs with
hardware selectable activation/threshold voltage and four trip
contacts. Input and output contacts are normally open but can be
turned normally closed by using the local HMI or Vampset. Anyhow
normally closed contact will open automatically when the auxiliary
power of the IED is switched off.
Table 10.12: Terminal pins 2-5/G/1:1...20

20
Tx Trip relay
19
18
Tx Trip relay
17
16
Tx Trip relay
15
14
Tx Trip relay
13
12
DIx Digital input
11
10
DIx Digital input
9
8
DIx Digital input
7
6
DIx Digital input
5
4
DIx Digital input
3
2
DIx Digital input
1
NOTE: Digital inputs are polarity free.
256 V300/en M/A002

10 Connections 10.3 I/O cards
10.3.3 I/O card “I = 10DI”

This card provides 10 digital inputs. The threshold level is selectable
by the last digit of the ordering code.
Table 10.13: Terminal pins 2-5/I/1:1...20

20
DIx Digital input
19
18
DIx Digital input
17
16
DIx Digital input
15
14
DIx Digital input
13
12
DIx Digital input
11
10
DIx Digital input
9
8
DIx Digital input
7
6
DIx Digital input
5
4
DIx Digital input
3
2
DIx Digital input
1
NOTE: Digital inputs are polarity free.
V300/en M/A002 257

10.4 I/O option card “D= 4Arc” 10 Connections
10.4 I/O option card “D= 4Arc”

This card contains 4 arc point connections to 4 arc light sensors (e.g.
VA1DA). The card provides sensors 3…6.

8 Sen 6 - Arc sensor 6 negative terminal
7 Sen 6 + Arc sensor 6 positive terminal
10.5 Communication cards

The communication card types and their pin assignments are
introduced in the following table.
Communication option modules and their pin numbering

Type Communication Signal levels Connectors Pin usage
ports
232+00 COM 3 / COM 4 RS-232 D-connector 1 = TX COM 4
(Slot 9) 2 = TX COM3
3 = RX COM3
4 = IRIG-B
5 = IRIG-B GND
6=
7 = GND
8 = RX COM4
9 = +12V
258 V300/en M/A002

10 Connections 10.5 Communication cards
Type Communication Signal levels Connectors Pin usage

ports
232+Eth RJ COM 3 / COM 4 RS-232 D-connector 1 = TX COM 4
3 = RX COM3
4 = IRIG-B
5 = IRIG-B GND
6=
7 = GND
8 = RX COM4
9 = +12V
Ethernet Ethernet RJ-45 1 = Transmit +
100Mbps 1 8 2 = Transmit -
3 = Receive +
4=
5=
6 = Receive -
7=
8=
232+Eth LC COM 3 / COM 4 RS-232 D-connector 1 = TX COM 4
3 = RX COM3
4 = IRIG-B
5 = IRIG-B GND
6=
7 = GND
8 = RX COM4
9 = +12V
Ethernet Light LC fiber connect- 1 = Transmit +
or
100Mbps 2 = Transmit -
NOTE: When communication option module of type B, C or D is used in slot

9, serial ports COM 3 / COM 4 are available.
V300/en M/A002 259

10.5 Communication cards 10 Connections
10.5.1 COM 3-COM 4 ports

COM 3-COM 4 PORT:s are ports for serial communication protocols.
The type of the physical interface on these ports depends on the
type of the selected communication option module. The use of some
protocols may require a certain type of option module. The
parameters for these ports are set via local HMI or with VAMPSET
in menus COM 3 PORT-COM 4 PORT.
Communication information is normally sent to control system
(SCADA) but it is also possible to use certain communication related
noticifications internally for example alarming. This is can be done
for example via logic and different matrixes.
Figure 10.9: Communication related noticifications can be connected to trip contacts

or other similar purpose in “output matrix” menu.
260 V300/en M/A002

Table 10.15: COM 3 port

Type External mod- Order code Cable / order Typically used
ule code protocols
232+00 None None None -None
or -IEC-101
232+Eth RJ -IRIG-B
or -GetSet
232+Eth LC VSE-009 VSE-009 None -None
(Slot 9) -DeviceNet
VIO12-AB VIO 12 AB None -None
and - -ExternalIO
VSE-002 VSE002
VIO12-AC VIO 12 AC None -None
and - -ExternalIO
VSE-002 VSE002
VIO12-AD VIO 12 AD None -None
and - -ExternalIO
VSE-002 VSE002
VSE-001 VSE001 None -None
-IEC-103
-ModbusSlv
-SpaBus
-IEC-103
-ModbusSlv
-SpaBus
-DNP3
VPA-3CG VPA3CG VX068 -None
-ProfibusDP
To be able to use COM 4 port, RS-232 communication interface

(Option B, C or D) has to be split in to two by using VX067 cable.
When VX-067 cable is connected below mentioned protocols can
be used in COM 4 port:
V300/en M/A002 261

Table 10.16: COM 4 port

Type External mod- Order code Cable / order Typically used
ule code protocols
232+00 None None None -None
or -IEC-101
232+Eth RJ -IRIG-B
or -GetSet
232+Eth LC VSE-009 VSE-009 None -None
+VX067 (Split -DeviceNet

cable) VIO12-AB VIO 12 AB None -None
(Slot 9) and - -ExternalIO
VSE-002 VSE002
VIO12-AC VIO 12 AC None -None
and - -ExternalIO
VSE-002 VSE002
VIO12-AD VIO 12 AD None -None
and - -ExternalIO
VSE-002 VSE002
-IEC-103
-ModbusSlv
-SpaBus
-IEC-103
-ModbusSlv
-SpaBus
-DNP3
VPA-3CG VPA3CG VX068 -None
-ProfibusDP
262 V300/en M/A002

1 2 3 4 5 6 8
COM 3 port
9
VX067
VX067
COM 4 port
Figure 10.10: To be able to use COM 3 and COM 4 ports, VX067 must be used
on the D-connector of slot 9 option card.
NOTE: It is possible to have up to 2 serial communication protocols

simultaneously but restriction is that same protocol can be used only
once.
Protocol configuration menu contains selection for the protocol, port

settings and message/error/timeout counters.
Figure 10.11: Protocols can be enabled in “protocol configuration” menu. Only

serial communication protocols are valid with RS-232 interface.
V300/en M/A002 263


Protocol Protocol selection for COM port Set
None -
SPA-bus SPA-bus (slave)
ProfibusDP Interface to Profibus DB module VPA 3CG
(slave)
ModbusSlv Modbus RTU slave
IEC-103 IEC-60870-5-103 (slave)
ExternalIO Modbus RTU master for external I/O-
modules
IEC 101 IEC-608670-5-101
DNP3 DNP 3.0
DeviceNet Interface to DeviceNet module VSE 009
GetSet Communicationi protocola for VAMPSET
interface
Msg# 0 ... 232 - 1 Message counter since the device has Clr
Errors 0 ... 216 - 1 Protocol interruption since the device has Clr
Tout 0 ... 216 - 1 Timeout interruption since the device has Clr
speed/DPS Display of current communication paramet- 1.
ers.
speed = bit/s
D = number of data bits
P = parity: none, even, odd
S = number of stop bits
Clr = Clearing to zero is possible
1. The communication parameters are set in the protocol specific menus. For the local port command line interface the
parameters are set in configuration menu.
264 V300/en M/A002

10 Connections 10.6 Local port (Front panel)
10.6 Local port (Front panel)

The relay has a USB-connector in the front panel
Protocol for the USB port
The front panel USB port is always using the command line protocol
for VAMPSET.
The protocol is an ASCII character protocol called “GetSet”. The
speed of the interface is defined in CONF/DEVICE SETUP menu
from the local HMI. The default settings for the relay are 38400/8N1.
Physical interface
The physical interface of this port is USB.
2 1
3 4
Figure 10.12: Pin numbering of the front panel USB type B connector
Pin Signal name

1 VBUS
2 D-
3 D+
4 GND
Shell Shield
It is possible to change the bit rate of front USB port. “Front USB
port” -menu is located under the “communication” leaflet. This menu
is visible only on local display of the IED. Bit rate can be set between
1200 - 187500. This changes the bit rate of the IED, Vampset bit
rate has to be set separately. If bit rate in setting tool is incorrect it
takes longer time to establish the communication.
NOTE: Use same bit rate in the IED and Vampset -setting tool.
V300/en M/A002 265

10.7 External option modules 10 Connections
10.7 External option modules
10.7.1 VSE-001 fiber optic interface module

External fiber optic module VSE-001 is used to connect VAMP 300
IED to a fiber optic loop or a fiber optic star. Variety includes four
different types of serial fiber optic modules.
• VSE001PP (Plastic - plastic)
• VSE001GG (Glass - glass)
• VSE001GP (Glass - plastic)
• VSE001PG (Plastic - glass)
Modules provide serial communication link up to 1 km with VSE 001
GG. With serial fibre interface module it is possible to have following
serial protocols in use.
• None
• IEC-103
• ModbusSlv
• SpaBus
The power for the module is taken from pin 9 of the D-connector or
from an external power supply interface.
VSE 001
Communication bus
Figure 10.13: VSE-001xx module brings serial fiber interface to the IED. Module
is connected to the RS-232 serial port.
Module interface to the VAMP 300 IED

The physical interface of the device is a 9-pin D-connector. Signal
level is RS-232.
NOTE: Product manual for VSE-001 can be found from the company website.
266 V300/en M/A002

10 Connections 10.7 External option modules
10.7.2 VSE-002 RS-485 interface module

External RS-485 module VSE-002 (VSE002) is used to connect
VAMP protection relays to RS-485 bus. With RS-485 serial interface
module it is possible to have following serial protocols in use.
• None
• IEC-103
• ModbusSlv
• SpaBus
VSE 002
Communication bus
Figure 10.14: VSE-002 module brings serial RS-485 interface to the IED. Module
is connected to the RS-232 serial port.

The physical interface of the device is a 9-pin D-connector. Signal
level is RS-232 therefore “interface type” of the external module has
to be selected as RS-232.
It is possible to connect multible devices in daisychain. When it come
to the last of the units in the chain the “termination” has to be selected
as on. Same applies when only one unit is used.
VSE-002 operates with the relay in RS-232 mode. Therefore
“interface type” has to be selected as RS-232.
V300/en M/A002 267

Pin number TTL mode RS-232 mode

1 - -
2 RXD (in) RXD (in)
3 TXD (out) TXD (out)
4 RTS (in) RTS (in)
5
6
7 GND GND
8
9 +8V (in) +8V (in)
10.7.3 VSE-009 DeviceNet interface module

VSE-009 (VSE009) is a DeviceNet interface module for VAMP 300
IED. The IED can be connected to network using DeviceNet as
protocol. VSE-009 is attached to the RS-232 D-connector at the back
of the IED. With DeviceNet interface module it is possible to have
following protocols in use.
• None
• DeviceNet
An external +24VDC power supply interface is required.
VSE 009
Communication bus
Figure 10.15: VSE-009 module brings DeviceNet interface to the IED. Module is
connected to the RS-232 serial port.
268 V300/en M/A002

10 Connections 10.7 External option modules
10.7.4 VPA-3CG profibus interface module

VAMP 300 IED can be connected to Profibus DP by using an external
profibus interface module VPA-3CG (VPA3CG). The IED can then
be monitored from the host system. VPA-3CG is attached to the
RS-232 D-connector at the back of the IED by using VSE-072
(VSE072) cable. With profibus interface module it is possible to have
following protocols in use.
• None
• ProfibusDP
VPA-3CG
Communication bus
Figure 10.16: VPA-3CG module brings profibus interface to the IED. Module is
connected to the RS-232 serial port via VX-072 cable.

The physical interface of the device is a 9-pin D-connector.
Profibus devices are connected in a bus structure. Up to 32 stations
(master or slave) can be connected in one segment. The bus is
terminated by an active bus terminator at the beginning and end of
each segments. When more than 32 stations are used, repeaters
(line amplifiers) must be used to connect the individual bus segments.
The maximum cable length depends on the transmission speed and
cable type. The specified cable length can be increased by the use
of repeaters. The use of more than 3 repeaters in series is not
recommended.
A seperate product manual for VPA-3CG can be found from our
website.
V300/en M/A002 269

10.7.5 VIO 12A RTD input / output modules

VIO 12A I/O modules can be connected to Vamp 300 using VSE
001 or VSE 002 interface modules.
A separate product manual for VIO 12A (VVIO12A/EN M/xxxx) can
be found from our website.
270 V300/en M/A002

10 Connections 10.8 Block diagram
10.8 Block diagram
VAMP 300
1/A/1 port 1
COM 5/ Arc I/O bus
1/A/1 port 2
COM 5/ Arc I/O bus
T13 3/G/1:13
3/G/1:14
T14 3/G/1:15
3/G/1:16
T15 3/G/1:17
3/G/1:18
T16 3/G/1:19
3/G/1:20
DI1 3/G/1:1 DI
DI1 3/G/1:2 SF
DI2 3/G/1:3
DI2 3/G/1:4
DI3 3/G/1:5
DI3 3/G/1:6
DI4 3/G/1:7
DI4 3/G/1:8
DI5 3/G/1:9
DI5 3/G/1:10
DI6 3/G/1:11
DI6 3/G/1:12
Figure 10.17: VAMP 300F ABGAA-AAAAA-A1 block diagram
V300/en M/A002 271

10.9 Connection examples 10 Connections
10.9 Connection examples
Slot 8
8/C1 : 1...12
8/D1 : 1...12
1 IL1 (S1)
2 IL1 (S2)
3 IL2 (S1)
4 IL2 (S2)
5 IL3 (S1)
6 IL3 (S2)
7 I01
8 I01
9 I02
10 I02
11 U4 UL12 (a)
12 U4 UL12 (b)
8C2 : 1...6
8D2 : 1...6
1 UL1 (a)
2 UL1 (n)
3 UL2 (a)
4 UL2 (n)
5 UL3 (a)
6 UL3 (n)
Figure 10.18: Connection example of VAMP 300F with a synchrocheck from

phate-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltage using 3xL+4U+2I0 analogue module.
The voltage selection shall be 3LN+LLy in SCALINGS setting view. The zero sequence
voltage is internally calculated by IED.
272 V300/en M/A002

10 Connections 10.9 Connection examples
Slot 8
8/C1 : 1...12
8/D1 : 1...12
1 IL1 (S1)
2 IL1 (S2)
3 IL2 (S1)
4 IL2 (S2)
5 IL3 (S1)
6 IL3 (S2)
7 I01
8 I01
9 I02
10 I02
11 U4 UL1 (a)
12 U4 UL1 (n)
8C2 : 1...6
8D2 : 1...6
1 UL1 (a)
2 UL1 (n)
3 UL2 (a)
4 UL2 (n)
5 UL3 (a)
6 UL3 (n)
Figure 10.19: Connection example of VAMP 300F with a synchrocheck function from
phase-to-ground voltage using 3xL+4xU+2I0 analogue module. The voltage selection
shall be 3LN+LNy in SCALINGS setting view. The zero sequence voltage is internally
calculated by IED.
V300/en M/A002 273

10.9 Connection examples 10 Connections
Slot 8
8/C1 : 1...12
8/D1 : 1...12
1 IL1 (S1)
2 IL1 (S2)
3 IL2 (S1)
4 IL2 (S2)
5 IL3 (S1)
6 IL3 (S2)
7 I01
8 I01
9 I02
10 I02
11 U4 Uo (da)
12 U4 Uo (dn)
8C2 : 1...6
8D2 : 1...6
1 UL1 (a)
2 UL1 (n)
3 UL2 (a)
4 UL2 (n)
5 UL3 (a)
6 UL3 (n)
3LN_Uo
Figure 10.20: Connection example of VAMP 300F/M for 3xL+4xU+2xI0 analogue

module. The voltage selection shall be 3LN+U0 in SCALINGS setting view.
274 V300/en M/A002

11 Technical data
11 Technical data
11.1 Connections
11.1.1 Measuring circuits

Phase currents -
Rated phase current 5 A (configurable for CT secondaries 1 – 10 A)
- Current measuring range 0.05…250 A
- Thermal withstand 20 A (continuously)
- 100 A (for 10 s)
- 500 A (for 1 s)
- Burden < 0.2 VA

I0 input (5 A) -
Rated residual current 5 A (configurable for CT secondaries 0.1 – 10 A)
- Current measuring range 0.025…50 A
- 100 A (for 10 s)
- 500 A (for 1 s)
- Burden < 0.2 VA

I0 input (1 A) -
Rated residual current 1 A (configurable for CT secondaries 0.1 – 10.0 A)
- Current measuring range 0.003 … 10 A
- 20 A (for 10 s)
- 100 A (for 1 s)
- Burden < 0.1 VA

I0 input (0.2 A) -
Rated residual current 0.2 A (configurable for CT secondaries 0.1 – 10.0 A)
- Current measuring range 0.0006 … 2 A
- Thermal withstand 0.8 A (continuously)
- 4 A (for 10 s)
- 20 A (for 1 s)
- Burden < 0.1 VA
V300/en M/A002 275

11.1 Connections 11 Technical data
Voltages -
Rated voltage UN 100 V (configurable for VT secondaries 50 – 400 V)
- Voltage measuring range 0 - 185 V (100V / 110 V)
- Continuous voltage withstand 250 V
- Burden < 0.5V A
Rated voltage U0 100 V (configurable for VT secondaries 50 – 120 V)
- Voltage measuring range 0 - 175 V
- Continuous voltage withstand 250 V
- Burden < 0.5 VA

Frequency -
Rated frequency fN 45 – 65 Hz (protection operates accurately)
Measuring range 16 – 95 Hz
< 16 Hz / >66 Hz (protection not steady)

Terminal block: Maximum wire dimension:
- Solid or stranded wire 4 mm2 (10-12 AWG)
11.1.2 Auxiliary power supply

UAUX 110 (-20%) - 240 (+10%) V ac/dc
110/120/220/240 V ac
110/125/220 V dc
or
24 - 48 ±20% V dc
24/48 V dc
Power consumption (order code 20 W (internal)
–ABAAA-AAAA-AA)
max 65W (internal + I/O units)
Power consumption increases
when more I/O cards or optional
I/O or communication cards are
used.
276 V300/en M/A002

11 Technical data 11.1 Connections
11.1.3 Digital inputs internal operating voltage

Number of inputs As per ordering code
Voltage withstand 265 V ac/dc
External operating voltage, threshold Nominal voltage selected in ordering code:
1: 24 dc/ac (max 265 V)*
2: 110 dc/ac (max 265 V)*
3: 220 dc/ac (max 265 V)*

Current drain approx. 3 mA
Activation time dc/ac < 11 ms / < 15 ms
Reset time dc/ac < 11 ms / < 15 ms
- Phoenix MVSTBW or equivalent 2.5 mm2 (13-14 AWG)
* set dc/ac mode according to the used voltage in VAMPSET.
11.1.4 Heavy duty trip contact

Number of contacts 5 normal open contacts
Rated voltage 250 V ac/dc
Continuous carry 5A
Make and carry, 0.5s at duty cycle 10% 30 A
Make and carry, 3s at duty cycle 10% 15 A

Breaking capacity, AC 2 000 VA
Breaking capacity, DC (L/R=40ms) -
at 48 V dc: 5A
at 110 V dc: 3A
at 220 V dc 1A
Contact material AgNi 90/10
NOTE: Heavy duty trip contacts exist in power module C and D only.
V300/en M/A002 277

11.1.5 Trip contacts, Tx

Number of contacts As per ordering code
Continuous carry 5A
Minimum making current 100 mA @ 24 Vdc
Typical operation time (applies only to 7 ms
arc output matrix controlled outputs)
Make and carry, 0.5 s 30 A
Make and carry, 3s 15 A
Breaking capacity, DC (L/R=40ms)

at 48 V dc: 1.15 A
at 110 V dc: 0.5 A
at 220 V dc 0.25 A
Contact material AgNi 90/10

11.1.6 Signal contacts

Number of contacts: 1
Continuous carry 5A
Minimum making current 100 mA @ 24 V ac/dc
Breaking capacity, DC (L/R=40ms)

at 48 V dc: 1.15 A
at 110 V dc: 0.5 A
at 220 V dc 0.25 A
Contact material AgNi 0.15 gold plated

Terminal block Maximum wire dimension
11.1.7 Local serial communication port

Number of ports 1 on front
Electrical connection USB
Data transfer rate 1 200 - 187 500 b/s
Protocols GetSet
278 V300/en M/A002

11 Technical data 11.1 Connections
11.1.8 COM 3-4 serial communication port

Number of physical ports 0…1 on rear panel (option)
Electrical connection RS-232 (option, IRIG-B included)
RS-485 (option)
Profibus (option, external module)
Glass fibre connection (option, external

module)
Protocols Modbus, RTU master
Modbus‚ RTU slave
Spabus, slave
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 61870-5-101
Profibus DP
DNP 3.0
GetSet
IRIG-B
11.1.9 Ethernet communication port

Number of ports 0…1 on rear panel (option)
Electrical connection RJ-45 100Mbps (option)
LC 100Mbps (option)
Protocols IEC 61850
Modbus TCP
DNP 3.0
Ethernet IP
11.1.10 Arc protection interface

BIO inputs/outputs, slot 2 option B
Rated output voltage +30 V DC
Rated input voltage +18…265 V dc
Rated current (BO) 20 mA
Rated current (BI) 5 mA
BI line (IN) 3 pcs
BO lines ( OUT ) 3 pcs
V300/en M/A002 279

BIO inputs/outputs, slot 2 option C

Connector ST
Fibre 50/125 μm, 62.5/125 μm, 100/140 μm, and 200
μm
Max link distance 2 km (62.5/125 μm)
Max link attenuation 7 db
BI line (IN) 2 pcs
BO lines ( OUT ) 2 pcs
Arc sensor inputs

Number of inputs As per ordering code
Supply to sensor Isolated 12 V dc
11.1.11 Analogue input / output connection (option)*

Table 11.1: Analogue input connection
mA inputs 2
Input range 0 - 25 mA
Input accuracy ±1%
Input resolution 6μA (12-bits)
Galvanic isolation 1000 V
Input impedance 100 Ω
Table 11.2: Analogue output connection

mA outputs 2
Output range 0 - 25 mA
Output accuracy ±1%
Output resolution 6μA (12-bits)
Galvanic isolation 1000 V
Max. Load / output 850 Ω
Response time -
- normal mode < 400 ms
- fast mode < 50 ms
* future option
280 V300/en M/A002

11 Technical data 11.2 Test and environmental conditions
11.2 Test and environmental conditions
11.2.1 Disturbance tests

Test Standard & Test class / level Test value
Emission EN 61000-6-4 / IEC 60255-26
- Conducted EN 55011, Class A / IEC 60255-25 0.15 - 30 MHz
- Emitted EN 55011, Class A / IEC 60255-25 / CISPR 11 30 - 1000 MHz
Immunity EN 61000-6-2 / IEC 60255-26

- 1Mhz damped oscillatory wave IEC 60255-22-1 ±2.5kVp CM, ±2.5kVp DM
- Static discharge (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 Level 4 / IEC 60255-22-2 Class ±8 kV contact, ±15 kV air
4
- Emitted HF field EN 61000-4-3 Level 3 / IEC 60255-22-3 80 - 2700 MHz, 10 V/m
- Fast transients (EFT) EN 61000-4-4 Level 4 / IEC 60255-22-4 Class ±4 kV, 5/50 ns, 5 kHz
A
- Surge EN 61000-4-5 Level 4 / IEC 60255-22-5 ±4 kV, 1.2/50 µs, CM
±2 kV, 1.2/50 µs, DM

- Conducted HF field EN 61000-4-6 Level 3 / IEC 60255-22-6 0.15 - 80 MHz, 10 Vemf
- Power-frequency magnetic field EN 61000-4-8 300A/m (continuous), 1000A/m 1-
3s
- Pulse magnetic field EN 61000-4-9 Level 5 1000A/m, 1.2/50 µs
- Voltage interruptions EN 61000-4-29 / IEC 60255-11 30%/1s, 60%/0.1s, 100%/0.05s
- Voltage alternative component EN 61000-4-17 / IEC 60255-11 12% of operating voltage (DC) /
10min
- Voltage dips and short interrup- EN 61000-4-11 30%/10ms, 100%/10ms,
tions 60%/100ms
>95%/5000ms
11.2.2 Electrical tests

- Impulse voltage withstand EN 60255-5, Class III 5 kV, 1.2/50 µs
- Dielectric test EN 60255-5, Class III 2 kV, 50 Hz
- Insulation resistance EN 60255-5
- Protective bonding resistance EN 60255-27
- Power supply burden IEC 60255-1
V300/en M/A002 281

11.2 Test and environmental conditions 11 Technical data
11.2.3 Mechanical tests

Device in operation
- Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1, Class II / IEC 60068-2-6, Fc 1Gn, 10Hz – 150 HZ
- Shocks IEC 60255-21-2, Class II / IEC 60068-2-27, Ea 10Gn/11ms
Device de-energized
- Vibrations IEC 60255-21-1, Class II / IEC 60068-2-6, Fc 2Gn, 10Hz – 150 HZ
- Shocks IEC 60255-21-2, Class II / IEC 60068-2-27, Ea 30Gn/11ms
- Bump IEC 60255-21-2, Class II / IEC 60068-2-27, Ea 20Gn/16ms
11.2.4 Environmental tests

Device in operation
- Dry heat EN / IEC 60068-2-2, Bd 70°C (158°F)
- Cold EN / IEC 60068-2-1, Ad -40°C (-40°F)
- Damp heat, cyclic EN / IEC 60068-2-30, Db
• From 25°C (77°F) to 55°C
(131°F)
• From 93% RH to 98% RH
• Testing duration: 6 days
- Damp heat, static EN / IEC 60068-2-78, Cab
• 40°C (104°F)
• 93% RH
• Testing duration: 10 days
Device in storage
- Dry heat EN / IEC 60068-2-2, Bb 70°C (158°F)
- Cold EN / IEC 60068-2-1, Ab -40°C (-40°F)
11.2.5 Environmental conditions

Ambient temperature, in-service -40...60°C (-40...140°F)*
Ambient temperature, storage -40...70°C (-40...158°F)
Relative air humidity < 95%, no condensation allowed
Maximum operating altitude 2000 m (6561.68 ft)
* VYX 695 raising frame recommended values:
VAMP 300 with 1 x raising frame -> maximum ambient temperature 55°C
VAMP 300 with 2 x raising frame -> maximum ambient temperature 50°C
282 V300/en M/A002

11 Technical data 11.3 Protection functions
11.2.6 Casing
Degree of protection (IEC 60529) IP54 Front panel, IP20 rear side
Standard model (w x h x d): 270 x 176 x 230 mm / 10.63 x 6.93 x 9.06 in
Weight 4.2 kg (9.272 lb) or higher (depends of options)
11.3 Protection functions

*) EI = Extremely Inverse, NI = Normal Inverse, VI = Very Inverse, LTI = Long Time Inverse,
MI= Moderately Inverse
**) This is the instantaneous time i.e. the minimum total operational time including the
fault detection time and operation time of the trip contacts.
11.3.1 Non-directional current protection

Table 11.3: Overcurrent stage I> (50/51)
Pick-up current 0.10 – 5.00 x IMODE
Definite time function: DT **)
- Operating time 0.04 – 300.00 s (step 0.02 s)

IDMT function: -
- Delay curve family (DT), IEC, IEEE, RI Prg
- Curve type EI, VI, NI, LTI, MI…depends on the family *)
- Time multiplier k 0.05 - 20.0, except
0.50 - 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2

Start time Typically 30 ms
Reset time < 95 ms
Retardation time < 50 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Transient over-reach, any τ < 10 %
Inaccuracy: -
- Starting ±3% of the set value or 5 mA secondary
- Operating time at definite time function ±1% or ±25ms
- Operating time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±25 ms **)
V300/en M/A002 283

11.3 Protection functions 11 Technical data
Table 11.4: Overcurrent stages I>> (50/51)

Pick-up current 0.10 – 20.00 x IN (I>>)
Definite time function DT **)
Operating time 0.04 – 1800.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy: -
- Operation time ±1% or ±25 ms
Table 11.5: Overcurrent stages I>>> (50/51)

Pick-up current 0.10 – 40.00 x IN (I>>>)
Definite time function DT **)
Operating time 0.03 – 300.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Instant operation time: -
IM/ISET ratio > 1.5 <30 ms
IM/ISET ratio 1.03 - 1.5 < 50 ms

Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy: -
- Operation time DT ( IM/ISET ratio > 1.5) ±1% or ±15 ms
- Operation time DT ( IM/ISET ratio 1.03 - 1.5) ±1% or ±25 ms
284 V300/en M/A002

Table 11.6: Stall protection stage (48)

Setting range: -
- Motor start detection current 1.30 – 10.00 xIMOT (step 0.01)
- Nominal motor start current 1.50 – 10.00 xIMOT (step 0.01)

Delay type: DT, INV
Definite time characteristic (DT): -
- operating time 1.0 – 300.0 s (step 0.1)**)

Inverse time characteristic (INV): -
- operation delay 1.0 – 300.0 s (step 0.1)
- Inverse time coefficient, k 1.0 – 200.0 s (step 0.1)

Minimum motor stop time to activate stall 500 ms
protection
-
Maximum current raise time from motor stop
to start 200 ms
Motor stopped limit 0.10 x IMOT
Motor running lower limit 0.20 x IMOT
Motor running limit after starting 1.20 x IMOT

Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy: -
- Operating time at definite time function ±1% or at ±30 ms
- Operating time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±30 ms
NOTE: Motor stopped and running limits are based on the average of three phase currents.
Table 11.7: Thermal overload stage T> (49)

Maximum continuous current: 0.1 – 2.40 x nominal (step 0.01)
Alarm setting range: 60 – 99 % (step 1%)
Time constant Tau: 2 – 180 min (step 1)
Cooling time coefficient: 1.0 – 10.0 xTau (step 0.1)
Max. overload at +40°C 70 – 120 %IMOT(step 1)
Max. overload at +70°C 50 – 100 %IMOT(step 1)
Ambient temperature -55 – 125°C (step 1°)
Resetting ratio 0.95
Accuracy: -
- operating time ±5% or ±1 s
V300/en M/A002 285

Table 11.8: Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in motor mode

Setting range: 2 – 70% (step 1%)
Definite time characteristic: -
- operating time 1.0 – 600.0s s (step 0.1)

Inverse time characteristic: -
- 1 characteristic curve Inv
- time multiplier 1 – 50 s (step 1)
- upper limit for inverse time 1 000 s

Reset time < 450 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy: -
- Starting ±1% - unit
- Operate time ±5% or ±200 ms
NOTE: Stage is operational when all secondary currents are above 250 mA.
Table 11.9: Incorrect phase sequence I2>> (47)

Setting: 80 % (fixed)
Operating time <120 ms
Reset time < 105 ms
NOTE: Stage is blocked when motor has been running for 2 seconds.
Stage is operational only when least one of the currents is above 0.2 x IMOT
Table 11.10: Undercurrent protection stage I< (37)

Current setting range: 20 – 70 %IMODE (step 1%)
- operating time 0.3 – 300.0s s (step 0.1)

Block limit 15 % (fixed)
Reset time < 450 ms
Reset ratio 1.05
Accuracy: -
- starting ±2% of set value or ±0.5% of the rated value
- operating time ±1% or ±150 ms
NOTE: Stage Blocking is functional when all phase currents are below the block limit.
286 V300/en M/A002

Table 11.11: Current unbalance stage I2> (46) in feeder mode

Settings: -
- Setting range I2/ I1> 2 – 70 %

Definite time function: -

Reset time < 450 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy: -
- Starting ±1% - unit
Table 11.12: Earth fault stage I0> (50N/51N)

Input signal I0 ( input X6- 7 & 8 or X6- 7 & 9)
I0Calc ( = IL1+IL2+IL3)
Setting range I0> 0.005 … 8.00 pu (when I0 or I02)
0.05 … 20.0 pu (when I0Calc)

- Operating time 0.04 **) – 300.00 s (step 0.02 s)

IDMT function:
0.50 – 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2

Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting ±2% of the set value or ±0.3% of the rated
value
- Starting (Peak mode) ±5% of the set value or ±2% of the rated
value (Sine wave <65 Hz)
- Operating time at definite time function ±1% or ±25 ms
- Operating time at IDMT function. ±5% or at least ±25 ms **)
V300/en M/A002 287

Table 11.13: Earth fault stages I0>>, I0>>>, I0>>>> (50N/51N)

Input signal I0 (input X6- 7 & 8 or X6- 7 & 9)
I0Calc (= IL1+IL2+IL3)
Setting range I0>> 0.01 … 8.00 pu (When I0 or I02)
0.05 … 20.0 pu (When I0Calc)

- Operating time 0.04**) – 300.00 s (step 0.02 s)

Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
value
- Starting (Peak mode) ±5% of the set value or ±2% of the rated
value (Sine wave <65 Hz)
Table 11.14: Directional intermittent transient earth fault stage I0T> (67NT)
Input selection for I0 peak signal I01 Connectors X1:7-8
I02 Connectors X1:9-10

I0 peak pick up level (fixed) 0.1 pu @ 50 Hz
U0 pickup level 1 – 60 % U0N
Definite operating time 0.12 - 300.00 s (step 0.02)
Intermittent time 0.00 - 300.00 s (step 0.02)
Start time < 60 ms
Reset time < 60 ms
Reset ratio (hysteresis) for U0 0.97
Inaccuracy:
- starting ±3% for U0. No inaccuracy defined for I0
transients
- time ±1% or ±30 ms (The actual operation time
depends of the intermittent behaviour of the
fault and the intermittent time setting.)
Table 11.15: Arc protection stage

Input signal I, I01
Setting range I>int 0.5 ... 8.0 pu
Setting range I01>int 0.10 ...5.0 pu
Accuracy 2.5% x IN ≤ IN
2.5% x IMACS > IN

Operating time -
- T1, T9 ... T12 < 10 ms
- A1, T2 ... T4 < 7 ms
- HSO 2 ms
288 V300/en M/A002

11.3.2 Directional current protection

Table 11.16: Directional overcurrent stages Iφ>, Iφ>> (67)
Pick-up current 0.10 - 4.00 x IMODE
Mode Directional/Directional+BackUp
Minimum voltage for the direction solving 0.1 VSECONDARY
Base angle setting range -180° to + 179°
Operation angle ±88°

IDMT function:
- Curve type EI, VI, NI, LTI, MI…depends on the family
*)
0.50 – 20.0 for RXIDG, IEEE and IEEE2

Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Reset ratio (angle) 2°
Inaccuracy:
- Starting (rated value IN= 1 – 5A) ±3% of the set value or ±0.5% of the rated
value
- Angle ±2° U>5 V
±30° U=0.1 – 5.0 V

- Operate time at definite time function ±1% or ±30 ms
- Operate time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±30 ms **)
V300/en M/A002 289

Table 11.17: Directional overcurrent stages Iφ>>>, Iφ>>>> (67)

Pick-up current 0.10 – 20.0 x IMODE
Mode Directional/Directional+BackUp
Minimum voltage for the direction solving 0.1 VSECONDARY

Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting (rated value IN= 1 – 5A) ±3% of the set value or ±0.5% of the rated
value
- Angle ±2° U>5 V
±30° U=0.1 – 5.0 V

290 V300/en M/A002

Table 11.18: Directional earth fault stages I0φ>, I0φ>> (67N)

Pick-up current 0.005 – 20.00 x I0N ( up to 8.00 for inputs other
than I0Calc)
Start voltage 1 – 50 %U0N
Input signal I0
I0Calc ( = IL1+IL2+IL3)
Mode Non-directional/Sector/ResCap
- Operating time 0.10**) – 300.00 s (step 0.02 s)

IDMT function: -
0.50 - 20.0 for RI, IEEE and IEEE2

Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.95
Inaccuracy:
- Starting U0&I0 (rated value In= 1 .. 5A) ±3% of the set value or ±0.3% of the rated
value
- Starting U0&I0 (Peak Mode when, rated ±5% of the set value or ±2% of the rated value
value I0n= 1 .. 10A) (Sine wave <65 Hz)
- Starting U0&I0 (I0Calc) ±3% of the set value or ±0.5% of the rated
value
- Angle ±2° when U> 1V and I0> 5% of I0N or > 50 mA
else ±20°
- Operate time at IDMT function ±5% or at least ±30 ms **)
11.3.3 Frequent start protection

Table 11.19: Frequent start protection N> (66)
Settings: -
- Max motor starts 1 – 20
- Min time between motor starts 0.0 – 100 min. (step 0.1 min)
V300/en M/A002 291

11.3.4 Voltage protection

Table 11.20: Single-phase overvoltage stages U>
Overvoltage setting range: 50 - 150 %UN
- operating time 0.08**) - 300.00 s (step 0.02)

Release delay 0.06 - 300.00 s (step 0.02)
Hysteresis 0.99 – 0.800 (0.1 – 20.0 %, step 0.1 %)
Reset time (release delay) 0.06 - 300.00 s (step 0.02)
Reset time < 95 ms
Inaccuracy: -
- starting ±3% of the set value
- operate time ±1% or ±30 ms
Table 11.21: Single-phase overvoltage stages U>>


Hysteresis 0.99 – 0.800 (0.1 – 20.0 %, step 0.1 %)
Reset time < 95 ms
Inaccuracy: -
Table 11.22: Single-phase overvoltage stages U>>>


Hysteresis 0.99 – 0.800 (0.1 – 20.0 %, step 0.1 %)
Reset time < 95 ms
Inaccuracy: -
292 V300/en M/A002

Table 11.23: Single-phase undervoltage stages U<

Undervoltage setting range 20 - 120 %UN

Release delay 0.06 - 300.00 s (step 0.02)
Hysteresis 1.001 – 1.200 (0.1 - 20.0 %, step 0.1 %)
Self-blocking value of the undervoltage 0 - 80 %UN
Reset time (release delay) 0.06 – 300.00 s (step 0.02 s)
Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio (Block limit) 0.5 V or 1.03 (3 %)
Reset ratio 1.03 (depends on the hysteresis setting)
Inaccuracy: -
- blocking ±3% of set value or ±0.5 V
Table 11.24: Single-phase undervoltage stages U<<


Hysteresis 1.001 – 1.200 (0.1 - 20.0 %, step 0.1 %)
Reset time < 95 ms
Inaccuracy: -
V300/en M/A002 293

Table 11.25: Single-phase undervoltage stages U<<<


Hysteresis 1.001 – 1.200 (0.1 - 20.0 %, step 0.1 %)
Reset time < 95 ms
Inaccuracy: -
Table 11.26: Zero sequence voltage stages U0>

Zero sequence voltage setting range 1 – 60 %U0N

Reset time < 450 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy:
value
- Starting UoCalc (3LN mode) ±1 V
Table 11.27: Zero sequence voltage stages U0>>

Zero sequence voltage setting range 1 – 60 %U0N

Reset time < 95 ms
Reset ratio 0.97
Inaccuracy:
value
- Starting UoCalc (3LN mode) ±1 V
294 V300/en M/A002

11.3.5 Circuit-breaker failure protection CBFP (50BF)

Table 11.28: Circuit-breaker failure protection CBFP (50BF)
Relay to be supervised T1-T4 (depending the ordering code)
Definite time function -
- Operating time 0.1** – 10.0 s (step 0.1 s)

Inaccuracy -
- Operating time ±20 ms
11.3.6 Magnetising inrush 68F2

Table 11.29: Magnetising inrush 68F2
Settings: -
- Setting range magnetishing inrush 10 – 100 %

Inaccuracy: -
- Starting ±1%- unit
NOTE: The amplitude of second harmonic content has to be at least 2% of the nominal
of CT. If the moninal current is 5 A, the 100 Hz component needs to exceed 100
mA.
11.3.7 Over exicitation 68F5

Table 11.30: Over exicitation 68F5
Settings: -
- Setting range over exicitation 10 – 100 %

Inaccuracy: -
- Starting ±2%- unit
NOTE: The amplitude of fifth harmonic content has to be at least 2% of the nominal of
CT. If the moninal current is 5 A, the 250 Hz component needs to exceed 100 mA.
V300/en M/A002 295

11.3.8 Frequency protection

Table 11.31: Overfrequency and underfrequency stages
Frequency measuring area 16.0 – 75.0 Hz
Current and voltage meas. Range 45.0 – 65.0 Hz
Frequency stage setting range 40.0 – 70.0 Hz
Low voltage blocking 10 – 100 %UN
-operating time 0.10**) – 300.0 s (step 0.02 s)

Start time < 100 ms
Reset time <120 ms
Reset ratio (LV block) Instant (no hysteresis)
Inaccuracy: -
- starting ±20 mHz
- starting (LV block) 3% of the set value or ±0.5 V
NOTE: If device restarts for some reason there will be no trip even if the frequency is
below the set limit during the start up (Start and trip is blocked). To cancel this
block, frequency has to visit above the set limit.
Table 11.32: Underfrequency stages

Frequency measuring area 16.0 – 75.0 Hz
Current and voltage meas. Range 45.0 – 65.0 Hz
Frequency stage setting range 40.0 – 64.0 Hz
Low voltage blocking 10 – 100 %UN
-operating time 0.10**) – 300.0 s (step 0.02 s)

Undervoltage blocking 2 – 100 %
Start time < 100 ms
Reset time <120 ms
Reset ratio 1.002
Reset ratio (LV block) Instant (no hysteresis)
Inaccuracy: -
- starting ±20 mHz
- starting (LV block) 3% of the set value or ±0.5 V
296 V300/en M/A002

11.3.9 Power protection

Table 11.33: Directional power stages P<, P<< (32)
Pick-up setting range -200.0 ... +200.0 %Pm
- Operating time 0.3 – 300.0 s

Reset time <500 ms
Reset ratio 1.05
Inaccuracy: -
- Starting ±3 % of set value or ±0.5 % of rated value
- Operating time at definite time function ±1 % or ±150 ms
11.3.10 Synchrocheck function

Table 11.34: Synchrocheck function
Sync mode Off; Async; Sync;
Voltage check mode DD;DL;LD;DD/DL;DD/LD;DL/LD;DD/DL/LD
CB closing time 0.04 – 0.6 s
UDEADlimit setting 10 – 120 %UN
ULIVElimit setting 10 – 120 %UN
Frequency difference 0.01 – 1.00 Hz
Voltage difference 1 – 60 %UN
Phase angle difference 2° – 90°
Request timeout 0.1 – 600.0 s
Stage operation range 46.0 – 64.0 Hz
Reset ratio (U) 0.97
Inaccuracy: -
- voltage ±3 %UN
- frequency ±20 mHz
- phase angle ±2° (when Δf < 0.2 Hz, else ±5°)
NOTE: When “sync” mode is used, Δf should be less < 0.2 Hz.
V300/en M/A002 297

11.4 Supporting functions 11 Technical data
11.4 Supporting functions

**) This is the instantaneous time i.e. the minimum total operational time including the
fault detection time and operation time of the trip contacts.
11.4.1 Disturbance recorder (DR)

The operation of disturbance recorder depends on the following
settings. The recording time and the number of records depend on
the time setting and the number of selected channels.
Table 11.35: Disturbance recorder (DR)
Mode of recording: Saturated / Overflow
Sample rate:
- Waveform recording 32/cycle, 16/cycle, 8/cycle
- Trend curve recording 10, 20, 200 ms
1, 5, 10, 15, 30 s
1 min
Recording time (one record) 0.1 s – 12 000 min (According recorder set-
ting)
Pre-trigger rate 0 – 100%
Number of selected channels 0 – 12
Table 11.36: Inrush current detection

Settings: -
- Idle current 0.01 – 0.50 x IN
- Pickup currnet 0.30 – 10.00 x IN
- Maximum time 0.01**) – 300.00 s (step 0.01 s)

Inrush: -
- Pickup for 2nd harmonic 0 – 99 %
298 V300/en M/A002

11 Technical data 11.4 Supporting functions
11.4.2 Transformer supervision

Table 11.37: Current transformer supervision
Pick-up current 0.00 – 10.00 x IN
Definite time function: DT

Reset time < 60 ms
Reset ratio Imax> 0.97
Reset ratio Imin< 1.03

Inaccuracy: -
- Activation ±3% of the set value
Table 11.38: Voltage transformer supervision

U2> setting 0.0 – 200.0 %
I2< setting 0.0 – 200.0 %

Definite time function: DT
- Operating time 0.04 – 600.00 ( step 0.02s)

Reset time < 60 ms
Reset ratio 3% of the pick-up value

Inaccuracy: -
- Activation U2> ±1%-unit
- Activation I2< ±1%-unit
V300/en M/A002 299

12 Mounting
12 Mounting
PANEL MOUNTING VAMP 300 SYSTEM 225
2 8.86
1 mm
in
Vamp 300
152
5.98 Vamp 300
ON
ON
OK
F2 OK
F1 F2
I O 1.0 F1
0.0-60 I O
4-2
.36
T max. 1.2Nm T max. 0.5...0.6Nm

3 4 10.6 lb.in 4.4...5.3 lb.in
3a
3a
CLICK !
Vamp 300
ON
3b 3c
OK
F2
F1
I O
2.5Nm 3Nm
22 lb.in 27 lb.in
mm
in 230 269
270 183 9.05 10.59
10.63 45
7.20 224
137 1.77
8.82
5.39
Vamp 300
ON
152
5.98
176 150
6.93 172
5.91
OK 6.77
F1 F2
I O
300 V300/en M/A002

13 Order information
When ordering, please state:
• Type designation:
• Quantity:
• Options (see respective ordering code):
Vamp 300 ordering code

Slot - 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
V300 - - A A -
Application
F = Feeder (Slot 8: HW = A, B, C or D) Vamp 300 feeder IED
M = Motor (Slot 8: HW = A, B, C or D) Vamp 300 motor IED
Supply voltage [V]

C = Power C 110 - 240 (80 .. 265Vac/dc, 5 x DO heavy duty, A1, SF)
D = Power D 24 - 48 (18 .. 60Vdc, 5 x DO heavy duty, A1, SF)
I/O Card I
A = None
B = 3BIO+2Arc (3 x BI/BO, 2 x Arc sensor, T2, T3, T4)
C = F2BIO+1Arc (Fibre 2 x BI/BO, 1 x Arc loop sensor, T2, T3, T4)
G = 6DI+4DO (6 x DI, 4 x DO)
I = 10DI (10 x DI)
I/O Card II
A = None
G = 6DI+4DO (6 x DI, 4 x DO)
I = 10DI (10 x DI)
I/O Card III

A = None
G = 6DI+4DO (6 x DI, 4 x DO)
I = 10DI (10 x DI)
I/O Card IV
A = None
G = 6DI+4DO (6 x DI, 4 x DO)
I = 10DI (10 x DI)
Option card I
A = None
D = 4Arc (4 x Arc sensor)
Future option
A = None
Analog measurement card (See application)

A = 3L+U+Io (5/1A)
B = 3L+4U+Io (5/1A)
C = 3L+4U+2Io (5+1A)
D = 3L+4U+2Io (1+0.2A)
Communication interface I
A = None
B = RS232
C = RS232+RJ (RS232 + Ethernet RJ-45 100 Mbs)
D = RS232+LC (RS232 + Ethernet LC 100 Mbs)
Future option
A = None
Display type
A = 128x64 (128 x 64 LCD matrix)
DI nominal voltage
1 = 24 VDC / 110 VAC
2 = 110 VDC / 220 VAC
3 = 220 VDC
V300/en M/A002 301

Accessories
Order code Description Note
VX052-3 USB programming cable (Vampset) Cable length 3m
VX067 VAMP 300/321 split cable for COM1-2 and COM 3-4 ports Cable length 3m
VSE001PP Fiber optic Interface Module (plastic - plastic) Max. distance 1 km
VSE001GG Fiber optic Interface Module (glass - glass) Max. distance 1 km
VSE001GP Fiber optic Interface Module (glass - plastic) Max. distance 1 km
VSE001PG Fiber optic Interface Module (plastic - glass) Max. distance 1 km
VSE002 RS485 Interface Module
VSE009 External DeviceNet interface module
VPA3CG Profibus DP fieldbus option board
VX072 VAMP 300/321 profibus cable Cable length 3m
3P014 MOXA TCF-90 Max. distance 40 km
VX048 RS232 converter cable for MOXA TCF-90 Cable length 3m
3P022 MOXA TCF-142-S-ST Max. distance 40 km
VX062 RS232 converter cable for MOXA TCF-142-S-ST Cable length 3m
VA 1 DA-6 Arc Sensor Cable length 6m
VA 1 DA-20 Arc Sensor Cable length 20m
VA 1 DA-6s Arc Sensor, shielded Cable length 6m
VA 1 DA-20s Arc Sensor, shielded Cable length 20m
VA 1 EH-6 Arc Sensor (Pipe type) Cable length 6m
VA1EH-20 Arc Sensor (Pipe type) Cable length 20m
ARC SLm-x Fiber sensor, 8 000 lx x = fiber lenght (1
VIO 12 AB RTD Module, 12pcs RTD inputs, RS 485 Communication
(24-230 Vac/dc)
VIO 12 AC RTD/mA Module, 12pcs RTD inputs, PTC, mA inputs/outputs,
RS232, RS485 and Optical Tx/Rx Communication (24 Vdc)
VIO 12 AD RTD/mA Module, 12pcs RTD inputs, PTC, mA inputs/outputs, Cable length 6m
RS232, RS485 and Optical Tx/Rx Communication (48-230
Vac/dc)
VYX695 Projection for 300-series Height 45mm
Note 1. Fibre lengths 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60 or 70 m
302 V300/en M/A002

VAMP Ltd. Street address: Yrittäjänkatu 15 Phone: +358 20 753 3200
Post address: P.O. Box 810 Fax: +358 20 753 3205
FI-65101 Vaasa Internet: www.vamp.fi
email: vamp@vamp.fi
We reserve the right to changes without prior notice
Customer Care Centre

http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
2014 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier

92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00

Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric

Publication version: V300/en M/A002 04/2014
HVX
Vacuum circuit-breaker 12 - 17,5 kV (≤ 2500 A, ≤ 31,5 kA)
Installation
Operation Maintenance
Technical instruction
No. DRC NTV 142
Issue 02/10
IMPORTANT NOTE
The Technical Instructions, which are exclusively valid are always supplied by Schneider Electric together with the product in question. Our
products may only be commissioned, operated, serviced, repaired or decommissioned together with Operating Instructions which have been
directly enclosed to the product in question by the factory.
On the other hand, this electronic version of the Technical Instruction is provided to the customer at his/her request for information only. None of
our products may be commissioned, operated, serviced, repaired or decommissioned on the basis of this electronic version.
Non-compliance with this instruction may entail serious damage to the product, the objects pertaining to it, as well as health hazard or mortal
danger. Schneider Electric shall not be held liable for any such damage.
Manufacturer:
Schneider Electric Xiamen
Switchgear CO.,Ltd.
Manufacturer:
No.24, Huo ju Bei Lu
361006 Xiamen
China
 +86 (0)592 5775316-0
 +86 (0)592 5775139
Schneider Electric India Limited

Milestone number 87
Village Kotambi
Vadodara Hallol Express Way
Tehsil Vorghodia
Vadodara 390008
India
 +91 10 8266 8663 130
Schneider Electric Energietechnik GmbH

Sachsenwerk Medium Voltage
Rathenaustraβe 293055 Regensburg
Germany
 +49 (0)9 41/46 20-0
 +49 (0)9 41/46 20-418
Schneider Electric Brazil

Protbb Blumenau
Rua Jose Deeke, 1585
89031 - 401 Blumenau
Brazil
 +55 11 3491 7000
 +55 11 3491 7375
HVX Content
1 Regulations and Provisions�� 4

1.1 Remarks on this Technical Instruction�� 4
1.2 Terms and symbols used�� 4
1.3 Use in line with the intended purpose�� 4
1.4 Applied standards�� 5
1.5 Safety provisions�� 5
1.6 Disposal after the end of service life�� 5
2 Technical data�� 6
2.1 Type designation�� 6
2.2 Technical data�� 6
2.3 Control and operating devices�� 6
3 Variants�� 8
4 Delivery, storage and transport�� 9
4.1 Delivery�� 9
4.2 Storage�� 9
4.3 Transport�� 9
5 Assembly�� 10
5.1 Instructions for assembly�� 10
5.2 HVX Mechanical assembly�� 10
5.3 Connecting the control lines��11
6 Commissioning�� 12
7 Operation�� 13
7.1 Control elements and operator interface�� 13
7.2 Interlocks �� 14
7.3 Actuate withdrawable unit�� 15
7.4 Charging the energy storing device�� 15
7.5 Switching operations�� 16
8 Servicing�� 17
8.1 Servicing schedule�� 17
8.2 Safety provisions�� 17
8.3 Cleaning insulating components�� 18
8.4 Corrosion protection�� 19
8.5 Avoid condensation�� 19
8.6 Lubrication instructions�� 19
8.7 Admissible numbers of breaking operations of vacuum chamber� 22
9 Annex�� 23
9.1 Accessories�� 23
9.2 Auxiliary products�� 23
9.3 Screw fastenings�� 23
9.4 How to treat the contact surfaces�� 24
DRC NTV 142 - HVX Compact - EN 3

HVX 1 Regulations and Provisions
1.1 Remarks on this Technical Instruction

This Technical Instruction describes transport, assembly, operation,
handling and maintenance of the series HVX vacuum service breakers.
It must be stored so that it is at any time readily accessible for and can be
used by persons who are to work on the switchgear.
When re-selling the circuit-breaker or the switchgear with circuit-breaker,
make sure that this Technical Instruction is transmitted as well.
The following additional documents must be observed for this circuit-breaker:
■■ Purchase agreement containing the stipulations on the specific
equipment of the circuit-breaker and the legal details.
■■ Project notes regarding the HVX circuit breaker
■■ For assembly and operation of the circuit-breaker, the operating manual
of the switchgear in which it is operated must be complied with.
As our products are subject to continuous further development, we reserve
the right to changes regarding standards, illustrations and technical data.
All dimensions not specified in detail are in millimeters.
1.2 Terms and symbols used

This Technical Instruction uses certain terms and symbols. They warn
about dangers or provide important information which must be complied
with at all costs so as to avoid danger and damage:
„WARNING“
This symbol warns of dangerous electrical voltage. Contact with
voltage may result in fatal injury!
„WARNING“
This symbol is used for instructions non-compliance with which
may result in serious injury, death or serious material damage.
„IMPORTANT“
This symbol is used for information which is important to avoid
damage.
1.3 Use in line with the intended purpose

The HVX vacuum circuit-breaker is intended exclusively as a switching unit
in air-insulated medium-voltage switchgear. It may only be used in the
scope of the specified standards and the switchgear-specific technical
data. Any other use constitutes improper use and may result in dangers
and damage.
IMPORTANT:
Operating reliability and service life depend on correct operation.
Disclaimer of liability
The manufacturer shall not be held responsible for damage which occurs if
■■ instructions in this Technical Instruction are not complied with,
■■ the circuit-breaker is not operated according to its intended use (see
above),
■■ the circuit-breaker is assembled, connected or operated improperly,
■■ accessories or spare parts are used which have not been approved by
the manufacturer,
■■ the circuit-breaker is converted without the manufacturer’s approval, or if
inadmissible parts are attached.
4 DRC NTV 142 - HVX Compact - EN

HVX 1 Regulations and Provisions
(contd.)
1.4 Applied standards

The three-phase HVX vacuum circuit-breaker:
■■ corresponds to the requirements for AC switchgear for voltages above 1
kV acc. to IEC 62271-100
Environmental and operating conditions
HVX circuit-breakers may only be operated under normal operating
conditions acc. to IEC 62271-1. Operation under conditions deviating from
these is only admissible upon consultation and with the written approval of
the manufacturer.
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature min./max. -25 / 40oC 1)
Average value over 24 hours (max.) 35oC 1)
Max. installation altitude above sea level 1000m 1)
1)
higher values on request

The work described in this Technical Instruction may only be performed by
specialist electricians who have proved their experience with the HVX
circuit-breaker and the EN 50110-1 standard.
Applicable standards and regulations:
■■ The locally applicable accident prevention, operating and work
instructions must be complied with.
■■ Installation: IEC 61936-1 / HD 637 S1
■■ Operation of electrical equipment: EN 50110-1
Read these instructions carefully before you work on the circuit-breaker,
and perform the work detailed in it according to the descriptions. Do not
perform any work on the circuit-breaker which is not described in this
Technical Instruction.
WARNING:
Before starting work on the circuit-breaker, de-
energize the system, verify it for zero voltage and earth
the system according to the applicable safety rules
pursuant to EN50110-1.
WARNING:
Before performing work on the circuit-breaker, switch
off the auxiliary voltage and prevent it from reclosing.
WARNING:
There is a risk of injury when working on the drive
mechanism.Before commencing work, release the
energy-storing device by performing the operating
sequence OFF-ON-OFF.
1.6 Disposal after the end of service life

A manual on disposal after the end of the service life is available for
disposal of the HVX vacuum circuit breaker.
Disposal at the end of the service life is performed as a service by the
Service Center at the manufacturer’s which is subject to a fee.

HVX 2 Technical data
2.1 Type designation

The type designation on the rating plate (Fig. 2.1) specifies essential
technical data. The type designation (1) is broken down in this example.
The following data on the rating plate are relevant for replacement or in
case of any queries:
■■ Type designation (1)
■■ Serial number (2)
■■ Year of manufacturing (3)
Example HVX 12 - 31 - 08
Series HVX
Rated volt age 12 kV
Rated short-circuit breaking current 31,5 kA
Rated normal current 8 00 A
Fig. 2.1
Example of rating plate
1 Type designation
2 Serial number
3 Year of manufacturing
4 Technical data
2.2 Technical data

Rated voltage Ur [kV] 12 17,5
Rated power frequency withstand voltage Up [kV] 75 95
Rated power frequency withstand voltage Ud [kV] 28 38
Rated normal current Ir max. [A] 2500 2500
Rated cable-charging breaking current Ic [A] 25 31,5
Rated short-circuit breaking current Isc max. [kA] 31,5 31,5
Rated short-time current Ik max. [kA] 31,5 (3 s) 31,5 (3 s)
Rated frequency fr [Hz] 50/60 50/60
2.3 Control and operating devices

The drive mechanism is designed on principle for manual charging of the
energy storing device (closing spring).
The drive can be equipped with additional operating and control devices.
Component fitting options:
HVX 2 Technical data (contd.)
Motor
■■ for charging the energy-storing device (spiral spring).
Opening release
■■ 2 units max.
Undervoltage release
■■ 1 unit.
Closing release
■■ 1 unit.
Secondary release
(Transformer-operated release)
■■ 1 unit max.
Blocking coil
■■ Blocking coils prevent the circuit breaker from being closed and opened
via the push-buttons ”ON” or ”OFF”, as well as manual actuation of the
withdrawable unit.
If the rated auxiliary voltage has fallen or is shut off, all blocking coils are in
”blocked” position.
Technical data, auxiliary switch
DC [V] AC [V]
Rated auxiliary voltage
[V] ≤ 48 125 220 120 230
Switching capacity [A] 10 3,8 2 10
Time factor T=L/R [ms] 10 20 -
Rated short-time current 250 A / 3 s
Rated continuous current [A] 15 -
Power consumption, solenoids and motor

Power consumption [W]
Solenoids / motor
DC [W] AC 50/60 Hz [VA]
Closing release ≤ 250
Opening release ≤ 250
Undervoltage release approx. 12
Motor for energy-storage device approx. 100
Information about the power consumption of solenoids and the motor is available
from the manufacturer. The auxiliary voltage data is required to this effect.
Operating times *
Times for solenoids and motor
Minimum command time “OFF” el. tripping [ms] 20
Minimum command time “ON” el. tripping [ms] 20
Motor charging time [s] ≤ 12
* Rated frequency according to specification on rating plate (50/60 Hz)
Auxiliary switches
Auxiliary switches are always actuated directly by the switch shaft via an
intermediate linkage. Their position always corresponds to that of the main
contacts. As standard, the circuit-breaker is equipped with two auxiliary
switches with 8 contact elements each.
The switching functions have been set in the factory according to the wiring diagram.
Anti-pumping relay
If an ON and OFF command is simultaneously and permanently present at
the circuit-breaker, the latter returns to its initial position after closing. It
remains in this initial position until the ON command is issued anew. This
prevents continuous closing and opening (”pumping”).
HVX 3 Variants
HVX model for the following technical data (Fig. 3.1):

Ur ≤ 17,5 kV
Ir ≤ 1250 A Ir
Isc ≤ 31,5 kA
1 Conductor bar
10 2 Circuit-breaker housing
5 3 Rating plate
4 Operator interface
1
6
5 Low voltage socket
6 Drive housing
4
7 Rollers
2
3 8 Withdrawable unit
9 Insertion opening for crank to move the circuit-breaker into its
11
disconnected/service position / manually
10 ”IP” protection sheet (optional)
9
7 11 Shutter rail (optional)
8
Fig. 3.1
Vacuum circuit-breaker HVX 17,5 kV - 31,5 kA - 1250 A
withdrawable unit with low voltage socket
1 Conductor bar terminal /moving contact

2 Circuit-breaker housing
10 3 Rating plate
5 4 Operator interface
1 5 Low voltage socket
6 6 Drive housing
7 Rollers
4
8 Withdrawable unit
9 Insertion opening for crank to move the circuit-breaker into its
2 3 disconnected/ service position / manually
10 ”IP” protection sheet (optional)
11 11 Shutter rail (optional)
9
7
8
Fig. 3.2
Vacuum circuit-breaker HVX 17,5 kV - 31,5 kA - 2500 A
withdrawable unit with low voltage socket

HVX 4 Delivery, storage and
transport
4.1 Delivery
■■ Handle shipping units carefully when unloading and unpacking them.
■■ Shipping units must be unpacked immediately after receipt. Any damage
occurred in transit must be recorded and reported immediately to the
manufacturer.
■■ On delivery, the consignment must be checked for completeness.
■■ The supplier must be notified in writing about any discrepancies.
Fig. 4.1
Shipping unit
4.2 Storage
The transport packaging is not intended for storage. The risk of storing the
parts in packed condition shall be the consignee’s responsibility!
Fig. 4.2
Transport and lifting 4.3 Transport
Transport using a forklift truck: Only transport the circuit-breaker within its
shipping unit on a pallet.
Transport without pallet:
Lift circuit-breaker acc. to Fig 4.2. A rope (not a metallic steel cable) Ø 12 to
15 mm or a strap is required to this effect.
WARNING:
Make sure the rope or strap is strong enough to bear
the weight of the circuit-breaker and do not touch the
circuit-breaker.
Weights [kg]
Rated Current [A]
Type
Ir ≤ 1250 1250 < Ir ≤ 2500
HVX - withdrawable Unit 100 kg 150 kg
(Guide values without packaging)

HVX 5 Assembly
5.1 Instructions for assembly

■■ Dimension drawings are made available on request.
■■ Check technical data on rating plate.
■■ Check auxiliary voltage of the control and operating devices installed.
The circuit-breaker is supplied in position ”OFF” and with the energy storing
device ”released”.
WARNING:
The energy storing device must not be charged until
assembly is finished. Risk of injuries.
WARNING:
The safety provisions of chapter 1.5 must be observed.
5.2 HVX Mechanical assembly

Mounting the transport truck (optional)
A transport truck (optional) is used to rack the circuit-breaker into the
switchgear panel (Fig. 5.2).
For the design and method of operation of the transport truck used, please
refer to the instructions for the panel in question.
Placing circuit-breaker on transport truck and racking it into
the switchgear
IMPORTANT:
When performing the following assembly steps, observe and
comply with the instructions given for the panel used.
1. Place the circuit-breaker on the transport truck rails.

2. Lock the circuit-breaker on the transport truck.
3. Grease the disconnecting fingers (fig. 8.3) or the tulip contacts (fig. 8.4)
using appropriate lubricant.
4. Couple the transport truck to the panel.
5. Unlock the circuit-breaker from the transport truck.
6. Press the handles inside as shown (fig. 5.2) by the arrows and push the
breaker inside cubicle to test position.
7. Release the handles in order to lock the withdrawable unit in test
position.
8. Release the transport truck from the panel.
Fig. 5.2
Move the circuit-breaker in front of the panel
Earth terminal
The circuit-braker is linked to the panel via the wheels of the trolley.
Optionally, the HVX circuit-breaker is available with short-circuit proof
earthing.

HVX 5 Assembly (contd.)
1 5.3 Connecting the control lines

The control lines are connected, depending on design, via control
connectors (Fig. 5.3), or control lines to the terminal strips in the drive
casing (Fig. 5.4). The control lines are wired in the circuit-breaker up to the
control connector or up to the terminal strip.
Single-wire conductors or strands can be connected
■■ to terminal strip up to 2.5 mm2
■■ in control connector up to 1.5 mm2
2
Terminal with control connector
Push the control connector onto the pin right-angle plug-and socket
connector of the cubicle and lock it (Fig. 5.9).
Fig. 5.3 Connection to terminal strip

Control connector 1. Remove the cover plate.
1 Insert control connector
2. Connect external control lines via the terminal strip. The specific wiring
2 Lock
diagram valid for the unit in question has been enclosed with each
circuit-breaker. If additional control lines are placed in the drive casing,
leave a sufficient distance from the movable parts of the drive.
3. After connecting the external control line, mount the cover plate.
IMPORTANT:
Comply with the tightening torques specified for screw-fastening
(refer to Annex).
Fig. 5.4
1 Control connector on terminal strip

HVX 6 Commissioning
■■ Check circuit-breaker for external damage.

■■ Make sure that there are no external parts in the circuit-breaker
compartment.
■■ Check surface of insulating components for impurities. If necessary,
clean (see Chapter 8).
IMPORTANT:
Observe the operating and locking conditions (Chapter 7).
IMPORTANT:
The energy storing device of motorized circuit-breakers is charged
automatically once the auxiliary voltage is applied.
IMPORTANT:
Undervoltage releases / blocking coils (optional) enable switching
tests only to be performed with the auxiliary voltage applied.
6.1 HVX
(withdrawable unit)
Perform functional tests:
1. Charge energy-storing device using the crank (Fig. 9.1 rep. 2). Check
the spring position indicator.
2. Switch circuit-breaker on and off several times by hand. Check position
indicator.
3. Move the withdrawable unit to its service and disconnected position via
the crank handle (Fig. 9.1 rep. 3).
□□ Check mechanical interlocks between the HVX and the cell. Check
position indication.
4. Check electrical functions of control and operating devices.
Apply auxiliary voltage.
Actuate the releases to perform switching operations and check functions /
interlocks. Watch position indicators.
5. Racking the circuit-breaker in and out. At the same time, check the
position indicators and the interlocks in the circuit-breaker and with
regard to other devices.

HVX 7 Operation
7.1 Control elements and operator interface
Fig. 7.1
Operator interface of HVX circuit-breaker
1 closed door of switchgear panel

2 ON/OFF operating rod
3 Spring charging crank for spring operating
mechanism
4 Moving crank handle
Fig. 7.2
Control elements for the circuit-breaker

HVX 7 Operation (contd.)
Position indicators on circuit-breaker and possible operating sequences

Position indicator Position indicator
possible operating
Item Energy-storing device ON / OFF sequence (mechanical)
(closing spring) Switch position
1 released OFF none
2 charged OFF C-O
3 released ON O
4 charged ON O-C-O
C = Switching ON O = Switching OFF
7.2 Interlocks
(where applicable)
Mechanical interlocks
The HVX switch features basic interlocks to prevent operating errors.
WARNING:
You must be familiar with these interlocks before operating the circuit-breaker.
Electrical interlocks
have been designed according to the circuit diagram.
Interlock Function of interlock Method of operation of interlock

The withdrawable part cannot be moved to The moving crank handle is
service position unless the low-voltage blocked automatically
Between the circuit-breaker connector is inserted and locked Do not apply higher force!
withdrawable part and the
low-voltage connector The low-voltage connector can only be
The interlock for the low-voltage connector
inserted or removed while the withdrawable
in the drive mechanism has been activated
part is in its disconnected position
The withdrawable part cannot be moved to The moving crank handle is
service position in while the earthing switch blocked automatically
Between the circuit-breaker of the panel is in “ON” position Do not apply higher force!
withdrawable part and the
earthing switch The earthing switch cannot be switched on The earthing switch cannot be
as once the withdrawable part has moved switched on.
towards service position Do not apply force!
The circuit-breaker cannot be moved to The moving crank handle is
service /disconnected position while it is blocked automatically
switched on Do not apply higher force!
The circuit-breaker cannot be switched on
Between the circuit-breaker and unless
the withdrawable part ■■ it is completely set to its service /
The circuit-breaker cannot be switched on
disconnected position
or off
■■ the crank handle for the
withdrawable part mechanism has been
removed

HVX 7 Operation (contd.)
7.3 Actuate withdrawable unit

IMPORTANT:
Observe interlock conditions (see chapter 7.2).
Move circuit-breaker from disconnected into service position

by hand:
Initial situation:
Circuit-breaker OFF
Earthing switch OFF
LV plug / supply CONNECTED
Front door CLOSED
1. Insert crank handle (Fig. 7.3) and move it clockwise to its stop or until
blocking; the circuit-breaker is racked into its service position. Observe
the position indicator on the switchgear panel.
2. Remove crank handle.
Move circuit-breaker from service into disconnected position

by hand:
Initial situation:
Circuit-breaker OFF
1. Insert crank handle (Fig. 7.3) and move it counter-clockwise to its stop;
the circuit-breaker is racked into its disconnected position. Observe the
Fig. 7.3
position indicator on the switchgear panel.
Crank handle to rack the circuit-breaker in and out
2. Remove crank handle.
7.4 Charging the energy storing device

Manually
Move circuit-breaker in ”ready-for-closing” position.
1. Insert crank into opening for tensioning the energy storing device (Fig. 7.4)
2. Charge the spiral spring using the spring charging crank. As soon as the
spiral spring is charged, the spring charging mechanism is
decoupled and the position indicator signals ”charged”:
If the motor starts during this process, this does not
constitute a risk.
3. Remove crank. The circuit-breaker is ready for closing (Table, Chapter 7.1,
item 2).
Fig. 7.4 Via motor

Charge the energy storing device as shown on the
The energy storing device of motorized circuit-breakers is charged
sticker
automatically as soon as the auxiliary voltage is applied.

HVX
7 Operation (contd.)
7.5 Switching operations

Closing (ON)
■■ Push button ”ON” - or actuate closing release electrically.

The position indicator shows the switch position ”ON” (Table, Chapter 7.1,
item 3).
■■ The position of the auxiliary switch has changed.
(by hand or by motor). If voltage is applied to the motor, charging is
performed automatically.
■■ The position indicator shows the energy storing device position ”charged”
(Table, Chapter 7.1, item 4).
Opening (OFF)
■■ Push button ”OFF” - or switch off via opening release, undervoltage

release or secondary coil.
■■ The position indicator shows the switch position ”OFF” (Table, Chapter
7.1, item 1 or 2).
■■ The position of the auxiliary switch has changed.

HVX 8 Servicing
8.1 Servicing schedule

Series HVX vacuum circuit-breakers require regular inspections. The
intervals depend on the strain to which the switches are subject during
operation, and on the operating conditions.
In case of frequent condensation or air pollution (dust, smoke or corrosive
gases), the maintenance intervals must be adapted to the actual
conditions.
IMPORTANT:
The circuit-breaker operating company is responsible for complying
with the specified maintenance intervals and for performing
maintenance according to the actual operating and ambient
conditions.
In case of queries or ambiguities, please contact the manufacturer.

Only specialist electricians certified by the manufacturer for maintenance
work regarding series HVX vacuum circuit-breakers and who have the
required knowledge regarding operation of medium-voltage switchgear are
permitted to perform maintenance and cleaning work.
WARNING:
The safety provisions of Chapter 1.5 must be
observed.
WARNING:
The circuit-breaker must not be disassembled for
maintenance work (see Disclaimer of liability, section
1.3).
Safety provisions
1. On principle, the 5 safety rules applicable for electrical engineering must
be complied with before maintenance work on the circuit-breaker is
started:
■■ Isolate switchgear from power supply
■■ Prevent it from reclosing
■■ Verify it for zero voltage
■■ Earth and short-circuit it
■■ Cover or bar off adjacent live components.
These rules apply for the upper and lower circuit-breaker terminals alike.
2. Switch off the auxiliary voltage for the circuit-breaker drive and secure it
against reclosing.
3. Release the energy-storing device by performing the corresponding
operating sequence on the circuit-breaker. ON - OFF - ON (see Chapter 7)

HVX 8 Servicing (contd.)
Servicing schedule
Maintenance
intervals Qualification /
(ambient Maintenance position
conditions work performing the
according to IEC work
60 694)
■■ Check for
contamination /
condensation and
damage
Every 4 years ■■ If necessary, clean
circuit-breaker (see
section 8.3) and
perform several Staff qualified
switching tests accordingly for the
■■ Clean, grease work to be done
circuit-breaker (see
Chapter 8.3 and 8.6)
and perform several
After 20 years
switching tests
■■ Check releases and
blocking coils for
proper working order
Once the summation
current limit has been Replace vacuum Manufacturer’s
reached (refer to interrupters Service Center
Chapter 8.7)
Replacement of
After 10.000 operating
mechanism and / or Manufacturer’s
cycles of the
parts of the circuit- Service Center
circuit-breaker
breaker
After 1000 operating Replacement of the
Manufacturer’s
cycles of the withdrawable part and
Service Center
withdrawable part other relevant parts
8.3 Cleaning insulating components

To ensure the specified insulating level, the insulating components must be
clean.
On principle, general cleanliness of the circuit-breaker or of its external
parts should be ensured.
Use a dry cleaning cloth for slight soiling:
Clean by means of a dry, lint-free cloth. Depending on dirt collected,
replace cloth as often as necessary.
Use cleaning agents for severe soiling:
Cleaning agent, 1 liter can (see Chapter 9.2).
WARNING:
The use of other cleaning agents is not admissible.
■■ Wear protective gloves

■■ Use cleaning agent according to manufacturer’s instructions
■■ Soak the cloth thoroughly and wipe the insulating components. Keep
duration of exposure as short as possible.
■■ Expose the cleaned surface to the air for at least two hours.

8.4 Corrosion protection

Drive mechanisms and covers have a long-term protection against
corrosion. Any damage to the paint, scratches and other damage must be
repaired immediately to avoid corrosion. Contact the manufacturer’s
Service Center.
8.5 Avoid condensation

To ensure the specified insulating level, the circuit-breaker - especially its
insulating components - must not be exposed to condensation.
Measures to take in case of condensation:
1. If condensation of the circuit-breaker is detected, the switching device
must be cleaned according to section 8.3.
2. Installation or inspection of the appropriate heating. It must provide a
sufficient heating performance to prevent condensation on the circuit-
breaker.
8.6 Lubrication instructions

Preparations
WARNING:
Comply with safety provisions (Chapter 1.5).
WARNING:
Circuit-breakers and drives must not be disassembled
for service and maintenance work (see Disclaimer of
liability, section 1.3).
Remove the withdrawable unit from the switchgear cubicle for inspection
(see instructions for the panel concerned). Remove the cover plate of the
circuit-breaker drive.
Lubricants
IMPORTANT:
Only approved lubricants may be used (section 9.2).
○ Cryogenic grease
□ High-pressure grease
∆ Contact lubricant
● Silicon grease
Lubrication procedure
1. Clean the points of lubrication (Fig. 8.1 to 8.3) using a lint-free cotton cloth;
in case of serious contamination, use a cleaning agent (see section 8.3).
2. Apply a thin coat of lubricant, using e.g. a paintbrush.
Points of lubrication
IMPORTANT:
The following elements must not be lubricated:
■■ Motor
■■ Electric releases
■■ Push switches
■■ Blocking coils
■■ Auxiliary switches
■■ Ball bearings

■■ Points of lubrication on the drive (Fig. 8.1):

All metallic surfaces sliding upon each other, especially cam discs, cogwheels and ratchet levers.
Fig. 8.1
Circuit-breaker drive mechanism
○ Cryogenic grease
● Cryogenic grease

■■ Spindle of withdrawable unit mechanism (Fig. 8.2, item 1).
Fig. 8.2
Rack-in mechanism
1 Spindle
■■ Finger contacts (Fig. 8.3)or tulip contact (Fig. 8.4).
Fig. 8.3
Finger contacts
Fig. 8.4
Tulip contacts
Final steps
Re-mount the cover plate and insert the circuit-breaker in the panel (see
section 5).
Check circuit-breaker according to section 6 ”Commissioning”.

8.7 Admissible numbers of breaking

operations of vacuum chamber
The diagram defines exclusively the admissible summation current limit. It
is a guide as to whether the vacuum interrupter chambers/pole sections
need to be replaced or not.
30 00 0
10 00 0
operations n n
5000
Ausschaltzahl 1000
50 0
Number of breaking
10 0
50
10
Ir I SC
Breaking current
Ausschaltstrom log II a
a
Ir = Rated (normal) current [A]

Isc = Short-circuit breaking current [kA]
For the data regarding the rated normal current Ir and the short-circuit
breaking current Isc, please refer to the rating plate (Fig. 8.4).
Fig. 8.5
Data for rated normal current Ir (1) and short-circuit breaking current Isc (2) on the
rating plate

HVX 9 Annex
9.1 Accessories
5
3
1 2
Fig. 9.1
Accessories for HVX circuit-breaker
The accessories depend on the panel type used, and must be enquired about if
necessary.
1 ON/OFF operating rod
2 Spring charging crank for spring operating mechanism
3 Moving crank handle
4 Lifting brackets (x2)
5 Lifting beam (optional)
9.2 Auxiliary products

Only the following auxiliary products may be used, which are available from
Schneider Electric. The use of other auxiliary products is not admissible.
Designation Symbol Order no.

Contact lubricant, 0.3 kg can ∆ ST 312-340-833
High-pressure grease, 0.3 liter can □ ST 312-101-833
Cryogenic grease, 0.3 liter can ○ ST 312-105-833
Silicon grease, 0.3 liter can ● ST 312-504-001
WARNING:
Danger of injury when wrong handling the auxiliary
products.Comply with the safety data sheets supplied
by the manufacturers of the auxiliary products.
9.3 Screw fastenings

The following elements must be used for all metal screw couplings:
■■ Screws and bolts: Grade ≥ 8.8
■■ Nuts: Grade 8.
Thread size
min. max.
M6 7 9
M8 16 24
M10 36 44
M12 63 77
Table 1:
Hex. bolts and socket-head capscrews (except slotted screws) and nuts (except
self-locking nuts)

Thread size
min. max.
M6 5,5 7,5
M8 15 19
M10 30 40
M12 60 76
Table 2:
Screw coupling between switching device and conductor bar with
copper as conductor material.
HVX 9 Annex (contd.)
9.4 How to treat the contact surfaces

WARNING:
Caution when handling bars insulated by heat-
shrinkable sleeves: The heat-shrinkable sleeve must
not get into contact with lubricant (swelling).
IMPORTANT:
Contact areas coated with lubricant Kontasynth should not be
touched, if possible.
1. Contact surfaces must be subjected to preliminary treatment before

screw-fastening:
Material of contact
Pre-treatment
surfaces
Silver-plated contact surfaces Clean 1)
Copper or copper alloy Clean 1), expose metallic surface 2)
Aluminium Clean 1), expose metallic surface 2)
Remove passivation, not,
Zinc-plated steel
however, the zinc layer 3)
Clean 1), passivation need not be
Hot-galvanized sheet-metal
removed
1)
Clean by means of lint-free cloth; use cleaning agent in case of serious
contamination (see above)
2)
Expose metallic surface
□□ by treating the entire surface with emery cloth or a rotating grinding tool (grain
size 100 or 80) or
□□ using a wire brush which is clearly marked for use exclusively for aluminium or
exclusively for copper
3)
using a brass brush, steel brush
2. Immediately after the pre-treatment, coat the contact surfaces with

lubricant Kontasynth so that the space between the contact surfaces is
completely filled once the screws have been fastened.

Appendices Notes

Appendices Notes

Appendices Notes

CS 30323
92506 Rueil-Malmaison Cedex, France This document has been printed
on ecological paper
RCS Nanterre 954 503 439 Publishing: Schneider Electric
Capital social 896 313 776 € Design: Schneider Electric
www.schneider-electric.com Printing:
DRC NTV 142 - HVX Compact - EN 03-2011
HVX
Vacuum circuit-breaker up to 36 kV
Medium-Voltage Switching Devices

Selection List
2011
Conditions of Delivery
The General Conditions of Delivery as amended shall apply.
Illustrations
The illustrations are not binding.
HVX Contents
■■ HVX Vacuum circuit-breaker.............................................................................. 4

□□ General Description........................................................................................ 4
□□ Essential Features.......................................................................................... 4
□□ Performance characteristics............................................................................ 5
■■ Design................................................................................................................... 6
□□ Design............................................................................................................. 6
□□ Module............................................................................................................ 7
□□ Pole section HVX............................................................................................ 8
□□ Drawing unit.................................................................................................... 8
□□ Drive design.................................................................................................... 8
□□ Secondary Equipment..................................................................................... 9
□□ Power consumption and tripping ranges of the releases.............................. 10
□□ Electric circuit diagram.................................................................................. 11
□□ Type Designation.......................................................................................... 12
■■ Switching tasks and applications....................................................................13

□□ Applications................................................................................................... 13
■■ Specifications and tests...................................................................................14

□□ Standards...................................................................................................... 14
□□ Tests.............................................................................................................. 14
□□ Insulating Level............................................................................................. 14
□□ Environmental Conditions............................................................................. 15
□□ Disposal Concept.......................................................................................... 15
■■ Selection tables................................................................................................. 16
□□ HVX Vacuum Circuit-Breaker 12 Kv with Drawing Unit for
Schneider Electric Switchgear Panels..............................................................16
□□ HVX Vacuum Circuit-Breaker 17.5 KV With Drawing Unit For
Schneider Electric Switchgear Panels..............................................................18
□□ HVX Vacuum Circuit-Breaker 24 KV With Drawing Unit For
Schneider Electric Switchgear panels..............................................................20
□□ Vacuum Circuit-Breaker HVX-E 36 KV With Drawing Unit For
Schneider Electric Switchgear Panels And HVX-F 36 KV Fixed-Type Model....... 22
□□ Vacuum Circuit-Breaker HVX-F 12 KV, Fixed-Type Model........................... 24
□□ Vacuum Circuit-Breaker HVX-F 17.5 KV, Fixed-Type Model........................ 28
■■ Models/dimensions........................................................................................... 32
□□ Dimensions HVX-E / 25 kA 3s...................................................................... 32
□□ Dimensions HVX-F ≤ 1250 A / 25 kA 3s....................................................... 36
□□ Dimensions HVX-F > 1250 A........................................................................ 37
■■ Accessories....................................................................................................... 39
□□ Transport...................................................................................................... 40
HVX E 3
HVX Vacuum circuit-breaker
The result of consistent further development for application in

modern air-insulated switchgear units
General Description
The HVX vacuum circuit-breaker is the result of consistent further
development for application in modern air-insulated switchgear units. It is
characterized by compact dimensions, good operator guidance and a
modern functional industrial design.
Thus, the market requirements, especially regarding small functional
compartments without additional solid insulating material in the panel to
ensure dielectric strength, can be satisfied optimally.
Drawing unit with vacuum circuit-breaker
Vacuum circuit-breaker HVX-F Fixed-type model with

64-pole connector
Essential Features
■■ compact design
■■ good operator guidance thanks to the functional arrangement of
operating and signalling elements
■■ no free-standing pole column
■■ vacuum interrupter chamber suspended free of external forces
■■ pole envelope with supporting and insulating functions
■■ high mechanical protection thanks to pole envelope
■■ flexible application options:
□□ for fixed installation
□□ for mounting on isolating truck
□□ for drawer-type use
4 HVX E
HVX Vacuum circuit-breaker(contd.)
■■ high reliability and availability thanks to mature vacuum switching technology and proven single-shaft spring drive
■■ world-wide application for all standards
■■ maintenance-free
Fields of application:
■■ Overhead cables
■■ Cables
■■ Motors
■■ Transformers
■■ Generators
Performance characteristics
Rated voltage Rated lightning Rated short-time Rated short-circuit Rated short-circuit Rated
impulse withstand power frequency making current breaking current current
voltage withstand voltage
kV kV kV kA kA 1) A
12 75 28 40 16 630 - 1250
63 25 630 - 2500
80 31.5 630 - 2500
100 40 800 - 2500
125 50 800 - 3150
17.5 95 38 40 16 630 - 1250
63 25 630 - 2500
80 31.5 630 - 2500
100 40 800 - 2500
24 125 50 40 16 630 - 2500
63 25 630 - 2500
80 31.5 630 - 2500
1)
Also corresponds to a rated short-time current of 3 seconds.
HVX E 5
HVX Design
Design
The HVX vacuum circuit-breaker was designed on the basis of the proven post insulator switch principle, i.e. the pole section is
secured to the drive casing in two places. In addition to providing insulation between the poles and to the ground, the
multifunction pole section performs all supporting and protection functions.
Drawing unit with vacuum circuit-breaker HVX-E ≤

1250 A with 64-pole connector attachment
Drawing unit with vacuum circuit-breaker HVX-E ≤ 2500 A with 64-pole connector
attachment
Drawing unit with vacuum circuit-breaker HVX-E > 2500 A, 50 kA with

64-pole connector attachment
HVX 36 kV fixed-type model
6 HVX E
HVX Design (contd.)
Module
Drive unit
Essential features
■■ Single-shaft system with a single spiral spring for ON and OFF
■■ Optimum adaptation to the small contact travel of the vacuum interrupter chamber
■■ Minimum energy requirement
Description
Thanks to the use of modern vacuum interrupter chambers, vacuum
circuit-breakers make for an optimization of the entire drive kinematics.
Method of operation:
The energy for a complete switching cycle can be stored in the spiral
spring. The ON and OFF movement of the vacuum interrupter chamber is
controlled via the cam discs. Once closing (ON) has been effected, the
spring can be tensioned further, storing the energy for a complete
automatic reclosing cycle.
The drive mechanism is available in two basic models, i.e. as manual
spring mechanism FH 2-01 or the motorized spring mechanism FK 2-01.
Appropriate interlocks rule out faulty switching operations.
In addition to the mechanical actuation of the manual ON/OFF pushbuttons,
the drives can be remote-controlled electrically or actuated via primary relays.
Spring-charging mechanism of the drive using a crank

Approx. 15 turns per C-O operating cycle are required.
Tensioning the OFF ON
spring Vacuum inter- Vacuum inter-
rupter chamber rupter chamber
Spring drum Drive casing Drive casing
Main shaft
Basic equipment
FH 2-01 FK 2-01 (Motor-
Type (Manual drive) operated drive
mechanism)
Mechanical elements
OFF push-button ■ ■
ON push-button ■ ■
Switch position indicator ■ ■
Mechanical operations counter• ■ ■
Switching spring position indicator ■ ■
Electrical equipment
Spring charging motor ■
Closing coil ■
Opening coil ■
8 auxiliary contacts ■ ■
HVX E 7
HVX Design (contd.)
Pole section HVX ≤ 2500 A

The supporting component of the entire pole section is the multifunctional
pole shell. Its functions comprise those of a mechanical supporting device
for the top and bottom terminal contacts between which the vacuum
interrupter chamber is suspended free of mechanical constraints. In this
case, there are no insulating bridges between the phases.
Integrating a wide variety of functions within the pole envelope helped
minimize the number of individual parts significantly.
Pole section > 2500 A

The pole section is of extremely robust design. The solid support provides
a constraint-free suspension for the interrupter chamber. Due to this
statically closed support system, the axial forces produced on closing and
opening only act on the contact system, whereas the vacuum interrupter
chamber remains free of constraints.
Drawing unit
The drawing unit is the supporting element for:
■■ the drive unit to move the vacuum circuit-breaker HVX-E into its
operating / isolating position
■■ secondary terminals (64/36-pole)
■■ interface elements for
Pole section HVX ≤ 1250 A
□□ panel interlocks
□□ drawing unit position indications
■■ drawing unit coding
Drive design
The basic design according to the Table on page 8 can be supplemented
optionally by:
■■ 8 additional auxiliary contacts
■■ 2nd shunt tripping coil
■■ undervoltage release
■■ transformer-operated release
■■ OFF button*
■■ ON button*
■■ primary relay release
■■ primary relay pulse contact
■■ anti-pumping relay
* Breaker contact in passing contact circuit
Pole section HVX 12/24 kV > 1250 A
8 HVX E
HVX Design (contd.)
Secondary Equipment
Releases
Auxiliary release (Shunt releases)
The coil of the auxiliary release is supplied with exciter voltage from an
auxiliary supply source via a release contact. Pulsing can be initiated by
hand, via control switches, overcurrent releases or undervoltage releases.
In case of AC voltage, the coil is supplied via a rectifier installed in the
switch housing. As the coil is designed for short-term excitation only, the
exciter circuit is routed via an auxiliary switch contact controlled by the
circuit-breaker shaft, thus - once released - interrupting the current circuit.
Secondary release (Transformer-operated release)
Secondary releases are used for automatic release of switching devices in
case of short-circuits and overcurrent. Once the protector reacts, the
release is excited by the transformer current, thus causing the switch to be
tripped. These releases are supplied for transformer secondary currents of
0.5 A, 1 A and 5 A.
Undervoltage release
Undervoltage releases are supplied by the auxiliary source permanently.
Whenever the auxiliary current is interrupted or its voltage drops
Pole section HVX 36 kV essentially, the switching device is tripped straight away.
Auxiliary switches
Auxiliary switches
Auxiliary switches are always actuated directly by the switch shaft via an
intermediate linkage, their position always corresponding to the position of
the main contacts. The circuit-breakers are equipped on general with an
auxiliary switch with 8 contact elements.
For further current circuits, 8 contact elements can be arranged
additionally. Optionally, an electronic pulse stretcher can be supplied.
Electronic pulse stretcher
The electronic pulse stretcher, type C27 900, extends the momentary
pulses to 50 ms, which offers the following advantages:
■■ suitable for short passing contact input signals > 1 ms
■■ independent of the input voltage, i.e. 24 V – 240 V AC/DC
■■ independent of climatic and environmental influences
■■ constantly reproduced momentary pulse
■■ potential-free momentary pulse
■■ straightforward retrofit; i.e. no intervention in the mechanical switching
Pole section HVX 12 kV > 2500 A system
Push switches
The push switches are snap-action switches mounted to the drive mechanism.
Unlike auxiliary switches, push switches are not necessarily dependent on
the switching device‘s position, but are actuated e.g. via cams or via
various elements installed on the switch.
The control switches are wired to the terminal strip; on request, a plug-and-
socket connection (with connector and connector base) is also available.
Relay
Anti-pumping relay
If both an ON and OFF command are permanently present on the circuit-
breaker at the same time, the latter returns to its initial position after
closing. It remains in this initial position until the ON command is issued
again. This prevents continuous closing and opening (=“pumping”).
Operation counter
An operations counter has been integrated into the operator interface to
furnish proof of the number of switching operations actually performed by
the circuit-breaker. The number of switching cycles can be used to draw
conclusions about the service life or the operating cycles.
HVX E 9
HVX Design (contd.)
Power consumption and tripping ranges of

the releases
Tripping voltage Power consumption
Rated Tripping
Tripping at AC
supply voltage at at DC
Release Designation voltage voltage at 50/60 Hz
AC 50/60 approx. [W]
AC approx. [VA]
Ua in [V] Hz
24 16 V to 40 V
48; 60 33 V to 66 V
Closing coil F2 250 250
110; 120; 125 60 V to 140 V
220; 230 130 V to 260 V
24 16 V to 40 V
F11
48;60 33 V to 66 V
Opening coil F12 ≤ 250 250
110; 120; 125 60 V to 140 V
F13
220; 230 130 V to 260 V
Undervoltage 24
35 to 0 % Ua 12 12
release 48
60
F4
Secondary 110
125 70 to 35 % Ua - 12
release
230
Tripping ranges
Release Designation Rated Tripping
current current at
la in [A] AC 50/60
Hz
Transformer- F3 0.5 -
90
operated release 1 at
5 100 % la
Power consumption and voltage ranges of

the motor-actuated drive mechanisms
Voltage range Power consumption
Rated supply voltage at DC at AC Starting
max. min. approx. 50/60 Hz Current [A]
Ua in [V] [W] approx. [VA]
DC 24
48
100
60 85 at 110 % Ua - 1)
120 2)
110
220
AC (110) 120 132 V 93 V 100
- 1)
(220) 230 253 V 187 V 120 2)
1)
The inrush current in the drive motor is negligible due to the fact that it occurs for a
very short time only, if protection is provided by miniature circuit-breakers with C
characteristics.
2)
Motor for drawing unit actuation
Auxiliary switches and motor limit switches

Number of Rated
Designation switching (normal) Breaking capacity
elements current
S11 8 at 48V DC, L/R = 10ms 10 A
at 125V DC, L/R = 10ms 3.8 A
15A at 220V DC, L/R = 10ms 2 A
S12 8
at (110) 120/(220) 230 V AC 10 A
One NC contact and one NO contact of the auxiliary switch respectively are required
for each closing or opening coil respectively.
10 HVX E
HVX Electric circuit diagram
Electric Circuit Diagram For HVX Circuit-Breaker

64-pole connector with anti-pumping relay
Electric Circuit Diagram For HVX Circuit-Breaker

Terminal strip with anti-pumping relay
These circuit diagrams show the possible secondary equipment. Depending on the order volume, components shown may not
be included.
Operating equipment which may be installed in the circuit- breaker -QO depending on the order specification
■■ F11, –F12 Shunt opening release (shunt release)
■■ F2 Shunt closing release (shunt release)
■■ F3 Secondary coil (transformer-operated release)
■■ F4 Undervoltage release
■■ K01 Anti-pumping relay
■■ M1 Motor to charge the energy storing device
■■ S11, S12 Auxiliary switchgear
■■ S2 Push switch actuated by energy-storing device
■■ S41, S42 Push switch actuated by ON/OFF pushbutton
■■ S43 Push switch actuated by OFF pushbutton
■■ S6 Push switch actuated by drawing unit
■■ X01 Terminal strip
■■ Y1 Blocking coil
HVX E 11
HVX Electric circuit diagram (contd.)
Type Designation
The type designation of the vacuum circuit breaker (refer to rating plate)
specifies the essential technical data. The example shows the composition
of the type designation.
HVX 12-25-06-E
Type Drawing unit
F
Rated voltage Fixed type
Rated short-circuit Rated current
breaking current
Example:
HVX 12-31-25-E
Rated (normal) current 12 kV
Rated short-circuit breaking current 31.5 kV
Rated (normal) current 2500 A
on drawing unit
OFF button
0 l ON button
Rating plate
Mechanical
Sachsenwerk Type HVX 24 -16 -00 -21
NO SW1 3340121001 1999
U 24 kV Im 800 A / 50/60 Hz
Um 125 kV Isc 16 kA /th 3 s
operations counter
0 - 3min - 00-3min-00
Made in Germany
Position indicator of
circuit breaker
99815
Position indicator of
closing spring
HVX Insertion opening for manual
charging of the closing spring
12 HVX E
HVX Switching tasks
and applications
All HVX vacuum circuit-breakers can be supplied

with reclosing facility.
Rated operating sequences
Rated operating Designation Specifications Remarks

sequence
0–3 min – CO – 3 without
IEC 62271-100 see Selection Tables
min – CO reclosing facility
0–0.3s – CO – 3 min with reclosing

IEC 62271-100 see Selection Tables
– CO facility
see Selection Tables

with reclosing IEC 62271-100
CO – 15s – CO column "with
facility ANSI C37
reclosing facility"
0–0.3s – CO – 15s
ANSI C37 subject to order
– CO
C Switching ON by means of rated short-circuit making current

O Switching OFF by means of rated short-circuit breaking current
Applications
■■ Rated short-circuit breaking current and part-load currents
■■ Unsymmetrical breaking currents
■■ Auto-reclosing
■■ Switching of idle cables and overhead lines
■■ Switching under phase opposition conditions
■■ Switching of idle transformers
■■ Switching under phase earth phase fault conditions
■■ Switching OFF short-circuit currents with very high initial steepnesses of
the transient recovery voltage
■■ Switching of motors and air gap inductions
„Test bench” for vacuum circuit-breakers with testing

and evaluation system for
■■ speed measurement
■■ tolerance of pole simultaneity and of
■■ make and break times
HVX E 13
HVX Specifications
and tests
Standards
The three-pole HVX vacuum circuit-breaker
■■ corresponds to the requirements for AC switchgear for voltages above
1 kV acc. to IEC 62271-100.
■■ complies, regarding its switching capacity and insulating level, with ANSI
C37.04,06,09 1).
■■ corresponds, as drawer-type HVX-E, to IEC 62271-102
1)
further standards available on request
Environmental And Operating Conditions

HVX circuit-breakers may only be operated under normal operating
conditions acc. to IEC 60694. Operation under conditions deviating from
these is only admissible subject to consultation with and written approval
from the manufacturer.
Drawing unit with vacuum circuit-breaker Tests

Vacuum circuit-breakers have proved their suitability in type testing
according to the applicable standards and during development in extensive
test series. The tests were performed in neutral institutes, such as IPH and
KEMA. Reliability, operator safety and the mechanical functions of the
switching devices have been proved in endurance tests or under regular
operating conditions.
Ambient temperatures
Temperature class: "minus 5 indoors” 1)
Min./max. ambient temperature -5 / 40 °C 1)
Average value over 24 hours (max.) 35 °C 1)
Maximum installation altitude above sea-level 1000 m 1)
1)
higher values on request
Insulating Level (Tested According to Iec 60

694 or EN 60 694)
HVX vacuum circuit-breakers are suitable for installation at high altitudes.
They can be used in buildings with low thermal insulation or low thermal
capacity, heated or cooled, without temperature monitoring. The heating or
cooling systems may fail to operate for a period lasting several days. The
values specified for the insulating level are referred to sea-level.
In case of installation at altitudes above 1000 m, a reduction of the
insulation level must be considered using an altitude correction factor
(ka = correction factor).
Thus, the following applies to the selection of devices and switchgear:
Rated withstand voltage Required rated
≥
to be selected 1) withstand voltage 1)
ka
14 HVX E
HVX Specifications
and tests (contd.)
However, if the actual insulating level at the site of installation - the

withstand voltage – is to be determined, the reduction of the insulating level
starting at 0 m (sea-level) must be taken into consideration as follows:
Withstand voltage 2) = ka · Rated withstand voltage 1) of the selected device.
The following is defined:
Rated withstand ....voltage 1) = Rated value according to IEC, EN etc.
referred to sea-level.
Withstand....voltage 2) = actual value at the altitude concerned.
Altitude correction factor ka acc. to IEC 60694 or EN 60694.
1)
Rated lightning impulse withstand voltage Rated power frequency
withstand voltage
2)
Lightning impulse withstand voltage
Power frequency withstand voltage
Environmental Conditions
Vacuum circuit-breakers HVX comply with the environmental conditions
defined in IEC 60 721-3-3, 1990.
Disposal Concept
A disposal manual is available on request.
HVX E 15
HVX Selection tables
HVX Vacuum Circuit-Breaker 12 KV with Drawing Unit for

Schneider Electric Switchgear Panels
Rated insulation Rated short-
level circuit breaking
current
Percentage value of the DC component

Rated power frequency withstand
Rated peak withstand current
Rated short-circuit current

Rated short-time current
out-of-phase conditions
Rated lightning impulse
Breaking current under

Cable breaking current
Rated (normal) current
Pole center spacing
withstand voltage
Type
Rated frequency
Rated voltage
voltage
3s
mm kV kV kV Hz A kA kA kA % A Ak
HVX 12-16-06-E 185/210 630

HVX 12-16-08-E 185/210 12 28 75 50/60 800 40 16 16 33 25 4
HVX 12-16-12-E 185/210 1250
HVX 12-20-06-E 185/210 630
HVX 12-20-08-E 185/210 12 28 75 50/60 800 50 20 20 33 25 5
HVX 12-20-12-E 185/210 1250
HVX 12-25-06-E 185/210 630
HVX 12-25-08-E 185/210 800
HVX 12-25-12-E 185/210 1250
HVX 12-25-16-E 210 12 28 75 50/60 1600 63 25 25 33 25 6.3
HVX 12-25-20-E 210 2000
HVX 12-25-25-E 210 2500 2)
HVX 12-25-25-E 254 2500
HVX 12-31-08-E 185/210 800
HVX 12-31-12-E 185/210 1250
HVX 12-31-16-E 210 1600
HVX 12-31-20-E 210 12 28 75 50/60 2000 80 31.5 31.5 33 25 8
HVX 12-31-25-E 210 2500 2)
HVX 12-31-25-E 254 2500
HVX 12-31-31-E 254 3150
HVX 12-40-12-E 185/210 1250
HVX 12-40-12-E 254 1250
HVX 12-40-16-E 210 1600
12 28 75 50/60 100 40 40 33 25 10
HVX 12-40-20-E 210 2000
HVX 12-40-25-E 210/254 2500 2)
HVX 12-40-31-E 254 3150
HVX 12-50-12-E 210 1250
HVX 12-50-25-E 210 12 28 75 (95) 50/60 2500 2) 125 50 50 33 25 12.5
HVX 12-50-31-E 254 3150 (130)
1)
adm. tolerance range, no manufacturing tolerance, current value of one specimen, see routine test report
2)
in case of PMA 210 mm panel with motor-driven fan
16 HVX E
HVX Selection tables (contd.)
Rated operating sequence Number of operating cycles Breaker operating times

without overhaul
Charging time for motor drive mechanism

Minimum command time for release coils
mechanical electrical 100% 100% 100%
Un Un Un
ith rated short-circuit current

O-3 min-CO-3 min-CO
O-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO
Interrupter chamber
O-0.3 s-CO-15 s-CO
Drive mechanism
1)
1)
Opening time
Closing time
Arc duration
CO-15 s-CO
Break time
Weight
ms ms ms ms ms ms kg
135
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ 10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-12 20 4-12 135
135
135
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ 10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
135
135
135
135
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ 10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
160
160
160
135
135
135
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ 10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 160
160
160
230
135
135
135
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ 10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12
135
160
160
230
▪ ▪ ▪ ▪ 10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 230
230
HVX E 17
HVX Vacuum Circuit-Breaker 17.5 KV with Drawing Unit for

Schneider Electric Switchgear Panels
Rated insula- Rated short- Rated operating sequence
tion level circuit break-
ing current
Percentage value of the DC

Rated power frequency

O-3 min-CO-3 min-CO
O-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO

Pole center spacing
O-0.3 s-CO-15 s-CO

ithstand voltage
Type
ithstand voltage
Rated frequency
Rated voltage
CO-15 s-CO
component
3s
mm kV kV kV Hz A kA kA kA % A kA
HVX 17-25-06-E 210 630
HVX 17-25-08-E 210 800
HVX 17-25-12-E 210 1250
HVX 17-25-20-E 210

17.5 38 95 50/60
2000
63 25 25 33 31.5 6.3 ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
HVX 17-25-25-E 210 2500 2)
HVX 17-25-25-E 254 2500
HVX 17-31-08-E 210 800
HVX 17-31-12-E 210 1250
HVX 17-31-20-E 210 2000
HVX 17-31-25-E 210

17.5 38 95 50/60
2500 2)
80 31.5 31.5 33 31.5 8 ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪
HVX 17-31-25-E 254 2500
HVX 17-31-31-E 254 3150
HVX 17-40-12-E 210 1250
HVX 17-40-20-E 210 2000
HVX 17-40-25-E 210 17.5 38 95 50/60 2500 2) 100 40 40 33 31.5 10 ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

HVX 17-40-25-E 254 2500
HVX 17-40-31-E 254 3150
1)
2)
18 HVX E
Number of operating cycles Breaker operating times

without overhaul

Un Un Un
Interrupter chamber
Drive mechanism
1)
1)
Opening time
Closing time
Arc duration
Break time
Weight
135
135
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12
160
160
160
135
135
160
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12
160
160
230
135
160
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 160
160
230
HVX E 19
HVX Vacuum Circuit-Breaker 24 KV with Drawing Unit for

Schneider Electric Switchgear panels
ing current

Rated short-circuit curenrt


Cable beaking currrent
O-3 min-CO-3 min-CO
O-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO

Pole center spacing
O-0.3 s-CO-15 s-CO

Type
ithstand voltage
Rated frequency
Rated voltage
CO-15 s-CO
oltage
3s
HVX 24-16-06-E 210 630
HVX 24-16-08-E 210 24 50 125 50/60 800 40 16 16 33 31.5 ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

HVX 24-16-12-E 210 1250
HVX 24-25-06-E 210 630
HVX 24-25-08-E 210 800
HVX 24-25-12-E 210 1250
HVX 24-25-16-E 210 24 50 125 50/60 1600 63 25 25 33 31.5 ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

HVX 24-25-20-E 210 2000
HVX 24-25-20-E 254 2000
HVX 24-25-25-E 210/254 2500 2)
HVX 24-31-08-E 210 800
HVX 24-31-12-E 210 1250
HVX 24-31-16-E 210 24 50 125 50/60 1600 80 31.5 31.5 33 31.5 ▪ ▪ ▪ ▪

HVX 24-31-20-E 210/254 2000
HVX 24-31-25-E 210/254 2500 2)
1)
2)
20 HVX E

without overhaul

Un Un Un
Interrupter chamber
Drive mechanism
1)
1)
Opening time
Closing time
Arc duration
Break time
Weight
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
135
135
135
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
160
160
230
135
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
160
160
HVX E 21
Vacuum Circuit-Breaker HVX-E 36 KV with Drawing Unit for

Schneider Electric Switchgear Panels a nd HVX-F 36 KV Fixed-Type Model
Rated insula- Rated short- Rated operating
circuit
tion level sequence
breaking
current



O-3 min-CO-3 min-CO
O-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO

Pole center spacing
O-0.3 s-CO-15 s-CO

ithstand voltage
Type
Low ind. currents

Rated frequency
Rated voltage
CO-15 s-CO
oltage
3s
mm kV kV kV Hz A kA kA kA % A A kA
HVX 36-25-12-E 300 36 70 170 50/60 1250 65 25 25 33 50 10 6.25 ■ ■ ■ ■

HVX 36-25-20-E 300 36 70 170 50/60 2000 65 25 25 33 50 10 6.25 ■ ■ ■ ■
HVX 36-25-25-E 300 36 70 170 50/60 2500 65 25 25 33 50 10 6.25 ■ ■ ■ ■
HVX 36-25-12-F 300 36 70 170 50/60 1250 65 25 25 33 50 10 6.25 ■ ■ ■ ■

HVX 36-25-20-F 300 36 70 170 50/60 2000 65 25 25 33 50 10 6.25 ■ ■ ■ ■
HVX 36-25-25-F 300 36 70 170 50/60 2500 65 25 25 33 50 10 6.25 ■ ■ ■ ■
1)
22 HVX E

without overhaul

Minimum command time for r elease coils
Un Un Un
Interrupter chamber
Drive mechanism
1)
1)
Opening time
Closing time
Arc duration
Break time
Weight
10000 30000 10000 100 40-53 45-63 47-65 7-12 20 4-9 155
10000 30000 10000 100 40-53 45-63 47-65 7-12 20 4-9 155
10000 30000 10000 100 40-53 45-63 47-65 7-12 20 4-9 155
10000 30000 10000 100 40-53 45-63 47-65 7-12 20 4-9 155
10000 30000 10000 100 40-53 45-63 47-65 7-12 20 4-9 155
10000 30000 10000 100 40-53 45-63 47-65 7-12 20 4-9 155
HVX E 23
Vacuum Circuit-Breaker HVX-F 12 KV, Fixed-Type Model

circuit
tion level
breaking
current



out-of-phase condition
O-3 min-CO-3 min-CO
O-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO

Pole center spacing
O-0.3 s-CO-15 s-CO

ithstand voltage
Type
Rated frequency
Rated voltage
CO-15 s-CO
oltage
3s
HVX 12-16-06-F 165 630
HVX 12-16-08-F 165 12 28 75 50/60 800 40 16 16 33 25 4 ■ ■ ■ ■

HVX 12-16-12-F 165 1250
HVX 12-16-06-F 185/210 630
HVX 12-16-08-F 185/210 12 28 75 50/60 800 40 16 16 33 25 4 ■ ■ ■ ■

HVX 12-16-12-F 185/210 1250
HVX 12-20-06-F 165/185/210 630
HVX 12-20-08-F 165/185/210 12 28 75 50/60 800 50 20 20 33 25 5 ■ ■ ■ ■

HVX 12-20-12-F 165/185/210 1250
HVX 12-25-06-F 165 630
HVX 12-25-08-F 165 800
HVX 12-25-12-F 165 1250
HVX 12-25-06-F 185/210 630
HVX 12-25-08-F 185/210 12 28 75 50/60 800 63 25 25 33 25 6.3 ■ ■ ■ ■

HVX 12-25-12-F 185/210 1250
HVX 12-25-16-F 210 1600
HVX 12-25-20-F 210 2000
HVX 12-25-25-F 210 2500
1)
24 HVX E

without overhaul

Minimum command time for r elease coils
Un Un Un
Interrupter chamber
Drive mechanism
1)
1)
Opening time
Closing time
Arc duration
Break time
ms ms ms ms ms ms Weight
kg
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
135
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
135
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
135
135
135
135
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
135
135
160
160
HVX E 25

ing current



O-3 min-CO-3 min-CO
O-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO

Pole center spacing
O-0.3 s-CO-15 s-CO

ithstand voltage
Type
Rated frequency
Rated voltage
CO-15 s-CO
oltage
3s
HVX 12-31-06-F 165 630
HVX 12-31-08-F 165 800
HVX 12-31-12-F 165 1250
HVX 12-31-06-F 185/210 630
HVX 12-31-08-F 185/210 12 28 75 50/60 800 80 31.5 31.5 33 25 8 ■ ■ ■ ■
HVX 12-31-12-F 185/210 1250
HVX 12-31-16-F 210 1600
HVX 12-31-20-F 210 2000
HVX 12-31-25-F 210 2500
HVX 12-31-31-F 254 12 28 75 50/60 3150 80 31.5 31.5 33 25 8 ■ ■ ■ ■
HVX 12-40-08-F 185/210 800
HVX 12-40-12-F 185/210 1250
HVX 12-40-16-F 210 12 28 75 50/60 1600 100 40 40 33 25 10 ■ ■ ■ ■
HVX 12-40-20-F 210 2000
HVX 12-40-25-F 210 2500
HVX 12-40-31-F 254 12 28 75 50/60 3150 100 40 40 33 25 10 ■ ■ ■ ■
HVX 12-50-31-F 254 12 28 75 50/60 3150 125 50 50 33 25 12.5 ■ ■ ■ ■
1)
26 HVX E

without overhaul

Un Un Un
with rated short-circuit current
Interrupter chamber
Drive mechanism
1)
1)
Opening time
Closing time
Arc duration
Break time
Weight
135
135
135
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
135
135
160
160
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 230
135
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
160
160
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 230
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 230
HVX E 27
Vacuum Circuit-Breaker HVX-F 17.5 KV, Fixed-Type Model

ing current



O-3 min-CO-3 min-CO
O-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO

Pole center spacing
O-0.3 s-CO-15 s-CO

ithstand voltage
Type
Rated frequency
Rated voltage
CO-15 s-CO
oltage
3s
HVX 17-16-06-F 165/210 630
HVX 17-16-08-F 165/210 17.5 38 95 50/60 800 40 16 16 33 31.5 4 ■ ■ ■ ■

HVX 17-16-12-F 165/210 1250
HVX 17-20-06-F 165/210 630
HVX 17-20-08-F 165/210 17.5 38 95 50/60 800 50 20 20 33 31.5 5 ■ ■ ■ ■

HVX 17-20-12-F 165/210 1250
HVX 17-25-06-F 165/210 630
HVX 17-25-08-F 165/210 800
HVX 17-25-12-F 165/210 1250

17.5 38 95 50/60 63 25 25 33 31.5 6.3 ■ ■ ■ ■
HVX 17-25-16-F 210 1600
HVX 17-25-20-F 210 2000
HVX 17-25-25-F 210 2500
HVX 17-31-06-F 165/210 630
HVX 17-31-08-F 165/210 800
HVX 17-31-12-F 165/210 1250
HVX 17-31-16-F 210 17.5 38 95 50/60 1600 80 31.5 31.5 33 31.5 8 ■ ■ ■ ■
HVX 17-31-20-F 210 2000
HVX 17-31-25-F 210 2500
HVX 17-31-31-F 254 3150
HVX 17-40-08-F 210/254 800
HVX 17-40-12-F 210 1250
HVX 17-40-16-F 210 1600

17.5 38 95 50/60 100 40 40 33 31.5 - ■ ■ ■ ■
HVX 17-40-20-F 210/254 2000
HVX 17-40-25-F 210 2500
HVX 17-40-31-F 254 3150
1)
28 HVX E

without overhaul

Un Un Un
Interrupter chamber
Drive mechanism
1)
1)
Opening time
Closing time
Arc duration
Break time
Weight
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
135
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
135
135
135
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12
135
160
160
135
135
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
160
160
230
135
135
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12
160
160
230
HVX E 29

ing current



O-3 min-CO-3 min-CO
O-0.3 s-CO-3 min-CO

Pole center spacing
O-0.3 s-CO-15 s-CO

ithstand voltage
Type
Rated frequency
Rated voltage
CO-15 s-CO
oltage
3s
HVX 24-16-06-F 210/275 630
HVX 24-16-08-F 210/275 24 50 125 50/60 800 40 16 16 33 31.5 ■ ■ ■ ■

HVX 24-16-12-F 210/275 1250
HVX 24-20-06-F 210/275 630
HVX 24-20-08-F 210/275 24 50 125 50/60 800 50 20 20 33 31.5 ■ ■ ■ ■

HVX 24-20-12-F 210/275 1250
HVX 24-25-06-F 210/275 630
HVX 24-25-08-F 210/275 800
HVX 24-25-12-F 210/275 1250

24 50 125 50/60 63 25 25 33 31.5 ■ ■ ■ ■
HVX 24-25-16-F 210/275 1600
HVX 24-25-20-F 210/275 2000
HVX 24-25-25-F 210/275 2500
HVX 24-31-06-F 210/275 630
HVX 24-31-08-F 210/275 800
HVX 24-31-12-F 210/275 1250

24 50 125 50/60 80 31.5 31.5 33 31.5 ■ ■ ■ ■
HVX 24-31-16-F 210/275 1600
HVX 24-31-20-F 210/275 2000
HVX 24-31-25-F 210/275 2500
1)
2)
30 HVX E

without overhaul

Un Un Un
Interrupter chamber
Drive mechanism
1)
1)
Opening time
Closing time
Arc duration
Break time
Weight
135/260
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135/260
135/260
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12 135
135
135/260
135/260
135/260
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12
135/260
160/260
160/260
135
135
135
10000 30000 10000 100 35-53 45-63 55-62 2-15 20 4-12
135
160
160
HVX E 31
HVX Models/dimensions
Dimensions HVX-E / 25 kA 3s
HVX-E ≤ 1250 A HVX-E > 1250 A
A A
16
16
A
A
A
Ø 60
16
see Tables on page 33 see Tables on page 34
32 HVX E
HVX Models/dimensions (contd.)
Dimensions HVX-E ≤ 1250 A / 25 kA 3s
Ur [kV] 12 kV
Ir [A] ≥1250
A 653
B 195/126
C 185
D 507
E 527
F 466
G 498
Dimensions in mm
HVX E 33
Dimensions HVX-E > 1250 A

C C
137
H (for installation in PIX only)
340
697
220
G
416 B E
E
C C
A
22
Dimensions in mm
For PN PID PI PIX PN PIA106, PID105, PIX PIX PIX PIX-C PIX-S PIX PIX PIX
PID106,
panel 104 104 104 12 104/106 PIN106 PID106 PI104 PI106 12 17 24 12 17 24
A 563 653 569 653 563 653 753 569 569 653 753 763 653 763 653 653 763
B 126 195 126 195 126 195 294 126 195 195 294 294 195 294 195 195 294
H 805 805 735 805 735 735 805 735 805
C 185 210 254
D 507 570 658
E 527 577 665
F 466 516 604
G 497.5 547.5 635.5
34 HVX E
Dimensions HVX-E 3150 A

A
349 178
807 (for PIX 12 kV only)
22
804 (for PIX 12 kV only)

736
340
732
743
669
B
11
C 23
735
472
D D
Cooler attachment depending on version
849
Additional dimension drawings available on request
kV kV lr A B C D
12 75 1250 688 220 502 254
12 75 2000 688 220 502 254
12 75 2500 688 220 502 254
12 75 3150 688 220 502 254
12 95 1250 723 239 537 254
12 95 2000 723 239 537 254
12 95 2500 723 239 537 254
12 95 3150 723 239 537 254
17.5 95 1250 723 239 537 254
17.5 95 2000 723 239 537 254
17.5 95 2500 723 239 537 254
17.5 95 3150 723 239 537 254
Dimensions in mm
HVX E 35
Dimensions HVX-F ≤ 1250 A / 25 kA 3s
Ur [kV] 12 kV
Ir [A] ≤1250
A 150
B 440
C 450
Dimensions in mm
≤ 1250 A
Vacuum circuit-breaker HVX-F ≤ 1250 A
36 HVX E
Dimensions HVX-F > 1250 A

327 176
25
458
18
B
310
E
176
C C
348
Ir ≤ 1600 A Ir ≥ 2000 A
Ur = 12/17.5 kV Ur = 12 kV Ur = 12/17.5/24 kV Ur = 24 kV Ur = 12/17.5 Ur = 24 kV
C 165 185 210 275 210 275
D 507 507 570 700 570 700
E 487 527 577 707 577 707
B 471 471 534 664 534 664
Dimensions in mm
Vacuum circuit-breaker HVX-F
HVX E 37
Dimensions HVX-F 3150 A
644 349 178
340
732
735
22
706
A
254 254
Ur [kV] Up [kV] A B
12 75 688 220
12 95 723 239
17.5 95 723 239
Dimensions in mm
38 HVX E
HVX Accessories
Transport trolley
The vacuum circuit-breaker HVX-E can be transported by means of the
transport trolley.
Transport trolley (optional)

Moving crank handle
The crank handle is used to move the switch with manual drawing module
from its isolating into its racked-in position and back.
Moving crank handle (optional) Emergency crank handle

The emergency crank handle can be used to move the HVX circuit-breaker
with motor-driven drawing unit manually into its racked-in position and
back.
Spring charging crank

Emergency crank handle (optional) The spring charging crank is used to charge the circuit-breaker‘s energy-
storing device.
Chassis frame
A floor chassis frame can be used to transport the HVX.
Spring charging crank
Chassis frame (optional)
HVX E 39
HVX Transport
Transport
The HVX vacuum circuit-breakers are shipped with packaging. The
circuit-breaker‘s weight corresponds to the selection tables. On delivery,
the circuit-breakers are fully assembled and adjusted.
The HVX vacuum circuit-breaker must be lifted in accordance with the
illustration. A rope with a diameter of 12 to 15 mm or a strap is required.
Shipping unit
>50¡
Transport HVX ≤ 2500 A
Transport HVX > 2500 A
40 HVX E
Appendices Notes
HVX E 41
Appendices Notes
42 HVX E
Appendices Notes
HVX E 43
CS 30323
This document has been printed
on ecological paper
RCS Nanterre 954 503 439 Publishing: Schneider Electric
Capital social 896 313 776 € Design: Schneider Electric
www.schneider-electric.com Printing:
HVX E 02-2011
DAM-12
Current transformer for indoor application designed in accordance with the prescriptions of
the DIN 42600-8 standard
General description
The support type current transformer is manufactured with a fully epoxi resin embedded core,
produced of cold rolled grain orieated or amorf nanocristalic electrical steel, in a design with 1,2 or
3 secondary circuits, mounted on a coated metal baseplate. The current transformer is suitable for
indoor application for rated primary voltages from 3 kV to 10 kV. That is for maximum system
voltages from 3,6 kV to 12 kV. For supplying the current circuits of relays and other instruments.
The primary terminals are located on the upper surface of the equipment. The size of the connecting
bolts is M12.
The seconary windings are for measuring or for protective purposes and are manufactured in
accuracy classes 0,2, 0,2S, 0,5, 0,5S, 1 for measuring and in 5P , 10P for protection.
The material of the primary and secondary windings as well as of the terminals is cooper.
The current transformer is designed and manufactured to comply with the requirements of the
effective Hungarian Standards MSZ EN 61869-1, -2, the previous MSZ EN 60044-2, IEC 186 and
also with DIN 42600-8. On the basis of common agreement it is possible to manufacture according
to other standards, different from the aforementioned as well.
Packing, delivery
The current transformer is delivered in a finish suitable for use under normal climatic conditions,
paccked in corrugated paper. boxes upon common agreement the delivery can be made in finish and
packing suitable for the requsted climatic zone.
Installation, operation
The current transformer can be fixed with 4 pcs M10 bolts. The connection to the primary terminals
is accomplished with M12 bolts. The secondary wires provided with cable lugs, can be fixed to the
secondary terminals by the means of M5 bolts. The terminals are closed with a sealable plastic
cover. The secondary terminals marked with „S2” can be earthed with M5 Bolts to the baseplate.
The M8 earthing bolt of the instrument is located on the side opposite to the secondary terminals.
The rating plate, sticked on the secondary side of the current tranformer contains both the technical
parameters and te secondary markings. Besides the ratio, the primary and secondary terminals and
the earthing are marked with labels. All the bolts and washers are coated.
Operation is possible keeping the prescriptions of the relevant security – labour – and property -
protection directives. Any faults and breakdowns emerging in the costumers spmere of interest due
to breaching, disobeying the aforementioned, exempt the manufacturer from the warranty and
quarantee lialibities.
Maintenance
The maintenance consists of works to be done according to the general rules for maintenance of
indoor instrument and equipments these are:
− periodical inspection of contamination
− cleaning depending on the degree of impurity
− inspection of the surfaces
− tightening the bolts of the primary and secondry connections
− tightening the fastening and the earthing bolts.
State verification
The secondary windings of the current transformers in class 0,2, 0,2S, 05, 0,5S are namufactured in
finish suitable for verification. The verification itself will be made only on special request. In this
case it will be accomplished and documented by an official seal or an affixed verification stamp by
the state office for measurement.
Data to be supplied with the order
− type execution e.g. Change over possibility
− rated insulation level
− rated primary and secondary current
− rated thermal short time current and rated dinamic current
− accuracy class and output of the secundary circuit
− quantity
− requested term of delivery
Other or special requirements

− climate zone of use other than normal
− language of the rating plate
− packing
− number of pieces and sort of the documentation requested
Warranty period, guarantee

The warranty period is 12 months. Upon mutual agreement of the parties it can be otherwise
established.
Technical Data
Rated voltage (network) 50 Hz 3 kV 6 kV 10kV

Highest voltage for equipment 3,6 kV 7,2 kV 12kV
Power frequency withstand voltage(EFF)(1MIN) 10kV 20 kV 28kV
Lightning impulse withstand voltage (peak) 20kV 60 kV 75 kV
Rated shorttime termal current 100xIn, -800xIn
de max. 50kA eff 1s
Rated dinamic current 2,5xIt
de max. 125 kA csúcs
Primary currents (A) normal execution 5,10,1,20,25,30,40,50,60,75
100,150, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500, 600, 750,
1000, 1250, 1500, 2000, 2500
Execution with change over possibility 2x5, 2x10, 2x15, 2x20, 2x25, 2x30, 2x40, 2x50,
2x60, 2x75, 2x100, 2x150, 2x200, 2x250, 2x300
Secondary current 5A , 1A
Accuracy classes, output 0,2-0,2S 2,5-30VA
0,5, 0,5S 2,5-45VA
1 2,5-60VA
5P 2,5-60VA
10P 2,5-60VA
Number of cores 1,2 ill.3
Insulation class B
Dimension (lxwxh mm) 375x148x220
Mass (kg) ~22
DFM-12
Voltage transfoermer for indoor application designed in accodance with the
prescriptions of the DIN 42600-9 standard.
General Description
The support type voltage transformer, consists of primary (medium voltage) and secondrary (low voltage)
windings, built concentrically on a fully epoxy resin embedded link type core, produced of cold rolled grain
oriented electrical steel is manufactured in single pole design on a coated metal baseplate. The windings and
the terminals are made of copper.
The voltage transformer is suitable for indoor application for rated primary voltages from 3 kV to 10 kV, that
is for maximum system voltages from 3,6 kV to 12 kV.
For supplying protective relays or other appliances. The secondary winding can be for measurement
purposes, protective (for relays) or for produce residual voltages (earth fault signaling) or the combination of
these. The accuracy classes for measuremant can be 0,2, 0,5, 1 or 3, for protection 3P, 6P and for the winding
for residual residual voltages 6P, and the instrument can be made with 1,2 or 3 secondary circles.
The voltage transformer is designed and manufactured to comply with the requirements of the
effective Hungarian Standards MSZ EN 61869-1, -3 and EN 61869-1 ,3 , the previous MSZ EN
60044-2, IEC 186 and also with the DIN 42600-9. On the basis of common agreement ist is also
possible to manufacture according to other standards different from the aforementioned.
Packing, delivery
The current transformer is delivered in a finish suitable for use under normal climatic conditions, paccked in
corrugated paper. boxes upon common agreement the delivery can be made in finish and packing suitable for
the requsted climatic zone.
Installation, operation
The voltage transformer can be installed by means of 4 pcs M10 bolts. The connection to the terminal of the
primary winding can be accomplished by an M10 bolt. The earth terminal of the primary coil is located next
to the secondary terminals and to this the connection can be made by a wire with cable lug, sized for M5
bolt.
The size of the bolt used for the connection of the protective earthing is M8 and it is located on the side
opposite to the secondary terminals. If necessary the ends of the secondary windings, marked with „n” can be
earthed to the baseplate by an M5 bolt.
The plastic ratingplate is located above the secondary terminals and it contains the marking of the terminals
as well. The secondary terminals are provided with a sealable plastic cover.
All the bolts and washers are coated. The earthing of the voltage transformer is obligatory. The earthing of
the secondary windings must be accomplished in accordance with the effective local requirements.
Operation is possible keeping the prescriptions of the relevant security – labour – and property - protection
directives. Any faults and breakdowns emerging in the costumers spmere of interest due to breaching,
disobeying the aforementioned, exemt the manufacturer from the warranty and quarantee lialibities.
Maintenance
The maintenance consists of works to be done according to the general rules for maintenance of indoor
instrument and equipments these are:
− periodical inspection of contamination
− cleaning depending on the degree of impurity
− inspection of the surfaces
− tightening the bolts of the primary and secondry connections
− tightening the fastening and the earthing bolts.
State verification
The secondary windings of the current transformers in class 0,2, 05, are namufactured in finish suitable for
verification. The verification will be made only on special request. In this case it will be accomplished and
documented by an official seal or an affixed verification stamp by the state office for measurement.
Data to be supplied with the order

− type
− rated insulation level
− rated primary and secondary voltages
− number, accuracy class, output of the secondary windings
− voltage factor
− quantity
− requested term of delivery
Other or special requirements

− tedclimate zone of use other than normal
− language of the rating plate
− packing
− number of pieces and sort of the documentation requested
Warranty period, guarantee

The warranty period is 12 months. Upon mutual agreement of the parties it can be otherwise established.
Technical data
Rated voltage (network) 3 kV 6 kV 10 kV

Highest voltage for equipment 3,6 kV 7,2 kV 12 kV
Rated primary voltage 3000/√3-11500/√3
Rated secondary voltage 100/√3, 110/√3
Power frequency withstand voltage(r.m.s.) 10 kV 20 kV 28 kV
Lightning impulse withstand voltage (peak) 40 kV 60 kV 75 kV
Accuracy class measurements 0,2, 0,5, 1
protection 3P, 6P
Winding to produce residual voltage ( earth fault
signaling rated voltage 100/3V 110/3V
output 25VA 30VA
accuracy class 6P
Power limit of the voltage transformer 400VA
Voltage factor 1,9Un/ for 8 hours operating time
Insulation class B
Number of circuits which can be verified 2
Dimensions (lxwxh mm) 375x148x220
Mass(kg) ~27
Rating Plate
− material: plastic
− dimensions: 01 x75 x 90 mm
− markings: printed
Accuracy classes of the different rated outputs
One circuit
Output VA 5 10 15 25 30 50 75 150 200

Accuracy class 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,2 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1
Two circuits
2. circuit Output VA
1. circuit 5 10 15 30 40 50 75 100
0,2 0,2 0,2 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1
5
0,2 0,2 0,2 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1
0,2 0,2 0,2 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1
10
0,2 0,2 0,2 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1
0,2 0,2 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1
15
0,2 0,2 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1
0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1
Output VA
30
0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1
0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1 1
40
0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1 1
0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1 1 1
50
0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
75
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
100
1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3
b a: accuracy class of the first circuit

a b: accuracy class of the second circuit
Maximal secondary loading current (Imax)
one circuit secondary voltage 100/√3 110/√3
1. circuit 7,00 6,30
1. circuit 3,50 3,20

two circuits
2. circuit 3,50 3,20

signaling circuit
secondary voltage 100/3 110/3
3. circuit 0,9 0,8

Preface
1
SIMATIC Distributed I/O System ET 200S
______________
Description
Brief instructions on
2
______________
commissioning ET 200S
SIMATIC
3
______________
Application planning
Distributed I/O System

4
ET 200S ______________
Installing
5
Operating Instructions
______________
Wiring and assembly
6
______________
Commissioning
7
______________
Functions
General technical
8
______________
specifications
A
______________
Order numbers
B
______________
Dimensional drawings
C
______________
Leakage resistance
D
______________
Interference-free operation
08/2008
A5E00515771-06
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The device/system may only be set up and used in conjunction with this documentation. Commissioning and
operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Within the context of the safety notes
in this documentation qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, ground and
label devices, systems and circuits in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG A5E00515771-06 Copyright © Siemens AG 2008.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 09/2008 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface
Purpose of the operating instructions

The information in these operating instructions is intended to enable you to operate the
ET 200S Distributed I/O System:
● on the PROFIBUS DP as DP Slave
● as a PROFINET IO device on PROFINET
Required level of knowledge

To understand these operating instructions, you should have general experience in the field
of automation engineering.
Scope of these operating instructions

These operating instructions are valid for the components of the ET 200S Distributed I/O
System.
These operating instructions contain a description of the components which were valid at the
time the manual was published. We reserve the right to enclose a product information
bulletin containing up-to-date information regarding new components and new versions of
components.
Standards and approvals

In Chapter General technical data, you will find information about standards, certificates and
approvals (Page 127)
ET 200S
Operating Instructions, 08/2008, A5E00515771-06 3
Preface
Position in the information landscape

The following manuals are available for ET 200S:
Manual
ET 200S Distributed I/O System Operating Instructions (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1144348)
ET 200S Distributed I/O System Manuals:
• IM 151-1 Interface Modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805259/133000)
• IM 151-3 PN Interface Modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19241998/133000)
• Interface Modules with Integrated CPU (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805260/133000)
• PM-E Power Modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805261/133000)
• Reserve Modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/14902665/133000)
• Digital Electronic Modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805262/133000)
• Analog Electronic Modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805263/133000)
Fail-Safe Modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/12461959/133000)
IO-Link Modules and Sensors (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/29773950/133300)
IQ-Sense Modules and Sensors (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805264/133000)
Technology modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805265/133000)
Terminal Modules for Power and Electronic Modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/10805266/133000)
Motor Starters and Frequency Converters (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/18687280/133000)
Safety Motor Starters and Fail-Safe Frequency Converters
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/18687280/133000)
PROFINET System Description (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19292127)
From PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930)
ET 200S IM151-7 CPU Interface Module (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/12714722) and Operation
List
ET 200S 1 SI Serial Interface Modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/9260793)
Weighing Technology for the ET 200S
• SIWAREX CS (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19250865)
• SIWAREX CF (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/21320470)
ET 200S
4 Operating Instructions, 08/2008, A5E00515771-06
Preface
Guide
The operating instructions contain the following guides which provide quick access to the
specific information you need:
● You will find a table of contents and a list of tables and figures in the document at the
beginning of the operating instructions.
● The chapters contain subheadings that provide an overview of the content of the section.
● Following the appendix, you will find a glossary in which important technical terms used in
the operating instructions are defined.
● At the end of the operating instructions, there is a comprehensive index enabling rapid
access to the information you are looking for.
Other manuals
In addition to these operating instructions, you also need the manual for your DP master or
PROFINET IO Controller and the manuals for the modules you are using.
Recycling and disposal

Thanks to the fact that it is low in contaminants, the ET 200S is recyclable. For
environmentally compliant recycling and disposal of your electronic waste, please contact a
company certified for the disposal of electronic waste.
Information on the Internet

You can find information on the Internet on the following topics:
● Contacts (http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner) for SIMATIC
● Contacts for SIMATIC NET (http://www.siemens.com/simatic-net)
● Training (http://www.sitrain.com)
See also
Order numbers for ET 200S network components (Page 138)
Technical Support, Contacts and
Training (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19293011)
ET 200S
Preface
ET 200S
Table of contents
Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Description............................................................................................................................................... 11
1.1 What are distributed I/O systems?...............................................................................................11
1.2 What is PROFINET IO? ...............................................................................................................13
1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system? ..............................................................................14
2 Brief instructions on commissioning ET 200S .......................................................................................... 21
2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP..............................................................................................21
2.1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................21
2.1.2 Install the ET 200S.......................................................................................................................23
2.1.3 Wiring and assembling ET 200S..................................................................................................24
2.1.4 Configuring ET 200S in the SIMATIC manager...........................................................................25
2.1.5 Creating a user program ..............................................................................................................26
2.1.6 Switching on ET 200S..................................................................................................................26
2.1.7 Evaluating diagnostic messages..................................................................................................27
2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO ...............................................................................................30
2.2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................30
2.2.2 Installing and wiring ET 200S ......................................................................................................32
2.2.3 Configuring ET 200S in the SIMATIC manager...........................................................................34
2.2.4 Assigning device names for the IO device...................................................................................35
2.2.5 Creating a user program ..............................................................................................................36
2.2.6 Switching on ET 200S..................................................................................................................36
3 Application planning................................................................................................................................. 41
3.1 Switching on the ET 200S............................................................................................................41
3.2 Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system .................................................................................42
3.3 Limitation of connectable modules/maximum configuration ........................................................43
3.4 Application of power modules ......................................................................................................45
3.4.1 Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential............................................45
3.4.2 Example of a configuration: Terminal modules for power modules.............................................47
3.4.3 Finding the correct power module for an I/O device ....................................................................49
ET 200S
Table of contents
4 Installing .................................................................................................................................................. 51
4.1 Basic principles of installation ..................................................................................................... 51
4.2 Installing the interface module .................................................................................................... 54
4.3 Installing the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules......................................................................... 55
4.4 Installing the terminal modules TM-C for COMPACT modules .................................................. 57
4.5 Installing add-on terminals .......................................................................................................... 59
4.6 Removing/installing pluggable bridges on the additional terminal .............................................. 63
4.7 Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module.................................................................... 64
4.8 Installing the bus terminating module ......................................................................................... 66
4.9 Installing the shield contact ......................................................................................................... 67
4.10 Applying slot number labels and color identification labels......................................................... 69
4.11 Mounting Color Identification Labels for ET 200S and ET 200S COMPACT ............................. 71
5 Wiring and assembly ............................................................................................................................... 73
5.1 General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S .......................................................... 73
5.2 Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply ............................................................ 75
5.3 Electrical configuration of the ET 200S....................................................................................... 78
5.4 Wiring the ET 200S ..................................................................................................................... 79
5.4.1 Wiring rules for the ET 200S ....................................................................................................... 79
5.4.2 Wiring a terminal module with screw-type terminals................................................................... 79
5.4.3 Wiring a Terminal Module with Spring Terminals ....................................................................... 80
5.4.4 Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect................................................................................ 81
5.4.5 Wiring terminal modules.............................................................................................................. 84
5.4.6 Wiring an interface module with PROFIBUS DP interface (electrically) ..................................... 87
5.4.7 Wiring an interface module with PROFIBUS DP interface (optically) ......................................... 88
5.4.8 Wiring an interface module with PROFINET IO interface (electrically) ...................................... 92
5.4.9 Wiring the power supply.............................................................................................................. 94
5.5 Plugging and removing electronic modules and COMPACT modules ....................................... 95
5.5.1 Plug and label electronic or COMPACT modules ....................................................................... 95
5.5.2 Removing and inserting modules during operation .................................................................... 99
6 Commissioning ...................................................................................................................................... 101
6.1 Safety tests prior to commissioning .......................................................................................... 101
6.2 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP ........................................................................................... 102
6.2.1 Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP .................................................................................. 102
6.2.1.1 Basic principles of configuration for the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP ...................................... 102
6.2.1.2 Combining modules for configuration ....................................................................................... 103
6.2.1.3 Grouping of digital input modules ............................................................................................. 106
6.2.1.4 Grouping of digital output modules ........................................................................................... 107
6.2.1.5 Grouping of motor starters ........................................................................................................ 108
6.2.1.6 Example of a configuration........................................................................................................ 109
6.2.2 Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP..................................................... 111
6.2.2.1 Setting the PROFIBUS Address ............................................................................................... 111
6.2.2.2 Commissioning ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP ............................................................................ 113
6.2.2.3 Startup of the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP ............................................................................... 114
ET 200S
Table of contents
6.3 Commissioning on PROFINET IO .............................................................................................115

6.3.1 Configuring the ET 200S on the PROFINET IO ........................................................................115
6.3.2 Assigning device names to the I/O device.................................................................................116
6.3.3 Combing modules for the configuration .....................................................................................118
6.3.4 Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on the PROFINET IO .................................................120
7 Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 123
7.1 Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP ..................................................................................123
7.2 Option handling on the PROFIBUS DP .....................................................................................125
7.2.1 Basic principles of option handling on PROFIBUS DP..............................................................125
7.3 Identification data.......................................................................................................................126
8 General technical specifications ............................................................................................................ 127
8.1 Standards and approvals ...........................................................................................................127
8.2 Electromagnetic compatibility ....................................................................................................131
8.3 Transport and storage conditions ..............................................................................................132
8.4 Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions............................................................................133
8.5 Specifications concerning insulation tests, protection class, and rated voltage for ET 200S....135
8.6 Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter ...........136
8.7 Use of ET 200S in a zone 2 potentially explosive environments...............................................136
A Order numbers ...................................................................................................................................... 137
A.1 Order numbers for ET 200S accessories ..................................................................................137
A.2 Order numbers for ET 200S network components ....................................................................138
B Dimensional drawings............................................................................................................................ 139
B.1 Interface modules ......................................................................................................................139
B.2 Terminal module for COMPACT module with COMPACT module inserted..............................141
B.3 Terminal modules with an electronic module inserted...............................................................141
B.4 Terminating module ...................................................................................................................145
B.5 Shield contact.............................................................................................................................146
B.6 Additional terminal .....................................................................................................................146
C Leakage resistance................................................................................................................................ 147
C.1 Establishing the leakage resistance of an ET 200S station.......................................................147
D Interference-free operation .................................................................................................................... 149
D.1 Special Measures for Interference-Free Operation ...................................................................149
Glosary ................................................................................................................................................. 153
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 161
ET 200S
Table of contents
ET 200S
Description 1
1.1 What are distributed I/O systems?
Distributed I/O systems

When a system is configured the I/Os from and/or to the process are often integrated
centrally in the automation system.
Circuitry wiring that covers great distances between the I/O and the automation system may
become very complex and confusing. Electromagnetic interference can therefore impair
reliability.
Distributed I/O provides the ideal solution for such systems:
● The controller CPU is located centrally
● The I/O systems (inputs and outputs) operate decentrally on-site
● The high-performance PROFIBUS DP system provides high-speed data transmission for
reliable communication between the controller CPU and the I/O system
What is PROFIBUS DP?

PROFIBUS DP is an open bus system according to the standard IEC 61784-1:2002
Ed1 CP 3/1 with the "DP" protocol (DP = Distributed Periphery).
Physically, PROFIBUS DP is either an electrical network based on a shielded two-wire line
or an optical network based on a fiber-optic cable.
The "DP" is a high-speed protocol for cyclic data exchange between the controller CPU and
the distributed I/O systems.
What is a DP master and what are DP slaves?

The DP master links the controller CPU with the distributed I/O systems. The DP master
exchanges data with the distributed I/O systems via PROFIBUS DP. It also monitors the
PROFIBUS DP.
The distributed I/O systems (= DP slaves) prepare the encoder and actuator data on site in
such a way that it can be transmitted via the PROFIBUS DP to the controller CPU.
Which devices can be connected to PROFIBUS DP?

PROFIBUS DP supports a wide variety of devices for operation such as DP master or DP
slave, provided they operate in compliance with the standard IEC61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
These include devices from the following product families:
● SIMATIC S7/C7
● SIMATIC PD/PC
● SIMATIC HMI (control and monitoring devices OP, OS, TD)
● Devices from other vendors
ET 200S
Description
1.1 What are distributed I/O systems?
Structure of a PROFIBUS DP network

The figure below illustrates a typical PROFIBUS DP network structure. The DP master is
integrated in the respective device. For example, the S7-400 is equipped with a
PROFIBUS DP interface. The DP slaves are the distributed I/O systems that are linked with
the DP masters via the PROFIBUS DP.
6 6 3*3& '3PDVWHU
352),%86'3
'3VODYHV
(7SUR (70 2326
(76
'ULYH 6 '3$6,/,1. 2WKHUILHOGGHYLFHV
Figure 1-1 The typical structure of a PROFIBUS DP network
ET 200S
Description
1.2 What is PROFINET IO?
1.2 What is PROFINET IO?
Definition
PROFINET IO is an open transmission system with real-time functionality defined in
accordance with the PROFINET standard. This standard defines a manufacturer-
independent communication, automation and engineering model.
Accessories for wiring the PROFINET components are available in industrial quality.
● PROFINET does not deploy the hierarchical PROFIBUS master/slave principle.
A provider/consumer principle is used instead. The planning process specifies which
modules of an IO device will be subscribed to by an IO controller.
● The quantities are extended in accordance with the options offered by the PROFINET IO.
Parameter limits are not exceeded during configuration.
● The transmission rate is 100 Mbps.
● The user's configuration interface is generally the same as that on PROFIBUS DP
(configuration in STEP 7 → HW CONFIG).
Structure of a PROFINET IO network

The figure below illustrates the typical layout of a PROFINET IO network. Existing
PROFIBUS slaves can be integrated by using an IE/PB link.
,2FRQWUROOHU ,2GHYLFH ,2GHYLFH

6 (76 (76 23 3*
6ZLWFK 6ZLWFK 6ZLWFK
,(3%
/LQN
352),1(7,2
352),%86'3 0D[P ,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW
Figure 1-2 Typical structure of a PROFINET IO network
Further information about structuring a PROFINET IO network is available in the PROFINET

System Description system manual.
ET 200S
Description
1.3 What is the ET 200S distributed I/O system?
Definition
The ET 200S distributed I/O system is a discretely modular, highly flexible DP slave for
connection to process signals on a central controller or a field bus. ET 200S supports field
bus types PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET IO. ET 200S has protection class IP 20.
Applications
You can connect virtually any number of I/O modules in virtually any combination right next
to the interface module that transfers the data to the central controller. You can thus set the
focus of your configuration on local requirements.
Depending on the interface module, each ET 200S can consist of up to 63 modules - for
example, power modules, I/O modules, and motor starters.
The fact that motor starters can be integrated (switching and protecting any three-phase load
up to 7.5 kW) ensures that the ET 200S can be quickly adapted to suit virtually any process-
related use of your machine.
The fail-safe modules of the ET 200S ensure the fail-safe reading and output of data to
safety category 4 (EN 954-1).
Terminal modules and electronic modules

The ET 200S distributed I/O system is
● Connected to PROFIBUS DP by a cable connector for PROFIBUS DP at the IM151-1 or
IM151-1 COMPACT interface module and
● Connected to PROFINET IO by a cable connector for PROFINET IO at the IM151-3
interface module.
Every ET 200S peripheral system is
● A DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP, or
● An IO device on the PROFINET IO.
ET 200S
Description
View
The figure below shows an example configuration of an ET 200S.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
IPM25 FSA
10 9
8
① ET 200S IM151-1 interface module
② PM-E power module for electronic modules
③ Electronic modules
④ PM-D power module for motor starters
⑤ Direct starter
⑥ Frequency converter
⑦ Terminating module
⑧ Power bus
⑨ TM-E terminal modules for electronic modules
⑩ TM-P terminal modules for power modules
ET 200S
Description
ET 200S components
The following table provides you with an overview of the most important components of the
ET 200S:
Table 1- 1 ET 200S components
Components Function View

Mounting rail according to ... ...carries the ET 200S. You mount
EN 60715 the ET 200S on the rail.
Interface module ... ...connects the ET 200S with the with RS485 interface:
• IM151-1 BASIC DP master and prepares the data for
the electronic modules and motor
• IM151-1 STANDARD
starters.
• IM151-1 HIGH
FEATURE
• IM151-1 FO with fiber-optic interface:

STANDARD
COMPACTModule ... ...connects the ET 200S with the with RS485 interface:
• IM151-1 COMPACT DP master and prepares the data for
32DI DC24V the integrated periphery as well as for
• IM151-1 COMPACT any electronic modules and motor
16DI/16DO starters.
24 VDC/0.5 A
ET 200S
Description

Terminal module for ... ...carries the wiring and
COMPACT modules accommodates COMPACT modules.
Terminal modules for COMPACT
modules are available in the following
versions:
• With screw-type terminal
• With spring-loaded terminal
Terminal module for ... ...provides the electrical and

power and electronic mechanical connection to the ET
modules 200S module.
Terminal modules versions available:
• For power modules
• For electronic modules
• With Fast Connect (quick
connection method, no stripping
required)
Add-on terminal for ... ...extends the terminal block and

• Terminal module for enables the connection of sensors /
COMPACT modules actuators for the individual channels
• Any terminal modules in 3 or 4 conductor technology
with a width of 120 Additional terminals are available in
mm the following variants:
Power module ... Monitors the voltage for all the

electronic modules in the potential
group. The following power modules
are available:
• For a 24 VDC supply with
diagnostics
• For a 24 to 48 VDC supply with
diagnostics
• For a 24 to 48 VDC, 24 to
230 VAC supply with diagnostics
and fuse
ET 200S
Description

Electronic module ... ...is inserted onto the terminal
module and determines the function:
• Digital output modules with
24 VDC, 120 /230 VAC and
NAMUR
• Digital output modules with
24 VDC and 120/230 VAC
• Relay modules
• Analog input modules with
voltage, current, and resistance
measurement, thermoresistor and
thermocouple elements
• Analog output modules for voltage
and current
• Technology modules
• Weighing modules SIWAREX CS
and SIWAREX CF
• Fail-safe modules
• RESERVE modules
Terminating module ... ...terminates the ET 200S and can
be used to carry 6 reserve fuses (5
mm x 20 mm).
Shield contact ... ...is a pluggable mount for 3 x 10

mm standard power busbars and
enables a low-impedance cable
shielding to be applied with minimal
installation time.
Labeling sheet ... ...for machine labeling or printing

(DIN A4, perforated, foil) • 80 strips per labeling sheet for
interface modules and electronic
modules
• 10 strips per labeling sheet for
COMPACT modules
Slot number plates ... ...used to identify the slots of the

terminal module.
62
63
1
ET 200S
Description

Color-coded labels ... ...allow customer/country specific
identification of the terminals on the
terminal module
PROFIBUS cable with ... ...combines nodes of a PROFIBUS

bus terminal connector DP configuration with each other.
Fiber-optic duplex cable ... ...combines nodes of a PROFIBUS

with simplex plug DP configuration with each other.
(in the plug adaptor for
IM151- 1 FO
STANDARD)
Interface module ... ...connects the ET 200S with With 2 PROFINET interfaces:
• IM151-3 PN PROFINET IO controllers and
prepares the data for the electronic
• IM151-3 PN HIGH
FEATURE modules and motor starters.
PROFINET connector as ... ...connects nodes of a

per the specifications in PROFINET IO configuration with one
the PROFINET another.
Installation Guide and
Industrial Ethernet FC
installation lines
Characteristics and advantages of the ET 200S

The table below presents the properties and benefits of ET 200S.
Table 1- 2 Characteristics and advantages of the ET 200S
Properties Advantages
About the structure
Discretely modular design • Function-oriented, cost-optimized station
• 1-, 2-, 4- and 8-channel electronic modules design
• Power modules • Significant reduction of cost and effort for
configuration and documentation
• Integrated motor starters
• Space saving due to the ability to string
• 32-channel COMPACT modules modules together in random order
Extensive range of electronic modules Broad area of application
ET 200S
Description
Properties Advantages
ET 200S FC frequency converter • Speed control
• Fail-safe technology: Safe braking ramp, safe
speed reduction
• Regeneration into grid when motor in
generator mode
• No grid commutation reactor required
Communication-capable, system-integrated PLC inputs and outputs, terminal blocks, circuit
motor starters: Direct and reversing starter up to breakers and contactors in a plug-in module save
7.5 kW space and the effort involved in wiring
Permanent wiring due to the separation of • Prewiring possible
mechanical and electronic components • Module replacement during operation of the
ET 200S ("hot swapping")
Individual connection of power modules to • Individual formation of potential groups
common potential (identifiable by color coding of the TM-P
terminal modules for power modules)
• Simple load interruption
Robust structure for rough industrial conditions (5 High operating reliability when mounted directly
g vibration resistance) on the machine, high availability
Connection system
Integrated voltage buses Reduced effort required for wiring
Power bus up to 50 A for motor starters Minimization of wiring in 400 V range
Screw-type terminals, spring-loaded terminals, A change in terminal connection method is not
and Fast Connect necessary
• 2- and 3-conductor connection or Optimal selection in terms of space and cost
• 2-, 3- and 4-conductor connection
Fast Connect • Connection method with no stripping required
• Time saving during wiring
Replaceable terminal box in the terminal module No need to remove the terminal module in the
event of terminal damage
Automatic coding of the I/O modules Quick and reliable module replacement
Large label plate Adequate space for clear labeling
High data transmission speed of up to 12 Mbps Short response times
on PROFIBUS DP and 100 Mbps on
PROFINET IO
Integrated safety functions Savings on time-consuming safety engineering
For motor starters up to safety category
4 according to EN 954-1
Fail-safe modules For acquiring and outputting fail-safe signals via
PROFINET (PROFIsafe) up to SIL3 in
accordance with IEC 61508, Category 4 in
accordance with EN 954-1, and Performance
Level e in accordance with ISO 13849.
ET 200S
Brief instructions on commissioning ET 200S 2
2.1 Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
2.1.1 Introduction
Introduction
The following simple examples will teach you how to commission the ET 200S on the
PROFIBUS DP step by step:
● ET 200S installation and wiring up
● Configuring ET 200S in the SIMATIC manager
● Creating a user program
● Switching on ET 200S
● Evaluating diagnostic messages:
– Removing and inserting of modules
– Switching off the load voltage on the power module
– Wire break in the actuator wiring on the digital output module
Requirements
● You have set up an S7 station consisting of a power supply component and a DP master
(e.g. CPU 315-2 DP). For this example a CPU 315-2 DP is used as the DP master. You
can of course use any other DP master (standard IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1).
● STEP 7 (V5.0 with ServicePack 3 or higher) is installed on your programming device. You
know how to work with STEP 7.
● The PD must be connected to the DP master.
ET 200S
Brief instructions on commissioning ET 200S
Components required
The figure below shows which ET 200S components you require for the sample on the
PROFIBUS DP:
6ORW
30 ', ', ', ', 30 '2 '2 '2 '2
,0

5DLO
7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH
[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG
'2'&9$+LJK)HDWXUH
HOHFWURQLFPRGXOH
7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG
30('&9SRZHUPRGXOH
[70(1$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG','&9
+LJK)HDWXUHHOHFWURQLFPRGXOH
7031$WHUPLQDOPRGXOHDQG30('&9SRZHUPRGXOH
,067$1'$5'LQWHUIDFHPRGXOH
352),%86EXVFRQQHFWRU
Figure 2-1 Components for the sample on the PROFIBUS DP
Order numbers for the sample configuration on the PROFIBUS DP
Quantity Ordering data Order No.:

1× Standard mounting rail 35 mm ( length = 483 mm, for example) 6ES5710-8MA11
1× IM151-1 STANDARD interface module and terminating module 1 piece 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0
2× Fast Connect terminal module TM-P15N23-A1, 1 piece 6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0
2× Fast Connect terminal module TM-E15N24-A1, 5 pieces 6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0
2× PM-E DC24V, 1 piece 6ES7138-4CA01-0AB0
1× 2DI DC24V HF, 5 pieces 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0
1× 2DO DC24V/0,5A HF, 5 pieces 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0
1× Bus connector 6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0
ET 200S
2.1.2 Install the ET 200S
Proceed as follows
1. Install the DIN rail (35 x 7.5 mm or 15 mm) with a length of at least 210 mm on a solid
surface.
2. Mount the various modules onto the rail, starting on the left side (hang in - swivel down -
slide to left.) Follow the following sequence:
– Interface module IM151-1 STANDARD
– TM-P15N23-A1 terminal module
– 4 x TM-E15N24-A1 terminal module
– Terminating module
3. Set PROFIBUS address 3 on the IM 151-1 STANDARD interface module.
2)) 21

Figure 2-2 Setting PROFIBUS address 3
* Intended for use with future add ins. Switch must be in OFF position.
ET 200S
2.1.3 Wiring and assembling ET 200S
Proceed as follows
1. Wire the ET 200S as shown below:
$8; $8;

/ 0

$ $

1 2 3
① 24 VDC electronic power supply
② 24 VDC sensor supply voltage group 1
③ 24 VDC load supply voltage group 2
1. Use the PROFIBUS bus connector to connect the DP master with the ET 200S. The
PROFIBUS DP interface is located on the IM 151-1 STANDARD.
2. Insert the power and electronic modules into the terminal modules.
3. Switch on the supply voltage for the DP master.
4. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master.
CPU 315-2 DP:
– 5 VDC → lights up
– SF DP → off
– BUSF → off
ET 200S
2.1.4 Configuring ET 200S in the SIMATIC manager
Proceed as follows
1. Start SIMATIC Manager, and create a new project with a DP master
(e. g., CPU315-2 DP). Create OB 1, OB 82 and OB 122 for the project.
2. Create the PROFIBUS subnet.
3. Connect the PROFIBUS subnet with the DP master in HW Config.
4. Take the ET 200S from the hardware catalog and put it on the PROFIBUS.
5. Set the PROFIBUS address 3 for the ET200S.
6. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog to the configuration
table.
7. Mark the electronic modules in the configuration table, and click the "Pack addresses"
button.
Table 2- 1 Configuration table in HW Config for PROFIBUS DP
Module/ Order No.: I address Q address Comment

DP identification
1 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V Power module
2 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V 0 Bytes 0.0 and 0.1
3 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V Bytes 0.2 and 0.3
4 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V Bytes 0.4 and 0.5
5 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V Byte 0.6 and 0.7
7 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V 0 Bytes 0.0 and 0.1
8 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V Bytes 0.2 and 0.3
9 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V Bytes 0.4 and 0.5
10 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V Byte 0.6 and 0.7
1. Set the following parameters:
– In the DP slave properties dialog box for ET 200S:
Startup for set- <> actual configuration: enable
– In the DP slave properties dialog box for the PM-E DC24V, Module/DP ID 1 (in the
configuration table)
Diagnostics: Missing load voltage
– In the DP slave properties dialog box for the 2 DO DC24V, Module/DP ID 7 (in the
Diagnostics: Wire break A0
2. Save the configuration.
ET 200S
2.1.5 Creating a user program
Proceed as follows
1. Create the user program in the LAD/STL/FBD editor in OB 1.
Example 1: Reading an input and triggering an output:
STL
U I 0.0 If input byte 0.0 and
U M 2.0 memory bit 2.0 is set, then
S O 0.0 set output byte 0.0
Example 2: Transferring an input byte to an output byte:
STL
L PEB 0 Load I/O input byte 0 in the accumulator
(bytes 0.0 to 0.7)
T PAB 0 Transfer the accumulator content to
I/O output byte 0 (bytes 0.0 to 0.7)
1. Save the project in SIMATIC Manager.

2. Download the configuration to the DP master.
2.1.6 Switching on ET 200S
Proceed as follows
1. Switch on all the power supplies on the ET 200S.
2. Observe the status LEDs on the DP master and ET 200S.
– CPU 315-2 DP:
DC 5V: lights up
SF DP: off
BUSF: off
– ET 200S:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lights up
ET 200S
2.1.7 Evaluating diagnostic messages
Introduction
In this example, you generate diagnostic messages by provoking errors on the ET 200S. In
the event of an error, OB 82 is started. You evaluate the start information in OB 82.
Tip: Call SFC13 in OB 82, and evaluate the diagnostic frame.
Removing and inserting the 2 DI DC24V HF digital electronic module

1. Remove the 2 DI DC24V HF electronic module from the terminal module during
operation.
2. Observe the status LEDs on the IM 151-1 STANDARD:
– SF: lights up → there is a diagnostic message.
– BF: off
– ON: lights up
Result: The ET 200S continues to run error-free.
3. Evaluate the diagnostic information:
Result:
– Station status 1 (byte 0): Bit 3 is set → external diagnostics
– ID-related diagnostics: Byte 7.1 is set → slot 2
– Module status: bytes 19.2 / 19.3: 11B → no module
4. Reinsert the removed electronic module into the terminal module.
Result:
– Status LED on the IM 151-1 STANDARD:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lights up
– The diagnostic message is deleted.
ET 200S
Switching off load voltage on the power module

1. Switch off the load voltage on the PM-E DC24V (slot 1).
2. Monitor the status LEDs.
IM151-1 STANDARD:
– SF: lights up
Power module:
– PWR: off → no load voltage available on the power module
I/O modules in the voltage group:
– LEDs: light up
3. Evaluate the diagnostics.
Result:
– Channel-specific diagnostics:
Bytes 35.0 to 35.5: 000000B → slot 1
Bytes 37.0 to 37.4: 10001B → sensor or load voltage missing
4. Switch on the load voltage back on the power module and re-evaluate the diagnostics.
Result:
SF: off
– Status LEDs on power module:
PWR: on
SF: off
– Status LEDs on I/O modules:
LEDs: off
ET 200S
Simulating a wire break in the actuator wiring

1. Remove the cable from terminal 1 on the 2DO DC24V/0.5A HF electronic module (slot 7)
2. Monitor the status LEDs:
IM151-1 STANDARD:
– SF: lights up
Electronic module 2DO DC24V/0.5A HF:
– SF: lights up → there is a diagnostic message
– 1: off → output is not activated
3. Evaluate the diagnostic information:
Result:
– Channel-specific diagnostics:
Bytes 35.0 to 35.5: 000110B → slot 7
Bytes 36.0 to 35.5: 000000B → channel 0
Bytes 37.0 to 37.4: 00110B → wire break
4. Reattach the cable to the actuator in terminal 1 and reevaluate the diagnostics:
SF: off
– Status LEDs electronic module 2DO DC24V/0.5 A HF:
SF: off
1: off/on
ET 200S
2.2 Commissioning on PROFINET IO
2.2.1 Introduction
Introduction
The following simple example teaches you step by step how to commission the ET 200S on
PROFINET IO:
● Installing and wiring ET 200S
● Configuring in HW Config or with the GSDML file
● Transferring device names to the IO device
● Integrating into the user program
● Switching the ET 200S on
● Evaluating the interrupts and diagnostics:
– Removing and inserting of modules
– Switching off the load voltage on the power module
– Wire break in the actuator wiring on the digital output module
Requirements
● You have set up an S7 station consisting of a power supply module and an IO controller
(e.g., CPU 317-2 PN/DP). In this example a CPU 317-2 PN/DP is used as the IO
controller with firmware version V2.3 and higher.
● STEP 7 V 5.3 + ServicePack 1 or higher is installed on your programming device. You
know how to work with STEP 7.
● The programming device connected to the PROFINET IO.
ET 200S
Components required
The figure below shows which ET 200S components you require for the example on the
PROFINET IO:
6ORW
30 ', ', ', ', 30 '2 '2 '2 '2
,0
31
0RXQWLQJUDLO
7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH
[7HUPLQDOPRGXOH70(1$DQG
HOHFWURQLFPRGXOH'2'&9$+)
7HUPLQDOPRGXOH7031$
DQGSRZHUPRGXOH30('&9
[7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH70(1$DQG
HOHFWURQLFPRGXOH','&9+)
7HUPLQDO0RGXOH7031$DQGSRZHUPRGXOH30('&9
,0b31LQWHUIDFHPRGXOH
,QGXVWULDO(WKHUQHW)&LQVWDOODWLRQFDEOHZLWK352),1(7FRQQHFWRU
Figure 2-3 Components for the example on PROFINET IO
ET 200S
Order numbers for the example on PROFINET IO
Quantity Ordering data Order number

1× Standard mounting rail 35 mm (length = 483 mm, for example) 6ES5710-8MA11
1× IM151-3 PN interface module and terminating module,1 unit 6ES7151-3AA20-0AB0
1× SIMATIC Micro Memory Card (e.g. 64k) 6ES7953-8LF11-0AA0
2× Fast Connect terminal module TM-P15N23-A1, 1 unit 6ES7193-4CC70-0AA0
2× Fast Connect terminal module TM-E15N24-A1, 5 units 6ES7193-4CA70-0AA0
2× PM-E DC24V, 1 piece 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0
1× 2DI DC24V HF, 5 pieces 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0
1× 2DO DC24V/0,5A HF, 5 pieces 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0
PROFINET connector (according to the specifications in the PROFINET
Installation Guide)
Appropriate installation cables:
• FC Standard Cable 6XV1 840-2AH10
• FC Trailing Cable 6XV1 840-3AH10
• FC Marine Cable 6XV1 840-4AH10
2.2.2 Installing and wiring ET 200S
Installing the DIN rail

1. Install the DIN rail (35 x 7.5 mm or 15 mm, length = at least 210 mm) on a solid surface.
2. Start from the left with the installation of the individual modules on the DIN rail
(hook in - swivel in - slide to left). Follow the following sequence:
– Interface module IM151-3 PN
– Terminating module
ET 200S
Wiring and assembling ET 200S

1. Wire the ET 200S as shown below:
$8; $8;
/ 0

$ $

1
2 3
① 24 VDC electronic power supply
② 24 VDC sensor supply potential group 1
③ 24 VDC load supply potential group 2
1. Use the PROFINET connector to connect the ET 200S (IO device) to the IO controller via
a switch. The PROFINET interface is located on the IM 151-3 PN interface module.
2. Insert the power and electronic modules into the terminal modules.
3. Switch on the power supply for the IO controller.
4. Observe the status LEDs on the IO controller.
CPU 317-2 PN/DP:
– DC 5V → lights up
– SF → off
– BF2 → off
ET 200S
2.2.3 Configuring ET 200S in the SIMATIC manager
Proceed as follows
1. Start SIMATIC Manager and create a new project with an IO controller
(e g., CPU 317-2 PN/DP). For this project, create the OB 1, the OB 82, the OB 83 and the
OB 122.
2. Open the "Properties - Ethernet Interface" window in the HW Config and create a subnet
e. g. Ethernet (1).
3. Take the IM151-3 PN from the ET 200S catalog of the hardware catalog and insert it on
Ethernet(1):PROFINET IO System (100).
4. Drag the individual ET 200S modules from the hardware catalog to the configuration
table.
Table 2- 2 Configuration table in HW Config for PROFINET IO
Module Order No.: I address Q address Comment

0 6ES7151-3AA20-0AB0 IM151-3 PN
5 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V 3 Byte 3.0 and 3.1
10 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0 2DO DC24V 3 Byte 3.0 and 3.1
1. Set the following parameters:
– In the IO device properties dialog box for the PM-E DC24V, module 1 (in the
Diagnostics: Missing load voltage

– In the IO device properties dialog box for the 2 DO DC24V, Module 7 (in the
Diagnostics: Wire break A0

2. Compile and save the configuration.
ET 200S
2.2.4 Assigning device names for the IO device
Procedure
1. Insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 PN.
2. Switch on the power supply for the IM151-3 PN.
3. Open the "Properties - IM151-3 PN" window in HW Config and enter the device name for
the IO device there.
4. An online PROFINET connection from the programming device to the IO device via a
switch is required for in order to transfer the name to the IM151-3 PN interface module.
The device name is transferred to the IM151-3 PN using "PLC > Ethernet > Assign
Device Name". To do so, activate the "Assign name" button in the "Assign device name"
window. The device name is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3
PN interface module.
Once the name is assigned, it appears in the window.
Alternative procedure:
Alternatively, you can write directly to a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card using a programming
device with an EPROM programming device installed or a PC connected to a SIMATIC USB
EPROM programming device and then use the memory card to transfer the device name to
the IM151-3 PN.
1. Open the "Properties - IM151-3 PN" window in HW Config and enter the device name for
the IO device there.
2. Insert the required SIMATIC Micro Memory Card into the EPROM programming device.
3. Select the IM151-3 PN in HW Config.
4. Select "Target system > Save device name to memory card" in HW Config.
5. Insert the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card written with the device name in the IM151-3 PN.
The device name is transferred to the IM151-3 PN.
ET 200S
2.2.5 Creating a user program
Proceed as follows
1. Create the user program in the LAD/STL/FBD editor in OB 1.
Example 1: Reading an input and triggering an output:
STL
U I 0.0 If input byte 0.0 and
U M 2.0 memory bit 2.0 is set, then
S O 0.0 set output byte 0.0
Example 2: Transferring an input byte to an output byte:
STL
L PEB 0 Load I/O input byte 0 in the accumulator
(bytes 0.0 to 0.7)
T PAB 0 Transfer the accumulator content to
I/O output byte 0 (bytes 0.0 to 0.7)
1. Save the project in SIMATIC Manager.

2. Download the configuration to the IO controller.
2.2.6 Switching on ET 200S
Procedure
1. Switch on all the power supplies of the ET 200S.
2. Observe the status LEDs on the IO controller, ET 200S, and switch.
– CPU 317-2 PN/DP:
DC 5V: lights up
SF: off
BF2: off
LINK: lights up
– ET 200S:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lights up
LINK: lights up
– Switch:
LINK: lights up
ET 200S
Introduction
In this example, you generate alarms by provoking errors on the ET 200S.
In the event of an error, OB 83 is started. Evaluate the start information in OB 83.
Tip: Call up the SFB 52 within the OB 83 and evaluate the E002H diagnostic telegram.
Removing and inserting the 2 DI DC24V HF digital electronic module

1. Remove the 2 DI 24VDC HF electronic module from the terminal module
(e.g., from slot 2) during operation.
2. Monitor the status LEDs on the IM 151-3 PN interface module:
– BF: off
– ON: lights up
3. In the event of a remove interrupt the OB 83 is started. Start the SFB 52 in OB 83.
Evaluate the E002H diagnostic data record.
You can find information about evaluating the diagnostic data record E002H in the "From
PROFIBUS DP to PROFINET IO
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19289930)" programming manual in
the sections "Structure of the configuration data record W#16#E002" and "Blocks of the
diagnostics and configuration records".
Result:
– Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lights up
– Once the module is inserted, diagnostic data record E002H no longer indicates a
discrepancy between the preset and actual configurations for any slot.
ET 200S
Introduction
In this example, you generate diagnostic messages by provoking errors in the ET 200S.
In the event of an error, OB 83 or OB 82 is started. Evaluate the start information in OB 83.
Tip: Call up the SFB 52 within the OB 83 and evaluate the C00A H diagnostic telegram.
Removal/Insertion Interrupt
1. Remove the 2 DI 24VDC High Feature electronic module from the terminal module
(e.g., from slot 2) during operation.
2. Monitor the status LEDs on the IM 151-3 PN interface module:
– BF: off
– ON: lights up
3. In the event of a remove interrupt the OB 83 is started. Start SFB 52 in OB 1. Evaluate
the E002H diagnostic data record.
You can find information about evaluating the diagnostic data record E002H in the "From
the sections "Structure of the configuration data record W#16#E002" and "Blocks of the
diagnostics and configuration records".
Result:
– Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN interface module:
SF: off
BF: off
ON: lights up
– Once the module is inserted, diagnostic data record E002H no longer indicates a
discrepancy between the preset and actual configurations for any slot.
ET 200S
Switching off load voltage on the power module

1. Switch off the load voltage on the PM-E DC24V (slot 1).
2. Monitor the status LEDs.
IM151-3 PN:
– SF: lights up
Power module:
– PWR: off → no load voltage available on the power module
– SF: lights up → a diagnostic message is pending.
I/O modules in the voltage group:
– LEDs: light up
3. Evaluate diagnostic data record C00AH.
Tip: Call up the SFB 52 within the OB 1 or OB 82 and evaluate the diagnostic message.
You can find information about evaluating the diagnostic data record C00AH in the "From
the section "Structure of diagnostics data records".
4. Switch on the load voltage back on the power module and re-evaluate the diagnostics.
Result:
– Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN:
SF: off
– Status LEDs on power module:
PWR: on
SF: off
– Status LEDs on I/O modules:
LEDs: off
ET 200S
Simulating a wire break in the actuator wiring

1. Remove the cable from terminal 1 on the 2DO DC24V/0.5A HF electronic module (slot 7)
2. Monitor the status LEDs:
IM151-3 PN:
– SF: lights up
Electronic module 2DO DC24V/0.5A HF:
– 1: off → output is not activated
3. Evaluate diagnostic data record C00AH.
You can find information about evaluating the diagnostic data record C00AH in the "From
the section "Structure of diagnostics data records".
4. Reattach the cable to the actuator in terminal 1 and reevaluate the diagnostics:
– Status LEDs on the IM151-3 PN:
SF: off
– Status LEDs electronic module 2DO DC24V/0.5 A HF:
SF: off
1: off/on
ET 200S
Application planning 3
3.1 Switching on the ET 200S
Simply put your ET 200S together yourself. A configuration tool supports you in doing so.
You can find the tool on the Internet (www.siemens.com/et200).
Using power and electronic modules in terminal modules

Various signals are available on the terminals depending on which terminal module is
selected. For more detailed information, refer to the manual for the specific I/O module.
The TM-P and TM-E terminal modules are mixable in the ET 200S configuration.
Usage of COMPACT modules on terminal modules

Various signals are available on the terminals depending on which terminal module is
selected. For more detailed information, refer to the IM 151-1 COMPACT Modules manual.
The terminal module TM-C must always be connected at the start of an ET 200S
configuration. Additional terminal modules TM-E or TM-P are to be connected to the right of
terminal module TM-C.
ET 200S
3.2 Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system
3.2 Use of the ET 200S in a redundant system
Properties
The ET 200S is integrated in a redundant DP system as DPV0 or DPV1 slave via the Y
switching.
Requirements
DPV0 DPV1
• Possible with all interface modules • IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
• from STEP 7 V5.3 SP3 (from 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0)
• GSD file • from STEP 7 V5.3 SP3
5HGXQGDQW'3V\VWHP
5HGXQGDQW352),%86'3
</,1.
,0 <FRXSOHU
(70 (70
<VXEQHW
(76
Figure 3-1 ET 200S and Y switching
Procedure
1. Configuration of the redundant DP system (redundant DP master, PROFIBUS DP,
slaves)
2. Configure the ET 200S with STEP 7
Reference
For additional information see the documentation for the Y-connection (manual or product
information (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1142696)).
ET 200S
3.3 Limitation of connectable modules/maximum configuration
Number of modules
The following modules are available for the ET 200S: interface modules, power modules,
electronic modules, RESERVE modules, technology modules, motor starters, and frequency
converters.
The number of modules you can insert is dependent on the interface module you are using:
● Max. 12 modules with:
– IM151-1 BASIC
– IM151-1 COMPACT
● Max. 63 modules with:
– IM151-1 STANDARD
– IM151-1 FO STANDARD
– IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
– IM151-3 PN
– IM151-3 PN FO
– IM151-3 PN HIGH FEATURE
Bus length of the ET 200S

A maximum bus length of 2 m can be assigned for the ET 200S.
Deviations are noted in the properties of the interface modules.
Parameter length
● For PROFIBUS DP: Depending on the PROFIBUS DP master you are using
● For PROFINET IO: Not relevant for maximum configuration
Address space
● For PROFIBUS DP: Depending on the PROFIBUS DP master you are using
● For PROFINET IO: Not relevant
ET 200S
Maximum configuration per potential group

The number of modules that can be connected depends on the total current of all modules in
a potential group. This total current must not exceed the maximum current-carrying capacity
of the power modules or COMPACT modules you are using.
The total current is governed in large part by the digital output modules.
Table 3- 1 Maximum configuration per potential group
Power modules/ Maximum current-carrying capacity

COMPACT modules
Power Module PM-E DC24V 10 A
Power Module PM-E DC24..48V 10 A
Power Module PM-E DC24..48V/AC24..230V
• For 24 to 56.7 VDC 10 A
• For 24 to 48/120/230 VAC 8A
IM151-1 COMPACT 5 A, for I/O modules connected after the IM151-1

COMPACT
DP master 32-byte diagnostic message frame length

You can use the ET 200S with DP masters with a diagnostic frame length of 32 bytes
because you can set the length of the diagnostic frame in all the interface modules.
Reference
The relevant values can be found in the technical data for the respective modules.
ET 200S
3.4 Application of power modules
3.4.1 Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential
Placing and connecting to common potential

You can choose where to position the power modules in the ET 200S. Every TM-P terminal
module (for a power module) that you install in the ET 200S opens a new potential group. All
sensor and load supplies of the downstream electronic modules are fed from this TM-P
terminal module (for a power module). If you place an additional TM-P terminal module after
an electronic module/motor starter, you interrupt the potential buses (P1/P2) and
simultaneously open a new potential group. This enables sensor and load supplies to be
individually connected to common potential.
AUX(iliary) bus (AUX1)

A TM-P terminal module (for a power module) allows you to connect additional potential
(up to the maximum rated load voltage of the module), which you can apply by means of the
AUX(iliary) bus.
You can use the AUX(iliary) bus individually:
● As a protective conductor bar
● For additionally required voltage
The AUX1 bus is laid out as follows:
● Maximum current-carrying capacity (at 60°C ambient temperature): 10 A
● Permitted voltage: 230 VAC/DC
ET 200S
Placing power modules and connecting them to common potential
4 5 6
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
(0
1 2 2 2 3

7 8 7
9

① Interface module ⑧ Supply voltage 2

② Power module ⑨ Supply voltage 3
③ Terminating module ⑩ Protective conductor
④ Potential group 1 ⑪ Additionally required voltage
⑤ Potential group 2 ⑫ P1/P2 power buses
⑥ Potential group 3 ⑬ AUX1 bus
⑦ Supply voltage 1
WARNING
If you connect the AUX1 bus to common potential independently of the P1/P2 buses
(different voltages), there is no safe electrical separation (in accordance with EN 50178)
between the AUX1 bus and the P1/P2 buses.
Connecting different potentials to the AUX1 bus
Note
If you apply different potentials to the AUX1 bus within an ET 200S station, you must
separate the potential groups by means of a power module with the TM-P15S23-A0 terminal
module.
ET 200S
3.4.2 Example of a configuration: Terminal modules for power modules
Introduction
The following table shows how terminal modules for power modules can be used:
Table 3- 2 Terminal modules for power modules
Terminal module Structure

TM-P15S22-01
TM-P15C22-01 3RWHQWLDOJURXS 3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
TM-P15N22-01 3
3
30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0

$8;
TM-P15S23-A1
TM-P15C23-A1 3RWHQWLDOJURXS 3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
TM-P15N23-A1 3
3
30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0

$ $ $ $

$8;
$FFHVVYLD 3(
WHUPLQDOVRQ
$8;
ET 200S

TM-P15S23-A0
%DFNSODQHEXV
TM-P15N23-A0 3
3
30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0 (0 (0

$ $ $ $

$8;
$FFHVVYLD
WHUPLQDOVRQ
$8; 2SHQQHZSRWHQWLDOJURXSYLD$8;
TM-P30S44-A0
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
30 (0 30 (0

$ $ $ $

$8;
$FFHVVYLD
WHUPLQDOVWR$8;
2SHQQHZSRWHQWLDOJURXSYLD$8;
ET 200S

TM-PF30S47-F1
3RWHQWLDOJURXS 3RWHQWLDOJURXS
%DFNSODQHEXV
3
3
30 (0 30 (0

$8;
3.4.3 Finding the correct power module for an I/O device
Applicability of power modules

The following table describes which power modules you can use with the different I/O
modules:
Power modules I/O modules

PM-E DC24V Can be used for all electronic modules that require a maximum load voltage of 24 VDC.
PM-E DC24..48V Applicable
• Can be used for all electronic modules that require a maximum load voltage of 24 VDC.
• For UC electronic modules if the maximum load voltage is 48 VDC and AC is not
required.
PM-E DC24..48V/ Can be used with all electronic modules.
AC24..230V
PM-E F pm DC24V See "ET 200S Distributed I/O System - Fail-Safe Modules
PROFIsafe (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/12490437)" Manual, Chapter
PM-E F pp DC24V "Assigning Modules of an ET 200S"
PROFIsafe
PM-E F DC24V PROFIsafe
ET 200S
Power modules I/O modules

PM-D For motor starters and frequency converters.
See "ET 200S Motor Starters
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/6008567)" Manual or "Frequency
Converter ET 200S FC (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26291825)"
PM-D F For fail-safe applications with motor starter or frequency converter.
See "ET 200S Motor Starters
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/6008567)" Manual or "Frequency
Converter ET 200S FC (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/26291825)"
ET 200S
Installing 4
4.1 Basic principles of installation
WARNING
Open components
Modules of an ET 200S are open components. This means that you may only install the
ET 200S in cases, cabinets or electrical plant rooms where they will only be accessible with
a key or a tool. Only trained or authorized personnel are allowed access to such cubicles,
cabinets or electrical operating rooms.
Simple installation
The ET 200S distributed I/O system is designed for simple installation.
Installation rules
● The ET 200S distributed I/O system starts
– with an interface module or
– with a TM-C terminal module with COMPACT module.
● A power module comes after the interface module or at the beginning of each potential
group.
● After a power module come digital, analog, technological, or RESERVE modules.
● After a COMPACT module, digital, analog, technological, or RESERVE modules may
follow. If necessary, power modules may also be deployed.
● The ET 200S distributed I/O system ends with the terminating module.
● The maximum configuration of the distributed I/O system is dependent on the interface
modules being used.
Installation position
Preferably, the ET 200S is mounted horizontally on a vertical wall. All other positions are
possible, although there are certain restrictions regarding the ambient temperature.
ET 200S
Installing
Mounting rail
The ET 200S distributed I/O system is installed on a mounting rail according to EN 60715
(35 x 7.5 mm or 35 x 15 mm).
Appropriate surface designs are:
● Steel strip according to Appendix A of EN 60715, or
● Tinned steel strip. We recommend the following mounting rails for this purpose:
– 6ES5710-8MA11 (length: 483 mm)
– 6ES5710-8MA21 (length: 530 mm)
– 6ES5710-8MA31 (length: 830 mm)
– 6ES5710-8MA41 (length: 2000 mm)
Note
If you use mounting rails from other manufacturers, please check whether they have
the required properties for your climatic ambient conditions.
Note
If the ET 200S distributed IO device is exposed to increased vibrations and shock, we
recommend that you screw the mounting rail to the mounting surface at intervals of
200 mm.
To prevent the ET 200S distributed I/O system from slipping sideways, we
recommend that you apply a mechanical hold-down (e.g. with grounding terminal,
8WA2011-1PH20) at both ends of the device.
If you install the rail on grounded, zinc-plated mounting plates, there is no need to
ground the rail separately.
ET 200S
Installing
Minimum clearances for installation, wiring, and ventilation

When installing the ET 200S in a housing, ensure that the distance to the lid of the housing
or the front door is at least 1 mm.
PP
30 (0 (0 (0 30 (0 (0 (0
PP
PP
PP
PP PP
PP
Figure 4-1 Minimum clearances
ET 200S
Installing
4.2 Installing the interface module
4.2 Installing the interface module
Introduction
● The interface module connects the ET 200S with the PROFIBUS DP and PROFINET.
● The interface module transfers data between the higher-level controller and the I/O
modules.
Requirements
● The DIN rail is installed.
● All terminal modules are installed to the right of the interface module. The maximum
configuration of the ET 200S distributed I/O system is 12/63 I/O modules.
Required tools
Screwdriver with 3 mm blade
Installing the interface module

1. Hang the interface module on the rail.
2. Tip the interface module back until you hear the slider engage.
Figure 4-2 Installing the interface module
Removing the interface module

The interface module is wired, and the terminal modules are on the right:
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the interface module.
2. Disconnect the wiring and the bus connector on the interface module.
3. Use a screwdriver to push the slider on the interface module down until the mechanism
stops and move the interface module to the left.
Note: The locking mechanism is beneath the interface module.
4. Press down on the slider while taking the interface module off the mounting rail.
ET 200S
Installing
4.3 Installing the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules
Introduction
● The terminal modules serve to receive the I/O modules and power modules.
● The terminal modules can be wired (without I/O modules)
● All the terminal modules must be installed to the right of the interface module.
Requirements
Required tools
Installing the terminal module

1. Fit the terminal module onto the rail.
2. Move terminal module backward until the slider can be heard locking in place.
3. Move the terminal module to the left until you hear it snap into place at the previous
interface module (if already installed) or the terminal module.
Figure 4-3 Installing the terminal module
ET 200S
Installing
Removing the terminal module

The terminal module is wired, and there are other terminal modules on the right and left.
A terminal module in the ET 200S distributed I/O system can only be removed when there is
a clearance of approx. 8 mm to the adjacent terminal modules (you achieve this clearance
by moving the adjacent modules).
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the terminal module and, if applicable, the power
module.
2. Disconnect the wiring on the terminal module.
3. Removing the terminal module (from the right):
Use a screwdriver to press down the slider on the previous (left hand) terminal module /
interface module until the mechanism stops then move the interface module to the right.
Removing the terminal module (from the right):
Use a screwdriver to press down the slider on the interface module until the mechanism
stops then move the interface module to the left.
Note: The slider is located underneath the terminal module.
4. Press down on the slider while taking the terminal module off the mounting rail.
4
1
Figure 4-4 Removing the terminal module (from the right)
① Slide
Note
It is not necessary to remove the terminal module in order to replace the terminal box.
ET 200S
Installing
4.4 Installing the terminal modules TM-C for COMPACT modules
Introduction
● The terminal modules serve to receive COMPACT modules.
● The terminal modules can be prewired (without COMPACT modules).
● All other terminal modules are installed to the right of the terminal module for COMPACT
modules.
Requirements
● The mounting rail is installed.
Required tools
Mounting a terminal module for COMPACT modules

1. Insert the terminal module for COMPACT modules in the mounting rail (on the left side).
2. Move terminal module backward until the slider can be heard locking in place.
Figure 4-5 Mounting a terminal module for COMPACT modules
ET 200S
Installing
Removing a terminal module for COMPACT modules

The terminal module is wired, and there are other terminal modules to the right.
The terminal module for COMPACT modules can only be removed when there is
approximately 8 mm space between it and the next terminal module (shift the modules if
necessary).
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the terminal module for COMPACT modules or for the
power module, if applicable.
2. Disconnect the wiring on the terminal module for COMPACT modules.
3. Use a screwdriver to press down the slider on the interface module for COMPACT
modules until the mechanism stops, then move the terminal module to the left.
Note:
– The slider is located underneath the terminal module.
– This step is not required if no other terminal modules are located to the right of the
terminal module for COMPACT modules.
4. Press down on the slider while taking the terminal module off the mounting rail.

Figure 4-6 Removing a terminal module for COMPACT modules
① Slide
Note
The terminal box can be replaced without first removing the terminal module for COMPACT
modules.
ET 200S
Installing
4.5 Installing add-on terminals
Introduction
● The add-on terminals expand the function of the terminal modules for ET 200S.
Extra potentials can be applied to the add-on terminal as necessary
(for example to connect encoders and actuators using 3- and 4- conductor technology
with IM151-1 COMPACT).
The add-on terminal can be cascaded if extra potentials are required.
● Terminal modules and add-on terminal can be prewired (without COMPACT modules or
I/O modules).
● Various voltage groups can be configured on the add-on terminal using pluggable
bridges.
Requirements
● The mounting rail is installed.
● The terminal module for COMPACT modules is installed or the terminal modules TM-P
and TM-E are installed at a width of 120 mm.
Note
Requirements for installing the add-on terminals under terminal modules TM-P and TM-E
Both of the "outside" terminal modules must have the same height. No higher terminal
modules are allowed to mounted between both of these terminal modules.
Required tools
4-mm screwdriver
ET 200S
Installing
Installing add-on terminals

1. Slide the add-on terminal from below onto the terminal module for COMPACTmodules or
the TM-P and TM-E terminal modules.
Figure 4-7 Installing add-on terminals
① Catch
ET 200S
Installing
If your ET 200S modules are exposed to shocks or vibrations they can be stabilized by using
the mounting brackets included in the delivery package.
1. Slide the fixing bracket into the slot in the underside of the additional terminal.
2. Screw the fixing bracket firmly onto the base.
The lower part of the mounting bracket can be broken off and used to fill any gap
between the add-on terminal and its base by placement under the bracket (as a spacer).

Figure 4-8 Stabilizing an add-on terminal with fixing bracket
① Mounting brackets
② Spacer
ET 200S
Installing
Removing add-on terminals

The add-on terminal is wired up.
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the add-on terminal, the terminal module for COMPACT
modules, and the power module, if applicable.
2. If the add-on terminal is stabilized using a mounting bracket, loosen it from the base and
pull it out of the add-on terminal.
3. Disconnect the wiring on the add-on terminal.
4. Push the screwdriver in the right hand slot between the terminal module and the add-on
terminal. Turn the screwdriver. The catch is released from its bracing when the add-on
terminal is pushed away.
5. Repeat this procedure on the left-hand slot.
6. Then pull the add-on terminal downwards and out of the terminal module / terminal
modules.
Figure 4-9 Removing add-on terminals
① Mounting brackets
② Catch
ET 200S
Installing
4.6 Removing/installing pluggable bridges on the additional terminal
4.6 Removing/installing pluggable bridges on the additional terminal
Introduction
The additional terminal is fitted with three pluggable bridges on delivery.
All of the terminals on the additional terminal have the same potential with the 3 plugged
bridges. If additional potentials are required then various potential groups can be configured
by removing the pluggable bridges. Detailed information pertaining to the expansion of
potential groups can be found in the device manual in the chapter Terminal modules >
Additional terminals TE-U120S4x10 and TE-U120C4x10 (6ES7193-4FLx0-0AA0).
Requirements
Required tools
Removing pluggable bridges

1. Pull the labeling strips out of the additional terminals.
2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the pluggable bridge being removed from the side.
3. Loosen the bridge and then pull it out.
4. If necessary, repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. Reinsert the labeling strips.
Figure 4-10 Removing the bridges
ET 200S
Installing
4.7 Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module
Installing pluggable bridges

1. Pull the labeling strips out of the additional terminals.
2. Insert the pluggable bridge between the potential groups being connected.
3. If necessary, repeat step 2.
4. Reinsert the labeling strips.
The inserted bridges can be recognized by their labeling strips.
Introduction
The terminal box is part of the terminal module. If necessary, you can replace the terminal
box. It is not necessary to remove the terminal module.
Requirements
● The terminal module is installed, wired, and fitted with a COMPACTmodule, power
module, or electronic module.
Required tools
ET 200S
Installing
Proceed as follows
1. Switch off the supply voltage on the terminal module and, if applicable, the power
module.
2. Disconnect the wiring on the terminal module.
3. Simultaneously press
– the upper and lower release buttons of the electronic module or power module, and
remove it from the terminal module.
– The release button located above of the COMPACT module and pull it out of the
terminal module.
4. Push the screwdriver at an angle from below into the small opening underneath the slot
number. At the same time pull the terminal box downward until it stops. Then pull the
terminal box upward and out of the terminal module.
5. Replace the terminal box, and insert the new one into the terminal module from above
(see figure). Then push the terminal box upward until it snaps into place.
6. Insert the COMPACTmodule, power module or electronic module into the terminal
module.
7. Wire the terminal module.
8. Switch on the supply voltage on the terminal module and, if applicable, the power
module.
① Slot number label

Figure 4-11 Replacing the terminal box on the terminal module
ET 200S
Installing
4.8 Installing the bus terminating module
4.8 Installing the bus terminating module
Introduction
The terminating module on the right end of the ET 200S terminates the ET 200S distributed
I/O system. If you have not inserted a terminating module, the ET 200S is not ready for
operation.
Requirements
The last terminal module must be installed.
Installing the bus terminating module

1. Fit the bus termination module onto the rail to the right of the last terminal module.
2. Pivot the terminating module backwards onto the DIN rail.
3. Push the bus termination module to the left until you hear it lock into the last terminal
module.
Figure 4-12 Installing the bus terminating module
ET 200S
Installing
4.9 Installing the shield contact
Removing the Bus Terminating Module

1. Use a screwdriver to push the slider on the last terminal module down until the
mechanism stops, and move the terminating module to the right.
2. Pivot the terminating module so that it comes off the DIN rail.
Note
If
• the terminating module of the ET 200S is removed and remounted under voltage, or
• the ET 200S backplane bus is interrupted during operation, e. g. at a terminal module,
and then restored to function,
the complete power supply of the ET 200S must be switched off and on again in order to
achieve a defined station status.
Introduction
● You need the shield contact to connect cable shields (for example, analog electronic
modules, 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module and 1SSI electronic module).
● Fit the shield connection on the terminal module.
● The shield connection consists of a shield connection element, a power bus (3 x 10 mm),
a shield clamp, and a grounding terminal.
Requirements
● The terminal modules are installed.
Required tools
● Screwdriver with 3 mm blade
● Metal-cutting saw
ET 200S
Installing
Proceed as follows
1. Push the shield connection element onto the first terminal module from below.
2. Push the shield connection element onto the last terminal module from below.
In order to achieve stability of the busbar between two shield contact elements during
installation, you must connect an additional shield contact element after every sixth
terminal module (given a width of 15 mm).
3. Saw off the correct length from the busbar. The length of the busbar is: equal to the
distance between the shield connection elements + 45 mm.
4. Push the busbar into the shield contact element. The busbar must protrude from the
shield contact element by 15 mm on the left or right after installation.
5. Attach the shield terminals to the busbar (between the shield connection elements).
6. Attach the ground connection terminal to the protruding busbar.
4
2
3
Figure 4-13 Installing the shield contact
① Shielding terminals
② shield connection elements
③ Ground connection terminal
④ Power bus
ET 200S
Installing
4.10 Applying slot number labels and color identification labels
Introduction
● The slot number labels identify the individual I/O modules with a slot (1 to 63).
● The color identification labels permit individual color coding of the terminals in
accordance with company or national conventions. The color identification labels are
available in white, red, blue, brown, yellow, yellow-green, and turquoise. Each terminal on
the terminal module can be fitted with a color identification label.
● The slot number labels and color identification labels are applied onto the terminal
modules.
– Position of the slot number plate: below the coding element on the terminal module.
– Position of the color-coding plates: directly next to each terminal on the terminal box.
Requirements
● The terminal modules are installed.
● You can only fit the slot number labels when no electronics modules are installed.
● The terminal modules should not be wired when you apply the color identification labels.
Required tools
3 mm screwdriver (for removal only)
ET 200S
Installing
Applying slot number labels and color identification labels

Applying slot number plates:
1. Break the slot number label (1 to 63) off the strip.
2. Use your finger to press the slot number label onto the terminal module.
Applying color-coding plates:
1. You can place the color identification labels in the opening next to the terminal while they
are still on the strip and then bend the strip back to pull them off.
2. Use your finger to press the color identification labels onto the terminal module.
2 2
Figure 4-14 Applying slot number labels and color identification labels
① Slot number label

② Color identification labels
Removing slot number labels and color identification labels

Removing slot number plates:
1. Remove the electronic module from the terminal module.
2. Lever the slot number label out of its mount.
Removing color-coding plates:
Use a screwdriver to lever the color-coding plates from their mounts.
ET 200S
Installing
4.11 Mounting Color Identification Labels for ET 200S and ET 200S COMPACT
4.11 Mounting Color Identification Labels for ET 200S and ET 200S

COMPACT
Properties
● Color-coded labels allow terminals to be identified in the colors white, red, blue, yellow,
yellow-green, and turquoise.
● Color-coded labels can be used at the terminal modules TM-E, TM-P and TM-C of the
ET 200S and ET 200S COMPACT.
● The packaging unit encompasses 200 color-coded labels (10 star-shaped mounts with 20
piece each).
Introduction
You can provide every terminal at a terminal module with a color-coded label. The color-
coded labels are mounted on the terminal module. Color-coded labels are positioned directly
next to the terminal.
Requirement
The terminal module should not be wired in order to make mounting of the color-coded
labels easier.
Required tools
Screwdriver with 3.5 mm blade
ET 200S
Installing
4.11 Mounting Color Identification Labels for ET 200S and ET 200S COMPACT
Mounting Color-Coded Labels

1. Press the point of the color-coded label using the screwdriver into the provided opening
of the terminal module.
2. Hold the color-coded label during the following steps.
3. Bend the star-shaped mount upwards by approx. 30° to 40°.
4. Detach the color-coded label from the mount by moving the mount back and forth
sideways.
Figure 4-15 Mounting Color-Coded Labels
Removing Color-Coded Labels

Use a screwdriver to lever the color-coded labels from their mounts.
Note
Ensure that the color-coded labels do not fall into the terminal openings. Color-coded labels
can only be removed from terminal openings after the COMPACT module has been
dismantled.
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly 5
5.1 General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S
Introduction
When operating the ET 200S distributed I/O system as part of a plant or system, special
rules and regulations have to be followed depending on the field of application.
This chapter provides an overview of the most important rules you must observe when
integrating the ET 200S distributed I/O system into a plant or system.
Specific application
Please observe the safety and accident prevention regulations applying to specific
applications (e.g. machine protection guidelines).
EMERGENCY-STOP devices
EMERGENCY-STOP devices according to IEC 204 (coincides with VDE 113) must remain
effective during all operating modes of the plant or system.
System Startup after Certain Events

The table below shows what you have to observe when restarting a plant after specific
events.
If there is ... then ...

Start-up following a power drop or failure No dangerous operating states may occur. If
Startup of the ET 200S follows an necessary actuate an EMERGENCY-STOP!
interruption of the bus communication
Startup follows unlocking of the emergency There must not be an uncontrolled or undefined
stop device startup.
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
5.1 General rules and regulations for operating the ET 200S
Line voltage
The table below shows what must be monitored respecting supply voltage.
With ... the ...

Stationary plants or systems without all-pole line building installation must contain a mains
voltage disconnect switch disconnect switch or a fuse.
load power supplies, power supply modules the set rated voltage range must match the local
supply voltage.
All circuits of the ET 200S distributed I/O system Any fluctuation/deviation in the supply voltage
from the rated value must be within the permitted
tolerance.
24 VDC supply
The table below shows what must be monitored for 24 VDC power supply.
With ... you need to observe ...

Buildings External lightning Take lightning protection
protection precautions
24 VDC power supply cables, signal internal lightning (for example, lightning protection
cables protection elements)
24 VDC supply Safe (electrical) isolation of extra-low voltage
Protection against outside electrical influences

The table below shows how you must protect your system against electrical interference or
faults.
With ... Make sure that ...

all plants or systems in which the ET 200S The plant or system is connected to a protective
is integrated, conductor for diverting electromagnetic interference.
power supply, signal, and bus cables the cable routing and installation is correct.
Signal and bus cables A cable or wire break cannot lead to undefined states
in the plant or system.
See also
Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions (Page 133)
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
5.2 Operating the ET 200S on a grounded incoming supply
Introduction
In this section, you will find information on the overall configuration of an ET 200S distributed
I/O system on a grounded incoming supply (TN-S system). The specific subjects discussed
are:
● Disconnecting devices, short-circuit and overload protection to VDE 0100 and VDE 0113
● Load voltage supplies and load circuits.
Grounded incoming supply

In grounded incoming supplies, the neutral conductor of the supply line is grounded. A single
fault between a live conductor and ground or a grounded part of the installation results in
tripping of the protective devices.
Safety isolation
Safe electrical isolation must be provided for:
● Modules that require supply with voltages ≤ 60 VDC or ≤ 25 VAC.
● 24 VDC load circuits
Configuring the ET 200S with ungrounded reference potential

As of IM151-1 BASIC (6ES7151-1CA00-0AB0), IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA02-
0AB0), IM151-1 FO STANDARD (6ES7151-1AB01-0AB0), IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
(6ES7151-1BA00-0AB0), IM151-3 PN, IM151-3 PN HIGH FEATURE and IM151-1
COMPACT, the ground M of the nominal supply voltage of the IM151-x is connected to the
mounting rail (grounding conductor) via an RC combination, thus making a ground-free
installation is possible.
To divert interference current, the reference potential of the IM151-x is connected internally
to the mounting rail (protective conductor) via an RC combination (R = 10 MΩ / C = 22 nF).
High-frequency interference currents are thus discharged, and static charge is prevented.
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
Components and protective measures

Various components and protective measures are specified for assembling a full installation.
The type of components and and the binding character of protective measures depends on
which DIN regulation applies to your plant. The following table refers to the figure below.
Compare ... Refer to figure DIN VDE 0100 DIN VDE 0113
Disconnection element for control ① ... Part 460: ... Part 1:
system, sensors, and actuators Main switch Disconnector
Short-circuit / overload protection: ② ... Part 725: ... Part 1:
In groups for sensors and actuators Single-pole protection of • With grounded
circuits secondary circuit:
unipolar
③ • otherwise: fuse all poles
Load current PS for AC power ② Isolation by transformer Isolation by transformer
circuits with more than five items of recommended recommended
electromagnetic apparatus
③
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
ET 200S in the overall configuration

The figure below shows the ET 200S distributed I/O system in the overall configuration (load
voltage supply and grounding concept) with incoming supply from a TN-S system.
L1
Low voltage distribution e.g.
L2
L3 TN-S system (3 x 400 V)
N
PE FE: Functional earth for direct diversion
of interference levels to the mounting rail via
spring contact
ET 200S
FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE
Mounting rail
2 PE (AUX1)
AC
1L+
DC
1M
Shield support for supporting
cable shields
Ground bus
Load circuit
400 VAC for motor starters
2
3
AC
DC
Load circuit 24 VDC for electronic modules and
motor starters
2
3
AC
AC
Load circuit 120 VAC / 230 VAC for AC modules
Figure 5-1 Operation of ET 200S with grounded reference potential
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
5.3 Electrical configuration of the ET 200S
5.3 Electrical configuration of the ET 200S
Galvanic isolation
In the ET 200S, isolation exists between:
● The load circuits/process and all other circuit components of the ET 200S
● The PROFIBUS DP interface in the interface module and all other circuit components
● The PROFINET interface in the IM151-3 PN interface module and all other circuit
components
The figure below shows the voltage ratios for ET 200S with IM151-1. Only the primary
components are shown in the figure.
'3 (OHFWURQLFV
(76EDFNSODQHEXV
,QWHU %DFNSODQHEXV
IDFH
%XV %XV %XV %XV %XV

LQWHUIDFH LQWHUIDFH LQWHUIDFH LQWHUIDFH LQWHUIDFH
0RXQWLQJ
UDLO
7HUPLQDWLQJPRGXOH
(OHFWULFDO (OHFWULFDO (OHFWULFDO (OHFWULFDO (OHFWULFDO (OHFWULFDO
LVRODWLRQ LVRODWLRQ LVRODWLRQ LVRODWLRQ LVRODWLRQ LVRODWLRQ
3URFHVV 3URFHVV 3URFHVV

HOHFWURQLFV HOHFWURQLFV HOHFWURQLFV
,0
,0
,0 /
/
/ 0
0 9'& 0 3( 9'& 0 3(
3RZHU (OHFWURQLF (OHFWURQLF
3RZHU (OHFWURQLF
PRGXOH PRGXOH PRGXOH PRGXOH PRGXOH
'3LQWHUIDFHSRWHQWLDO
3RWHQWLDO,2 3RWHQWLDOORJLFFLUFXLWU\
Figure 5-2 Potentials of the ET 200S with IM151-1
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
5.4 Wiring the ET 200S
5.4.1 Wiring rules for the ET 200S
Wiring rules
Wiring Rules for... Interface module Terminal modules (spring Terminal modules
(supply voltage) and screw terminals) (Fast Connect)
connectable cable cross sections for solid No 0.14 mm to 2,5 mm2 0.5 mm to 1.5 mm2
cables
permitted cross- without wire end ferrule 0.25 mm to 2.5 mm2 0.14 mm to 2,5 mm2 0.5 mm to 1.5 mm2
sections of flexible with wire end ferrule 0.25 mm to 1.5 mm2 0.14 mm to 1.5 mm2 ---
conductors
Number of wires per connection 1 or combination of 2 cables up to 1,5 mm2 (total) 1
in a mutual wire end ferrule
Maximum external diameter of the wire ∅ 3.8 mm ∅ 3.1 mm at 1.5 mm2 ∅ 3.2 mm at 1.5 mm2
insulation ∅ 3.8 mm at 2.5 mm2
Stripping length of the wires 11 mm ---
Wire-end ferrules Without insulating collar Form A, 8 to 12 mm Form A, up to 12 mm long ---
to DIN 46228 long
with insulating collar Form E, up to 12 mm long ---
0.25 to 1.5 mm2
5.4.2 Wiring a terminal module with screw-type terminals
Introduction
In terminal modules with screw-type terminals, the individual wires are screwed into the
terminal.
Requirements
● Adhere to the wiring rules.
● No wire end ferrules required
Required tools
Proceed as follows
1. Strip 11 mm of insulation from the wires.
2. Insert the wires into the terminal.
3. Screw the ends of the individual wires onto the terminal module (torque of 0.4 to 0.7 Nm).
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
5.4.3 Wiring a Terminal Module with Spring Terminals
Introduction
When wiring terminal modules with spring terminals, the wires are secured in the terminal
simply by inserting them into the terminal.
Requirements
Follow the wiring rules.
Required tools
Procedure
1. Strip 11 mm of insulation from the wires.
2. Insert the screwdriver in the upper (round) opening of the terminal.
3. Insert the wire until it stops in the lower (square) opening of the terminal.
4. Release the terminal by pushing the screwdriver into the opening.
5. Push the wire into the released spring terminal, and pull the screwdriver out.
Figure 5-3 Wiring with Spring Terminals
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
5.4.4 Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect
Introduction
● In the case of terminal modules with Fast Connect, the individual wires are attached
using a quick connection method that requires no stripping.
● Fast Connect is a connection method that requires no conductor preparation
(i. e., the conductor insulation does not have to be stripped).
● Each terminal of the terminal module with Fast Connect has a test opening
(e.g. for measuring the voltage). The test opening is suitable for test probes with a
maximum diameter of Ø 1.5 mm.
● Wire end ferrules are not permitted.
● Diagram of the Fast Connect terminal module
① Opening for measuring and testing: max. Ø 1.5 mm

② Opening for 1 conductor: 0.5 ... 1.5 mm2
③ Slider open (the cable can be inserted)
④ Locking mechanism closed (the wire is connected)
Requirements
● Follow the wiring rules.
Required tools
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
Connectable wires
You can connect solid and flexible conductors with PVC insulation with a wire cross-section
between 0.5 mm2 and 1.5 mm2 (max. external diameter 3.2 mm). If the cross-section of the
conductors is the same they can be wired fifty times. A list of the tested conductors can be
found on the Internet (http://www.idc2.com).
UL-compliant cables and connections
Wiring range for insulating piercing connection 22-16 AWG solid/stranded PVC insulated
conductors, UL style no. 1015 only.
Proceed as follows
1. Insert the unstripped cable in the round opening until it stops (the insulation and
conductor must form a flat surface).
2. Insert the screwdriver into the opening above the slider until it stops.
3. Press the screw driver downwards until the slider reaches the end position.
PP

Figure 5-4 Wiring terminal modules with Fast Connect
Result: The wire is connected.
Note
If you would like to reuse a conductor after it was already connected once then it must be
recut.
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
Release the wiring from the terminal module with Fast Connect
1. Insert the screwdriver into the opening below the slider until it stops.
2. Use the screwdriver to lever and push the slider upwards.
3. The wiring is disconnected: Remove the wire.

Figure 5-5 Release the wiring from the terminal module with Fast Connect
Removing any conductor remnants (if necessary)

To remove any remains of the conductor (insulation), you can deinstall the slider from the
terminal module (see Step 3). To do this, the slider must be open (upper position). You can
only insert the slider in the upper position (see Step 4).
1. Insert the screwdriver in the opening below the slider (the tip of the screwdriver is on the
lip of the slider).
2. Press the screwdriver downwards to lever the slider out of the terminal module.
3. Remove the locking mechanism from the terminal module. Remove any remnants of the
conductor from the locking mechanism.
4. Use your fingers to press the slider back into the opening. Caution: Make sure the slider
is inserted in the correct position otherwise you can damage the clamping point.

Figure 5-6 Deinstalling the slider from the terminal module
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
5.4.5 Wiring terminal modules
Introduction
The ET 200S distributed I/O system incorporates terminal modules for power modules,
electronic modules and COMPACT modules:
● Connect the supply/load voltage for the respective voltage group for the power terminal
modules.
● Terminal modules for electronic modules connect the ET 200S with the process.
● With the terminal modules for electronic modules you can connect cable shielding by
means of a shield connection.
● For terminal modules for COMPACT modules, connect:
– the supply voltage for the interface part
– the load voltage for the relevant voltage group
– the connections for the integrated peripherals with the process
(with the help of add-on terminals for 3- and 4-conductor technology)
Requirements
● You must wire the terminal modules with the supply/load voltage switched off at the
power module and the load voltage switched off at the electronic module.
● Wire terminal modules for COMPACT modules with the supply voltage for the interface
part switched off and the supply/load voltage for the potential groups switched off.
Required tools
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
Wiring terminal modules for power modules

The terminal assignment of the terminal module depends on which power module is
inserted. You can find information regarding the terminal and power modules in the ET 200S
device manual.
Wiring terminal modules for digital, analog, and technological modules

The terminal assignment of the terminal module depends on which electronic module is
inserted. You can find information regarding the terminal and electronic modules in the
ET 200S device manual. You can find information about technological modules in the
Technological Functions manual.
Wiring terminal modules for COMPACT modules

The terminal assignment of the terminal module depends on which COMPACT module is
inserted. You can find information regarding the terminal and COMPACT modules in the
chapter entitled COMPACT- Modules and in the ET 200S device manual.
Connecting the Cable Shielding

We recommend that you use the shield connection to connect cable shielding (e.g. in the
case of analog electronic modules, the 1COUNT 24V/100kHz electronic module and the
1SSI electronic module.).
1. Remove the insulation material from the area around the shield terminal, and clamp the
cable shield in the shield terminal (above the conductor rail). The shield clamp is suitable
for one cable with a maximum diameter of 8 mm or two cables with a maximum diameter
of 4 mm each.
2. Tighten the shield terminal (approximately 0.5 Nm)
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 if you want to connect additional cable shields.
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
4. Strip the insulation from the ground wire (from 6 mm to 25 mm2), and insert it in the
ground connection terminal (under the conductor rail). Tighten the ground connection
terminal (2 Nm to 2.5 Nm).
5. Attach the other end to the ground bus.
5
2
4
3
① Shield terminal
② Insulation material removed
③ Cable to the encoder
④ Cable to the ground bus
⑤ Ground connection terminal
Figure 5-7 Connecting cable shields
Note
To stabilize the shield connection, you must mount and screw in at least one shield
terminal above the shield connection element.
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
5.4.6 Wiring an interface module with PROFIBUS DP interface (electrically)
Introduction
The supply voltage and the bus connector (RS 485) are connected at the IM151-1 BASIC,
IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface modules.
Requirements
● Wire the interface module with the supply voltage switched off.
Required tools
Procedure
1. Connecting the supply voltage:
– Strip the insulation from the wires for the supply voltage of the interface module.
– Secure the individual wires in the screw-type terminal.
2. Connecting PROFIBUS DP:
– Insert the bus connector onto the PROFIBUS DP connection.
– Tighten the screws of the bus connector.
1
(76
Figure 5-8 Wiring IM151-1 BASIC, IM151-1 STANDARD, and IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE
① Labeling strip
② Supply voltage (1L+, 2L+, 1M, 2M)
③ PROFIBUS DP
See also
Wiring rules for the ET 200S (Page 79)
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
5.4.7 Wiring an interface module with PROFIBUS DP interface (optically)
Introduction
The supply voltage and the fiber-optic cable are connected at the IM151-1 FO STANDARD
interface module via a simplex connector.
Requirements
Required tools
3-mm screwdriver
Required accessories
● Package of Simplex connectors and polishing sets (6GK1901-0FB00-0AA0)
● Package of plug adapters (6ES7195-1BE00-0XA0)
● Fiber optic duplex cable see catalog IK PI
Rules for configuring a fiber optic cable network with IM151-1 FO STANDARD
In fiber-optic networks with participants with integrated fiber-optic interfaces:
● The fiber-optic network can only be configured as a line.
● If you remove the fiber-optic cable from an integrated fiber-optic interface or the supply
voltage to the IM151-1 FO STANDARD fails, all subsequent nodes will no longer be
accessible.
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
Example configuration of a fiber-optic cable network with IM151-1 FO STANDARD

The figure below presents an example of how to set up a fiber-optic cable network with the
ET 200S and the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module.
3
① S7-400H automation system with IM 467 FO as the DP master
② ET 200S Distributed I/O with IM151-1 FO STANDARD
③ Fiber-optic duplex cable
Figure 5-9 Fiber-optic cable network with IM151-1 FO STANDARD
Installing simplex connectors
Note
The fiber-optic duplex cable may have the following maximum lengths:
• PROFIBUS Plastic Fiber Optic standard cable 50 m
• PROFIBUS PCF Fiber Optic standard cable 300 m
1. Remove approximately 30 cm of the jacket of the fiber-optic duplex cable.

2. Attach the fiber-optic duplex cable with the associated simplex plugs. You can find
detailed installation instructions in the SIMATIC NET- PROFIBUS Networks manual.
Tip: Do not click the 2 simplex plugs closed individually, click them closed together so
that they a complete a "duplex plug". In this manner you will achieve a better hold in the
plug adapter.
IMPORTANT: The smoothed and polished surface of the plastic fibers must be absolutely
flat and even. Likewise, the plastic jacket must not protrude or be cut unevenly. Every
irregularity causes strong attenuation of the light signal via the fiber-optic cable!
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
3. Place the simplex connectors into the plug adapter for the IM151-1 FO STANDARD
interface module and the fiber-optic cable into the designated cable ducts. Snap the plug
adapter closed until you can hear clearly that the side panels have engaged.
When inserting the plug in the plug adaptor, pay attention to the correct position:
Transmitter always up and receiver always down!
5 4 3
① Plug adapter for IM151-1 FO STANDARD
② Snap the two simplex connectors closed together such that you obtain a "duplex
connector."
③ Tip: Cut the lower wire approx. 10 mm shorter than the upper wire to achieve a better
arrangement of the wiring.
④ Maximum 30 mm bending radius!
⑤ Fiber-optic duplex cable
Bending radius for the fiber-optic cable

When placing the fiber-optic duplex core into the plug adapter and routing the cable, be sure
not to exceed the permissible bending radius of 30 mm. Refer also to the installation
guidelines for fiber-optic cable in the ET 200 Distributed I/O System or SIMATIC NET -
PROFIBUS Networks manual.
Reusing fiber-optic cable
Note
If you insert previously used fiber-optic cable into the plug adapter, you must shorten both
fiber-optic cores by the amount of the curved lengths and reinstall the simplex connectors.
This will prevent any attenuation losses caused by re-bent, heavily-stressed portions of the
fiber-optic duplex core.
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
Wiring interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD

– Strip the insulation from the supply voltage wires on the interface module.
2. Connecting PROFIBUS DP:
– Insert the fiber-optic cable with the mounted plug adapters into the IM151-1 FO
STANDARD.
– Fold the protruding plug adapter grip upward.
Pay attention to the correct position: The transmitter fiber optic cable is inserted into the
receiver female connector and the receiver fiber optic cable into the transmitter female
connector of the fiber optic cable interface of the IM151-1 FO STANDARD.
If the IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module is the last node of the fiber-optic cable
network, the unoccupied fiber-optic cable interface must be blanked off (blanking plug
inserted in IM151-1 FO STANDARD, as supplied).
CAUTION
Do not look directly into the opening of the optical transmit diodes. The emitted light beam
could damage your eyes.
1 2
7
4 3
ET 200S
① Transmitter
② Grip
③ Simplex connectors
④ Receiver
⑤ Supply voltage (1L+, 2L+, 1M, 2M)
⑥ Labeling strip
⑦ PROFIBUS DP (fiber-optic cable)
Figure 5-10 Wiring IM151-1 FO STANDARD
See also
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
5.4.8 Wiring an interface module with PROFINET IO interface (electrically)
Introduction
Connect the supply voltage and the bus connectors to the IM151-3 PN interface module.
Requirements
Note
Provide a suitable strain relief for the PROFINET connecting cable.
Note
Guideline for setting up modules with PROFINET I/O interfaces
You may only operate modules with PROFINET I/O interfaces in LAN networks if all
connected nodes are equipped with SELV/PELV power supplies (or have equivalent
protection).
For linking up to the WAN, a data transfer point is prescribed that guarantees this degree
of safety.
Note
When using a CPU 315-2 PN/DP or CPU 317-2 PN/DP an industrial-quality switch must be
placed directly on the CPU to which the downstream I/O devices must be connected.
Required tools
● Screwdriver with 3 mm blade
● Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect stripping tool (6GK1901-1GA00) (stripping tool for
Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect installation cables)
Required accessories
● PROFINET connector (according to the specifications in the PROFINET Installation
Guide)
● Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect installation cables
The following are suitable:
Fast Connect standard cable 6XV1840-2AH10

Fast Connect trailing cable 6XV1840-3AH10
Fast Connect marine cable 6XV1840-4AH10
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
Installing a bus connector

Install the PROFINET connector according to the specifications in the PROFINET Installation
Guide.
Procedure
– Strip the insulation from the supply voltage wires on the interface module.
2. Connecting PROFINET:
– Insert the bus connector into the PROFINET connection.
2
(76
① 2-port switch (switched hub) for PROFINET

② Labeling strip
③ Supply voltage (1L+, 2L+, 1M, 2M)
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
5.4.9 Wiring the power supply
Required tools
Connect the power supply using a screwdriver with 3 mm blade width.
Power supply unit

You may only use PELV-type power supply units with a guaranteed electrically isolated
extra-low voltage (≤ 60 VDC).
Connection for power supply

The power supply connections for the 24 V power supply are located on the front of the
interface module. The connections have the following meaning:
/ 0

0

/
① + 24 VDC from the power supply
② Ground of the power supply
③ + 24 VDC from the power supply for looping through
④ Ground of the power supply for looping through
Figure 5-11 Power supply connection
The maximum cross-section of the connection is 2.5 mm2. A strain relief is not present. The
connection plug allows you to loop through the power supply without interruption even in
unplugged condition.
Procedure
1. Strip the wires to a length of 10 mm.
2. Insert the line into the round opening of the connection plug up to the endstop. (The
connecting plug is plugged into the power supply connection in the delivery condition.)
3. Insert the wired plug connection onto the power supply connection on the interface
module.
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
5.5 Plugging and removing electronic modules and COMPACT modules
5.5.1 Plug and label electronic or COMPACT modules
Introduction
● The electronic modules or COMPACT modules are inserted in the terminal modules.
● A labeling strip allows you to identify the electronic modules or COMPACT modules.
● Electronic and COMPACT modules are:
– Self-coding
– Type-coded
The first time you insert an electronic or COMPACT module, a code element engages on
the terminal module. This mechanically prevents the wrong electronic module or
COMPACT module from being inserted.
Requirement
Observe the rules regarding inserting electronic modules as detailed in the Application
Planning chapter.
Inserting electronic and COMPACT modules

1. Insert the electronic module or COMPACT module into the terminal module until you hear
it snap into place.
2. For identification purposes, pull the labeling strip
– upward out of the electronic module.
– to the right out of the COMPACT module.
You have to lift the labeling strip to the right above the notch (with a 3 mm
screwdriver).
3. Then reinsert the labeling strip back into the electronic module or COMPACT module.
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
3
2
Figure 5-12 Inserting and labeling the electronic modules
Figure 5-13 Inserting and identifying a COMPACT module
Removing electronic or COMPACT modules
CAUTION
An electronic or COMPACT module may only be removed if the associated load voltages
have been switched off.
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
1. Simultaneously press
– the two release buttons on the top and bottom of the electronic module.
– the release button positioned at the top of the COMPACT module.
2. Pull the electronic or COMPACT module forward out of the terminal module.
Figure 5-14 Removing electronic modules
Figure 5-15 Removing the COMPACT module
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
Implementing an electronic module or COMPACT module type change

You have already removed the electronic module or COMPACT module:
1. Use a screwdriver to push the code element out of the terminal module.
2. Reinsert the code element onto the used electronic module or COMPACT module.
3. Insert the electronic module or COMPACT module (type change) into the terminal module
until you hear it snap into place.
4. Label the new electronic module or COMPACT module.
① Code element
Figure 5-16 Removing the code element
WARNING
If you make changes to the code element, dangerous plant conditions can result and the
outputs of the ET 200S can be damaged.
As a consequence, death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are
not taken.
For this reason, do not make any changes to the code element to avoid damaging the
ET 200S.
Replacing a defective electronic module or COMPACT module

You have already removed the electronic module or COMPACT module:
1. Remove the code element from the (underside of the) new electronic module or
COMPACT module.
2. Insert the new electronic module or new COMPACT module (same type) into the terminal
module until you hear it snap into place.
3. Label the new electronic module or COMPACT module.
See also
Switching on the ET 200S (Page 41)
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
5.5.2 Removing and inserting modules during operation
Introduction
ET 200S supports the removal and insertion of modules during operation (RUN mode).
The ET 200S remains in RUN mode when an electronic module is removed. The protective
conductor connections of the ET 200S are not interrupted.
Rules
● You cannot remove and insert modules during operation unless the corresponding
parameters have been assigned.
● You can remove and insert modules during operation with IM151-1 BASIC, IM151-1
COMPACT, IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0 or higher), IM151-1 FO
STANDARD, IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE, IM151-3 PN and IM151-3 PN HIGH FEATURE.
● If one module is missing (gap) and the ET 200S POWER ON is switched, the station will
not start up.
● The removal and insertion of modules affects the cycle synchronization (constant bus
cycle time).
● When replacing more than one module, make sure that only one gap occurs.
ET 200S
Wiring and assembly
General procedure
The following table indicates which modules you can remove and insert under which
conditions:
Table 5- 1 Removing and inserting electronic modules
Module Removing and Conditions

inserting
Interface module No ---
IM151-1 COMPACT No ---
Power modules yes The load voltage must be switched off!
Potential distributor module yes The load voltage must be switched off!
4POTDIS
Digital electronic modules (input) yes ---
Digital electronic modules (output) yes The load voltage must be switched off by
means of an external switch/fuse!
Analog electronic modules yes ---
4 IQ-SENSE yes The sensors can also be replaced during
operation. The electronic module then
assigns parameters automatically to
these sensors.
1COUNT 24V/100kHz yes The load voltage must be switched off by
1COUNT 5V/500kHz means of an external switch/fuse!
1SSI
1STEP 5V/204kHz
2PULSE
1POS INC/Digital
1POS SSI/Digital
1POS INC/Analog
1POS SSI/Analog
1SI 3964/ASCII yes ---
1SI Modbus/USS yes ---
RESERVE yes ---
ET 200S
Commissioning 6
6.1 Safety tests prior to commissioning
Performing tests
Note
You must ensure the safety of your facility. Before a system undergoes final commissioning,
you should perform a complete function test and the necessary safety tests.
Incorporate foreseeable errors when planning the tests. In this way, you can avoid exposing
your personnel or property to danger during operation.
ET 200S
Commissioning
6.2.1 Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP
6.2.1.1 Basic principles of configuration for the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP
Introduction
Configuration involves configuring and assigning parameters to the ET 200S.
● Configuration: The systematic arrangement of the different ET 200S modules (setup).
● Assigning parameters: Defining the ET 200S parameters with the configuration software.
Note
The ET 200S is included in the hardware catalog of HW Config:
• IM151-1 BASIC: STEP 7 V5.2 and higher
• IM151-1 COMPACT: STEP 7 V5.3 with Service Pack 3 or higher +HSP
"ET 200S/COMPACT"
• IM151-1 STANDARD: STEP 7 V5.0 with Service Pack 3 or higher
• IM151-1 FO STANDARD: STEP 7 V5.1 with Service Pack 1 or higher
• IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: from STEP 7 V5.1 with Service Pack 3 or higher
You will not need a GSD file. Advantages:
• Simplified summary of the devices (via the "Pack addresses" button in HW Config)
• Validity checking of parameters
You can find further information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.
DPV1 operation
If you are using IM151-1 STANDARD (6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0 or higher) in DPV1 mode on
an S7 CPU that does not support an insert/remove module interrupt, you must not enable
the "Operation at preset <> actual configuration" parameter in STEP 7. Otherwise, the
removal of a module (module failure) always results in a station failure (OB 86).
If it is imperative that you enable "Operation at preset <> actual configuration", you must
either select DPV0 mode or configure IM151-1/FO STANDARD using the GSD file (under
"Additional field devices - I/O" in the STEP 7 hardware catalog). "Operation at preset <>
actual configuration" is then possible even when the insert/remove module interrupt is
disabled.
However, the S7-CPU does not register an insertion or removal (module failure). You can
detect such events only by cyclically reading the diagnostic frame and evaluating the module
status.
ET 200S
Commissioning
Configuring by means of the GSD file

You configure the ET 200S distributed I/O system using the GSD file. The ET 200S is linked
as norm slave in your system via the GSD file. You can download the GSD file for ET 200S
from the Internet (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/652154):
6.2.1.2 Combining modules for configuration

You can only combine digital modules or motor starters with useful data amounting to less
than 1 byte.
Introduction
The ET 200S has a maximum address area of:
● IM151-1 BASIC: up to 88 bytes for inputs and 88 bytes for outputs.
● IM151-1 COMPACT: up to 100 bytes for inputs and 100 bytes for outputs.
● IM151-1 STANDARD (up to 6ES7151-1AA03-0AB0), IM151-1 FO STANDARD (up to
6ES7151-1AB02-0AB0) up to 128 bytes for inputs and 128 bytes for outputs.
● IM151-1 STANDARD (from 6ES7151-1AA04-0AB0), IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE: up to
244 bytes for inputs and 244 bytes for outputs.
To better utilize the available address space of the DP master and reduce data exchange
between the ET 200S and the DP master, you can group several electronic modules/load
feeders within one byte in the input or output area of the process image. This is achieved by
the systematic arrangement and designation of the ET 200S electronic modules/motor
starters.
A list of the address space requirements for the individual modules is to be found in the
appendix.
You can combine the following device types within one byte:
● Digital input modules
● Digital output modules
● Motor starters (direct starters and reversing starters)
ET 200S
Commissioning
Proceed as follows
1. Integrate the GSD file in your configuration software.
Result: You can identify combinable devices in the hardware catalog of your configuration
software by the fact that they are twice present. The devices differ only by a "*" in the
name.
2. Configure the ET 200S setup, adhering to the following rules:
– The modules that you can group within a byte must be of the same module type (see
above).
– Interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0 with product version 1
to 4:
The modules that can be combined within one byte must be inserted right next to each
another. Only power modules are permitted between the electronic modules. Power
modules do not open a new byte.
– After Interface module IM151-1 BASIC; IM151-1 STANDARD, 6ES7151-1AA00-0AB0
with creation state 5, 6ES7151-1AA01-0AB0; IM151-1 FO STANDARD and IM151-1
HIGH FEATURE:
Other modules may be connected between the modules that can be combined.
– There can be a total of no more than 8 channels (1 byte).
Note
In STEP 7 applications, if you combine the modules for IM151-1 STANDARD, IM 151-
1 FO STANDARD or IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE in the DPV1 mode:
• No insert/remove module interrupts (OB83) are triggered for these modules. In this
case, you can recognize that a module has been removed by evaluating the
module status in the diagnostic frame in the cyclic user program.
• Each grouped module then receives its own diagnostic address.
3. Select the module designation without "*" from the hardware catalog of your configuration
software.
Result: You open a byte and store the first module there.
4. Select the module designation with "*" from the hardware catalog of your configuration
software.
Result: You store other modules in the opened byte until all bits are occupied.
5. If a byte is filled, you must configure a module again (that is, open a new byte without "*").
Note
Configuring by means of the GSD file:The configuration software does not check the
correct combination of the devices. If you configure more than 8 channels in a byte, the
modules that exceed the byte limit are reported as improperly configured in the
diagnostics:
Module status → 10B: wrong module; invalid user data
These modules are not addressed.
ET 200S
Commissioning
No grouping
If you do not want to group digital input modules, digital output modules, or motor starters
within a byte when configuring the ET 200S distributed I/O system, use only those module
designations without "*" from the hardware catalog of your configuration software.
Each individual electronic module/motor starter will then occupy one byte in the input or
output area of the process image.
ET 200S
Commissioning
6.2.1.3 Grouping of digital input modules
General procedure
The figure below illustrates schematically the grouping of digital input modules.
,067$1'$5'(6$$$%ZLWKSURGXFWYHUVLRQWR
6WHS 6WHS 6WHS
6WUXFWXUH ', ', ', ', ', ',
ZLWKRXWಯ ರ ZLWKRXWಯ ರ ZLWKRXWಯ ರ

'HVLJQDWLRQ
ZLWKಯ ರ ZLWKಯ ರ
,QSXW
E\WH ', ', ',
$VRI,0%$6,&,0&203$&7,067$1'$5'(6$$$%ZLWKSURGXFWYHUVLRQ
(6$$$%,0)267$1'$5'XQG,0+,*+)($785(
6WHS 6WHS 6WHS
6WUXFWXUH ', ', $, ', ', $, ', $2 ',
ZLWKRXWಯ ರ ZLWKRXWಯ ರ
'HVLJQDWLRQ ZLWKRXWಯ ರ
ZLWKಯ ರ ZLWKಯ ರ ZLWKಯ ರ
,QSXW
E\WHV ', ', ',
$, $,
2XWSXW
E\WHV
$2
Figure 6-1 Grouping of digital input modules in a single byte
ET 200S
Commissioning
6.2.1.4 Grouping of digital output modules
General procedure
The figure below illustrates schematically the grouping of digital output modules.
,067$1'$5'(6$$$%ZLWKSURGXFWYHUVLRQWR
6WHS 6WHS 6WHS
6HWXS '2 '2 '2 '2 '2 '2

'HVLJQDWLRQ ZLWKಯ ರ
ZLWKಯ ರ

2XWSXW
E\WH '2 '2 '2
$VRI,0%$6,&,0&203$&7,067$1'$5'(6$$$%ZLWKSURGXFWYHUVLRQ
಻(6$$$%,0)267$1'$5'DQG,0+,*+)($785(
6WHS 6WHS 6WHS
'2 '2 $, '2 '2 $, '2 $2 '2

6HWXS

'HVLJQDWLRQ ZLWKಯ ರ ZLWKಯ ರ
ZLWKಯ ರ

,QSXW
E\WHV
$, $,
2XWSXW
E\WHV '2 '2 '2

$2
Figure 6-2 Grouping of digital output modules in a single byte
ET 200S
Commissioning
6.2.1.5 Grouping of motor starters
General procedure
The figure below illustrates schematically motor starter grouping.
6WHS 6WHS
6HWXS 06 06 06

'HVLJQDWLRQ
ZLWKಯ ರ
,QSXW
E\WH ', ',

2XWSXW
E\WH '2 '2
Figure 6-3 Grouping of motor starters within a byte
ET 200S
Commissioning
6.2.1.6 Example of a configuration
Introduction
The following example describes how to design an ET 200S configuration:
ET 200S structure
An example design of an ET 200S configuration is shown in the following figure:
6ORW

30($&9
,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH
%XVWHUPLQDWRU
30('&9
30('&9
'2'&9
'2'&9
'2'&9
'2'&9
','&9
','&9
','&9
'29
'29
$2,
$2,
30'
$,8
$,8
52
'6
'6
'6

*URXSLQJLQDVLQJOHE\WH
$VRI,0%$6,&,0&203$&7,067$1'$5'(6$$$%ZLWK
3URGXFWYHUVLRQ(6$$$%,0)267$1'$5'DQG,0+,*+)($785(
Figure 6-4 ET 200S structure
ET 200S
Commissioning
Configuration table and address space

The user is free to select the byte addresses of the inputs and outputs (if the configuration
software supports this). The bit addresses result automatically from the sequence of the
grouped modules.
The following table shows which modules have been grouped and the corresponding
address space.
Table 6- 1 Configuration table and address space
Slot Module Grouping I/O address

Inputs Outputs
1 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V --- --- ---
2 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0 2DI DC24V yes 0.0 to 0.1
3 6ES7131-4BB01-0AB0* 2DI DC24V 0.2 to 0.3
4 6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0 2AI U No 1 to 4
5 6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0 2AO I No 0 to 3
6 6ES7131-4BD01-0AA0* 4DI DC24V yes 0.4 to 0.7
7 6ES7132-4BD01-0AA0 4DO DC24V yes 4.0 to 4.3
8 6ES7132-4BB01-0AB0* 2DO DC24V 4.4 to 4.5
9 6ES7132-4HB01-0AB0* 2DO Rel. 4.6 to 4.7
10 6ES7134-4FB01-0AB0 2AI U No 5 to 8
11 6ES7135-4GB01-0AB0 2AO I No 5 to 8
12 6ES7138-4CA01-0AA0 PM-E DC24V --- --- ---
13 6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0 2DO DC24V yes 9.0 to 9.1
14 6ES7132-4BB31-0AB0* 2DO DC24V yes 9.2 to 9.3
15 6ES7138-4CB11-0AB0 PM-E AC230 --- --- ---
16 6ES7132-4FB01-0AB0* 2DO 230V yes 9.4 to 9.5
17 6ES7132-4FB01-0AB0* 2DO 230V yes 9.6 to 9.7
18 3RK1903-0BA00 PM-D --- --- ---
19 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 DS yes 9.0 to 9.3 10.0 to 10.3
20 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 *DS 9.4 to 9.7 10.4 to 10.7
21 3RK1301-xxB00-0AA0 DS yes 10.0 to 10.3 11.0 to 11.3
ET 200S
Commissioning
6.2.2 Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP
6.2.2.1 Setting the PROFIBUS Address
Introduction
The PROFIBUS address is used to specify the address of the ET 200S distributed I/O
system on PROFIBUS DP.
● The PROFIBUS DP address for the ET 200S is set on the interface module or COMPACT
module by means of DIP switches. The DIP switches are to be found on the front of the
interface module, protected by a sliding window.
● Valid PROFIBUS DP addresses are 1 to 125.
● Each address can be assigned only once on PROFIBUS DP.
Requirements
Address setting is not yet assigned on PROFIBUS DP.
Required tools
3-mm screwdriver
ET 200S
Commissioning
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

1. Slide the window
– upwards on the interface module.
– downwards on the COMPACT module.
CAUTION
When open, the window protrudes out from underneath the COMPACT module case.
This can cause it to be easily broken off.
2. Use a screwdriver to set the desired PROFIBUS DP address via the DIP switch.
3. Close the window.
,QWHUIDFHPRGXOH
2)) 21 ([DPSOH
'3DGGUHVV

(76

2QO\ZLWK,067$1'$5',0)267$1'$5'
5HVHUYHGIRUIXWXUHXSJUDGHV7KLVVZLWFKPXVWEHLQWKH2))SRVLWLRQ
Figure 6-5 Setting the PROFIBUS Address
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

You change the PROFIBUS DP address in exactly the same way as you set it. A change in
the PROFIBUS DP address becomes valid for the ET 200S after a POWER ON at the
interface module / COMPACT module.
ET 200S
Commissioning
6.2.2.2 Commissioning ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP
Software Requirements
The table below details the software requirements for commissioning on PROFIBUS DP.
Table 6- 2 Software requirements for commissioning on PROFIBUS DP
Configuration software Version Explanations

used
STEP 7 from Version 5.0 and You use HW Config. With Service Pack 3 or higher the ET 200S is
ServicePack 3 included in the hardware catalog.
Configuration software for You need the GSD file from ET 200S.
a different DP master used
Requirements for commissioning

The following additional requirements must be satisfied for commissioning the ET 200S on
PROFIBUS DP:
● DP slave installed
● DP slave wired up
● DP slave is configured (configured and parameters assigned)
● Supply voltage for the DP master is switched on (see manual for the DP master)
● DP master is switched to RUN mode (see manual for the DP master)
Proceed as follows
To commission the DP slave, proceed as follows:
1. Switch on the power supply for the DP slave.
2. If necessary, switch on the supply voltage for the load.
See also
Basic principles of configuration for the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP (Page 102)
Basic principles of installation (Page 51)
Setting the PROFIBUS Address (Page 111)
ET 200S
Commissioning
6.2.2.3 Startup of the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP
Flow diagram for startup of the ET 200S
6WDUWXSZKHQH[SHFWHG!DFWXDOFRQILJXUDWLRQ
6ZLWFKRQWKHVXSSO\YROWDJHIRU SDUDPHWHUGLVDEOHGRQO\LQWKHFDVHRI'39
WKH'3VODYH
'3VODYHVHWVRXWSXWVWRDQG
DFFHSWVWKHVHW352),%86
DGGUHVV
/('V21'&9
DQG%)OLJKWXS
'3VODYHUHFHLYHVFRQILJXUDWLRQ
GDWDIURPWKH'3PDVWHU
&RQILJXUDWLRQGDWD 1R 6)OLJKWVXSUHG
FRUUHVSRQGWRWKHDFWXDO %)EOLQNVUHG
VHWXS"
<HV
%)/('RIILQSXWVDQGRXWSXWV
HQDEOHGGDWDWUDQVIHUEHWZHHQ
5HPHG\0DWFKFRQILJXUDWLRQGDWD
(76DQG'30DVWHUSRVVLEOH
WRVHWXSRUYLFHYHUVD
Figure 6-6 Startup of the ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP
ET 200S
Commissioning
Note
All interface modules support the default startup. In other words, configuration using the
GSD file or HW Config is not necessary.
The following conditions then apply:
• Preset parameters are used.
• AKF (general identifier format in compliance with the PROFIBUS standard) in the
configuration frame
• Grouping (packing) of the electronic modules is not possible without parameterization.
• All supply voltages on the power modules must be switched on.
• It is not possible to remove or insert modules during operation.
Reference
You can find information regarding the parameter assignment of electronic modules in the
Device Manual ET 200S in the chapters Digital or Analog electronic Modules in each case
under "Parameter for ...".
6.3.1 Configuring the ET 200S on the PROFINET IO
Introduction
The interface module IM151-3 requires a unique device name in order to operate at an IO
controller (refer to the following chapter).
Configuration involves configuring and assigning parameters to the ET 200S.
● Configuration: The systematic arrangement of the different ET 200S modules (setup).
● Assigning parameters: Defining the ET 200S parameters with the configuration software.
Note
The ET 200S can be operated with STEP 7 V5.3 Service Pack 3 and higher.
GSD file
You configure the ET 200S using the GSD file. This file is used to integrate the ET 200S in
your system as an IO device. You can download the GSD file for ET 200S from the Internet
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19699080):
The following GSD file is available for the IM151-3 interface module:
GSDML-Vx.y-Siemens-ET200S-"Date in yyyymmdd format".xml
You can find further information about the procedure in the STEP 7 Online Help.
ET 200S
Commissioning
6.3.2 Assigning device names to the I/O device
Introduction
Each PROFINET IO device is assigned a unique device ID by the manufacturer
(MAC address).
For configuration and in the user program, each ET 200S IO device is addressed with its
device name.
For detailed information on addressing in PROFINET IO, refer to the PROFINET System
Description.
Requirements
● IM151-3 Interface Module
● SIMATIC Micro Memory Card 64k and higher
● The PD must be online on PROFINET to the IO device to let you assign a device name to
the interface module.
● The IO device is configured in HW Config and assigned an IP address.
Assigning a device name

1. Insert an empty SIMATIC Micro Memory Card into the module slot on the front of the
IM151-3.
3. Open the Properties - IM151-3 PN window in the HW Config or Properties - IM151-3 PN
HIGH FEATURE and enter the device name for the IO Device there and confirm with OK.
Do not use the device name "noname" (not case-sensitive).
Transferring the device name to the interface module

1. In HW Config select PLC > Ethernet > Assign Device Name.
2. Click the Assign name button in the Assign device name window.
Result
The device name is stored on the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card in the IM151-3 interface
module.
ET 200S
Commissioning
Alternative procedure
Alternatively, you can write directly to a SIMATIC Micro Memory Card using a programming
device with an EPROM programming device installed or a PC connected to a SIMATIC USB
EPROM programming device and then use the memory card to transfer the device name to
the IM151-3 PN.
Proceed as described in the online help for HW Config under "Assign device name using a
memory card".
Forwarding the device name when the interface module is replaced

The device name of the IO device is saved to the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card.
To transfer the device name when exchanging the interface module IM151-3, pull the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card out of the "old" IM151-3 and insert it in the "new one".
The IO device adopts the device name from the SIMATIC Micro Memory Card after
switching the power supply off/on. Then the station is addressable again and functions the
same as before the exchange.
Station flash test

If you are using multiple IO devices, multiple IO devices are also indicated in the "Assign
device name" dialog. In this case, you should compare the MAC address of the device with
the indicated MAC address and select the proper IO device.
The identification of IO devices in a system is facilitated by a station flash test. The flash test
is activated as follows:
1. In the "Assign device name" dialog, select one of the indicated IO devices.
2. Select a flash duration.
3. Click the "Flash on" button.
The LINK LED on the selected IO device flashes (open the flaps on the front cover of the
IM151-3).
ET 200S
Commissioning
6.3.3 Combing modules for the configuration
Introduction
The IM151 has a maximum address area of 256 bytes for inputs and 256 bytes for outputs.
For a better utilization of the available address space of the IO controller, you can group
multiple electronic modules/ load branches within a byte in the input or output area of the
process image. This is achieved by the systematic arrangement and designation of the
ET 200S electronic modules/motor starters.
Note
Grouping is only possible with the IM151-3 PN after 6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 and STEP 7
V5.3 SP 3.
A list of the address space requirements for the individual modules is to be found in the
appendix.
You can combine the following device types within one byte:
● Digital input modules
● Digital output modules
● Motor starters (direct starters and reversing starters)
Other modules may be connected between the modules that can be combined.
The procedure is identical to that for PROFIBUS DP.
Modules are grouped during configuration. By selecting a module label without "*", you open
a byte. By selecting a module with "*", you fill the byte until all bits are occupied.
The generation of interrupts results in the following behavior:
Interrupts at removed DO modules

%\WH[
0RGXOH0RGXOH0RGXOH 0RGXOH
ZLWKRXWಯ ರZLWKಯ ರZLWKಯ ರ ZLWKಯ ರ
,IUHPRYHGDUHPRYHPRGXOHLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHGIRUWKH಻
FRUUHVSRQGLQJPRGXOH
2SHQLQJPRGXOH,IUHPRYHGWKHJURXSHG
'2PRGXOHVRXWSXWWKHLUFRQILJXUHGVXEVWLWXWHYDOXHVVWDUWLQJZLWK
WKH[FKDQQHO)URPWKHJURXSHGPRGXOHV
GLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSWVFDQFRQWLQXHWREHJHQHUDWHG
Figure 6-7 Interrupts at removed DO modules
ET 200S
Commissioning
Interrupts at removed DI modules
%\WH[
0RGXOH0RGXOH0RGXOH 0RGXOH
ZLWKRXWಯ ರZLWKಯ ರZLWKಯ ರ ZLWKಯ ರ
,IUHPRYHGDUHPRYHPRGXOHLQWHUUXSWLVJHQHUDWHGIRUWKH಻
FRUUHVSRQGLQJPRGXOH
2SHQLQJPRGXOH,IUHPRYHGWKH,2&RQWUROOHUUHDGVQHLWKHU಻WKH
LQSXWVRIWKHUHPRYHG',PRGXOHQRUWKHLQSXWVRIWKH
JURXSHGPRGXOHVDQ\ORQJHU7ULJJHULQJRI
಻SURFHVVDQGGLDJQRVWLFLQWHUUXSWVIURPJURXSHG',PRGXOHV
಻FRQWLQXHVWREHSRVVLEOH
Figure 6-8 Interrupts at removed DI modules
Additional information
You can find additional information on grouping modules during configuration in the chapter
Configuring ET 200S on PROFIBUS DP (Page 102).
ET 200S
Commissioning
6.3.4 Commissioning and startup of ET 200S on the PROFINET IO
Table 6- 3 Software requirements for commissioning on PROFINET IO
Configuration software Version Explanations

used
STEP 7 • Version 5.3 and higher and ServicePack 1 for You use HW Config and the supplied
IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA00-0AB0) GSD file.
• Version 5.3 and higher and ServicePack 3 for
IM151-3 PN (6ES7151-3AA10-0AB0 and higher)
and IM151-3 PN HIGH FEATURE (6ES7151-
3BA20-0AB0 and higher)
Configuration software for You need the GSD file from ET 200S.
a different IO controller
Requirements for commissioning

The following additional requirements must be satisfied for commissioning the ET 200S on
PROFINET IO:
● IO device installed
● IO device wired up
● IO device has been assigned a device name
● Supply voltage for the DP master is switched on (see manual for the IO controller)
● IO controller is switched to RUN mode (see manual for the IO controller)
Commissioning the ET 200S

To commission the IO device, proceed as follows:
1. Switch on the power supply for the IO device.
2. If necessary, switch on the supply voltage for the load.
ET 200S
Commissioning
Startup of the ET 200S
Switch on the supply voltage for

the IO device
IO device sets outputs to

"0" and accepts the
configured device name from the
SIMATIC Micro Memory Card
The "ON" LED comes on

"BF" LED flashes.
(with connection to the switch)
“BF” LED lights up
(without connection to the switch)
IO device receives
connect telegram and
parameter data
from IO controller
"BF" LED off;

inputs and outputs
enabled;
data transfer possible.
Figure 6-9 Startup of ET 200S on PROFINET IO
Note
The interface modules IM151-3 PN and IM151-3 PN HIGH FEATURE support the default
startup.
The following conditions then apply:
• The preset parameters are used (refer to parameters for the electronic modules).
• All supply voltages on the power modules must be switched on.
ET 200S
Commissioning
ET 200S
Functions 7
7.1 Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP
Introduction
The ET 200S can be used as the sender (publisher) for the direct exchange of data (cross
traffic). Naturally, the DP master used must also support direct data exchange. You will find
information on this in the description of the DP master.
General procedure
Direct data exchange (cross traffic) is characterized by PROFIBUS DP nodes which "listen"
on the bus and know which data a DP slave returns to its DP master. This mechanism allows
the "listener" (recipient / subscriber) direct access to modified input data from the remote DP
slaves.
During configuration in STEP 7 the respective I/O input addresses are used to specify the
address space of the recipient where the sender data is stored.
ET 200S
Functions
7.1 Direct data exchange on PROFIBUS DP
Example: Direct data exchange with IM151-1

The figure below is an example of the direct data exchange / "relationships" that can be
configured with a sender ET 200S and the nodes that can "listen" as possible recipients.
2
4
1
3 5
8
8 8
7
① CPU 31x-2 ⑥ DP slave

② DP master system 1 ⑦ CPU 31x-2 as DP slave
③ CPU 31x-2 as DP master 1 ⑧ ET 200S
④ DP master system 2 ⑨ PROFIBUS DP
⑤ CPU 31x-2 as DP master 2
Note
The interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE supports as of 6ES7151-1BA01-0AB0 the
safety related I-Slave-Slave-Communication via PROFIBUS DP for the fail-safe module. You
can find the description of this function in the S7 Distributed Safety Configuration and
Programming manual.
ET 200S
Functions
7.2 Option handling on the PROFIBUS DP
7.2 Option handling on the PROFIBUS DP
7.2.1 Basic principles of option handling on PROFIBUS DP
Principle
Option handling enables you to set up the ET 200S for future expansions (options). Option
handling means that you install, wire, configure, and program the planned maximum
configuration of the ET 200S.
You can choose between two option handling variants, according to your requirements:
● Option handling with RESERVE modules
● Option handling without RESERVE modules
The two option handling variants are mutually exclusive.
Option handling with RESERVE modules

The optional electronic modules are initially replaced with inexpensive RESERVE modules
which are then later exchanged with the planned electronic modules.
This means that the ET 200S can be completely prewired ("master cabling") since the
RESERVE module is not connected to the terminal module terminals and therefore not to the
process.
The RESERVE modules for future expansions at the right-hand end of the station do not
have to be mounted. In this case, preparatory installation and wiring are possible but not a
prerequisite.
Option handling without RESERVE modules

With this variant, the use of RESERVE modules is not necessary. The modules are mounted
side-by-side without gaps. Preparatory mounting and wiring are not required for the optional
electronic modules.
Note
Mark the modules in your installation with the slot numbers from your configuration.
Reference
Refer to the "Properties" in the manuals for the ET 200S interface modules to find out which
interface modules support "Options handling".
ET 200S
Functions
7.3 Identification data
7.3 Identification data
Definition
Identification data are data that are stored in a module for assisting the user in:
● Checking the system configuration
● Locating hardware changes in a system
● Correcting errors in a system
Identification data enable modules to be uniquely identified online.
STEP 7 shows the identification data in the "Module information - IM 151" and "Properties -
DP Slave" tabs.
Reference
Refer to the "Properties" in the manuals for the ET 200S interface modules to find out which
interface modules support "Identification data".
ET 200S
General technical specifications 8
8.1 Standards and approvals
Introduction
The general technical specifications comprise the standards and test specifications which
satisfy the ET 200S distributed I/O system and form the base criteria for testing the ET 200S
distributed I/O system.
CE certification
The ET 200S distributed I/O system satisfies the requirements and objectives of the
following EC directives and satisfies the Harmonized European Standards (EN) for
Programmable Logic Controllers which were published in the official pamphlets of the
European Community:
● 73/23/EEC "Electrical Equipment for Use within Fixed Voltage Ranges" (Low-Voltage
Directive)
● 89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC guideline)
● 94/9/EC "Equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive
environments" (ATEX).
The EU conformity declaration certificates are available for the responsible authorities and
are kept at the following address:
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Industry Sector
IA AS RD ST Type Test
P.O. Box 1963
D-92209 Amberg
ET 200S
General technical specifications
UL approval
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with
● UL 508 (Industrial Control Equipment)
CSA approval
Canadian Standards Association in accordance with
● C22.2 No 142 (Process control Equipment)
or
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. in accordance with
● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Industrial Control Equipment)
or
Underwriters Laboratories Inc. according to
+$=/2& ● CSA C22.2 No. 142 (Process Control Equipment)

● UL 1604 (Hazardous Location)
● CSA-213 (Hazardous Location)
APPROVED for use in
Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
The ET 200S motor starters do not possess cULus for HAZ. LOC. certification.
Note
The certifications currently valid can be found on the nameplate of the specific module.
ET 200S
FM approval
Factory Mutual Research (FM) according to
Approval Standard Class Number 3611, 3600, 3810
APPROVED for use in Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D Tx;
Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Tx
The ET 200S motor starters do not possess FM certification. All other modules of the
ET 200S are FM certified.
acc. to EN 50021 (Electrical apparatus for potentially explosive atmospheres; Type of
protection "n")
,,*([Q$,,77
WARNING
Personal injury and property damage can occur.
There is a risk of injury or damage if you disconnect any plug-in connections in potentially
explosive environments while the ET 200S is in operation.
Always de-energize the ET 200S in potentially explosive environments before
disconnecting plug-in connections.
WARNING
Explosion Hazard
Components may no longer qualify for Class I, DIV. 2 if they are substituted.
WARNING
This device is only appropriate for use in Class I, Div. 2, Group A, B, C, D, or in non-
hazardous areas.
Tick-Mark for Australia

The ET 200S distributed I/O system satisfies the requirements of the standard AS/NZS 2064
(Class A).
IEC 61131
The ET 200S distributed I/O system satisfies the requirements and criteria of the standard
IEC 61131-2 (Programmable Logic Controllers, Part 2: Equipment Requirements and Tests).
PROFIBUS standard
The ET 200S distributed I/O system is based on the IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1
standard.
ET 200S
Marine type approval

Classification organizations:
● ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
● BV (Bureau Veritas)
● DNV (Det Norske Veritas)
● GL (Germanischer Lloyd)
● LRS (Lloyds Register of Shipping)
● Class NK (Nippon Kaiji Kyokai)
Use in industrial environment

SIMATIC products are designed for use in industrial environments.
Table 8- 1 Use in industrial environment
Area of application Requirement for

Emitted interference Immunity to noise
Industry EN 61000-6-4 : 2001 EN 61000-6-2 : 2001
Use in residential areas

If ET 200S is used in residential areas you must comply with limit class B in accordance with
EN 55011 regarding the emission of radio interference.
Appropriate measures for achieving the radio interference level required by limit class B are:
● Installation of the ET 200S in grounded switch cabinets/switch boxes
● Use of filters in supply lines
ET 200S
8.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
8.2 Electromagnetic compatibility
Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility refers to the capability and reliability of electrical equipment in
performing its function in an electromagnetic environment without causing interference in the
same environment.
The ET 200S distributed I/O system meets all EMC legislation requirements for the
European market. As a prerequisite the ET 200S distributed I/O system must satisfy the
specifications and guidelines concerning electrical installation.
Pulse-shaped Interference
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S distributed I/O
system when compared with pulse-shaped interference.
Pulse-shaped interference tested with corresponds with degree

of severity
Electrostatic discharge according 8 kV 3 (air discharge)
to IEC 61000-4-2 4 kV 2 (contact discharge)
Burst pulse (fast transients) 2 kV (supply line) 3
complying with IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV (signal line) 3
High-energy single pulse (surge) according to IEC 61000-4-5
Only with lightning protection elements (see the DP master manual and
the description of SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks)
• asymmetrical coupling 2 kV (supply line)
2 kV (signal / data line) 3
• symmetrical coupling 1 kV (supply line)
1 kV (signal / data line)
Sinusoidal Interference
The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of the ET 200S Distributed I/O
System when confronted with sinusoidal interference.
● HF radiation according to IEC 61000-4-3
Electromagnetic HF field, amplitude-modulated
– 80 MHz to 1000 MHz, 1.4 GHz to 2 GHz
– 10 V/m
– 80% AM (1 kHz)
● HF coupling according to IEC 61000-4-6
– 0.15 MHz to 80 MHz
– 10 Vrms unmodulated
– 80% AM (1 kHz)
– 150 Ω source impedance
ET 200S
8.3 Transport and storage conditions
Emission of Radio Interferences

Emission of interference from electromagnetic fields in compliance with EN 55011: Limit
class A, group 1 (measured at a distance of 10 m).
Frequency Emitted interference

from 30 to 230 MHz < 40 dB (µV/m)Q
from 230 to 1000 MHz < 47 dB (µV/m)Q
8.3 Transport and storage conditions
Transport and storage conditions

The ET 200S distributed I/O system surpasses the IEC 61131-2 requirements of transport
and storage conditions. The specifications below apply to modules which are transported
and stored in their original packaging.
Type of condition Permitted range

Free fall ≤1m
Temperature between –40 °C and +70 °C
Rate of temperature change 20 K/h
Air pressure between 1080 and 660 hPa (corresponds with altitudes of 1000 m to
3500 m)
Relative humidity From 5 % to 95 %, without condensation
ET 200S
8.4 Mechanical and Climatic Ambient Conditions
Climatic environmental conditions

The following climatic environmental conditions apply:
Ambient conditions Areas of application Remarks

Temperature between 0 and 60°C for horizontal installation
From 0 to 40 °C for all other mounting positions
Rate of temperature change 10 K/h
Relative humidity From 15 to a maximum of 95% Without condensation
Air pressure from 1080 hPa to 795 hPa Corresponds to an altitude of -1000 m
to 2000 m
Contaminant concentration Check:
SO2: < 0.5 ppm; 10 ppm; 4 days
rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation
H2S: < 0.1 ppm; 1 ppm; 4 days
rel. humidity < 60 %, no condensation
ISA-S71.04 serverity level G1; G2; G3 —
Note
Modules for the extended operating range from 0 to 55 °C / 50 °C for vertical installation
A series of ET 200S modules is approved for an extended operating range from 0 to 55 °C or
from 0 to 50 °C for vertical installation.
Refer to the "Properties" in the relevant manuals for the ET 200S modules to find out
whether a module is approved for the extended operating range.
Note
Any supply or load voltage for the ET 200S may not exceed 24 VDC. This voltage limit must
be ensured.
ET 200S
Mechanical ambient conditions

The table below shows the mechanical ambient conditions in the form of sinusoidal
oscillation.
ET 200S modules Frequency range Constant Intermittent

All modules except motor starters 10 ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz 0.15 mm amplitude 0.35 mm amplitude
58 ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz 2 g constant acceleration 5 g constant acceleration
Testing for Mechanical Ambient Conditions

The following table provides information about the type and scope of testing for mechanical
ambient conditions.
Testing Test Standard Terminal modules and electronic modules

Vibrations Vibration test to Type of vibration: Frequency cycles with a rate of change of 1
IEC 60068-2-6 octave/minute.
10 Hz ≤ f ≤ 58 Hz, constant amplitude 0.35 mm
58 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz, constant acceleration 5 g
Duration of vibration: 20 frequency cycles per axis in each of the 3
mutually perpendicular axes
Shock Shock, tested to Type of shock: Half-sine
IEC 60068-2-27 Type of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration
Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in +/- direction in each of the
3 mutually vertical axes
Repetitive shock Shock, tested to Type of shock: Half-sine
IEC 60068-29 Type of shock: 25 g peak value, 6 ms duration
Direction of shock: 1000 shocks each in +/- direction in each of the
3 mutually vertical axes
ET 200S
8.5 Specifications concerning insulation tests, protection class, and rated voltage for ET 200S
8.5 Specifications concerning insulation tests, protection class, and rated

voltage for ET 200S
Test voltage
The insulation resistance is tested during routine tests using the following test voltage
according to IEC 61131-2:
Circuits with a rated voltage of Ue relative to Test voltage

other circuits or ground
< 50 V 500 VDC
< 150 V 2500 VDC
< 250 V 4000 VDC
Degree of Pollution / Overvoltage Category to IEC 61131

● Pollution level 2
● Overvoltage category
– When UN = 120 / 230 VAC: III
– at UN = 24 VDC: II
Protection Class
Protection class I in accordance with IEC 60536
Protection class IP 20
Protection class IP 20 according to IEC 60529 for all ET 200S modules i.e.:
● Protection against touch with standard test fingers
● Protection against foreign bodies with a diameter greater than 12,5 mm
● No specific protection against water
Rated voltage for operation

The ET 200S distributed I/O system works with the rated voltage and corresponding
tolerances shown in the following table.
ET 200S modules Rated voltage Tolerance range

Everything except motor starters 24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 VDC 1
18.5 to 30.2VDC2
120 VAC 93 to 132 VAC (47 to 63 Hz)
230 VAC 187 to 264 VAC (47 to 63 Hz)
1 Static value: Generation as functional extra-low voltage with safety isolation in accordance with IEC 60364-4-41
2 Dynamic value: Including ripple, e.g., during three phase current bridge rectification
ET 200S
8.6 Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter
8.6 Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC

frequency converter
Variations in general technical specifications

The table below shows variations in the general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC
frequency converter compared to the ET 200S.
Table 8- 2 Variations in general technical specifications for the ET 200S FC frequency converter
Section Variations
Standards and approvals The frequency converter is not approved for
• cULus for HAZ.LOC.
• FM (Factory Mutual Research)
• Marine
Transport and storage conditions Free fall: ≤ 0.35 m
Climatic environmental conditions Temperature for horizontal installation:
from 0 to 60 °C
Temperature for vertical installation:
from 0 to 40 °C
Mechanical ambient conditions See operating instructions for ET 200S FC
Rated voltage for operation Frequency Converter (6SL3298-0CA12-0xP0)
Use in Zone 2 The frequency converter ET 200S FC is not

approved for use in zone 2 potentially explosive
environments.
8.7 Use of ET 200S in a zone 2 potentially explosive environments

See product information Use of subassemblies/modules in a Zone 2 Hazardous Area:
ET 200S
Order numbers A
A.1 Order numbers for ET 200S accessories
The table shows the order numbers for ET 200S accessories.
Table A- 1 Order numbers for ET 200S accessories
Name Order number

Shield connection
• Shield connecting element, 5 pieces 6ES7193-4GA00-0AA0
• Power rail, 1 piece ・1 m, 3 x 10 mm 8WA2842
• Shield terminal, 5 pieces 6ES7193-4GB00-0AA0
• Grounding terminal, 1 piece 8WA2868
Add-on terminal
• TE-U120S4x10 (screw-type terminal), 1 piece 6ES7193-4FL10-0AA0
• TE-U120C4x10 (screw-type terminal), 1 piece 6ES7193-4FL00-0AA0
Labeling sheet for interface modules and electronic modules; DIN
A4 10 pieces
• beige 6ES7193-4BA00-0AA0
• red 6ES7193-4BD00-0AA0
• yellow 6ES7193-4BB00-0AA0
• teal 6ES7193-4BH00-0AA0
Labeling sheet for COMPACT modules; DIN A4 10 pieces
• beige 6ES7193-4BA10-0AA0
• red 6ES7193-4BD10-0AA0
• yellow 6ES7193-4BB10-0AA0
• teal 6ES7193-4BH10-0AA0
200 color-coded plates per packaging unit (10 star-shaped
supports in packs of 20 items per color)
• white 6ES7193-4LA20-0AA0
• red 6ES7193-4LD20-0AA0
• yellow 6ES7193-4LB20-0AA0
• yellow-green 6ES7193-4LC20-0AA0
• brown 6ES7193-4LG20-0AA0
• blue 6ES7193-4LF20-0AA0
• turquoise 6ES7193-4LH20-0AA0
Slot number labels, 10 x (1 to 20), 200 pieces 8WA8861-0AB
Slot number labels, 5 x (1 to 40), 200 pieces 8WA8861-0AC
Terminating module, 1 piece 6ES7193-4JA00-0AA0
ET 200S
Order numbers
A.2 Order numbers for ET 200S network components
A.2 Order numbers for ET 200S network components

The tables below list all the network components for the ET 200S Distributed I/O System that
you may require to use the ET 200S.
Table A- 2 Network components (PROFIBUS DP) for ET 200S order numbers
Name Order number

RS 485-Repeater, PROFIBUS DP, IP 20 6ES7972-0AA01-0XA0
PROFIBUS bus connector (12 MBaud)
• Anthracite (without PD plug) 6ES7972-0BA12-0XA0
• Anthracite (with PD plug) 6ES7972-0BB12-0XA0
Bus cable
• normal 6XV1830-0EH10
• Drum cable 6XV1830-3BH10
• Direct-buried cable 6XV1830-3AH10
Repeater adapter 6GK1510-1AA00

Active RS485 terminating element 6ES7972-0DA00-0AA0
PROFIBUS connecting cable 6ES7901-4BD00-0XA0
Table A- 3 Network components (PROFINET IO) for ET 200S order numbers
Name Order number

Industrial Ethernet FC RJ45 Plug 90 (RJ45 plug for Industrial Ethernet
with robust metal housing and integrated cutting/clamping contacts for
connecting the Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90°
cable outlet
• 1 unit 6GK1901-1BB20-2AA0
• 10 units 6GK1901-1BB20-2AB0
• 50 units 6GK1901-1BB20-2AE0
Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect installation cables

• Fast Connect standard cable 6XV1840-2AH10
• Fast Connect trailing cable 6XV1840-3AH10
• Fast Connect marine cable 6XV1840-4AH10
Industrial Ethernet Fast Connect stripping tool 6GK1901-1GA00
ET 200S
Dimensional drawings B
B.1 Interface modules
Interface module
Dimensional drawing IM151-1 interface module (dimensions in mm):

1

① Rail support
Dimensional drawing IM151-3 PN / IM151-3 PN HIGH FEATURE interface module

(dimensions in mm):

1

① Rail support
ET 200S
B.1 Interface modules
Interface module IM151-3 PN FO

Dimensional drawing IM151-3 PN FO interface module (dimensions in mm):
ET 200S
B.2 Terminal module for COMPACT module with COMPACT module inserted
B.2 Terminal module for COMPACT module with COMPACT module

inserted
Dimensional drawing of COMPACT modules with COMPACT module inserted:

① Rail support
② with spring terminal / screw-type terminal
B.3 Terminal modules with an electronic module inserted

The dimensions of the terminal modules with inserted power module are identical to those
with inserted electronic module.
Dimensional drawing of terminal module (6 terminals in rows with inserted electronic module:
ET 200S

1

① Rail support
③ with Fast Connect
* 30 mm for double-width modules
ET 200S

1

1

① Rail support
* 30 mm for double-width modules
ET 200S

1

1

① Rail support
ET 200S
B.4 Terminating module
Dimensional drawing of terminal module (screw-type terminal) with inserted power module:
3
66,5
196,5
130
30
67
① Rail support
B.4 Terminating module

Dimensional drawing of the terminating module:

1

① Rail support
ET 200S
B.5 Shield contact
B.5 Shield contact

Dimensional drawing of the shield contact:

B.6 Additional terminal

Dimensional drawing of the additional terminal:

ET 200S
Leakage resistance C
C.1 Establishing the leakage resistance of an ET 200S station
Ohmic resistance
When establishing the leakage resistance for an ET 200S station (e.g. for a ground-fault
detector) you must take the ohmic resistance from the RC combination of the relevant
module into account:
Module Ohmic resistance from RC network

Interface module 10 MΩ (±5 %)
IM151-1 COMPACT 10 MΩ (±10 %)
Power Module PM-E DC24V 10 MΩ (±5 %)
PM-E DC24V/AC120/230V power module ---
Formula
With the following formula you can calculate the leakage resistance of an ET 200S station if
you protect all the aforementioned modules withone ground-fault detector:
50RGXO
RET200S =
1
RET 200S = Leakage resistance of the ET 200S station
Rmodule = Leakage resistance of a module
N = Number of power modules and the interface module in the ET 200S
station
RIM 151 = RPM-E DC24V = Rmodule = 9.5 MΩ

RIM 151 = Leakage resistance of the IM151-1 interface module
RPM-E DC24V = Leakage resistance of power module PM-E DC24V
If you protect the modules within an ET 200S station listed above with several ground-fault
detectors, you must determine the leakage resistance for every single ground-fault detector.
ET 200S
Leakage resistance
C.1 Establishing the leakage resistance of an ET 200S station
Example
In the setup of an ET 200S there is one IM151-1 STANDARD and two PM-E DC24V power
modules and various input and output modules. The entire ET 200S station is protected by
one ground-fault detector:
5(76 0വ
0വ

Figure C-1 Calculation example for the leakage resistance
ET 200S
Interference-free operation D
D.1 Special Measures for Interference-Free Operation
Inductive voltages
Overvoltage occurs when sources of inductance are switched off. Examples of this are relay
coils and contactors.
Integrated overvoltage protection

The digital output modules of the ET 200S have an integrated overvoltage protection device.
Additional overvoltage protection

Inductance must only be connected to additional overvoltage protective devices in the
following cases:
● If digital output circuits can be switched of by additionally installed contacts
(e. g. relay contacts).
● If the inductance cannot be controlled by digital output modules.
Note: Inquire about how the respective overvoltage protective devices must be dimensioned
from your inductance supplier.
ET 200S
Example
The following diagram shows an output circuit which makes additional overvoltage protection
devices necessary.
'&9
2
0
① Contact in the output circuit

② Inductance requires a circuit (see figures below)
Figure D-1 Relay contact for Emergency-STOP in the output circuit.
ET 200S
Wiring of DC-operated coils

The figure below shows DC-operated coils wired with diode or Zener diode circuits
1 2

① with diode
② with Zener diode
Diode/Zener diode circuits have the following properties:

● Switch off surge voltage can be totally avoided.
Zener diode has higher switch off voltage.
● High switch-off delay (6 to 9 times higher than without protective circuit).
Zener diode switches off faster than diode circuit
ET 200S
Wiring of DC-operated coils

AC-operated coils are wired with varistors or RC elements as illustrated in the following
diagram.
1 2
a a
a a
① with varistor
② with RC element
A circuit with varistors has the following properties:

● The amplitude of the switch off surge voltage is limited, but not dampened.
● The gradient of the overvoltage remains the same.
● The switch-off delay is small.
The properties of RC circuits are:
● Amplitude and gradient of the switch-off power surge are reduced.
● The switch-off delay is small.
ET 200S
Glossary
Automation system
An automation system is a programmable logic controller consisting of at least one CPU,
various input and output modules, and operator control and monitoring devices.
AUX1 bus
Power modules allow you to connect additional potential (up to 230 VAC), which you can
apply by means of the AUX(iliary) bus. You can use the AUX(iliary) bus individually:
● As a protective conductor bar
● For additionally required voltage
Backplane bus
The backplane bus is a serial data bus via which the IM151-1 interface communicates with
the electronic modules/motor starters, supplying them with the required voltage. The
connection between the individual modules is established by means of the terminal modules.
Bus
A common transfer route connecting all nodes and having two defined ends.
In the case of the ET 200, the bus is a two-wire or fiber-optic cable.
Bus connector
A physical connection between the bus nodes and the bus line.
Chassis ground
Chassis ground refers to all the interconnected inactive parts of a piece of equipment that,
even in the event of a fault, cannot carry voltage that is dangerous to the touch.
Configuration
The systematic arrangement of the different ET 200S modules (setup).
Connecting to common potential

The opening of a new potential group by a power module. This permits the individual
grouping of the sensor and load supplies.
ET 200S
Glossary
Device names
Before an IO device can be addressed by an IO controller, it must have a device name. This
procedure was selected for PROFINET because names are easier to handle than complex
IP addresses.
Assignment of a device name for a concrete IO device can be compared with the setting of
the PROFIBUS address for a DP slave.
An IO device does not have a device name upon delivery. An IO device can only be
addressed by an IO controller - i.e., for transferring configuration data (including the IP
address) during startup or for user data exchange during cyclic operation - after it has been
assigned a device name with the programming device/PC.
Diagnostics
Diagnostics involves the identification, localization, classification, display, and further
evaluation of errors, faults, and messages.
Diagnostics includes monitoring functions that run automatically while the system is in
operation. This increases the availability of systems by reducing setup times and downtimes.
Direct starter
A direct starter is a → motor starter that switches a motor on or off directly. It consists of a
circuit breaker and a contactor.
Distributed IO systems
These are input/output units that are not located in the base unit; instead, they are
distributed at some distance from the CPU, for example:
● ET 200M, ET 200X, ET 200L, ET 200S
● DP/AS-I Link
● Other DP slaves from either Siemens or other vendors
The distributed IO systems are connected to the DP master by means of PROFIBUS DP.
DP master
A → master that complies with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 is known as a DP master.
DP slave
A → slave running on the PROFIBUS on the basis of the PROFIBUS DP protocol in
accordance with IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1 is known as a DP slave.
DP standard
The DP standard is the bus protocol of the ET 200 distributed IO system in accordance with
IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1.
ET 200S
Glossary
Electronic modules
Electronic modules provide inputs and outputs for process signals. There are digital and
analog electronic modules.
Firmware update
Updating of the firmware of the interface module.
You should update the interface module to the latest firmware version following (compatible)
function-related expansions or performance improvements.
FREEZE
This is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves.
When a DP slave receives the FREEZE control command, it freezes the current status of the
inputs and transfers them cyclically to the DP master.
After each subsequent FREEZE control command, the DP slave freezes the status of the
inputs again.
The input data is not transferred from the DP slave to the DP master again cyclically until the
DP master sends the UNFREEZE control command.
Frequency converter
The frequency converter implements the smooth controlling of the speed of asynchronous
motors. It masters both simple (frequency controlling) as well as more complex driving tasks
(vector controlling). It can also be used for torque control.
Ground
The conductive mass of earth, the electrical potential of which is equivalent to zero. In the
vicinity of grounding electrodes, the potential may not be zero. The term "reference ground"
is often used here.
Grounding
Grounding means connecting an electrically conductive part to a grounding electrode by
means of a grounding system.
GSD file
The properties of a PROFINET device are described in a GSD (General Station Descriptor)
file that contains all required information for configuration.
As with PROFIBUS, you can link a PROFINET device in STEP 7 by means of a GSD file.
In PROFINET IO, the GSD file is always in XML format. The structure of the GSD file
corresponds to ISO 15734, the worldwide standard for device descriptions.
In PROFIBUS, the GSD file is in ASCII format (as defined in IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1 CP 3/1).
ET 200S
Glossary
Hot swapping
This is the removal and insertion of modules during the operation of the ET 200S.
Isolated
In the case of isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load
circuit are electrically isolated - for example, by means of optical isolators, relays, or
transformers. Input/output circuits can be grouped.
MAC address
Each PROFINET device has a factory-assigned worldwide unique device identification. This
6-byte device identification is the MAC address.
The MAC address consists of:
● 3-byte manufacturer ID and
● 3-byte device ID (serial number)
As a rule, the MAC address can be read on the front of the device,
for example: 08-00-06-6B-80-C0
Master
When it has a token, a master can send data to and request data from other nodes (= active
participants). Examples of DP masters are the CPU 315-2 DP or the IM308-C.
Motor starter (MS)

Motor starter is the generic term for → direct and → reversing starters. The startup and
direction of rotation of a motor are determined by motor starters.
Node
Device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus,
for example,. DP master, DP slave, RS 485 repeater.
Non-isolated
In the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and
load circuits are electrically connected.
Parameter assignment
Parameter assignment is the transfer of slave parameters from the DP master to the DP
slave.
PELV
Protective Extra Low Voltage = extra low voltage with safe isolation
ET 200S
Glossary
Power buses (P1/ P2)

Two internal buses (P1 and P2) that supply the electronic modules with voltage. The power
buses are fed by the power module and connected by means of the terminal modules.
Power modules
Power modules monitor the supply voltage for all the electronic modules in the potential
group. The supply voltage is fed in by means of the TM-P terminal module.
Prewiring
The wiring of the terminal modules before the electronic modules are inserted.
Process image
The process image is a component of the system memory of the DP master. The signal
states of the input modules are transferred to the process-image input area at the beginning
of the cyclic program. At the end of the cyclic program, the values of the process-image
output area are transferred to the DP slave as the signal states.
PROFIBUS
PROcess FIeld BUS, German process field bus standard specified in IEC 61784-1:2002 Ed1
CP 3/1. It defines functional, electrical, and mechanical properties for a bit-serial field bus
system.
PROFIBUS is available with the protocols DP (which stands for distributed peripherals, that
is, distributed or remote IO), FMS (which stands for field bus message specification), PA (=
process automation), or TF (= technological functions).
PROFIBUS address
Each bus node must receive a PROFIBUS address to identify it uniquely on the PROFIBUS.
The PC/programming device has the PROFIBUS address "0".
The PROFIBUS addresses 1 to 125 are permitted for the ET 200S distributed IO system.
PROFINET
Within the context of Totally Integrated Automation (TIA), PROFINET is the systematic
development of the following systems:
● PROFIBUS DP, the established field bus and
● Industrial Ethernet, the communication bus for the cell level
Experiences from both systems have been and are being integrated in PROFINET.
PROFINET as the Ethernet-based automation standard of PROFIBUS International (formerly
PROFIBUS Nutzerorganisation e.V.) defines a cross-vendor communication, automation,
and engineering model.
ET 200S
Glossary
PROFINET device
A PROFINET device always has at least one Industrial Ethernet connection. In addition, a
PROFINET device can also have a PROFIBUS connection and even act as a master with
proxy functionality. In exceptions, a PROFINET device can also have a several PROFIBUS
connections (for example CP 5614).
Provider-consumer principle
In a PROFINET IO both partners are independent providers in sending data, in contrast to
PROFIBUS DP.
Real time
Real time means that a system processes external events within a defined time.
Determinism means that a system responds in a predictable (deterministic) manner.
Both requirements are important for industrial networks. PROFINET satisfies these
requirements. Thus, as a deterministic real-time network, PROFINET is designed as follows:
● The transfer of time-critical data between different stations via a network is guaranteed
within a defined interval of time.
● To this end, PROFINET has an optimized communication channel for real-time
communication: real time (RT): Real time (RT).
● The time of transfer can be accurately determined.
● It is ensured that seamless communication can take place in the same network by means
of other standard protocols, such as industrial communication for programming
device/PC.
Reference potential
Potential from which the voltages of the circuits involved can be observed and/or measured.
Reversing starter
A reversing starter is a → motor starter that determines the direction of rotation of a motor. It
consists of a circuit breaker and two contactors.
Segment
The bus line between two terminating resistors forms a segment. A segment contains 0 to 32
→ bus nodes. Segments can be coupled via RS 485 repeaters.
SELV
Safety Extra Low Voltage
ET 200S
Glossary
Slave
A slave can only exchange data with a → master when requested by it to do so. By slaves we
mean, for example, all DP slaves such as ET 200X, ET 200M, ET 200S, etc.
SNMP
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) is the standardized protocol for performing
diagnostics and assigning parameters to the Ethernet network infrastructure.
In the office setting and in automation engineering, devices from many different vendors
support SNMP on the Ethernet.
SNMP-based applications can be operated on the same network in parallel to applications
with PROFINET.
The scope of supported functions depends on the device type. For example, a switch has
more functions than a CP 1616.
SSI
The positional information is transferred synchronously on the basis of the SSI (synchronous
serial interface) protocol. The SSI protocol is used with absolute encoders.
Stationary wiring
All the wiring-carrying elements (terminal modules) are mounted on a rail. The power and
electronic modules are inserted in the terminal modules.
Switch
PROFIBUS is a linear network. The communication nodes are linked by means of a passive
cable– the bus.
By contrast, the Industrial Ethernet consists of point-to-point connections: each
communication node is interconnected directly with one other communication node.
If a communication node is linked to several communication nodes, this communication node
is connected to the port of an active network component – the switch. Additional
communication nodes (including switches) can now be connected to the other ports of the
switch. The connection between a communication node and the switch remains a point-to-
point connection.
A switch also has the task of regenerating and distributing received signals. The switch
"learns" the Ethernet address(es) of a connected PROFINET device or additional switches
and only forwards those signals that are intended for the connected PROFINET device or
switch.
A switch has a specific number of ports. You connect at most one PROFINET device or
additional switch to each port.
ET 200S
Glossary
SYNC
This is a control command of the DP master to a group of DP slaves.
With the SYNC control command the DP master orders the DP slave that the DP slave
freeze the states of the outputs to the current value. With the subsequent frames, the DP
slave stores the output data, but the statuses of the outputs remain unchanged.
After each new SYNC control command, the DP slave sets the outputs that it has stored as
output data. The outputs are not cyclically updated again until the DP master sends the
UNSYNC control command.
Technological modules
Modules that are equipped with technological functions, such as counting pulses,
positioning, and controlling stepping motor power units.
Terminal modules
Terminal modules implement the electrical and mechanical connection of the I/O modules
with the interface module and the terminating module.
The inserted I/O module determines the signals at the terminals of the terminal module.
Depending on the selected terminal module only certain terminals are available.
Terminating module
The ET 200S distributed IO system is completed by the terminating module. If you have not
inserted a terminating module, the ET 200S is not ready for operation.
ET 200S
Index
Commissioning the ET 200S
on PROFIBUS DP, 113
2 on PROFINET IO, 120
COMPACT modules, 95, 96, 98
24 VDC supply, 74
changing type, 98
Exchange, 98
identifying, 95
A
Mounting, 95
Add-on terminal removing, 96
Installing, 60 Components and protective measures, 76
removing, 62 Configuration, 102, 115
Address area, 103, 118 ET 200S, 102, 115
Approval Configuration examples
Standards, 127 Terminal modules for power modules, 47
Assembly, 67, 68 Connecting cable shields, 85
Shield contact, 67, 68 Connecting PROFIBUS DP, 87, 91
Assigning a device name, 116 Connecting the supply voltage, 87, 91
AUX(iliary) bus (AUX1), 45 Connecting to common potential, 45
B D
Brief instructions on commissioning Diagnostics, 102
ET 200S on PROFINET IO, 30 Digital input modules, 103, 118
ET 200S on the PROFIBUS DP, 21 Digital output modules, 103, 118
Burst pulses, 131 Dimensions
Bus cable, 16 Additional terminal, 146
Shield contact, 146
Terminal module for COMPACT module with
C COMPACT module inserted, 141
Terminal modules with an electronic module
CE
inserted, 141
Certification, 127
Terminal modules with inserted power module, 141
Certification
Terminating module, 145
CE, 127
Distributed I/O systems, 11
FM, 129
DP master, 11
Marine, 130
DP slave, 11
Changing the PROFIBUS Address, 112
Climatic environmental conditions, 133
Color-coded labels, 16, 71
Mounting, 72
Removing, 72
Commissioning, 102
PROFIBUS DP, 113
PROFINET IO, 120
Requirements for PROFIBUS DP, 113
Requirements for PROFINET IO, 120
ET 200S
Index
E H
Electromagnetic compatibility, 131 Heat dissipation, 53
Electronic module, 16
Electronic modules, 95, 96, 98, 99
changing type, 98 I
Exchange, 98
identifying, 95 Identification data, 126
Mounting, 95 IEC 204, 73
removing, 96 IEC 61131, 129
Removing and inserting during operation, 99 IEC 61784-1 standard
Electrostatic discharge, 131 2002 Ed1 CP 3/1, 11
EMC, 131 IM151-1 BASIC interface module, 16
EMERGENCY-STOP devices, 73 IM151-1 FO STANDARD interface module, 16
Emission of radio interference, 132 IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE interface module, 16
ET 200S, 75, 77, 102, 113, 120 IM151-1 STANDARD interface module, 16
Characteristics and benefits, 19 IM151-3 PN interface module, 16
Configuration, 102, 115 Installation, 54, 66, 69
Overall configuration, 77 Color identification labels, 69
with grounded reference potential, 75 Interface module, 54
ET 200S components, 16 Slot number plates, 69
ET 200S distributed I/O system Terminating module, 66
Applications, 14 Installation position, 51
Definition, 14 Installation rules, 51
Terminal modules and electronic modules, 14 Installing, 51
View, 15 Installing the terminal module
ET 200S FC TM-C, 57
Variations in the technical specifications, 136 TM-E, 55
Example configuration of a fiber-optic cable network TM-P, 55
with IM151-1 FO STANDARD, 89 Insulation test, 135
Example of a configuration, 109 Interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD
Exchange terminal box Plug adapters, 89
on terminal module, 64
L
F Label sheet, 16
Fiber-optic cable
bending radius, 90
Fiber-optic duplex cable, 16 M
FM
Certification, 129 Marine
Frequency converter Certification, 130
Variations in the technical specifications, 136 Mechanical ambient conditions, 134
Minimum clearances, 53
Motor starter, 103, 118
Mounting rail, 16, 52
G
Galvanic isolation, 78
General Rules, 73
General technical specifications, 127
Grounded incoming supply, 75
GSD file, 103, 115
Guide
for the operating instructions, 5
ET 200S
Index
O S
Operating instructions Safety isolation, 75
Purpose, 3 Scope, 3
Option handling, 125 Self-coding, 95
Properties, 125 Setting the PROFIBUS Address, 111
Order numbers Shield contact, 16
ET 200S accessories, 137 Shock, 134
Order numbers for sample configuration Simplex connectors
on PROFIBUS DP, 22 installing, 89
on PROFINET IO, 32 Sinusoidal Interference, 131
Slot number plates, 16
P Commissioning on PROFIBUS DP, 113
Commissioning on PROFINET IO, 120
Placing and connecting to common potential, 45
Specific application, 73
Placing power modules and connecting them to
Standards and approvals, 127
common potential, 45
Startup, 113, 120
Plug adapters
Startup of the ET 200S
for IM151-1 FO STANDARD, 89
on PROFIBUS DP, 114
Pollution level, 135
on PROFINET IO, 121
Potential group, 45
Storage conditions, 132
Power module, 16
System Startup after Certain Events, 73
Power supply, 45
Connecting, 94
PROFIBUS DP, 11
T
Devices, 11
PROFIBUS DP network Technical specifications
Structure, 12 Climatic environmental conditions, 133
PROFIBUS standard, 129 Electromagnetic compatibility, 131
PROFINET IO mechanical ambient conditions, 133
Network structure, 13 terminal box on terminal module
Protection against outside electrical influences, 74 replace, 64
Protection Class, 135 Terminal module, 16, 79, 80, 81
Protection class IP 20, 135 Wiring with Fast Connect, 81
Pulse-shaped Interference, 131 wiring with screw-type terminals, 79
wiring with spring terminals, 80
Terminal modules, 84
R Terminating module, 16
Test voltage, 135
Rated voltage, 135
Tick-mark for Australia, 129
Recycling, 5
Transport conditions, 132
Redundancy, 42
Type-coded, 95
Regulations, 73
Removing and inserting
Electronic modules, 100
U
Removing the terminal module
TM-C, 58 Use in industrial environment, 130
TM-E, 56 Use in residential areas, 130
TM-P, 56
Repetitive shock, 134
Required level of knowledge, 3
Rules for fiber-optic cable network, 88
ET 200S
Index
V Wiring and assembly, 73

Wiring rules, 79
Vibrations, 134
Wiring terminal modules, 84
Voltage relationships
for COMPACT modules, 85
in the ET 200S with IM151-1, 78
for digital, analog, and technological modules, 85
For power modules, 85
W
Wiring, 87, 88, 92 Y
IM151-3 PN interface module, 92
Y switching, 42
Interface module IM151-1 BASIC, 87
Interface module IM151-1 FO STANDARD, 88
Interface module IM151-1 HIGH FEATURE, 87
Interface module IM151-1 STANDARD, 87
ET 200S

bản vẽ điện

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

bản vẽ điện

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

.

Vendor instruction English

Plant Name: Xuan Thanh

Contract Number: 14-45344

Doc. no.: 60154454 - 1.0

Purchase order no.

Xuan Thanh PIX Inst - Operation -

Purchase order no.

Installation Operation Maintenance

Remarks on this manual������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6

As our products are subject to continuous further development, we reserve the

Applicable standards and regulations:

Behaviour in case of incidents or accidents

2.1 Panel design

1 Jack rings for transport harness

2.2 Panel variants

2.2.1 Feeder panels with switching devices

Fig. 2.4 Fig. 2.5

Fig. 2.6 Fig. 2.7

2.2.2 Panels for bus section coupler

Fig. 2.8 Fig. 2.9

Fig. 2.10 Fig. 2.11

2.2.3 Panels with busbar voltage transformer and earthing switch

Fig. 2.12 Fig. 2.13

Fig. 2.14 Fig. 2.15

2.3 Dimensions and weights (without

1 Pressure relief duct

Depth and height of panel1

Panel type Rated current2 Panel width Weight3

■■ Bus riser panel ≤ 1250 650 650

Depth and height of panel1

Busbar metering panel – 750 650

Depth and height of panel1

Panel type Rated current2 Panel width Weight3

■■ Bus riser panel ≤ 1600 800 750

2.4 Applied standards

PIX switchgear units meet the following standards and regulations:

Degree of protection against accidental contact and foreign objects

2.5 Environmental and operating conditions

Ambient conditions in accordance with IEC 62271-1

2.6 Ratings of the PIX series

Rated peak withstand current Ip 2

2.8 Technical data of electrical control and

Overview of rated supply voltages

2.9 Utilization in line with the intended

2.10 Disposal after the end of the useful life

3.1 Shipping units

4.1 Safety provisions

4.2 Access to the cable compartment

4.2.1 Removal of the cable compartment cover

4.2.2 Removing the truck carrier

■■ Remove truck from the panel (see Chapter 4.3).

Re-install truck carrier

4.3 Access to switching device compartment

4.3.1 Opening and closing the front door

4.3.2 Removing the transport locke of the truck

Removing the low-voltage connector

4.3.4 Removing the truck from the panel

4.3.5 Inserting the truck into the panel

4.4 Access to the busbar compartment

4.4.1 Front access

1 Remove cable compartment cover

5.1 Safety provisions

5.2 Important information for assembly

Remarks on this manual�� 6